SIP5 7SJ81 V07.90 Manual C079-1 en PDF

Preface
Open Source Software
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5 Introduction 1
Overcurrent Protection Basic Structure of the Function 2
7SJ81
System Functions 3
V7.90 and higher Applications 4
Function-Group Types 5
Manual
Protection and Automation Functions 6
Control Functions 7
Supervision Functions 8
Measured Values, Energy Values, and
Supervision of the Primary System 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C079-1
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in Copyright © Siemens 2019. All rights reserved.
this document only contains general descriptions and/or The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
performance features which may not always specifically document, or utilization and communication of the content
reflect those described, or which may undergo modifica- are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
tion in the course of further development of the products. including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The requested performance features are binding only when utility model or a design, are reserved.
they are expressly agreed upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C079-1.02 Trademarks
Edition: 06.2019
SIPROTEC™, DIGSI™, SIGRA™, SIGUARD™, SAFIR™, SICAM™,
Version of the product described: V7.90 and higher and MindSphere™ are registered trademarks of Siemens
AG. Any unauthorized use is prohibited. All other designa-
tions in this document may represent trademarks whose
use by third parties for their own purposes may violate the
proprietary rights of the owner.
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes the protection, automation, control, and monitoring functions of the SIPROTEC 5
devices.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa-
tions and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dwprefdm-221012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 3

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Preface
• Communication protocol manual

The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engi-
neering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update the
functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• DIGSI 5 online help

The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic examples
of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed infor-
mation about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on practical
operation and a brief explanation.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
• Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices, and a
device selection table.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the Member States concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on usage of hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the standard
EN 50581 (for RoHS directive), and with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low
Voltage Directive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.
Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.
For more information about the UL database, see ul.com
You can find the product with the UL File Number E194016.
IND. CONT. EQ.

69CA
4 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Preface
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Siemens AG
Customer Support Center
Humboldtstrasse 59
90459 Nuremberg
Germany
E-mail: [email protected]
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415
Siemens Power Academy TD Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
Humboldtstrasse 59 E-mail: [email protected]
90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Preface
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given particular attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Used Symbols on Device
No. Symbol Description
1 Direct current, IEC 60417-5031
2 Alternating current, IEC 60417-5032
3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417-5033
4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417-5017
5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417-5019

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Preface
No. Symbol Description
6 Caution, risk of electric shock
7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000-0434
8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417-5172, Safety Class II devices
9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices
10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Open Source Software
The product contains, among other things, Open Source Software developed by third parties. The Open
Source Software used in the product and the license agreements concerning this software can be found in the
Readme_OSS. These Open Source Software files are protected by copyright. Your compliance with those
license conditions will entitle you to use the Open Source Software as foreseen in the relevant license. In the
event of conflicts between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license conditions, the
Open Source Software conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the soft-
ware. The Open Source Software is licensed royalty-free. Insofar as the applicable Open Source Software
License Conditions provide for it you can order the source code of the Open Source Software from your
Siemens sales contact - against payment of the shipping and handling charges - for a period of at least 3 years
since purchase of the Product. We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in
it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for the Open Source Software
beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore any liability for defects
resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded. We do not
provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified.
When using DIGSI 5 in online mode, you are provided with the option to go to the main menu Show open
source software information and read and display the Readme_OSS file containing the original license text
and copyright information.
To do this, the following steps are necessary:
• Switch to online mode.
• Select the device.
• Select Online in the menu bar.
• Click Show open source software information.
NOTE
i To read the Readme_OSS file, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer.
In order to operate SIPROTEC 5 devices, a valid DIGSI 5 license is required.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Open Source Software..................................................................................................................................9
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................33
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................34
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 36
2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 37

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.................................................................................... 38
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope..................................................... 45
2.3 Function Control............................................................................................................... 47
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications.....................................51
2.5 Information Lists............................................................................................................... 53
3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 55
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 56
3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 56
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 56
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 58
3.1.4 Displaying Indications.................................................................................................. 59
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 62
3.1.5.1 General..................................................................................................................62
3.1.5.2 Operational Log..................................................................................................... 63
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................65
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log................................................................................................... 66
3.1.5.5 User Log................................................................................................................ 68
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log.................................................................................................70
3.1.5.7 Communication Log............................................................................................... 71
3.1.5.8 Communication-Supervision Log............................................................................ 73
3.1.5.9 Security Log........................................................................................................... 74
3.1.5.10 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................. 75
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs....................................................................................... 76
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5....................................................................78
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel...........................................78
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device.................................................................80
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ..................................................... 81
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ............81
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition.............................................................................................. 82
3.3 Processing Quality Attributes.............................................................................................84
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................84
3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values............................. 86

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................. 92

3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions............................ 96
3.4 Fault Recording...............................................................................................................100
3.4.1 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................. 100
3.4.2 Structure of the Function........................................................................................... 100
3.4.3 Function Description..................................................................................................100
3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes....................................................................................103
3.4.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................106
3.4.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 107
3.5 Date and Time Synchronization....................................................................................... 108
3.5.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................... 108
3.5.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................114
3.6 User-Defined Objects...................................................................................................... 116
3.6.1 Basic Data Types........................................................................................................ 116
3.6.2 Energy Metered Values, Transformer Taps..................................................................119
3.6.3 Additional Data Types................................................................................................ 119
3.6.4 External Signals......................................................................................................... 119
3.7 Other Functions.............................................................................................................. 121
3.7.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals................................................ 121
3.7.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.................................................................125
3.7.3 Persistent Commands................................................................................................ 128
3.7.4 Device Logout........................................................................................................... 128
3.7.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 128
3.7.4.2 Application and Setting Notes.............................................................................. 129
3.7.4.3 Information List................................................................................................... 131
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions.............................132
3.8.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................132
3.8.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5.............................................................. 132
3.8.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device....................... 139
3.9 Device Settings............................................................................................................... 141
3.9.1 General Device Settings............................................................................................. 141
3.9.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 141
3.9.1.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 143
3.9.2 Settings-Group Switching.......................................................................................... 144
3.9.2.1 Overview of Functions .........................................................................................144
3.9.2.2 Structure of the Function..................................................................................... 144
3.9.2.3 Function Description............................................................................................ 144
3.9.2.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 146
4 Applications.............................................................................................................................................. 147
4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 148

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ81..................................149
5 Function-Group Types.............................................................................................................................. 153

5.1 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase................................................................. 154
5.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................154
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group................................................................................ 154
5.1.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 159
5.1.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................159
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase................................................................. 161
5.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................161
5.2.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................ 165
5.2.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................165
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase............................................................................. 167
5.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................167
5.3.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................168
5.4 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................. 170
5.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................170
5.4.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................172
5.4.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 172
5.4.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet .......................................................... 173
5.4.3.5 20-mA Channel.................................................................................................... 174
5.4.3.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 178
5.4.4 20-mA Unit Serial...................................................................................................... 180
5.4.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 180
5.4.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 182
5.4.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit...............................................................................184
5.4.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit........................................................................ 184
5.4.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet....................................................................187
5.4.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs..........................................................189
5.4.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 189
5.4.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 195

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
5.4.7 RTD Unit Ethernet...................................................................................................... 197

5.4.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 197
5.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ........................................................................ 198
5.4.7.5 Temperature Sensor.............................................................................................200
5.4.7.6 Application and Setting Notes ............................................................................. 201
5.4.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 202
5.4.8 RTD Unit, Serial..........................................................................................................202
5.4.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 202
5.4.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 203
5.4.9 Communication with RTD Unit................................................................................... 205
5.4.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)..................................................... 205
5.4.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)................................................... 208
5.4.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors ............................................................ 210
5.4.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols........................................................................210
5.4.10.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 210
5.4.10.3 Stage Temperature Acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850............................... 211
5.4.10.4 Stage Temperature Acquisition via GOOSE............................................................218
5.4.10.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 232
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker............................................................................... 233
5.5.1 Overview...................................................................................................................233
5.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................236
5.5.6 Trip Logic.................................................................................................................. 237
5.5.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 239
5.5.7 Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 239
5.5.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 239
5.5.7.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker............................................... 240
5.5.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information..............241
5.5.7.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression.............................243
5.5.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information....................................................................... 244
5.5.7.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 247
5.5.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions........... 248
5.5.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................. 248
5.5.9 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)......................................... 249
5.5.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 250

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
5.6 Process Monitor.............................................................................................................. 252

5.6.3 Current-Flow Criterion............................................................................................... 253
5.6.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion) ..............................................254
5.6.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object......................................................254
5.6.6 Closure Detection...................................................................................................... 255
5.6.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) ...................................................................... 256
5.6.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) ...................................... 257
5.6.10 Settings.....................................................................................................................258
6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 259

6.1 Power-System Data......................................................................................................... 261
6.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................261
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data...........................................................................261
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 261
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3‑Phase (I 3-ph)............... 262
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 1-Phase (I-1ph)................ 265
6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)............... 266
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1-Phase (V-1ph)............... 270
6.1.8 Settings.....................................................................................................................272
6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions.................................................... 282
6.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................... 282
6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................................................283
6.3.2 Structure of the Function .......................................................................................... 283
6.3.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain........................................................................................... 285
6.3.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 285
6.3.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 287
6.3.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................ 288
6.3.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 288
6.3.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 295
6.3.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 299
6.3.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 299
6.3.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 306
6.3.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 309
6.3.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 309
6.3.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 312

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................315

6.3.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 315
6.3.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings..................................................... 316
6.3.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 316
6.3.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) ..................................................320
6.4 Overcurrent Protection, Ground...................................................................................... 321
6.4.3 General Functionality................................................................................................ 322
6.4.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 322
6.4.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 324
6.4.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 325
6.4.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 329
6.4.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 333
6.4.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 337
6.4.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 340
6.4.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 343
6.4.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................345
6.4.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 345
6.4.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 347
6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) ..................................................350
6.5 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases...................................................................... 352
6.5.3 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 354
6.5.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 354
6.5.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 355
6.5.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 360
6.5.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 364
6.5.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 370
6.5.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 373
6.5.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 375

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

6.5.7 Direction Determination............................................................................................ 378
6.5.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 378
6.5.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings .................................................... 382
6.5.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends ............. 382
6.5.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection ........................................... 383
6.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground..................................................................... 385
6.6.3.1 Measured-Value Selection.................................................................................... 387
6.6.3.2 Direction Determination....................................................................................... 388
6.6.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 392
6.6.4 Stage Control............................................................................................................ 393
6.6.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 393
6.6.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 395
6.6.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 401
6.6.6.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 404
6.6.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 411
6.6.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse Char-
acteristic Curve..........................................................................................................415
6.6.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 415
6.6.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 418
6.6.8 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve................................................................ 421
6.6.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 421
6.6.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 423
6.6.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 425
6.6.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 427
6.7 Inrush-Current Detection.................................................................................................431
6.7.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................436

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

6.8 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping...............................................................................438
6.8.3 Standard Release Procedure....................................................................................... 439
6.8.4 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................... 440
6.8.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface................................................................. 441
6.8.7 Settings.....................................................................................................................443
6.9 Arc Protection................................................................................................................. 445
6.9.1 Overview of Function ................................................................................................445
6.9.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings....................................................... 448
6.9.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage............................................................... 449
6.9.6 Settings.....................................................................................................................450
6.9.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only................................................................................................................. 453
6.9.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 453
Light and Current...................................................................................................... 455
6.9.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 455
6.9.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip Initiation..457
6.9.10.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 457
6.9.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current...................................................................................................... 461
6.9.11.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 461
6.10 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault.................................................................... 464
6.10.3 Stage Description...................................................................................................... 465
6.10.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................466
6.11 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase...................................................................................... 467
6.11.1 Function Overview ....................................................................................................467
6.11.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 469
6.11.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 471

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

6.11.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 472
6.11.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 474
acteristic Curve..........................................................................................................476
6.11.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 476
6.11.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 479
6.11.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 480
6.11.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 482
6.11.7 Fast Stage................................................................................................................. 483
6.11.7.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 483
6.11.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 484
6.11.8 Application Example: High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection..................484
6.11.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 484
6.11.9 Application Example: Tank Leakage Protection........................................................... 490
6.11.9.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 490
6.12 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection......................................................492
6.12.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................499
6.13 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection............................................................. 500
6.13.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................509
6.14 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................... 511
6.14.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 513
6.14.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 517
6.14.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement............................................. 519
6.14.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 519

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
6.14.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 527

6.14.5 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage................................................................... 528
6.14.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 528
6.14.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 536
6.14.6 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement.................................................... 537
6.14.6.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 537
6.14.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 542
6.14.7 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement.......................................................544
6.14.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 544
6.14.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 553
6.14.8 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage..................... 555
6.14.8.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 555
6.14.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 559
6.14.9 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage.......................................................................................... 559
6.14.9.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 559
6.14.9.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 562
6.14.10 Non-Directional Y0 Stage........................................................................................... 563
6.14.10.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 563
6.14.10.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 566
6.15 Undercurrent Protection..................................................................................................568
6.15.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................571
6.16 Negative-Sequence Protection.........................................................................................573
6.16.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 574
6.16.4.1 Stage Description ................................................................................................ 576
6.16.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 577
6.16.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 579
6.16.5.2 Application and Settings Notes............................................................................. 580

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
6.16.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 581

6.17 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced........................................................... 582
6.17.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain........................................................................................... 582
6.17.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 582
6.17.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 584
6.17.4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced.....................................585
6.17.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 585
6.17.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 594
6.18 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage...................................................................596
6.18.3.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 597
6.18.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 600
6.18.4.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 602
6.18.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 607
6.19 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage..............................608
6.19.3 Stage Description ......................................................................................................609
6.19.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................613
6.20 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage................................................... 615
6.20.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................617
6.21 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage................................................. 619
6.21.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 619
6.21.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 621

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
6.21.4 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage...................................................................... 622

6.21.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 622
6.21.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 624
6.22 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage................................................................ 626
6.22.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 627
6.22.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 632
6.22.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 635
6.22.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 642
6.23 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage.................................................644
6.23.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................649
6.24 Overfrequency Protection................................................................................................651
6.24.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage................................................................................ 652
6.24.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................654
6.25 Underfrequency Protection............................................................................................. 656
6.25.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage.............................................................................. 657
6.25.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................659
6.26 Rate of Frequency Change Protection.............................................................................. 662
6.26.3 General Functions (Undervoltage Test, df/dt Calculation)........................................... 662
6.26.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 662
6.26.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 664
6.26.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................666

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

6.27 Vector-Jump Protection................................................................................................... 668
6.27.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 668
6.27.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 671
6.27.4 Δφ Stage................................................................................................................... 672
6.27.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 672
6.27.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 674
6.27.5 I1 < Release Stage .....................................................................................................674
6.27.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 674
6.27.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 675
6.28 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase...................................................................................... 676
6.28.3 Active Power Stage ................................................................................................... 677
6.28.4 Reactive Power Stage ................................................................................................679
6.28.5 Application Example.................................................................................................. 680
6.28.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage................................................................... 681
6.28.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage................................................................ 682
6.28.8 Settings.....................................................................................................................683
6.29 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection........................................................ 686
6.29.3 Protection Stage........................................................................................................ 687
6.29.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 687
6.29.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 690
6.29.4 Reclosure Stage......................................................................................................... 692
6.29.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 692
6.29.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 694
6.30 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.....................................................................................695
6.30.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................710

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
6.31 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole.......................................................................................... 713

6.31.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................715
6.32 Automatic Reclosing Function......................................................................................... 716
6.32.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions .............. 718
6.32.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function.......................................................................... 719
6.32.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function.................................... 719
6.32.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function............................................ 722
6.32.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping .................................................... 723
6.32.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup........................................................724
6.32.4.5 Start.................................................................................................................... 725
6.32.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time..................726
6.32.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time.................... 728
6.32.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time.............730
6.32.4.9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time............... 731
6.32.4.10 Stage Release.......................................................................................................732
6.32.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes With Tripping......................................................733
6.32.4.12 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Pickup ........................................................734
6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time.......................................................... 735
6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command................................................................ 737
6.32.4.15 Reclaim Time....................................................................................................... 740
6.32.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness .................................................................................... 741
6.32.4.17 Blockings............................................................................................................. 742
6.32.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)..................................... 745
6.32.4.19 Settings............................................................................................................... 747
6.32.5 Cooperation with External Automatic Reclosing Function........................................... 751
6.32.5.1 Description ......................................................................................................... 751
6.32.6 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings.....................................................752
6.32.7 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function 758
6.33 Fault Locator...................................................................................................................762
6.33.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................773
6.34 Temperature Supervision................................................................................................ 775
6.34.3 Function Description .................................................................................................776
6.34.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................777

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
6.35 Phase-Sequence Switchover............................................................................................ 785

6.35.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................789
7 Control Functions..................................................................................................................................... 791

7.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................792
7.1.1 Overview...................................................................................................................792
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables............................................................................................792
7.2 Switching Devices........................................................................................................... 795
7.2.1 General Overview...................................................................................................... 795
7.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker................................................................................ 795
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device..................................................795
7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker............................................................ 801
7.2.2.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 809
7.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device.................................................................................. 813
7.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device.................................................... 813
7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector.....................................................................818
7.2.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................... 821
7.3 Control Functionality.......................................................................................................823
7.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.......................................... 823
7.3.2 Command Logging ................................................................................................... 839
7.3.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................843
7.4 Synchronization Function................................................................................................845
7.4.3 Connection and Definition......................................................................................... 846
7.4.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 848
7.4.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 855
7.4.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching.......................................................................... 855
7.4.6 Sequence of Functions.............................................................................................. 857
7.4.7 Stage Synchrocheck...................................................................................................859
7.4.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 859
7.4.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 860
7.4.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous............................................................................. 862
7.4.8.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 862
7.4.8.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 868

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
7.4.9 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar...........................................................................870

7.4.9.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 870
7.4.10 Direct Close Command ..............................................................................................873
7.4.11 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering........... 874
7.4.12 External Synchronization........................................................................................... 876
7.4.12.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 876
7.4.12.2 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)..................................... 878
7.4.12.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 879
7.4.13 Settings.....................................................................................................................881
7.5 Switching Sequences...................................................................................................... 886
7.5.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................892
7.6 CFC-Chart Settings.......................................................................................................... 893
7.6.4 Settings.....................................................................................................................894
7.7 Transformer Tap Changers.............................................................................................. 895
7.7.3 Settings.....................................................................................................................906
8 Supervision Functions.............................................................................................................................. 907

8.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 908
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision.................................................................................909
8.2.1 Load Model............................................................................................................... 909
8.2.2 Function Points..........................................................................................................911
8.2.3 CFC Resources........................................................................................................... 912
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System.............................................................................. 914
8.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................914
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure......................................................................................... 914
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions......................................................................................... 914
8.3.2.2 Structure of the Function .................................................................................... 915
8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure.................................................................917
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure.......................................................................918
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load............................919
8.3.2.7 Settings............................................................................................................... 921
8.3.3 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker...........................................................................922

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

8.3.3.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 924
8.3.4 Voltage-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 924
8.3.4.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 926
8.3.5 Voltage-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 927
8.3.5.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 929
8.3.6 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision........................................................................... 930
8.3.6.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 931
8.3.7 Voltage-Comparison Supervision................................................................................932
8.3.7.3 Description.......................................................................................................... 932
8.3.7.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 936
8.3.8 Broken-Wire Detection............................................................................................... 937
8.3.8.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 938
8.3.9 Current-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 939
8.3.9.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 941
8.3.10 Current-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 941
8.3.10.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 944
8.3.11 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision........................................................................... 945

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

8.3.11.5 Settings............................................................................................................... 947
8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision.............................................................................................. 947
8.3.12.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs......................................................... 948
8.3.12.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input...........................................................949
8.3.12.6 Settings............................................................................................................... 953
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware................................................................................ 954
8.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................954
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum......................................................955
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware.......................................................................................959
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration........................................................................... 960
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections....................................................................961
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures........................................................................ 962
8.8.1 Overview...................................................................................................................962
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1....................................................................................................... 963
8.8.3 Defect Severity 2....................................................................................................... 967
8.8.4 Defect Severity 3....................................................................................................... 968
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm).................................................................................969
8.9 Group Indications............................................................................................................971
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System............................................. 973
9.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................... 974
9.2 Structure of the Function................................................................................................ 975
9.3 Operational Measured Values.......................................................................................... 977
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components....................................................................979
9.5 Energy Values................................................................................................................. 980
9.5.1 Function Description of Energy Values....................................................................... 980
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values........................................................ 981
9.6 Measuring Transducers................................................................................................... 983
9.6.5 Settings.....................................................................................................................987
9.7 Statistical Values of the Primary System........................................................................... 990
9.8 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring......................................................................................991

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents

9.8.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 992
9.8.3.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 994
9.8.4 ΣI*-Method Stage...................................................................................................... 995
9.8.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 995
9.8.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 997
9.8.5 2P-Method Stage....................................................................................................... 998
9.8.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................... 998
9.8.5.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................ 1001
9.8.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1002
9.8.5.4 Information List................................................................................................. 1002
9.8.6 I2t-Method Stage.....................................................................................................1003
9.8.6.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1003
9.8.6.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1004
9.8.7 Supervision CB Make Time Stage..............................................................................1005
9.8.7.1 Description........................................................................................................ 1005
9.8.7.3 Settings............................................................................................................. 1006
10 Functional Tests......................................................................................................................................1009
10.1 General Notes............................................................................................................... 1010
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) ...................... 1011
10.3 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground-Fault Functions................... 1012
10.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................1012
10.3.2 Directional Testing for Solid or Resistive-Grounded Systems..................................... 1012
10.3.3 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems................................ 1014
10.4 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection ............................................................ 1016
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection............................ 1018
10.6 Circuit-Breaker Test....................................................................................................... 1021
10.7 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection ............................................................ 1024
10.8 Functional Test of Transient Ground-Fault Protection .................................................... 1025
10.9 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision .............................................................. 1026
10.10 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal............................................................. 1027
10.11 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 1028
10.12 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function.................................... 1030
10.13 Testing the Negative-Sequence Current ........................................................................ 1034
10.14 Functional Test Protection Communication....................................................................1035
10.14.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication......................................................... 1035
10.14.2 Directional Test .......................................................................................................1036
11 Technical Data........................................................................................................................................ 1037

11.1 General Device Data......................................................................................................1039
11.1.1 Analog Inputs.......................................................................................................... 1039

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
11.1.2 Supply Voltage........................................................................................................ 1041

11.1.3 Binary Inputs........................................................................................................... 1041
11.1.4 Relay Outputs.......................................................................................................... 1043
11.1.5 Design Data.............................................................................................................1044
11.2 Date and Time Synchronization..................................................................................... 1046
11.3 Analog-Units Function Group........................................................................................ 1047
11.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases......................................................................................1048
11.4.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve.......................................................... 1048
11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1050
11.4.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve .......................................................... 1057
11.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground.................................................................................... 1060
11.5.1 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve ......................................................... 1060
11.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases.................................................................... 1070
11.6.3 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1074
11.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground................................................................... 1076
acteristic Curve........................................................................................................1079
11.7.4 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve ............................................................. 1081
11.7.5 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve........................................................... 1083
11.8 Inrush-Current Detection...............................................................................................1086
11.9 Arc Protection............................................................................................................... 1087
11.10 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping.............................................................................1088
11.11 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault ................................................................. 1089
11.12 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase.................................................................................... 1090
acteristic Curve........................................................................................................1093
11.13 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Fast Stage)................................................................. 1097
11.14 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection....................................................1098
11.15 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection........................................................... 1100
11.16 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.................................................................................. 1102
11.16.1 General................................................................................................................... 1102
11.16.2 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement........................................... 1103
11.16.3 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage................................................................. 1104
11.16.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement.................................................. 1105
11.16.5 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement (Admittance)................................1106
11.16.6 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage................... 1107
11.16.7 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage........................................................................................ 1108

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
11.16.8 Non-Directional Y0 Stage......................................................................................... 1108

11.17 Undercurrent Protection................................................................................................1110
11.18 Negative-Sequence Protection.......................................................................................1112
11.19 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase – Advanced........................................................ 1116
11.20 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................1120
11.21 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ...........................1122
11.22 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage ................................................ 1124
11.23 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage .............................................. 1125
11.24 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.............................................................. 1126
11.25 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage...............................................1129
11.26 Overfrequency Protection..............................................................................................1131
11.27 Underfrequency Protection........................................................................................... 1132
11.28 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................ 1133
11.29 Vector-Jump Protection................................................................................................. 1135
11.30 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase.................................................................................... 1136
11.31 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection...................................................... 1137
11.32 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection ..................................................................................1139
11.33 External Trip Initiation .................................................................................................. 1141
11.34 Automatic Reclosing..................................................................................................... 1142
11.35 Fault Locator.................................................................................................................1143
11.36 Temperature Supervision.............................................................................................. 1144
11.37 Synchronization Function..............................................................................................1145
11.38 Current-Balance Supervision..........................................................................................1148
11.39 Voltage-Balance Supervision .........................................................................................1149
11.40 Current-Sum Supervision...............................................................................................1150
11.41 Voltage-Sum Supervision.............................................................................................. 1151
11.42 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 1152
11.43 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision .............................................................................. 1153
11.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision................................................................................... 1154
11.45 Trip-Circuit Supervision ................................................................................................ 1155
11.46 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum .........................................................1156
11.47 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection............................................................................. 1157
11.48 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker ............................................................................. 1159
11.49 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values....................................................... 1160
11.50 Energy Values............................................................................................................... 1164
11.51 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring ...................................................................................1165
11.52 CFC...............................................................................................................................1166
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 1171
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options...........................................................................1172
A.2 Ordering Accessories.....................................................................................................1173
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions........................................................................... 1175

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table of Contents
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SJ81.......................................................................................... 1178

A.5 Current Transformer Requirements ...............................................................................1182
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................. 1185
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices........................1192
A.8 Prerouting 7SJ81...........................................................................................................1196
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................. 1199
Index.......................................................................................................................................................1219

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
1 Introduction
1.1 General 34
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 36

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with a
powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device has a current transformer and,
depending on the device type, a voltage transformer. The current inputs are therefore intended for the detec-
tion of phase currents and ground current. The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core
balance current transformer. In addition, phase currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly
precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current
and voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.
Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
• Filtering and preparation of the measurands
• Constant monitoring of the measurands
• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions
• Querying of limiting values and time-outs
• Controlling of signals for the logic functions
• Decision about the trip and close commands
• Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.
• External distribution of information
Binary Inputs and Outputs

Using the binary inputs and outputs, the device receives information from the system or from other devices
(such as locking commands). The most important outputs include the commands to the switching devices and
the indications for remote signaling of important events and states.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide informa-
tion on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC display,
the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting parame-
ters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters changed. In
addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Introduction
1.1 General
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally
bridged by capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

The SIPROTEC 5 devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium and high-voltage
switchgear. They are characterized by comprehensive integration of protection and control functions.
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing circuits from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
• Continuous display of measured and metered values at the front
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
• Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries
• Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
• Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain
• Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults
• Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
• Multiple redundant communication interfaces
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
• Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B, SNTP, or IEEE 1588)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
2 Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device 38

2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope 45
2.3 Function Control 47
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 51
2.5 Information Lists 53

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The necessary
integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
• Distance protection (21)
• Overcurrent protection, phases (51)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (50BF), for circuit breakers 1 and 2
• Basic functionality (handling of tripping, etc.)
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This
application template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application
Templates/Functional Scope).
Function Groups (FG)

Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and copying). The
function groups are assigned to primary objects, such as a line, transformer, or circuit breaker.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
• Assignment of functions to current and/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the protected object)
• Exchange of information between function groups

When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned to
the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application. You
can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. You can find detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online help.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
• Protection function group Line 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 1
• Circuit-breaker function group QA 2

The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups.
[dweifkfg-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Embedding the Functions via Function Groups
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
• Protection function groups
• Circuit-breaker function groups

Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to one protected object – for example, to the
line. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types of protection
function groups (line, voltage/current 3-phase, transformer, motor, generator, etc.).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches – for example, circuit breakers
and disconnectors (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protection , automatic reclosing).
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application. You
can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. You can find detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online help.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point

The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to one or more measuring points.
The number of measuring points and the assignment of function groups to the measuring points are preset by
the selected application template in accordance with the specific application. Therefore, this specifies which
measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function
group.
EXAMPLE
The measuring points are assigned to the function groups in the application template in Figure 2-1 as follows:
• The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2, and V-3ph 1.
The function group therefore receives the measured values from current transformers 1 and 2 and from
voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are added geometrically for
feeder-related processing.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 2.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)
The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following Figure, does not
correspond to the example).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Connecting Measuring Points and Function Groups
Interface Between Protection and Circuit-Breaker Function Groups

The protection function group(s) is/are connected to one or several circuit-breaker function groups. This
connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are started by the protection functions of the protection FG.
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group) through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this is included
later in the section. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible
assignments in detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.
The user can change this linkage as needed, that is, protection function groups can be freely assigned to any
Circuit-breaker function groups.
To check or change the assignment of the protection function groups to the circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Name of device (see following
figure).
[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]
The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
• Open the respective protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example, Line 1 (see the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sclsinta-190214-01, 1, en_US]
• Double-click Circuit-breaker interaction (see Figure 2-6).
• The window for the detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and
the Circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scdetail-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Group(s)
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function
• Which protection functions block the automatic reclosing function
• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function
Functions (FN), Tripping Stages/Function Blocks (FB)

As already illustrated in Figure 2-1, functions are assigned to the protected objects or other primary objects via
function groups.
Functions can be further subdivided. For example, protection functions often consist of multiple protection
stages (for example, the Overcurrent-protection function). Other functions can contain one or more function
blocks.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in chapter 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, tripping stages, and function blocks can be
added, copied, and deleted (see chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

Application Template
The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed. The available application templates with
the respective functional scope are described in more detail in 4 Applications.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are present in
the device (see also Figure 2-1 in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device).
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.
Adjusting the Functional Scope

Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, copy or delete functions,
tripping stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added func-
tionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are also
copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or stage from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions
for your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one or
more measuring points (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. Further information can be
found in the description of application templates, in the chapter 4 Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
No function points are required to add additional stages in functions.
Extending the Function-Point Credit

You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Proceed as follows:
• Determine the function point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com.
• Siemens provides a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
2.3 Function Control

Function control is used for:
• Functions that do not contain stages or function blocks
• Stages within functions
• Function blocks within functions
NOTE
i Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not (Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode for the purpose of commissioning (parameter Mode = Test).
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[losteurg-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-8 General Control of a Function
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. The function mode can be set to
On, Off, and Test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
• On-site operation at the device
• Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)

The possibility to adjust the superordinate state is limited. For test purposes, the complete device can set into
test mode.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state is shown in the
following table.
Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Linkage of Parameter Mode and Superordinate State)
Inputs State of the Function

Parameter Mode (of the function) Superordinate State
Off (any) Off
(any) Off Off
On On On
On Test Test
Test On Test
Test Test Test
The following table shows the possible function states:
Table 2-2 Possible States of a Function
Function State Explanation

On The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The health of a disabled func-
tion always has the value OK.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Function State Explanation

Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor-
mation from the function (indications and, if present, measured values) is provided with a
test bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the information,
depending on the target.
For instance, among other things, it is possible to implement the functionality Blocking of
the command relay known from SIPROTEC 4.
Target of the Informa- Processing
tion
Log The indication is labeled Test in the log.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal
processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is not in test state:

The CFC chart is not triggered by a status change of infor-
mation with a set test bit. The initial state of the informa-
tion (state before test bit was set) is not processed during
execution of the CFC chart.
• CFC chart itself is in test state:
The CFC chart continues to process the information (indica-
tion or measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing infor-
mation is provided with a test bit. The definitions in this
table apply to its continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the
entire device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message, the test bit is set
spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted immedi-
ately. The receiver of the GOOSE message is automatically noti-
fied of transmitter test mode.
If an object is transmitted via the protection interface, the test bit
is not transmitted. The Test state must also be transmitted as
information for this state to be taken into account in the applica-
tion on the receiver end. You must route the Test signal in the
DIGSI 5 project tree → Device → Communication routing.
The test mode of the differential protection will be dealt with
separately in the application.
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case the
functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-monitoring can cause functions to assume the health Alarm (see chapter 8 Supervision Func-
tions). If a function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is gener-
ated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
active in the following cases:
• Function is disabled
• The function is in the health state Alarm
• Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-8)
• All protection-function steps are disabled via the Enable protection controllable (state = false). The
indication Protection inactive is active.
Blocking of the Operate Indication, No Fault Recording at Pickup

With the Blk. Op. Ind. & Fault Rec. parameter, you define whether a function works as a protection
or a monitoring function. Further, you use this to determine the type and scope of the logging (see following
table)
Parameter Value Description
No The function works as a protection function. It generates an operate indica-
tion and starts fault recording with pickup. During fault recording, a fault is
created and logged as a fault record in the fault log.
Yes The function works as a supervision function. The logic runs normally, but
without creating the operate indication. The time-out indication is still
generated and can be processed further if necessary. No fault recording
starts with pickup.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form unique texts and reference numbers, each function group, function, function block/stage, and
indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the texts and reference numbers follows the already shown in Figure 2-1, hierarchy:
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Indication
• Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Parameter

The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Stage/Function block are optional. Since the func-
tion groups, functions as well as tripping stages/function blocks of the same type can be created multiple
times, a so-called instance number is added to these elements.
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an example
of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite time-overcurrent protec-
tion stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and one func-
tion group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.
[lostuumz-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Stage of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (without Representation of Stage
Control)
The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite time-overcurrent 66 2
protection
Settings Threshold value 3 –
Indication Pickup 55 –
The instance numbers arise as follows:
• Function group: Line 1

1 instance, because only one Line function group exists in the device
• Function: Overcurrent 3ph 1

1 instance, because only one Overcurrent 3ph function exists in the Line function group

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Stage: Definite time-overcurrent protection 2

2 instances, because 2 definite time-overcurrent protection stages exist in the Overcurrent 3ph function
(here the 2nd instance as an example)
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite time-overcurrent 21:201:662:3
protection 2:Threshold value
Indication: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite time-overcurrent 21:201:662:55
protection 2:Pickup
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
2.5 Information Lists
2.5 Information Lists

For the function groups, functions, and function blocks, settings and miscellaneous signals are defined that
are shown in the settings and information lists.
The information lists summarize the signals. The data type of the information may differ. Possible data types
are ENS, ACD, ACT, SPS and MV, etc.
A type is assigned to the individual data types. The following table shows the possible types:
Type Meaning
I Input – input signal
O Output – output signal
C Controllable – control signal
EXAMPLE:
The following table shows the types for some data types as examples:
Data Type Type
ENS O
ACD O
ACT O
SPS I or O
SPC C
MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 56
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 82
3.3 Processing Quality Attributes 84
3.4 Fault Recording 100
3.5 Date and Time Synchronization 108
3.6 User-Defined Objects 116
3.7 Other Functions 121
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 132
3.9 Device Settings 141

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
• Function procedures during testing and commissioning of the device

In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the system. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
• Ground-fault log 100 indications
• Fault log 1000 indications
• User-defined log 200 indications
• Operational log 2000 indications
• Motor-starting log 200 indications

If the maximum capacity of the user-defined log or of the operational log is exhausted, the oldest entries
disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault log or of the ground-fault log is
reached, the number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault log is full. You can route this signal in the
information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are also
saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and navigation using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external
request via general interrogation. In DIGSI 5, indications can be tracked spontaneously during online mode in
a special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control systems through
mapping on various communication protocols.
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.
[scoprlog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Menu Path Log

Main menu → Indications → Operational log
Fault log
Ground-fault log
Setting changes
User indications 1
User indications 2
Motor-starting indications
Communication-supervision log
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Log → Device diagnosis
Security indications
Communication indications
To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To learn more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
NOTE
i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5
Procedure
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project → Device → Process data → Log → Operational log
Setting changes
Communication-supervision log
Fault log
User indications 1
User indications 2
Motor-starting log
Ground-fault log
Online access → Device → Device information → Device-diagnosis log
Logs tab → Security indications
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communica- Communication indications
tion module →
To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. You can establish a direct connection to your PC
via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data network
from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² You reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device using the project-tree window. If you have not
created the device within a project, you can also do this via the Online access menu item.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update, it is
necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² Synchronize the log. For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see the
ground-fault indications example in Figure 3-2 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List (Example of Ground-Fault Log)
You will find additional information about deleting and saving logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the
Logs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
Setting Relative Time Reference

² Reference the display of log entries, if needed, to the real time of a specific entry. In this way, you deter-
mine a relative time for all other indications. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
3.1.4 Displaying Indications
Displayed indications are supplemented in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel with the following infor-
mation:
Table 3-1 Overview of Additional Information
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for operational indications and Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
log for user-defined indications Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Function structure, Value
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Log for motor-starting indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Motor-starting time, Function structure,
Starting current, Name,
Starting voltage, Value
Starting duration
Log for ground-fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Fault number,
Fault number, Value
Entry number,
Function structure,
Name,
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause,
Number

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for parameter changes Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Spontaneous indication window Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(DIGSI 5) Relative time, Fault number,
Indication, Value
Value,
Quality,
Additional Information
Log for safety indications1 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for device-diagnostic indica- Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
tions1 Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication indications1 Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Indication number, Indication
Indication
Log for communication supervision Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(GOOSE) Relative time, Function structure,
Entry number, Name,
Name,
Value,
Quality,
Cause,
Number
Overview of Displayed Quality Attributes

If values are shown on the device display or in DIGSI, the following quality attributes are different for meas-
ured values and metered values.
Table 3-2 Measured Values
IEC 61850 Device Display/ Description

Detail Quality Validity DIGSI
Good Invalid Questionable
– X Value The measured value is valid.
Failure X Fault The device is defective. Contact
Support.
1 Only online access

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications

Detail Quality Validity DIGSI
Inaccurate X --- The measured value was not
calculated (for example, the
angle between current and
voltage if 1 of the 2 variables is
missing).
Bad Reference X ≈ Value The measured value can be inac-
curate (for example, outside the
frequency-tracking range).
Out of Range X > Value The measured value exceeds the
measuring range.
Table 3-3 Metered Values

Validity DIGSI
X Value The metered value is invalid.
X --- The metered value was not calcu-
lated.
X ≈ Value The metered value has no refer-
ence.
Indication Columns
The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns in the log:
Indication Column Meaning
Time stamp Time stamp of the indication in device time using the local time
zone of the device or the query time for the motor log
Relative time Relative time to a reference entry
Error number Number of the error that occurred in the device. This number incre-
ments continuously.
Entry number Entry identification of buffer entries. This identification displays the
sequence of buffer entries.
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number
increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by
Siemens.
Indication Indication text
Function structure Path of the signal with the signal name
Name Signal name
Value Current state of the command. Also pay attention to the value
quality to check whether the value is up to date.
Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether
the value is up to date.
Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity
Number DIGSI address of the signal
Motor startup time Time of motor starting
Starting current Current needed by the motor to start up
Starting voltage Voltage needed by the motor to start up
Start duration Time needed by the motor to start up

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow catego-
rization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and based on
fields of application.
Table 3-4 Log Overview
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Ground-fault log Ground-fault indications
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-startup log Information on the motor startup
Communication-supervision log Communication supervision (GOOSE)
Log Management
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault or ground-fault log is
reached, the number of the last fault is generated via the signal Fault log is full. You can route this signal in
the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are
also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.
Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is only
through the project:
• Open the information routing.

Project → Device → Information routing
• Select the appropriate routing column.

Destination → Logs → Column Ground-fault log (G)
The routing of the selected indication is done via right click.
• Select one of the options in the list box shown:

– Routed (X)
– Unrouted

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scinfpuf-191012-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: Ground-Fault Log, Column G)
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
3.1.5.2 Operational Log

Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
• State of device functions
• Measured data
• Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed informa-
tion about the recording of system incidents, please refer to the description of the fault log (chapter
3.1.5.3 Fault Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log
• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4 a)).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scbetrmd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device via the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scoperlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-5 On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indications)
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.3 Fault Log

Fault indications are events which arise during a fault. They are logged in the fault log with real-time stamp
and relative-time stamp (reference point: fault occurrence) . Faults are numbered consecutively in rising order.
With fault recording engaged, a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault logged
in the fault log. A maximum of 128 fault logs can be stored. A maximum of 1000 indications can be recorded
in each fault log.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is pref-
erably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing process is
logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function every
pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
NOTE
i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the
last fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs
operation panel.
[scfaullg-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Device Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this
can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording
of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log

Ground-fault indications are events which arise during a ground fault. They are logged in the ground-fault log
with real-time stamp and relative-time stamp (reference point: ground-fault occurrence) . Ground faults are
numbered consecutively in rising order. A maximum of 10 ground-fault logs are stored, and for each ground-
fault log it is guaranteed that at least 100 indications are recorded.
The following functions can start the logging of a ground fault with the raising ground-fault indication:
• Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns)
• Sensitive ground current protection with I0 (50Ns/51Ns)
• Intermittent ground-fault protection

The logging ends with the clearing ground-fault indication.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Ground-fault log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the ground-fault log is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-7 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-7 Reading the Ground-Fault Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Ground-fault indication
operation panel.
[scgfllg1-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Deletability
The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Ground-fault log
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.5 User Log

With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-9 a)).
[scanwnmd-030211-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-9 Reading the User-Defined Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scuserrlog1-081217-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configuration of a User-Defined Log

The indication capacity of a created user-defined log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → U1 or U2
[scdiu1u2-280415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log U1/2)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log

All individual setting changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
setting changes. This enables you to determine setting changes made are associated with events logged (for
example faults). On the other hand, it is possible to obtain verification with fault analyses, for example, that
the current status of all settings truly corresponds to their status at the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications
can be stored in the setting-history log.
• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-12).
[scparamd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Reading the Setting-History Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Setting changes
operation panel.
[schislog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
Table 3-5 Overview of Indication Types
Displayed Information Explanation

Selection edit+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Cancelation+ Cancelling of all changes successful
SG activation+ SG activation via command successful
SG activation- SG activation via command failed
Set+ Parameter value was changed
Confirmation+ Confirmation of change successful
Confirmation- Confirmation of change failed
DCF uploaded DCF loaded into device
SG 1 Settings group 1
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• The log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
• You cannot route additional indication objects to the setting-history log.
3.1.5.7 Communication Log

The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sccompuf-140912-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-14 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Communication logs
operation panel.
[sccommlg-270618, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.5.8 Communication-Supervision Log

The communication-supervision log is used to log communication events.
The following events are currently logged:
• Status for each GOOSE subscription (if configured)

A log is kept of whether the GOOSE subscription has received valid messages or not.
• Aggregated status for all GOOSE subscriptions

The status is TRUE if at least one GOOSE subscription does not receive any valid message.
• Subscriber in simulation mode

GOOSE messages are processed with a simulation flag. The status is TRUE if at least one GOOSE subscrip-
tion processes simulated messages.
• To reach the communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Com supervision log
The status of the communication-supervision log last loaded from the device is shown.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list.
[sc_comsuperv, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log with DIGSI 5
• To reach the communication-supervision log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site
operation panel.
Main menu → Logs → Com supervision log
operation panel.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_comsupervlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in
chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication-supervision log cannot be freely configured. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.5.9 Security Log

Access to areas of the device with restricted access rights is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 2048 indications can be stored in the security log.
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. The device must be in
Online access.
Project → Online access → Device → Device Information → Logs tab → Security logs
The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed.
[scsecmld-180816-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-18 Reading the Security Indications with DIGSI 5

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Security log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scseclog-280618, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
3.1.5.10 Device-Diagnosis Log

Concrete take-action instructions are logged and displayed in the device-diagnosis log for the following items:
• Required maintenance (for example, battery supervision)
• Identified hardware defects
• Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Online access → Device → Device information → Logs tab → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scdevdia-180816-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Device diagnosis
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[scdevdia-280618, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
i • The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!
• The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after a revision of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with rele-
vance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
NOTE
i Upon deletion of the fault log, the associated fault records are also deleted. In addition, the meters for fault
number and fault-record number are reset to 0. In contrast, if you delete fault records, the content of the
fault log, including the allocated fault numbers, remains.
NOTE
i If the device executes an initial start, for example after an update of the device software, the following logs
are automatically deleted:
• Operational log
• Fault log
• Ground-fault log
• Setting-history log
• User-defined log
• Motor-starting log
• Communication-supervision log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i If a ground fault is currently active, the ground-fault log cannot be deleted.
Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main menu → Logs → Operational log
[scoprlog-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being requested, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being requested, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
• Click Indications in the path:

Online access → Interface → Device → Indications
• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
[scspnmld-230211-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects and even circuit breakers can
be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several instances). In DIGSI 5, several
spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application, with each individual one being
assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the device until they are manually
confirmed or released by LED reset.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configuration of a Spontaneous Fault Display with DIGSI 5
• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration
• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
• With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be shown for each pickup or only pickups with the
trip command.
[sckonstf-230211-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Configuration of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
Table 3-6 Overview of Display Options
Displayed Information Explanation

Pickup indication Display of the first function stage picked up in a fault, as needed with auxiliary
information (phases, ground, direction)
PU time Display of the entire pickup duration of the fault
Operate indication Display of the first function stage triggered in a fault, as needed with auxiliary
information (phases)
Trip time Display of the operate time related to the beginning of the fault (pickup start)
Fault distance Display of the measured fault-location distance
Operate result indication Display of the control or switching device triggered in a fault, with auxiliary
information (phases) where necessary
Acknowledgment of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device

After faults, the last occurred fault is always displayed to you. In cases where more than one circuit breaker is
configured, several stored fault displays can be present after faults, with the latest being displayed. These
displays remain stored in the device until manual acknowledgment or release by LED reset.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scstfanz-090413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-25 Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
Method 1: Manual acknowledgment
• Press the softkey button Quit in the base bar of the display. The display is irretrievably closed. Repeat this
step until no further spontaneous fault displays appear.
• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
Method 2: Acknowledgment via LED reset
• An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and also
to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
• On-site operation panel
• DIGSI 5
• Binary input
• Protocol of substation automation technology
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5

In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others, to
LEDs and output contacts.
• To do this, proceed in the project tree to:

Project → Device → Information routing
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Table 3-7 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
V (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unlatched. Activation and reset of
the output (LED, BA) occurs automatically via the binary-
signal value.
G (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is acti-
vated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
NT (conditioned latching) X Fault indications are stored during control of the output
(LED) as a function of the parameter (_:91:139)
Fault-display. In the event of a new fault, the previ-
ously stored states are reset.
• If the fault gets terminated via a trip command from

the assigned circuit breaker, the status of an indication
remains as latched with the setting option with
trip. Without a trip command, the status is displayed
before the fault (if necessary, the status of the last
fault) is restored.
• With the setting option with pickup the current
indication image of a pickup gets stored. The image
comprises all indications of functions that are effective
in the event of tripping on the same circuit breaker,
like the picked up function.
TL (stored only with tripping) X Routing option TL (tripping stored) is only possible for the
switching object circuit breaker.
The output is saved with protection tripping. The contact
remains activated until acknowledged.
Control commands are not affected. A control command is
pending above the parameterized command period until
feedback has been successfully received.
Note:
You can realize the functionality of the Lockout (ANSI 86)
by storing the output relay with the routing option TL.
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it
is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5.
You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high
sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu-
racy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2 algo-
rithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 90 Hz.
• Fixed sampling frequency – correction of the filter coefficients:

This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-26 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit the
bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. This means the magnitude,
phase, as well as the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that
the current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dwmeserf-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-26 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If the magnitude, phase, and transformer time
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values, refer.
For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency. For
numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if frated = 50 Hz:
sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an adequate compro-
mise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in
2 variants:
• Fixed (not resampled)
• Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 90 Hz)

Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. Detailed information can be found in the
corresponding function description.
NOTE
i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in chapter 6.1 Power-
System Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.3 Processing Quality Attributes
3.3.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different appli-
cations, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects on the basis of
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.
[loquali1-090212-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-27 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device
Supported Quality Attributes

The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
• Validity using the values good or invalid

The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also
setting a substitute value for the object that is not received (see 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the
User for Received GOOSE Values). The substitute value is forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed further
as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the transmitter end.
• Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiver device that the object received via a GOOSE message
was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
• OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE

The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message origi-
nates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. When the sending device is switched off,
the object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Operator-
Blocked quality was previously identified on the receiver device, the object can be treated differently at
the receiving end (see chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
At the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.
• Source using the values process, substituted

The Source quality attribute indicates whether the object was updated in the sending device.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.7.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the device also supports further operating modes that influence quality:
• Test mode of the device

You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device (state
values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test =TRUE.
• Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.
• Functional logoff of the device

If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can function-
ally log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated
in the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked =TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The receiver
device detects a functional logoff of the transmitting device. After shutting down the sending device, the
receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not fail. Now
the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/
Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
• Switching off individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch off individual functions, stages, or function blocks. In this case, all data objects generated
by the function, stage, or function block (state values or measured values) receive the device-internal
quality attribute Off. The states of the inputs and measured values remain unchanged in this case; input
changes are not processed. As the quality attribute Off is not provided for in communication protocol
IEC 61850, the data objects are transferred with the quality attribute Invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision

Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see chapter 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If
the supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, all recorded data will receive
the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breakers

If tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is detected (see chapter 8.3.3 Voltage-Transformer Circuit
Breaker), all recorded data will receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Influencing the Quality by the User

You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this is possible at the
following 3 locations:
• In the Information routing editor for external signals of GOOSE connections
• In the CFC chart
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of the function.
This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several func-
tions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values
The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can find
information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User
for Received GOOSE Values, Page 90.
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-28 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Select the property for the selected data object.

You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding.
The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Figure 3-29 Advanced Quality Attributes for GOOSE Later Binding
With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
Table 3-8 Value Definitions
Setting Value Description

Apply safe state value The value configured in the Safe state is forwarded as valid to the appli-
cation as soon as communication disturbance occurs.
Keep value The disturbed quality attribute is overwritten with good and the received
value is forwarded as valid to the application. If no value was received,
the output value is assumed being in safe state.
Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received, the last valid value is forwarded
to the application. If no value has yet been received, the output value is
assumed being in safe state.
Set value to "false" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value false to be forwarded to the applica-
tion.
Set value to "true" Applies only to Boolean communication objects. Every invalid quality
attribute causes the valid value true to be forwarded to the application.
These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Figure 3-30 Value Definition of a Data Object of the SPS Type
You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.
Functional Logoff by Operator Blocked

You have set the Operation mode to Device logoff = true in the transmitting device. As a result, every
indication issued from the functions and subject to Device logoff is transmitted with the quality informa-
tion operator blocked and Validity = good. The receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts
according to the settings (Table 3-8). A different quality processing can take place only once you have set the
Operation mode to Device logoff = false in the transmitting device.
Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-8).
Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-8).
NOTE
i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.
In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not appli-
cable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.
Data Substitute Values

Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general 0 (False), 1 (True)
(The directional information is always manually updated with
unknown.
PhsA, phsB, phsC, and neut are manually updated with the same
value just like how the general value is set.)
BAC, APC mxVal Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
BCR actVal –263 to 263 – 1
CMV mag, ang Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
INC stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
INS stVal –2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
ISC, BSC valWTr.posVal –64 to 64
valWTr.transInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag Floating-point range and range of values according to IEEE 754
(single precision)
For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY
Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values

In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
• Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
without change.
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is • The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

• Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
forwarded without change.
• Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked
= FALSE
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = • The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
• The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked

OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Oper- Regardless of whether the validity check box is set or
atorBlocked = TRUE not, and regardless of the current validity, the validity
attribute is set to good and the substitute value of
the OperatorBlocked data object is set. That is, the
OperatorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity
settings.
OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it must
be taken into account that in this configuration the
data object substitute value for validity = invalid is
set, but the quality attribute OperatorBlocked is not
yet set.
3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:
[sc quali cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-32 Influencing CFC Quality Handling in DIGSI 5
With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to
invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the
quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set glob-
ally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
Quality Attribute: Test

CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored. When
the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was used
before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this old
value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is set
for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or
without quality processing.
1)ACFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of
the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally logged
off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.
Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)

The first 3 building blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other
building blocks are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical
processing.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

OR_SPS The building blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic.
The following tables describe the logic using input values in connection with the quality
AND_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
NEG_SPS
x = placeholder for the input value and quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLIT_DPS building block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a
quality processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
SPLI_XMV
connection.
SPLIT_Q The building block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid),
test, off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The building
block must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) building block.
BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under General
Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

BUILD_ACD These building blocks merge data value and quality. The building-block output is generally
used as a CFC output.
BUILD_ACT Generally, the BUILD_Q building block is connected upstream from these building blocks.
BUILD_BSC
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE

The following conditions apply to the example:
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear inter-
locking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS building
block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then continue to
process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal for a
BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a result, with
the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the release
messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release signal for a
switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The following
figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:
[sccfcran-220415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-33 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link
the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions
Figure 3-34 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
NOTE
i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.7.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.
Figure 3-34 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function
Internal Input Data

The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Supported Quality Attributes Description

Validity • At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
• If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
• The frequency operating range of the device was left.

• The device is not calibrated.
• The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.
Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)

Figure 3-35 shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received
GOOSE Values
• Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.
Figure 3-35 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-34.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
• In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[sceinflu de, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-36 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
• Further process last valid data value of the source signal

(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
• Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Quality Attribute: Test

• The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
• The input signal source is not in test
state and the function to be
processed is in test state.
The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state.
• Further processing of the last valid source signal data value,
before the source switches to the test state (that is the
default setting)
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
• The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applica-
tions.
Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked

The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
3.4 Fault Recording
3.4.1 Overview of Functions
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording docu-
ments operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them. You can
read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Sample values of the analog input channels
• Measured values calculated internally
• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also available
after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
3.4.2 Structure of the Function
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
This means that all fault recordings function on the same real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be transferred to
the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing communica-
tion connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data using appro-
priate programs.
3.4.3 Function Description
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the inter-
nally calculated measured values and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually.
NOTE
i You can find detailed information about selecting and deleting fault records in the Operating Manual
(C53000-G5040-C003).
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest records are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz, 2 kHz,
4 kHz, and 8 kHz . This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection functions or
calculated measured values.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable recording
criterion, the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time . You can set the parameters for these
components individually.
[dwsigrar-070813-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-37 Example of a Fault Recording
With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.
• with pickup & AR cyc.:

In connection with an active automatic reclosing function (internal/external), the fault recordings record
the fault including the short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles).
• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
• Externally via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection device
without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
• By way of a configurable input signal >Manual start, you can start fault records with a configurable
length (parameter Manual record time).
• From DIGSI 5, you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s.
• With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)
NOTE
i If a pickup signal is present continuously, the fault record is closed after the Maximum record time
expires and the fault recording is not restarted!

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
Saving the Recording

Not every fault recording that is started actually needs to be saved. With the Storage parameter, you specify
whether or not you want to save the fault recording that has started. You can also save only fault data for
which the pickup of a protection function also caused a tripping. With this setting, faults beyond the self-
protection range will not lead to replacing fault recordings that have already been saved.
Configuration of Signals to Be Recorded

All analog inputs of the device that have been configured (currents and voltages) are recorded as sampled
channels.
Function-specific binary signals (for example, pickup and trip signals) and measured value channels can be
configured individually for recording in the DIGSI Information-routing matrix. For this purpose, a separate
Recorder column is available.
You can rename the signals in the DIGSI Information-routing matrix. You can change the order of the binary
signals and measured-value channels to be recorded in DIGSI under Signal order. You can find more detailed
information on this in the DIGSI 5 Online Help, version V07.50 and higher (Order number: C53000-D5040-
C001-D).
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see the Device Manual, chapters 9.3 Operational Measured Values and 9.4 Fundamental and
Symmetrical Components) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this can
mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording of
these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
Numbering and Time Stamping

All fault recordings saved are automatically numbered in ascending order and assigned a real-time stamp for
the start time. The fault recording logs the fault with a relative time. The reference-time point is the start of
the recording. Every fault recording has a corresponding fault log with the same number. This ensures that the
fault recording can be uniquely assigned to the event log.
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is always
available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten.
This means that the most recent recordings are always available. The sampling rate, type, and number of
measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of recordings possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific measured
values and up to 200 binary tracks can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of the maximum
storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.
Table 3-9 Maximum Length of All Stored Recordings
Connection Examples Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling

1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
Feeder: 80 s 40 s 20 s 10 s
4I, 4V, 20 binary tracks
Input and Output Signals

The Fault recorder function provides several input signals that allow the precise starting, deleting of record-
ings. The output signals provide information about the function status.
In the following table, you can find input signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Start recording SPC Start recording via the function key
Control: Reset memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers are reset.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording

Control: Delete memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers remain as is.
Control: >External start SPS Start recording with an external binary signal,
for example, by the trip command of an external
protection device. The set pre- and post-trigger
time are taken into account.
Control: >Manual start SPS Start a recording of fixed duration (parameter
Manual record time ) by way of an
external binary signal, for example, manually via
the function key or by an external binary signal.
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
General: Mode ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according
General: State ENS to chapter 2.3 Function Control
General: Standby ENS
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Fault recording
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:130) Fault recording = with pickup

With the Fault recording parameter, you define the time interval at which faults are recorded. The total
record duration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters Pre-trigger time,
Post-trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration.
with pickup The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
pickups. The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken into
account.
Note: When the post-trigger time has expired, the indications of an auto-
matic reclosing function are not recorded. Evolving faults after expiry of the
post-trigger time can result in the opening of a new fault with its own
recording.
with pickup & AR cyc. The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
pickups including short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles).
It includes the resulting pickup signals of all function groups and the
runtimes of initiated automatic reclosing cycles for all active automatic
reclosing functions.
user-defined The fault recording time is defined user-specific.
Note: You must specify all signals for individual definition of the fault
recording time in the DIGSI 5 information-routing matrix. In the information
routing matrix in the Fault record column, the fault recording has for this
purpose a separate column Trigger. The record duration is calculated from
the logical OR operation of all initiated, configured signals.
Parameter: Storage
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:131) Storage = always

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
With the Storage parameter, you define the storage criterion for a fault recording that has already started.
always Each fault recording that has been started is saved.
with trip If at least one protection function issues an operate indication during the
record time, any fault recording that has been started will be saved.
Parameter: Maximum record time
• Default setting (_:2761:111) Maximum record time = 5.00 s

With the Maximum record time parameter, you configure the maximum record duration for an individual
fault recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter
merely limits the duration of the fault recording. It does not affect the logging of faults in the fault log.
Parameter: Pre-trigger time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.50 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The set pre-trigger time is prepended to the actual recording criterion for the fault recording.
Parameter: Post-trigger time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:113) Post-trigger time= 0.50 s

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time that has been configured is added to the actual recording criterion for the
fault recording after the dropout.
The following table shows how the setting range changes for the Post-trigger time parameter
depending on the Sampling frequency.
Sampling Frequency Setting Range for the Post-trigger time Parameter
8 kHz 0.05 s to 0.5 s
4 kHz 0.05 s to 1 s
2 kHz 0.05 s to 2 s
1 kHz 0.05 s to 4 s
Parameter: Manual record time
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:116) Manual record time = 0.50 s

With the Manual record time parameter, you set the length of a recording if the fault recording is acti-
vated dynamically (edge-triggered) via a separately configured input signal >Manual start.
In this case, pre-trigger and post-trigger times do not take effect.
Parameter: Sampling frequency
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:140) Sampling frequency = 8 kHz

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of fault records that you
want to download via DIGSI 5. Possible setting values are 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
Parameter: Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec.
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:141) Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec. = 8 kHz

With the Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec. parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault record
that you want to download using the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Possible setting values are 8 kHz,
4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
You cannot set the Sampl. freq. IEC61850 rec. parameter to be greater than the maximum setting
value of the Sampling frequency parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
If the size of the COMTRADE file exceeds the maximum permissible storage capacity of the device, the original
recording is truncated. The truncated data are discarded.
Parameter: COMTRADE revision year
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:151) COMTRADE revision year = COMTRADE 1999

With the COMTRADE revision year parameter, you select the version of the IEEE standard for the
COMTRADE format. Possible setting values are COMTRADE 1999 or COMTRADE 2013.
Parameter: Scaling COMTRADE
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:128) Scaling COMTRADE = Secondary values

With the Scaling COMTRADE parameter, you scale the fault record data for the COMTRADE format. Possible
setting values are Primary values or Secondary values.
Parameter: Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel
• Default setting (_:2761:129) Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel = no

With the Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel parameter, you determine whether the calculated zero-sequence
current 3I0 or -3I0 is recorded in a separate channel or not. The separate channel is visible in the DIGSI 5
Information routing under the I 3-phase measuring point.
The zero-sequence currents can be calculated only with the following current-transformer connection types:
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase

no The zero-sequence current calculated from the sampled values of the
currents is not recorded.
-3I0 The calculated zero-sequence current -3I0 is recorded for each I 3-phase
measuring point.
-3I0 is calculated from the sampled current values using the following
equation: -3I0 = - (IA + IB + IC).
3I0 The calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 is recorded for each I 3-phase
measuring point.
3I0 is calculated from the sampled current values using the following equa-
tion: 3I0 = (IA + IB + IC)
Parameter: Cal.zero seq.volt.channel
• Default setting (_:2761:132) Cal.zero seq.volt.channel = no

With the Cal.zero seq.volt.channel parameter, you determine whether the calculated zero-sequence
voltage V0 or3V0 is recorded in a separate channel or not. The separate channel is visible in the DIGSI 5 Infor-
mation routing under the V 3-ph measuring point.
The zero-sequence voltages can be calculated only with the following current-transformer connection types:
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording

no The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the sampled voltage values is
not recorded.
V0 The calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 is recorded for each V 3-ph meas-
uring point.
V0 is calculated from the sampled voltage values using the following equa-
tion: V0 = (VA + VB + VC)/3.
3V0 The calculated zero-sequence voltage 3V0 is recorded for each V 3-ph
measuring point.
3V0 is calculated from the sampled voltage values using the following
equation: 3V0 = (VA + VB + VC).
3.4.5 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting

General
_:2731:1 General:Mode • on on
• test
Control
_:2761:130 Control:Fault recording • with pickup with pickup
• with pickup & AR cyc.
• user-defined
_:2761:131 Control:Storage • always always
• with trip
_:2761:111 Control:Maximum record 0.20 s to 10.00 s 5.00 s
time
_:2761:112 Control:Pre-trigger time 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:113 Control:Post-trigger time 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:116 Control:Manual record 0.20 s to 10.00 s 0.50 s
time
_:2761:140 Control:Sampling • 8 kHz 2 kHz
frequency
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:141 Control:Sampl. freq. • 8 kHz 1 kHz
IEC61850 rec.
• 4 kHz
• 2 kHz
• 1 kHz
_:2761:151 Control:COMTRADE revi- • COMTRADE 1999 COMTRADE
sion year 1999
• COMTRADE 2013
_:2761:128 Control:Scaling • Primary values Secondary
COMTRADE values
• Secondary values
_:2761:129 Control:Cal.zero.seq.cur. • no no
channel
• -3I0
• 3I0

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording

_:2761:132 Control:Cal.zero • no no
seq.volt.channel
• V0
• 3V0
3.4.6 Information List
No. Information Data Class Type

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2731:53 General:Health ENS O
Binary IO
_:2761:300 Control:Start record SPC C
_:2761:305 Control:Reset memory SPC C
_:2761:306 Control:Clear memory SPC C
_:2761:502 Control:>External start SPS I
_:2761:503 Control:>Manual start SPS I
_:2761:310 Control:Fault number INS O
_:2761:311 Control:Recording started SPS O
_:2761:314 Control:Record made SPS O
_:2761:327 Control:Tmax reduced SPS O
_:2761:324 Control:Fault log is full INS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.5 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• Device: Main menu → Device functions → Date & Time

Parameter:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings

Indications:
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
Configurable Synchronization Options:
• None (default setting)

The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Connection to a radio clock

The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG-B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
Configurable Time Sources:
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is indi-
cated.
• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.
Configurable Date Format

Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
Taking Local Time Zones into Account

The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parame-
ters. This allows the display of the local time.
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG-B.
Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management

Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
start-up and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the indi-
cation can point to a defect in the clock module or to
an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second has
Leap second occurred during time synchronization using an
external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG-B
005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[sctimedg-220415, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Time Information in DIGSI
For every time source, you see the following:
• Last received time (with date)
• Receipt time of the last received time telegram
• Configured type of timer
• Indication of timer outage or failure
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
Parameter: Date Format
• Default setting Date format = YYYY-MM-DD

With the Date format parameter, you define the local customary format of the date display.
YYYY-MM-DD Day.Month.Year: Typical European display
Example: 24.12.2010
YYYY-MM-DD Month/Day/Year: Typical US representation
Example: 12/24/2010
YYYY-MM-DD Year-Month-Day: Typical Chinese display
Example: 2010-12-24
Parameter: Time zone time source 1,Time zone time source 2
• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2 parameters, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions

local Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone offsets to
GMT.
UTC Time format according to UTC (universal time)
Parameter: Time source 1,Time source 2
• Default setting Time source 1 = none, Time source 2 = none

With the Time source 1 and Time source 2 parameters, you can configure an external timer. The
prerequisite is to have the corresponding hardware configuration of the communication interfaces of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. This is listed as a prefix when making a selection in DIGSI 5.
none The time source is not configured.
IRIG-B Time synchronization by an external GPS receiver:
SIPROTEC 5 devices support several protocol variants of the IRIG-B standards:
• IRIG-B 002(003)
The control function bits of the signal are not occupied. The missing year is
formed from the current device time. In this case, it is possible to set the
year via the online access in DIGSI 5.
• IRIG-B 006(007)
The bits for the calendar year are not equal to 00. The calendar year is set
automatically by the time protocol.
• IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE C37.118-2005
If, in the time signal, other control function bits are occupied in addition to
the calendar year, then the device takes the additional information into
consideration for leap seconds, daylight saving time, time offset (zone,
daylight saving time) and time accuracy.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2: The
value of this setting is not evaluated by the device, since this protocol
either transmits or in the case of local time, specifies the appropriate offset
to UTC in each set time telegram.
DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF 77 receiver
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
Please note: There are also clocks that generate a DCF 77 signal representing
UTC. In this case, UTC must be set.
PI The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured
for your SIPROTEC 5 device. Here, the timing master takes over the time
management. Signal-transit times of the protection interface communication
are calculated automatically.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
A slave that receives a time or a SIPROTEC 5 master, receives its system time
kept in UTC.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions

SNTP The time synchronization is done via the Ethernet service SNTP (SNTP server or
via IEC 61850).
SIPROTEC 5 devices support both Edition1 and Edition2 in accordance with
IEC 61850-7-2. In Edition2, the logical attributes LeapSecondsKnown, ClockFai-
lure, ClockNotSynchronized, and the value TimeAccuracy are maintained in
each time stamp. For Edition1, these signals contain default settings. Thus, the
interoperability for substation automation technology is ensured for both
editions!
The SNTP service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet interfaces
so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
IEC 60870-5-103 The time is synchronized via telegram with an appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
However, there are also T103 systems that send the UTC.
DNP3 The time is synchronized via telegram with the appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the DNP3 protocol.
Two characteristics are supported in the process:
• Time synchronization via UTC

• Time synchronization with local time
The daylight saving time status is not transmitted. The device assumes that
the DNP3 master follows the same rules for the start and end of the
daylight saving time as those that were set for the device.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC is
the current implementation, local concerns older implementations.
IEEE 1588 Time is synchronized via an IEEE 1588 timing master. In this case, SIPROTEC 5
devices operate as slave-only clocks. IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P and
Ethernet Transport.
The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter-
faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC.
Parameter: Fault indication after
• Default setting Fault indication after = 600 s

With the Fault indication after parameter, you set the time delay after which the unsuccessful
attempts of time synchronization with external time sources configured are indicated.
Parameter: Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time

This parameter block contains all the settings for the local time zone and daylight saving time of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In addition to the individual parameters, configure the basic settings by preselecting via
the radio buttons or check box.
[sctimezo-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-39 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
Selection Button Description

Manual settings (local time zone and daylight saving This setting must be selected if you want to select the
time regulation) local time zone and daylight saving time zone regula-
tions of your SIPROTEC 5 device regardless of the PC
settings.
Input: Offset time zone for GMT [min]
Selection: Switchover to daylight saving time
[yes/no] via check box
• Input: Start of daylight saving time [Day and

time]
• Input: End of daylight saving time [Day and
time]
• Input: Offset daylight saving time [min]
• Default settings as in the picture above
3.5.5 Settings

Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source • none none
1
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:103 Time sync.:Time source • port J
1 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
1 channel
• Ch2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions

_:105 Time sync.:Time source • none none
2
• IRIG-B
• DCF77
• PI
• SNTP
• IEC 60870-5-103
• PROFIBUS DP
• Modbus
• DNP3
• IEEE 1588
• IEC 60870-5-104
_:106 Time sync.:Time source • port J
2 port
• port F
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source • Ch1
2 channel
• Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 1
• local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone • UTC local
time source 2
• local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after

(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.6 User-Defined Objects
3.6.1 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.6.4 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-40 User-Defined Signals
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-41 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
Integer Status Value (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Complex Measured Values (CMV)

This data type provides a complex measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for example.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
Phase-to-Ground Measured Values (WYE)

This data type represents the phase-to-ground measured values of a 3-phase system.
Phase-to-Phase Measured Values (DEL, Delta)

This data type represents the phase-to-phase measured values of a 3-phase system.
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT
can be generated and processed by CFC charts.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.6.2 Energy Metered Values, Transformer Taps
Transformer Taps
Transformer taps are contained in the Transformer tap changers switching element. When the Transformer
tap changer switching element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data
object of type BSC (binary controlled tap changer with tap-position information).
You can find detailed information in 7.7.1 Function Description.
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.5.1 Function Description of Energy Values.
3.6.3 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)

The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
• SEQ (Sequence)
• BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position)

The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up,
down can be given.
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).
3.6.4 External Signals
User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-42) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instantia-
tion in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850 system
tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding procedure
specified in IEC 61850-6).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-42 External Signals
NOTE
i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
3.7 Other Functions
3.7.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i The software filtering time is available only for the circuit breaker and disconnector in the controllable
Cmd. with feedback (control function block), as this is used for logging purposes. The controllable posi-
tion (circuit breaker or disconnector function block) is used for interlocking conditions and must always
show the unfiltered position of the switching object.
[sclposi-260116, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 Settings for Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The setting range for the Software filter time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 100 000 ms in ms incre-
ments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether to restart the filtering time when-
ever a status change is performed within the software filtering time. When activated, the Indication
timestamp before filtering check box backdates the time stamp by the set software filtering time. In
this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If you activate the Suppress
intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed for the duration of this soft-
ware filtering time.
If you leave the software filtering time at 0 ms, the time for the suppression of the intermediate position is
also 0 ms. The activated Suppress intermediate position check box then remains ineffective.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
If you do not activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the software filtering time
affects the on, off, intermediate, and disturbed positions of the circuit breaker or disconnector switch.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by:, you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes can then not be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as an input parameter, for example as a parameter of the
position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block.
[scflatte-180315, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-44 Setting Chatter Blocking
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[scparafl-291110-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-45 Chatter-Blocking Settings
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-46 and Figure 3-47 in the exam-
ples shown in the following):
• No. permis.state changes

This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
• Initial test time

During this time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked. This time is started if chatter
blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its status. If the configured number
of permissible status changes is exceeded during the initial test time, the signal is temporarily blocked
and the indication Chatter blocking is set.
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in
seconds. When the set time has expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).
• No. of chatter tests

This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run. If the number of permissible status
changes of the signal stays exceeded during the initial test time of the last test cycle, the signal is finally
blocked. In this case, the indication Group warning (Alarm handling group and Device group) is set
additionally to the Chatter blocking indication after expiry of the set number. Restarting the devices
removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite (∞) is also permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.
• Chatter idle time

If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the initial test time or the
subsequent test time, the Chatter idle time starts. Within this time, this signal is blocked tempora-
rily and the Chatter blocking indication is set. The blocked input signal is assigned the oscillatory
quality.
minutes. An entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal to 0.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
• Subsequent test time

During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked once again. The
time begins when the Chatter idle time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the maximum
number of chatter tests has been reached.
seconds. An entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0.
Example 1: Permanent Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of status changes of the
input signal exceeds the set No. permis.state changes, the chatter blocking detects a persistent viola-
tion of the signal stability and sets the Group warning indication. The original state of the signal is perma-
nently frozen. Only a device restart removes the chatter blocking again.
[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-46 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
Example 2: Temporary Blocking

The chatter-blocking settings are set as follows:
• No. permis.state changes = 4
• No. of chatter tests = 2

After more than 4 state changes within the Initial test time, the input signal is set to the original state
by the chatter blocking and the oscillatory quality is assigned. Additionally, a corresponding indication is
added to the operational log. At the same time, the Chatter blocking indication is set. After expiry of the
settable Chatter idle time, during the following Subsequent test time, it is checked whether the
input signal is still chattering. This check is repeated, as the No. of chatter tests is set to 2 in this
example.
If, during the 2nd Subsequent test time, it has been detected that the number of state changes of the
input signal is within the set No. permis.state changes, the temporary blocking of state changes of the
signal is removed and the actual signal state is released.
The quality bit oscillatory is removed and the Chatter blocking indication is reset. As the temporary
blocking of the signal is removed, the Group warning indication is not set. The chatter test starts again.
[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
3.7.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.
• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.
• Press the Change softkey.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.

After entering the confirmation ID (only with the RBAC inactive), acquisition blocking is switched on.
[scerfass-310816-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-48 Activating Acquisition Blocking
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select Manual update (Figure 3-49) using the navigation keys.
• Select the switching device setting to be updated manually using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-50).
• Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display.
[scstatus-310816-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-49 Activating Manual Update
[scstatu2-310816-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-50 Selecting Position
The manually updated position of the switching device will be displayed.
[scstatu3-310816-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-51 Position of the Switching Device
NOTE
i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
You can also set acquisition blocking via a binary input. If you want to put the feeder or the switching device
in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking for an individual or several switching devices with an external
toggle switch. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or discon-
nector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the CFC.
[scbeerfa-190215, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-52 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
• Operation panel of the device
• System interface IEC 61850
• Input signal >Acquisition blocking

All sources undergo OR operations, that is, the acquisition blocking remains set until all the sources are deacti-
vated.
After deactivation of the acquisition blocking, the actual position of the switching device is adopted and
displayed in the operation panel of the device.
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.
The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
3.7.3 Persistent Commands
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
[scbefehl-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
3.7.4 Device Logout
3.7.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some applica-
tions, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant
and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades
• Testing the local protection functions

The Device logout functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
NOTE
i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.
You can log off the device as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via a communication interface using the Device logout (_:319) controllable
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logoff have been met. If the condi-
tions for the log off have not been met, the logout is rejected.
The logout is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.
NOTE
i The option used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logoff, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.
If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logoff. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.
3.7.4.2 Application and Setting Notes
Logoff Options for a Device

You can log off a device as follows:
• Via the on-site operation panel
• Via communication via the controllable Device logout (_:319)
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
Conditions for Logging off the Device
[lo functional logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-54 Logic for Logging off the Device
The conditions for a successful logout of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol, for example, in the case of substation
interlocking, you can set in the receiver device for each received data point the value of this data point when
the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the logout is canceled
by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the meantime.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination using Protection Communication

If devices in a device combination communicate via the protection interface, you can only log off a device
under the following conditions:
• Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interruption of the
protection communication.
• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise, the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices that are not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged
off.
Logout via Binary Inputs

The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you want to use push-
buttons, switch them on as shown in the following figure. Use the push-button Key2 to log off the device; use
the push-button Key1 log on the device again.
[loextta logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device
If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Dev. funct.logout on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logout off as L (active without voltage). If the
switch S is closed, the device is logged off.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.7 Other Functions
[loextsx logoff device, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-56 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device
Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and the cause of the logout.
If you have logged off the device via binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI is issued.
If you have logged off the device via on-site operation, via DIGSI 5, or via the protection interface, the indica-
tion (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.
3.7.4.3 Information List

(Type)
General
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:319 General:Device logout SPC C
_:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:315 General:Device logged off SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.8 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection

Functions
3.8.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
Edit Mode: Primary

The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conversion
on the secondary circuit omitted.
Edit Mode: Secondary

The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
The secondary setting is the customary setting view. For secondary tests, the pickup values can be read
directly.
Edit Mode: Percent

This setting type is beneficial for electric machines (generators, transformers, motors, and busbars). The
setting values can be standardized regardless of the machine size. The reference values for the percentage
settings are the rated values of the function groups, for example, rated voltage and rated current or rated
apparent power . The setting values are, thus, related exclusively to the primary settings. If other reference
values are used, then this is documented for the respective protection function in the application and setting
notes.
If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views.
Recommendation for Setting Sequence

When setting the protection function, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
• First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. You will find these parameters in func-
tion group .
• Next, set the parameter of the protection functions.

If the transformer data have changed after completing the protection setting, remain in the setting sheet
(for example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the
new settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.
3.8.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5
In the delivery setting, DIGSI 5 is set to the Secondary edit mode.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the
example of the Overcurrent protection function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup value: 1.5 A
The following figure shows the protection setting of the Overcurrent protection function in the secondary
view. The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.
[scmodsek_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-57 Protection Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[scmodums_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-58 Switchover to the Desired Setting View
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scpwandl_3, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-59 Setting Sheet: Transformer Data
In the function group Voltage/current 3-phase, you set the rated current and the rated voltage (see following
figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the reference variables for the percent setting.
[scui3phd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-60 Reference Data for Percentage Settings
The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at
1500 A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scumzpri_5, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage (Edit Mode:
Primary)
When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A · 100 % = 150 %

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scumzpro_6, 1, en_US]
Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scumzsek_7, 1, en_US]
Secondary)
If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scfragew_8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-64 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A * 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
[scsekneu_9, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-65 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in the
secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In
the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A * 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the reply to your question (see Figure 3-64).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A
Changing the Transformer Ratio in the Single-Line Editor

If you want to change the primary or secondary rated currents of the current transformer in the Single-Line
Editor, select the current transformer. You can view and change the currents in the Properties tab of the
object bar.
If you change the rated currents, the corresponding field has a red border to indicate currents that differ
between the Single-Line Editor and the power-system data. During synchronization in the Single-Line Editor,
these rated currents are adopted into the power-system data.
3.8.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device
In the delivery setting, the device is preset to the secondary value. Only secondary values can be set directly
on the device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-64). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.9 Device Settings
3.9 Device Settings
3.9.1 General Device Settings
3.9.1.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.
[scDeSeDe1-310715-01, 1, en_US]
[scDeSeAl-310715-01, 3, en_US]
[scDeSeall-260815-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-66 General Device Settings
The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.9 Device Settings
You can find more about:
• Chatter blocking in chapter 3.7.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
• Control in chapter 7.3 Control Functionality.
• Spontaneous indications in chapter 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5.
• Continuous Function Chart Quality Treatment in chapter 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User
in CFC Charts.
Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
With Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit, if
this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit you can determine whether an indication is generated in a
test and whether all or individual functions of the device are in the test mode. In this manner the reactions
that are necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive
these indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for
test purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.

The major portion of the settings is described in the chapters cited above. Then, the parameters on the section
Device, Settings change, Spontaneous indication, and Test support are described.
Parameter: Rated frequency
• Default setting (_:101) Rated frequency = 50 Hz

With the parameter Rated frequency, you set the rated frequency of the electrical power system.
Parameter: Minimum operate time
• Default setting (_:102) Minimum operate time = 0.00 s

With the parameter Minimum operate time , you set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
functions. The trip command is maintained for the set duration.
Parameter: Block monitoring dir.
• Default setting (_:138) Block monitoring dir. = off

With the parameter Block monitoring dir., you set whether indications are output via the system inter-
face(s) of the SIPROTEC 5 device or not.
If transmission blocking is switched on, no indications are output via the system interface(s) of a SIPROTEC 5
device, except via the IEC 61850 interface(s).
To avoid receiving IEC 61850 data, the corresponding IEC 61850 Client must stop the reporting or freeze the
data. You can find more information in the Communication Protocols Manual (C53000-L1840-C055-3).
Parameter: Fault-display
• Default setting (_:139) Fault-display = with pickup

With the parameter Fault-display , you set whether spontaneous fault indications which are signed as NT
(conditioned latching) in the matrix, get stored with every pickup or only for one tripping.
Keep the DIGSI 5 routing options in chapters 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 and Table 3-7 in
mind.
Parameter: Activate device test mode
• Default setting (_:150) Activate device test mode = inactive

With the parameter Activate device test mode , you activate test mode that adds a test bit to the
output indications. If test mode is activated but the test mode of the relay outputs is not, no relay outputs are
activated by the protection functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.9 Device Settings
Parameter: Oper.bin.outp. under test
• Default setting (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test = inactive

If you activate the parameter Oper.bin.outp. under test , you can permit the closing of a binary
output for test purposes. In this way, indications are output during a device-wide test mode and the relay is
either activated or not. If an individual function is in test mode, only indications are output and the relays are
not activated.
NOTE
i The device remains in test mode during every startup until you intentionally set the device back into
process mode. You set process mode by switching the parameterActivate device test mode to inactive
again (removing the check mark).
Output Signal: Functions in Test mode

Normally, the output signal Functions in Test mode is prerouted to the last LED of the device base
module. If one or more functions are in test mode, the output signal Functions in Test mode is gener-
ated and the corresponding LED of the device lights up red.
3.9.1.3 Settings

Device
_:101 General:Rated frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz
• 60 Hz
_:102 General:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
operate time
_:138 General:Block moni- • off off
toring dir.
• on
Setting change
_:163 General:Reserv.time for 0 s to 65535 s 120 s
com.prot.
Spontan.indic.
_:139 General:Fault-display • with pickup with pickup
• with trip
Test support
_:150 General:Activate device • 0 false
test mode
• 1
_:151 General:Oper.bin.outp. • 0 false
under test
• 1

(Type)
General
_:510 General:>Test mode on SPS I
_:511 General:>Test mode off SPS I
_:507 General:>Dev. funct.logout on SPS I
_:508 General:>Dev. funct.logout off SPS I
_:512 General:>LED reset SPS I
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.9 Device Settings

(Type)
_:53 General:Health ENS O
_:51 General:Test mode ENC C
_:321 General:Protection on SPC C
_:54 General:Protection inactive SPS O
_:323 General:LED reset SPC C
_:320 General:LED have been reset SPS O
_:329 General:Functions in Test mode SPS O
3.9.2 Settings-Group Switching
3.9.2.1 Overview of Functions

For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if
necessary enable them quickly.
You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active at
any given time. During operation, you can switch between settings groups. The source of the switchover can
be selected via a parameter.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
• Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
• Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
• Via binary inputs
• Via a communication connection to the substation automation technology.

The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be
used for switching the settings groups.
A settings group includes all switchable settings of the device. Except for a few exceptions (for example,
general device settings such as rated frequency), all device settings can be switched.
Detailed information about the settings groups can be found in the Operating Manual and DIGSI 5 Online
Help.
3.9.2.2 Structure of the Function

The function of the Settings group switching is a supervisory device function. Accordingly, the settings and
indications of the settings group switching can be found in DIGSI 5 and at the on-site operation panel of the
device, below the general device settings respectively.
If you want to switchover a settings group, navigate to DIGSI 5 or proceed on the on-site operation panel of
the device, as follows:
• Via the project tree in DIGSI 5:

Project -> Device -> Settings -> Device settings
• Via the on-site operation panel of the device:

Main menu → Settings → General → Group switchover
The indications for the settings group switching can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under:
Project → Device → Information routing → General
3.9.2.3 Function Description
Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.9 Device Settings
Mechanism of the Switchover

When switching over from one settings group to another, the device operation is not interrupted. With the
Active settings group parameter, you are either specifying a certain settings group or you allow
switching via control (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850) or via binary input.
Switching via Control

When using the Control function for switching, the settings groups can be switched via a communication
connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used
for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
In order to use a CFC chart for switching, you must create a new CFC chart in DIGSI 5. Create the CFC chart in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Charts → Add new chart. Link the signals that control
settings group switching in the CFC chart.
Switching via Binary Input

There are 3 appropriate input signals available for switching via binary inputs. These input signals allow selec-
tion of the settings group via a binary code. If one of the 3 signals changes, the signal image present will, after
100 ms (stabilization time), result in switching over to the appropriate settings group. If only 2 settings groups
must be switched over, only 1 binary input is required. The following table shows the possible binary codes
(BCD) and applicable settings groups (PG).
Table 3-10 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
BCD Code via Binary Inputs PG 1 PG 2 PG 3 PG 4 PG 5 PG 6 PG 7 PG 8

>PG selection bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Copying and Comparing Settings Groups

In DIGSI 5, you can copy or compare settings groups with each other.
If you want to copy settings groups, select a source and target parameter group in DIGSI 5 in the device
settings, and then start the copy process. The device settings can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under
Project → Device → Settings → Device settings.
If you want to compare settings groups, it is possible to do so in all setting sheets for settings. You will then
select in addition to the active settings group, a 2nd settings group for comparison. Active setting values and
the comparable values are displayed next to each other. For settings that cannot be switched over, no compa-
rable values are displayed.
Indication of Settings Group Switchings

Every settings group shows an applicable binary indication as well as its activation and deactivation. The
process of settings group switching is also logged in the log for settings changes.
Parameter: Number settings groups
• Default setting (_:113) Number settings groups = 1

With the Number settings groups parameter, you can set the number of available settings groups; you
can switch between these.
Parameter: Activat. of settings group
• Default setting (_:114) Activat. of settings group = settings group 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
System Functions
3.9 Device Settings
With the Activat. of settings group parameter, you specify the settings groups that you want to acti-
vate, or the mechanisms via which the switchover is allowed. You can switchover only between the settings
groups specified with the Number settings groups parameter. Parameter Value
via control The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a
communication connection from a substation automation technology or via
a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC
61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups
via a communication connection.
via binary input The switchover between the settings groups functions exclusively via the
binary input signals routed to the settings group switching.
settings group 1 They define the active settings groups. You can define the active settings
... groups in DIGSI 5, or directly on the device via the on-site operation.
settings group 8
3.9.2.5 Settings

Change group
_:113 General:Number settings 1 to 8 1
groups
_:114 General:Activat. of • via control settings group 1
settings group
• via binary input
• settings group 1

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>SG choice bit 1 SPS I
_:300 General:Act. settings group 1 SPC C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
4 Applications
4.1 Overview 148

4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ81 149

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
• Supports the fast realization of complete protection solutions for applications
• Contains the basic configuration for the use case
• Contains functions and default settings for the use case
When using an application template, note the following:
• Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
You can find more detailed information in the 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ81
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of the non-modular device 7SJ81. The appli-
cation templates contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for the device 7SJ81 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
• Non-directional OC (4*I)
• Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V)

To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum
Requirement
Template 1 Non-directional OC (4*I) 9 BI, 8 BO, 4 I
Template 2 Non-directional OC (4*I, 4*V) 9 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates
for the device 7SJ81:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Template for the Device 7SJ81
ANSI Function Abbr.
Template 1
Template 2
Available
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence system V1< x
27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection QU x
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
37 Undercurrent protection I< x
38 Temperature supervision TmpUb x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2> x
49 Thermal overload protection Θ, I2t x
50TD/ Overcurrent protection, phases - advanced I> x
51
50TD/ Overcurrent protection, phases - basic I> x x x
51
50NTD/ Overcurrent protection, ground - advanced IN> x
51N
50NTD/ Overcurrent protection, ground - basic IN> x x x
51N
50N/ Overcurrent protection, 1-phase - advanced I>1pA x
51N
50N/ Overcurrent protection, 1-phase - basic I>1pB x
51N
50HS High-speed instantaneous overcurrent protection I>>> x
50Ns/ Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with INs> x
51Ns resonant or isolated neutral
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x
59 Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence system V1> x

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Template 1
Template 2
Available
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system V2> x
59N Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system V0> x
60 Voltage-comparison supervision x
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases – advanced I>, ∠(V,I) x
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases – basic I>, ∠(V,I) x
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground - advanced IN>, ∠(V,I) x
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground - basic IN>, ∠(V,I) x
67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection for systems INs>, ∠(V,I) x
with resonant or isolated neutral
67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection via admit- G0>, B0> x
tance measurement for systems with resonant or
isolated neutral
67Ns Transient ground-fault function, for transient and perma- W0p,tr> x
nent ground faults in resonant-grounded or isolated
networks
74TC Trip-circuit supervision TCS x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x
81O Overfrequency protection f> x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x
81R Rate of frequency change protection df/dt x
Vector-jump protection x
86 Lockout x x x
Arc Prot Arc protection x
DIGFP Directional intermittent ground-fault protection x
IGFP Intermittent ground-fault protection x
FL Fault locator, single-side FL-one x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x x x
Monit Circuit-breaker wear monitoring x
20mAMT 20-mA unit Ethernet x
20mAMS 20-mA unit serial x
RTDMT RTD unit Ethernet x
RTDMS RTD unit Serial x
Measuring-voltage failure detection x
CB Test x x x
Interlocking x x x
Measured values, standard x x x
Switching statistic counters x
CFC (Standard, control) x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x x x
External trip initiation x
Control x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x x
Monitoring and supervision x x x

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
Template 1
Template 2
Available
Circuit breaker x 1 1
Disconnector x 3 3
Tap changer x
Analog unit x
Communication modules x
Access control x
Security logging x x x
Temperature acquisition via communication protocol x
Function-points class: 0 0

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5 Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase 154

5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase 161
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 167
5.4 Function-Group Type Analog Units 170
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker 233
5.6 Process Monitor 252

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
5.1.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 3-phase function group, you can use all the functions for protection and supervision
of a protected object or equipment that allows 3-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type in the func-
tion group Voltage-current 3-phase. The functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and Automation
Functions.
You can find more information on the embedding of the functions in the device in chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function. You can find the function scope of the application templates for the various device types in
chapter 4 Applications.
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
The function group always contains the following blocks:
• Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)
• Operational measured values
• Process monitor
• Output logic of the function group
• Reset the LED group

These blocks are essential for the function group under all circumstances, so they cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the function group. The
functions are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Functions that are not needed can be deleted from the
function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase.
[dwfgui3p-301112-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Structure of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The function group has interfaces with:
• The measuring points
• The Circuit-breaker function group
Interface with Measuring Points

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function group connections Editor. You can find more detailed information in chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function.
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
• 3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points
(for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been connected with
the 3-phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured values from both
measuring points in the function group. All functions in the function group have access to these values.
• 3-phase voltage (optional)

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various types
of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also
provided via this interface. Connecting the function group to the V 3ph measuring point is optional.
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree → (Name of the device) Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage). For more information, please refer to the description of the power-
system data starting in chapter 6.1 Power-System Data.
Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

All required data is exchanged between the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and the Circuit-breaker
function group via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the
direction of the Circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-breaker position information in
the direction of the protection function groups.
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group is connected to one or more Circuit-breaker function groups.
This connection generally determines:
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the Circuit-breaker function groups, you can
also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function group.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
• Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function
• Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function

If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5
via the Function-group connections Editor.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the protected object or the
equipment are defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
Resetting the LED Group

Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific func-
tion group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group .
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional, only for protection devices):

These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
The description of the process monitor begins in chapter 5.6 Process Monitor.
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be removed.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Table 5-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

dary
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) √3 · Vrated · Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
Cos φ Active factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values.
Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)

The following directional values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direc-
tion of the protected object.
• Power
• Active factor
• Energy
• Minimum, maximum values
• Average values
With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
You can find more information on this in chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-2 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[loauslin-150211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-3 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

With this, you define which circuit breaker(s) is/are affected by the protection functions of the Protection func-
tion group. A feasible default setting has already been provided in the application templates. You can find
more information in chapter 2.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The set data applies to all functions in the function group.
Set the protected object/equipment data for your specific application.
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9451:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated current parameter is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: Rated voltage
• Default setting (_:9451:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated voltage parameter is significant for protection functions if current values are set in
percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the measured values
in percent.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
• Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the Power-sys. neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded,
isolated or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the parameter
does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage measure-
ment.
You can find more information in chapter 6.32.1 Overview of Functions.
Parameter: P, Q sign
• Default setting (_:9451:158) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also positively define the power output by the protected
object (for example, as seen by the consumer). With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign for
these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.
5.1.4 Write-Protected Settings
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:103 General:rated apparent power 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
NOTE
i You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in chapter 5.6 Process Monitor.
5.1.5 Settings

Rated values
_:9451:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A
_:9451:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. neutral • grounded grounded
point
• suppress. coil grounded
• isolated
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
Reset LED Group
_:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.2.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protection object or equipment that allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence
voltage measurement via the 3-phase voltage measuring point. The function group also contains the opera-
tional measurement for the protected object or equipment (see chapter 9 Measured Values, Energy Values,
and Supervision of the Primary System).
The Voltage-current 1-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[dw1spstr-040117-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-4 Structure of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group

You connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group to the current and voltage measuring points via the
interfaces to the measuring points. At least one measuring point has to be connected. The other is optional.
This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the
interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
The function group has the following interfaces to the measuring points:
• 1-phase current
The 1-phase current measured values are provided via this interface.
You can only connect a 1-phase current measuring point to the 1-phase current interface.
• Voltage 1-phase or Voltage 3-phase

You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with a 1‑phase or
a 3-phase measuring point. The calculated zero-sequence voltage or the measured residual voltage are
available for connection with a 3-phase measuring point. The phase-to-ground voltages are not available
in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase. You can use both connection types at the same time.
You configure the 1-phase voltage measuring points via the voltage interface (see the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-5 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group
If you select the voltage type VN broken-delta for the 1-phase voltage measuring point in the measuring
point routing (see the following figure), the device measures the residual voltage VN at the broken-delta
winding. The residual voltage is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-sequence voltage. This
converted voltage is used as the voltage input for all functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase function
group.
[scvnopen, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-6 Selection of the VN broken-delta Voltage Type for the 1-Phase Voltage Measuring Point
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the 3-phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is
available via the voltage interface (see figure below).
[scVI1ph_V3ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-7 Connecting Measuring Points 3-Phase Voltage and 1-Phase Current to the 1-Phase Voltage-
Current Function Group
You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with precisely one 3-
phase voltage measuring point. 3 types of 3-phase voltage measuring-point connection are supported. With
the different connection types, the type of voltage input for the functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase
function group also changes.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following table shows the properties of the voltage input for the Voltage-current 1-phase function group
depending on the connection types.
Connection Type of the 3- Voltage Input
Phase Voltage Measuring
Point
3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages
and used as a voltage input for all functions.
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN The residual voltage VN is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN sequence voltage. This converted voltage is used as a voltage input for func-
tions.

All required data is exchanged between the Voltage-current 1-phase function group and the Circuit-breaker
function group via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This
assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connections. To connect the inter-
faces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix. If the interface is not
connected, the functions operate as supervision functions in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group.
[sc1stspc-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-8 Connecting Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Fundamental Components
The fundamental components are always present in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the fundamental components of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group:
Table 5-2 Fundamental Components of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to

I 1-phase current A A Parameter Rated operating current
V2 1-phase voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating voltage
V0 3 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage /√3
VN4 Residual Voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage /√3
You can find the parameters Rated operating current and Rated operating voltage in the
General function block of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group.
2 The 1-phase voltage V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.
3 The zero-sequence voltage V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the 3-phase phase-to-
ground voltage connection type.
4 The residual voltage VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the connection type 3-phase
phase-to-ground voltage + VN or 3-phase phase-to-phase voltage + VN.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

The operational measured values are not preconfigured in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group. You
can instantiate them in the function group or delete them from the function group. You can find the opera-
tional measured values in the DIGSI library, in the folder FG Voltage-current 1-phase under Measurements
→ Operational values.
[scui1pom, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-9 Operational Measured Values
Table 5-3 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 1-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to

I 1-phase current A A Parameter Rated operating current
V5 1-phase voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating voltage
VN 6 Residual voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
V07 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Parameter Rated operating
voltage/√3
f Frequency Hz Hz Parameter Rated frequency
P Active power MW W Parameter Rated apparent power
Q Reactive power Mvar var Parameter Rated apparent power
You can find the parameters Rated operating current, Rated operating voltage, and Rated
apparent power in the General function block of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group. You can
find the parameter Rated frequency in the General function block of the Device settings.
NOTE
i The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value.
The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1-phase current are connected to
the function group. If the connected voltage is a phase-to-ground voltage (VA, VB , VC) or any voltage Vx,
the specific power values are displayed. Otherwise the power is displayed as not available.
NOTE
i Prior to creation of the protection functions in the function group, these functions should first be
connected to the appropriateCircuit-breaker function group.
5 V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.

6 VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point of the type 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN or 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN.
7 V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point of the type 3 ph-to-gnd voltages.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Rated current
• Default setting (_:9421:101) Rated current = 1000 A

The (_:9421:101) Rated current parameter is used to set the primary rated current of the protected
object. The (_:9421:101) Rated current specified here is the reference value for the percentage-meas-
ured values and setting values made in percentages.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage of the protected object. The Rated
voltage set here is the reference value for all voltage-related percentage values in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group.
If you connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with the 1-phase measuring point, the following
applies:
• With connection type VAB, VBC, VCB, or VN , you set the Rated voltage parameter as the phase-to-phase
voltage.
• With the connection type VA, VB, VC, or VN (broken-delta winding), you set the Rated voltage parameter as the
phase-to-ground voltage.
• With the connection type VX, you set the Rated voltage parameter as either the phase-to-phase
voltage or the phase-to-ground voltage
Parameter: P, Q sign
• Default setting (_:9421:150) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power values are set at the factory so that power in the direction of the protected object is considered
positive. You can also define the power output by the protected object as positive. With the P, Q sign
parameter, you can invert the signs of active and reactive power. This inversion has no effect on the protec-
tion functions.
5.2.4 Write-Protected Settings
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Rated values
_:9421:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
Power-system data
_:9421:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9421:223 General:CT mismatch M 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
I-1ph
5.2.5 Settings

Rated values
_:9421:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100 000 A 1000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Measurements
_:9421:150 General:P, Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
5.3.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also
contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for
example, Voltage protection or Frequency protection.
The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[dw3spann-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-10 Structure of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

You connect the Voltage 3-phase function group to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree → Function group connec-
tions. To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc3span1-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-11 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.

All required data is exchanged between the Voltage 3-phase function group and the Circuit-breaker function
group via the interface of the Circuit-breaker function group.
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
You must connect the Voltage 3-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This assign-
ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree → Connect function group. To connect the interfaces, set a
cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc3span2-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-12 Connecting Voltage 3-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage 3-phase function group and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase function group:
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % with respect to

VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/√3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should first connect these functions to
the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is the
reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
5.3.4 Settings

Rated values

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED FG

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.4 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.4.1 Overview
The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, analog plug-in modules, or measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc20maee-250816-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-13 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library in order to map the RTD units.
If the device is connected to a power-plant control system or another protection device, you must load one or
more Temperature acquisition via protocols functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library to form the protocols.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwstrthe, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-14 Structure of the Analog Unit Function Group
Gray: Optionally wired, optionally available

White: Always wired, always available
The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function
group provides for example measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit , a measuring
transducer or via protocols. These measured temperature values are available for all protection function
groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can operate simultaneously.
The structure of the function RTD unit serial is identical to the structure of the function RTD unit Ether..
The function 20-mA unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can operate simultaneously. The structure of the function 20-mA unit serial is identical to the structure of the
function 20-mA unit Ether..

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols has 2 stage types: The Temperature acquisition via
PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 and the Temperature acquisition via GOOSE. One instance of the Temperature
acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 is preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 12 instances
can operate simultaneously for both stage types.
5.4.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet
5.4.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Ether. can work only in the function group Analog units. A maximum of 4 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. contains input and output channels which can be configured independently
of one another.
[dwstrfn2-150113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-15 Structure/Embedding of the Function

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.4.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Logic
[lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-16 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Communication with 20-mA Unit

The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a
connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab-
lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20-mA unit.
Ether.. For the connection to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be specified.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 5.4.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.
The 20-mA measurement unit 7XV5674 is supported.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
Table 5-5 Error Responses
Error Description Status Health

The function 20-mA unit Ether. cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. sends TCP settings to Alarm
the communication module, which evidently would
like to connect to the 20-mA unit via a serial protocol.
This communication module does not establish a
connection to the 20-mA unit.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the 20-mA unit causes a time-out indication.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the 20-mA unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port setting to define the port connecting the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the 20-mA unit connected to the communication
module via the TCP protocol. You must assign each 20-mA unit an unambiguous IP address. The IP address to
be set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts
with other IP addresses in the network. First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20-mA unit. Then specify the
IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the 20-mA Unit

The 7XV5674 20-mA unit is set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter's Ethernet interface.
Set Modbus TCP as bus protocol/operating mode.
You can find detailed notes on the settings in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.energy.siemens.com).
5.4.3.5 20-mA Channel
Logic
[lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-17 Logic Diagram of the Function 20-mA Channel

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre-
sponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities such as
temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the 20-mA
channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated values are
available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from
a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-18 Settings for Example 1
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA means
a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100. The resolution (decimal
place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dwknges3-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-19 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-20 Settings for Example 2
[dwknges2-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-21 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Unit (Example 2)
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Error Description Status Health Error Status

The input value lies outside the OK Yes
given limits
Channel not connected OK No
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = °C

With the Unit parameter, you set the physical unit of measurement the measured values. The possible setting
values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Conversion factor
• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

With the Conversion factor parameter, you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

With the Resolution parameter, you set the resolution of the scaled values.
Parameter: Range active
• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the parameter Range active (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to
20 mA.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Parameter: Upper limitLower limitUpper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20.000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4.000 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the parameter Range active , the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corre-
sponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.4.3.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port E port J
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
5.4.4 20-mA Unit Serial
5.4.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values meas-
ured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
• Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20-mA Unit Ether.. The mode of
operation is also identical. The only difference is that the measured values are transferred to the communica-
tion module via a serial connection instead of an Ethernet connection.
You can find more information in Chapter 5.4.3.2 Structure of the Function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = Port J

With the Port parameter, you specify the slot for the communication module that will be used for the
connection with an external 20-mA unit.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number parameter, you
specify the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication
module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

With the Slave address parameter, you define the device address of the 20-mA unit. If only one 20-mA
unit is connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. Set the same device address as used with
the 20-mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a
serial bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when connecting
3 of the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the Slave address setting in the 3 functions 20-mA
Unit Serial.
Parameter: Unit

• Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

• Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

• Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active parameter (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to
20 mA.
If you activate the Range active parameter, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
• Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4 mA
• Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
If you activate the Range active parameter, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.
5.4.4.3 Settings

General
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

• W/s
• Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 1000000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -1000000 to 1000000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
5.4.5 Communication with 20-mA Unit
5.4.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 5-22 shows how to connect the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug
is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-22 Connection of the 20-mA Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-23 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the 20-mA unit.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-24 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the
parameter Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Figure 5-25 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see the
following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-26 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Serial 1
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
20‑mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-27 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Finally, load the configuration in the device.
5.4.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-28 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-28 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
[scautcp2-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-29 Activation of the Protocol
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
Figure 5-30 Selection of the Protocol
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. 1 function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sc20tcp4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-31 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
Figure 5-32 Setting the Port and IP Address
5.4.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs
5.4.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz for
all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the fault-
recorder function.
• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced from
the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in the
interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas pres-
sure, etc.
• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).

The function MT fast input works in the function group Analog units and contains the number of available
measuring-transducer inputs, depending on the hardware configuration. You can configure these channels
independently from one another either as current or voltage inputs.
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]

Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function, it will be visible in the project tree in the function
group Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder.
If you open the subdirectory MT fast input, you reach the setting sheet for the respective input (for more
details, see Application and Setting Notes).
The hardware is designed in such a way that either a current or a voltage can be processed at each input. Use
the corresponding terminals (see Hardware manual). Configure the input in accordance with the selected
connection (Parameter TD input-signal type). With the parameter Measuring window, you set the
measuring range with which the arithmetic mean value is determined. With the parameter Measuring
window, you also determine measurement speed for the input. For example, a setting of 100 ms means that
the measured value is updated every 100 ms.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scmuio212, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-34 Parameters of the Measuring-Transducer Channels.
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA-channels (see chapter 5.4.3.5 20-mA
Channel).
Parameter: TD input-signal type
• Default setting (_:101) TD input-signal type = Current input

With the TD input-signal type parameter, you determine whether the measuring-transducer input
channel works as a Current input or as a Voltage input.
Make sure that the selected channel has also been wired correctly (see Hardware manual, Input and Output
Module IO212).
Parameter: Unit
• Default setting (_:103) Unit = A

Parameter: Measuring window
• Default setting (_:142) Measuring window = 10 ms

With the Measuring window parameter, you set the measuring window that is used to determine the arith-
metic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends setting the
top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for further
processing.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function then assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA
or -10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate the Range active parameter, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit
- SensorLower limit and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 5-34).
• Default setting (_:104) Conversion factor = 1.00

Parameter: Upper limit, Upper limit - Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
• Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
• Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00
• Default setting Lower limit = -20.00 mA
• Default setting Lower limit - Sensor = 1.00

With these setting parameters, you set the operating range of the measuring transducer as well as the conver-
sion of the values transmitted to the sensor values. Harmonize the operating range of the measuring trans-
ducer with the transmitter of the sensor. Using the free scalability of the system, you can meet different
requirements. The following figure shows the setting parameters in general terms.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-35 Scaling Principle
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well
below -25.6 mA or above +25.6 mA indicate a transmitter failure; currents around 0 mA indicate a broken
wire. A sensor detecting a temperature is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C
and the lower value to -100 °C. This results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set charac-
teristic curve, the function calculates the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the
linear equation (gradient and foot point) are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are deter-
mined. A supplied current of 9.333 mA corresponds to a temperature of 0 °C.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-36 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits are at approx. +20 mA and -20 mA or +10 V and -10 V.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly as
sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
• Upper limit = 10.00 V
• Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V
• Lower limit = -10.00 V
• Lower limit - Sensor = -10.00 V

With this setting, a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12-V measured value (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-37 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V
5.4.6.5 Settings

MT fast #
_:101 MT in #:TD input-signal • Voltage input Current input
type
• Current input

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:103 MT in #:Unit • % A
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:142 MT in #:Measuring • 10 ms 10 ms
window
• 20 ms
• 40 ms
• 60 ms
• 80 ms
• 100 ms
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 5.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 m Ato 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -1000000.00 to 1000000.00 1.00
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O
5.4.7 RTD Unit Ethernet
5.4.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Ether. function can only work in the Analog units function group. A maximum of 20 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwstrfnc-291112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
5.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit
Logic
[lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-39 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Communication with an RTD Unit

The function is used to communicate with an RTD box connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec-
tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD box via the Ethernet interface, the RTD box
transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD box Ether. function. For the connection to be
established successfully, specific communication settings must be set, see chapter 5.4.7.4 Application and
Setting Notes.
The RTD box Ziehl TR1200 IP supports only an Ethernet connection of 10 MBit/s. A direct connection to a 100-
Mbit communication module is therefore not possible. For this reason, you must connect the RTD box to the
communication module via a 10/100 MBit/s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the transmis-
sion rates and adapts them accordingly. Further information can be found in the Application and setting
notes, see chapter 5.4.7.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

The RTD unit Ether. function cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the RTD unit causes a time-out.
A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the RTD unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port parameter to define over which port the external RTD unit is connected to the SIPROTEC 5
device.
If you want to connect the external RTD unit to the integrated Ethernet interface, set the parameter Port =
Port J. If you want to connect the external RTD unit to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port
= Port F, Port E, Port P, or Port N.
You can connect directly the RTD unit to the device via the internal 10-Mbit Ethernet port J. If you operate the
RTD unit on another port via a 100-Mbit communication module, you need an interconnected 10/100-Mbit
autosensing switch, which adapts transmission rates accordingly.
Parameter: IP address
• Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address parameter, you set the IP address of the RTD unit connected to the communication
module via the SUP protocol. Every RTD unit has to be assigned a unique IP address. The IP address to be set
depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts with
other IP addresses in the network. Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit. Then
specify the IP address parameter for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the RTD Unit

The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its
Ethernet interface. Set the connection type of the sensors (3-wire connection or resistance value for 2-wire
connection), the idle state of the fault-indication relay, as well as the IP interface setting.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the RTD
unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.
For an Ethernet connection to a SIPROTEC 5 device communicating with the RTD unit TR1200 IP via the SUP
protocol (Slave Unit Protocol), the Modbus TCP setting must be activated in the RTD unit. You can activate
the Modbus TCP protocol using the function keys under the tcP. → Mod / on menu item or with the Web
browser in the TCP/UDP Config tab. The RTD (RTD protocol) and UDP Port settings have no effect here. The
Modbus TCP port is permanently set to 502 and cannot be changed.
5.4.7.5 Temperature Sensor
Logic
[lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-40 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block
Measured Temperature Value

The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the
RTD unit for the assigned sensor. 12 temperature sensor function blocks are always available in each RTD unit
function (both via Ethernet and serial), even if fewer sensors are connected to the RTD unit.
Various temperature sensor types are supported: Pt100, Ni100, and Ni120 sensors. The function block is noti-
fied regarding the selection of connected type via the Sensor type parameter.
The function block delivers a measured temperature value in °C or °F as an output variable. The measured
temperature value is available as an operational measured value and can be monitored by the Temperature
supervision function.
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured
temperature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with
the following table:
Table 5-8 Error response
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Sensor or line short circuited Alarm Yes
Sensor or line interrupted Alarm Yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Measured temperature value Alarm Yes
outside the valid measuring range
specified in the technical data. The
valid measuring range depends on
the sensor type.
Sensor not connected OK No
Parameter: Sensor type
• Default setting (_:11611:102) Sensor type = Pt 100

The Sensor type parameter is used to set the sensor element used. You can select between Pt 100, Ni
100 and Ni 120.
Parameter: Temperature unit

To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly.
Proceed as follows:
• In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings.
• In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-41 Change of the Display Between °C and °F
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.4.7.7 Settings

General
• port F
• port J
• port N
• port P
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type • Pt 100 Pt 100
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O
5.4.8 RTD Unit, Serial
5.4.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
• Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature supervision function
• Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Serial function is set up structurally in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function. The
mode of operation is also identical (see 5.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ).
Parameter: Port
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = F

With the Port parameter, you set the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external RTD unit.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port = Port
F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.
Parameter: Channel number
• Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number settings, you set the
channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication module
inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

Use the Slave address parameter to define the device address of the RTD unit. If only one RTD unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. The same device address has to be set on the RTD
unit. The device address is important for distinguishing among several RTD units connected to a serial bus. Set
a unique device address (for example 1, 2 and 3 when connecting 3 RTD units) for each RTD unit and the same
device address for the parameter Slave address in the 3 RTD unit serial functions.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
5.4.8.3 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port • port F port J
• port E
• port P
• port N
• port J
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 254 1
Sensor 1
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 2
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 3
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 4
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 5
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Sensor 6
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 7
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 8
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 9
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 10
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 11
• Ni 100
• Ni 120
Sensor 12
• Ni 100
• Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Sensor 4
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Sensor 7
Sensor 8
Sensor 9
Sensor 10
Sensor 11
Sensor 12
5.4.9 Communication with RTD Unit
5.4.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 5-42 shows how you connect the RTD unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug is
connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-42 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module must be
inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the CB202
expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-43 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit.
Figure 5-44 Selecting the SUP Protocol

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings
of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the parameter
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Figure 5-45 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD unit serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-46 Analog-Unit Instance
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
RTD box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first
time:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Bus protocol: mod
• Device address: 1
• Baud rate: 9600
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-47 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
5.4.9.2 Integration of an RTD Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-48 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface port J.
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-48 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Figure 5-49 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
Figure 5-50 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (Base Module)
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-51 Analog Unit Instance
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to the
following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Figure 5-52 Setting the Port and IP Address
5.4.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors

Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit. Using this resistor, simulate a constant tempera-
ture. The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω.
If you want to simulate a changeable temperature, connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead
of a fixed resistor.
5.4.10 Temperature Acquisition via Protocols
5.4.10.1 Overview
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols:
• Obtains the temperature from a power-plant control system or from another protection device
• Processes the temperature, for example, supervises the temperature in the CFC
• Transfers the temperature to other protection devices

The function Temperature acquisition via protocols can work only in the function group Analog units. In
this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 12 stages Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850

The stage can obtain the temperature from a power-plant control system via PROFINET IO or via
IEC 61850.
• 12 stages Temperature acquisition via GOOSE

The stage can obtain the temperature from another SIPROTEC 5 protection device via GOOSE.
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols comes factory-set with 1 stage Temperature acquisi-
tion via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_structure_TmpviaProt, 1, en_US]
5.4.10.3 Stage Temperature Acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-54 Logic Diagram of the Stage
The stage processes the transmitted temperature via PROFINET IO or via IEC 61850.
• Via PROFINET IO, only the analog value of the temperature is transmitted.
• Via IEC 61850, the analog value of the temperature, the quality of the temperature, and the time stamp
are transmitted.
Temperature-Failure Indication
If the received temperature is invalid, the failure indication Temperature failure is issued.
Stage Application
The following figure shows the application example. The temperature sensor measures, for example the cold-
gas temperature of the generator and feeds it to the power-plant control system. In the SIPROTEC 5 protection
device, the function Temperature acquisition via protocols acquires the cold-gas temperature from the

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
power-plant control system and processes the cold-gas temperature in the function. The function Tempera-
ture acquisition via protocols can also send the processed temperature value to other functions for further
processing.
[dw_AppEXP_IEC, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-55 Application Example
The following table explains the data.

Data Name Description
Tmp The variable is used to acquire the temperature via the protocol PROFINET IO or via the
protocol IEC 61850.
In the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, the data type is
APC.
Unit The parameter is used to select the unit °F or °C for the temperature which is acquired
from the power-plant control system.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Configuration Example
To acquire the temperature with the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850, proceed
in DIGSI as follows:
• Via PROFINET IO
– In the project tree, select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select an Ethernet port of the device.
If the device has no Ethernet port, select Hardware catalog → SIRPOTEC 5 → Communication to
add one to the device.
– In the Properties view of the Ethernet port, select General → Ethernet addresses.
– Under IP protocol, set the IP address for the port.
[sc_PROFINET IP, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-56 IP Configuration

– In the Properties view of the Ethernet port, select General → Ethernet-interface settings.
– Under Communication protocols, change the setting value of the parameter Selected protocol to
PROFINET IO.
[sc_PROFINET_IO, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-57 Protocol Selection

– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Analog units.
– Instantiate the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom in the function group Analog units.
– In the project tree, select Device → Communication mapping.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
– In the Communication mapping window, set Show protocol to PROFINET IO.
[sc_PROFI_Filter, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-58 Protocol Filter

– In the column Signals, select Analog units → Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1 → Tmp.Ctl 1.
– Route the data Tmp in column R and set the value to 1.
[sc_PROFI_Setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-59 Signal Configuration

Now you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 to acquire the cold-
gas temperature via PROFINET IO.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Via IEC 61850

– In the project tree, select Device → Device information.
– In the Device information view, change the setting value of the parameter Edition to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
– In following dialog, click Yes.
[sc_PopupDialog, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-60 Confirmation of the IEC 61850 Edition Conversion
The IEC 61850 edition of the device changes to edition 2.
[sc_DeviceEdition, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-61 Converted IEC 61850 Edition

– In the Device view, select the port that you want to communicate via IEC 61850.
– In the Properties view of the port, select General → Ethernet addresses.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sc_IEC61850_IP, 1, en_US]

– Select General → Ethernet-interface settings.
– Under Communication protocols, check IEC 61850-8-1.
[sc_IEC61850Sel, 1, en_US]


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
– Instantiate the function which requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function
group. The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following step.
– Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, change the setting values of the parameters
Temperature acquisition and Temperature via protocol to Protocol COM and
Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Ctl 1 respectively.
[sc_IEC61850_3, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-64 Parameter Configuration

– In the project tree, select Device → IEC 61850 structure.
– In the column Name, select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 → VIAC_STMP1.
– Active the data CTmp.
[sc_IEC61850_CGT, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-65 Data Selection

Now you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 to acquire the cold-
gas temperature via IEC 61850.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.4.10.4 Stage Temperature Acquisition via GOOSE
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Temperature Failure Indication

If the received temperature is invalid, a failure indication Temperature failure is issued.
Stage Application
The following figure shows the application example. The temperature sensor measures, for example the cold-
gas temperature of the generator and feeds it to the SIPROTEC 5 device 2. In the SIPROTEC 5 protection device
1, the function Temperature acquisition via protocols acquires the cold-gas temperature from the
SIPROTEC 5 device 2 and processes the cold-gas temperature in the function. The function Temperature
acquisition via protocols can also send the processed temperature value to other functions for further
processing.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_AppEXP_GOOSE, 1, en_US]
The following table shows the explanations of the data:

Data Name Description
Tmp The variable is used to acquire the temperature via GOOSE.
In the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE, the input measured value with a
COM template is designed to acquire the data from another protection device.
Unit The parameter is used to select the unit °F or °C for the temperature which is acquired
from another protection device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Configuration Example
• Configure the source device.

– In the project tree, select Project → Device information.
Edition 2.
The following dialog shows up. To acquire the cold-gas temperature, click Yes.

– Select Device → Hardware and protocols.
– In the Device view, select the port that you want to communicate with IEC 61850.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

– Select Device → IEC 61850 structure.
– In the column Name, select AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 → VIAC_STMP1.
– Active the data CTmp.
[sc_IEC61850_CGT, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-71 Data Selection

Now the device can be used to send the cold-gas temperature to other devices.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Configure the destination device.

– In the project tree, select Device → Device information.
Edition 2.
The IEC 61850 edition of the device changes to edition 2.
[sc_DeviceEdition, 1, en_US]

– In the Device view, select the port that you want to communicate with via GOOSE.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


– Instantiate the stage Tmp.GOOSE in the function Tmp.Acq.viaCom.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
– Select Device → Information routing.

– In the column Signals, select Analog units → Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1 → Tmp.Goose 1.
– Enter 1 in the column GOOSE for the data Tmp.
[sc_Station10, 1, en_US]
Signal Configuration
– In the project tree, select Device → Settings.
– Instantiate the function which requires the cold-gas temperature in the corresponding function
group. The function 49R RotorTOLP is taken as an example in the following step.
– Under General of the function 49R RotorTOLP, change the setting values of the parameters
Temperature acquisition and Temperature via protocol to Protocol COM and
Tmp.Acq.viaCom 1.Tmp.Goose 1 respectively.
[sc_GOOSE_CGT, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-76 Parameter Configuration

Now the device can be used to receive the cold-gas temperature from another device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Connect the source device and the destination device.

– In the project tree, select IEC 61850 stations.
– Double-click Add new station and create a station.
– In the Properties view of the station, change the setting value of IEC Edition to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
[sc_StationConfirmation, 1, en_US]
The IEC 61850 edition of the station changes to edition 2.
[sc_IECStation, 1, en_US]

– Assign the available devices to the IEC station.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sc_DeviceAssign, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-79 Device Assignment

– Right-click the station and select Export changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator in the context
menu.
[sc_ExportIEC, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-80 Export Changes to IEC 61850 System Configurator

– In the following dialog, click OK and save the SCD file to a folder.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sc_IECConfim, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-81 SCD File Creation

– In the opened IEC 61850 System Configurator window, select GOOSE in the toolbar.
Figure 5-82 GOOSE Function Selection

– In the GOOSE messages view, right-click the IEC station and select GOOSE application in the
context menu.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Figure 5-83 GOOSE Application Creation

– In the Source catalog box, select Source device → AnUn_TmpAcqCom 1 → VIAC_STMP1.
– Drag the data CTmp and drop it to the GOOSE application.
Figure 5-84 Source Data Selection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
You can see the assigned source data in the GOOSE messages view.
Figure 5-85 Source Data Assignment

– Unfold the assigned source data.
– In the Destination catalog box, select Destination device → AnUn_TmpAcqCom1.
– Drag the data RxTmp and drop it to the assigned source data.
Figure 5-86 Target Data Selection
Now the destination data is connected with the source data.
Figure 5-87 Target Data Assignment

– Save the configuration and close the IEC station.
– In the project tree, right-click the station and select Import changes from IEC 61850 System
Configurator in the context menu.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Figure 5-88 Import Changes from IEC 61850 System Configurator
If the following dialog shows up, the source device and the destination device are successfully
connected.
[sc_End, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-89 Successful Devices Connection

– Click OK to finish the connection.
Now you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE to acquire the cold-gas temperature via
GOOSE.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Change of the Temperature Unit

Commonly, the temperature unit °C is used in the display and evaluation of measured temperature values.
• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for all devices in the current DIGSI project, proceed as
follows:
– In DIGSI, select the menu item Options → Settings.
– In the Settings view, select the menu item DIGSI 5 user preferences.
– Under Standard unit system, change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to
US units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-90 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for all Devices
• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for 1 device, proceed as follows:

– In the project tree, select Device → Settings → Device settings.
– In the Device settings view, select the menu item Localization.
– Under Unit system, change the setting value of the unit system used from SI to ANSI.
[sc_SITmp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-91 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for 1 Device

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i If the parameter Unit system is set to ANSI, only the unit of the measuring values and parameters
changes to °F. The unit of the data used in the device and the thresholds in DCF is still °C.
Parameter: Unit

You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of the source data the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.
5.4.10.6 Settings

Tmp.Ctl 1
_:19801:101 Tmp.Ctl 1:Unit • °C °C
• °F

(Type)
Tmp.Ctl 1
_:19801:300 Tmp.Ctl 1:Tmp APC C
_:19801:53 Tmp.Ctl 1:Health ENS O
_:19801:301 Tmp.Ctl 1:Failure SPS O
_:19801:302 Tmp.Ctl 1:TmpOut MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5 function library.
The Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you
can use for this device type. The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Circuit-
breaker function group.
[sc_CB_7SJ81, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-92 Circuit-Breaker Function Group – Example of the Functional Scope
The circuit-breaker type can accept additional basic function blocks for protection functions.
The available functions are described in the chapters 6 Protection and Automation Functions and 7 Control
Functions.
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
• Mapping the physical circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions
• Detection of manual closure
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwfgstru-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-93 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with:
• Measuring points
• Protection function groups
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The function group contains the measured values needed from the measuring points associated with this
function group.
If an application template is used, the function group is connected to the measuring point of the 3-phase
current because this connection is essential. It can be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the
function group, depending on the nature of the user functions used. The configuration is carried out using the
Function-group connections editor in DIGSI 5. You can find more detailed information on this in chapter
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device.
If a user function, for example, synchronization, is used in the function group but the required measuring
point has not linked to it, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the
missing measuring-point connection.
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with the following measuring points:
• 3-phase line current

The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. The function group must
always be connected to this measuring point.
• Voltage
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are, for example, VA, VB, VC of
the line or feeder. The connection of the function group to this measuring point is optional.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Sync. Voltage1, Sync. Voltage2

A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or a 3-
phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is supplied
via this interface.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

All required data is exchanged between the protection function groups and the Circuit-breaker function
group via the interfaces of the Circuit-breaker function group. This data includes, for example, the pickup and
operate indications of the protection functions sent in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function group and,
for example, the circuit-breaker position information in the direction of the protection function groups.
If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this connection is
essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection using the Function-group connections
editor in DIGSI 5.
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Besides the general assignments of the protection function group or groups to the Circuit-breaker function
groups, you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated?
• Which protection functions activate the Automatic reclosing function?
• Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function?


The interface with the 3-phase current system must have been configured. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 supplies an
inconsistency message.
If the Synchronization function is used, the measuring points that represent voltages V1 and V2 of the parts
of the electrical power system to be synchronized must be connected.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 7.4 Synchronization Function.
The Automatic reclosing function provides the auxiliary functions Dead-line check and Reduced dead time.
For these auxiliary functions, the 3-phase voltage system has to be measured. If you want to use these auxil-
iary functions, the measuring point of the 3-phase voltage system must be connected to the Voltage function
group interface.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

The protection-function group is connected to 2 circuit breakers (2 Circuit-breaker function groups) for 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layouts.
Parameter: I Reference for % Values
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated normal current = 1000 A

With the Rated normal current parameter, you set the primary current which serves as a reference for all
current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured
values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: V Reference for % Values
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated voltage = 400 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary voltage, which serves as a reference for all voltage-
related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured values
and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only via
Parameter: Current Threshold Circuit Breaker Open
• Default setting (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A

With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you specify the current threshold below which the circuit-
breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the circuit-breaker pole
is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value. If parasitic currents (for example, due to induction)
are excluded with the line deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high degree of
sensitivity, to 0.05 A for example.
If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary
purposes.
5.5.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP • unbalancing unbalancing
• I> query

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Tripping current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
5.5.6 Trip Logic

The Trip logic function block receives the group operate indication from the Protection function group or
Protection function groups and forms the protection trip command that is transmitted to the Circuit-breaker
function block.
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.5.7 Circuit Breaker). The command output time is also effective here.
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 5-95).
[loausbef-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-94 Trip Command

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Trip-Command Reset
[lobefe3p-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-95 Trip-Command Reset
Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-94).

You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of
trip command. The following setting options are possible:
• with dropout
If the function that initiated tripping resets its operate indication the trip command is reset. This occurs
typically with dropout. Command reset of the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the
circuit-breaker condition.
• with I<
• with I< & aux.contact

For these criteria, the state of the circuit breaker is also taken into account as a further criterion in addi-
tion to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indication is reset by command). You can select
whether the state is determined by means of the current (with I<) or by means of the current in
conjunction with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (with I< & aux.contact). The behavior of
these setting options only differs in one situation of the circuit-breaker state. If the circuit breaker is in
the opening state, the trip command is reset in the case of the option with I<, whereas it is not reset
yet in the case of the option with with I< & aux.contact. The opening state is detected if the auxil-
iary contacts still detect the circuit breaker as being closed and opening is detected via the decreasing
current flow.
As long as the circuit breaker is detected unambiguously as closed (fully closed), the trip command will
not be reset with these setting options.
The information about the condition of the circuit breaker and the determination of the various condi-
tions is supplied by the Circuit-breaker position recognition function block. You can find further infor-
mation in chapter 5.5.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions.
Parameter: Reset of trip command
• Recommended setting value (_:5341:103) Reset of trip command = with I<

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

with I< The trip command is reset under the following conditions:
• Dropout of the tripping function

• The current falls short of the value set in the parameter
(_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
with I< & aux.contact The trip command is reset under the following conditions:
• The current falls short of the value set in the parameter

(_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open
• The circuit-breaker auxiliary contact reports that the circuit breaker is
open.
This setting assumes that the setting of the auxiliary contact has been
routed via a binary input (for more information, see 5.5.7.3 Acquisition
of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information).
with dropout If the load current in the system cannot be interrupted during the protec-
tion device test and the test current is fed in parallel with the load current
this setting is useful.
The setting can be selected for special applications in which the trip
command does not result in complete interruption of the current in every
case. In this case, the trip command is reset if the pickup of the tripping
protection function drops out.
5.5.6.3 Settings

Trip logic
_:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip • with I< with I<
command
• with dropout

(Type)
Trip logic
_:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
5.5.7 Circuit Breaker
5.5.7.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
• Operation of the circuit breaker
• Acquisition of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Acquistion of other circuit-breaker information

The Circuit-breaker function block provides the following information:
• Number of switching cycles
• Breaking current, breaking voltage, and breaking frequency
• Summation breaking current

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.5.7.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
• Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command
• Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations
• Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of automatic reclosing or control operations

Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection func-
tions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the
Circuit-breaker function block is generated there.
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals that must be
routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device (see Table 5-9).
[loausssc-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-96 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table 5-9 Description of the Output Signals
Signal Description Routing Options

Trip/open cmd. This signal executes all tripping and opening opera- • Unlatched
tions.
• Only saved in
The Output time parameter affects the signal. the event of
The signal is pending for the duration of output time, protection trip-
with the following exceptions: ping (not when
opened)
• Only when switched off by the control:
If the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit
breaker is open before expiration of the period
the signal is canceled before expiration of the
period.
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
The signal remains active as long as the trip
command is still active after expiration of the
period (see also 5.5.6.1 Function Description).
• Only in the event of protection tripping:
With the routing option Only saved in the
event of protection tripping, the signal remains
pending until it is acknowledged manually. This
only applies for protection tripping.
Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of this period,
with the following exception: The signal is canceled
before expiration of the period if the auxiliary
contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed
before expiration of the period.
Command active This signal is active as long as one of the binary Normal routing
outputs is active:
• Trip/open cmd.
• Close command
The binary outputs are active while a switching
command is being executed by the control.
5.5.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information

To determine the circuit breaker position, the Circuit-breaker function block provides position signals. These
signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to 2 binary
inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker positions can be reliably acquired.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loerfass-101210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-97 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information
Signal Type Description

Position DPC Acquisition of the circuit-breaker position
The position 3-pole circuit breaker open and/or the position 3-pole
circuit breaker closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
The signals must be routed to the binary input that is connected with the CB auxiliary contacts. The open and
closed signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of parallel routing is that it can
be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If only one signal is routed (open or closed), you
cannot determine the intermediate or disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are acquired (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
Open SPS The circuit-breaker position is open.
Closed SPS The circuit-breaker position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS The circuit-breaker position is in intermediate position.
Disturbed position SPS The circuit-breaker position is in disturbed position.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
The following table shows further input signals:

>Acquisition SPS This is used to activate acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxil-
blocking iary contacts (see Other Functions 3.7.3 Persistent Commands for a
description of acquisition blocking).
>Reset SPS This is used to reset acquisition blocking and manual update of the
AcqBlk&Subst circuit breaker. When the signal is active, acquisition blocking and
tracking are reset.
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an Open-
closed-open cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip.
The signal is used in the Automatic reclosing and Circuit-breaker test
functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following table shows another output signal:

External health SPS This can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit breaker.
For this, you must acquire any failure information for the circuit breaker
via a binary input. This failure information can be used to set the appro-
priate state of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using
the BUILD_ENS block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.
5.5.7.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever an automatic reclosing is not present or
the AREC has been switched off.
Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not be issued if it is to be reclosed automatically after tripping, or if it is to
be closed or opened via the control. The alarm is only to be issued in the event of definitive tripping.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Alarm suppression signal can be used to suppress the alarm.
If one of the following conditions is met, the Alarm suppression signal is generated:
• The definitive protection tripping is not present.
• The integrated automatic reclosing function executes a closure.
• The integrated control executes a closure or opening action.
• External closing is detected via the Manual close function.

For further information about its use, refer to 5.5.9.2 Application and Setting Notes.
[lounterd-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-98 Definitive Tripping and Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.5.7.5 Tripping and Opening Information

When a trip or opening command is issued, the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the
fault log.
[loausloe-081210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-99 Breaking Information
The following statistics information is saved for the circuit breaker:
• Number of switching cycles:

All tripping, opening, and closing operations are counted.
• Number of closing operations by the automatic reclosing function
• Total of breaking currents

The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..
[lo_statistics information circuit-breaker, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-100 Statistics Information About the Circuit Breaker
Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker

Figure 5-101 shows the necessary routings for the device:
• 3-pole tripping via the protection
• 3-pole opening via the control
• 3-pole closing via AREC or via the control
[loansteu-230311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-101 Activation of the Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
By routing the Trip/open cmd. signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-
pole activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description in chapter 7.2.2.3 Connection
Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
Routings for Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

For certain functions of the device, it is useful to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. In the following, you can find some examples:
• Circuit-breaker position recognition function block
• Circuit-breaker failure protection function
• Control function block

The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Siemens recommends capturing the Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles and Circuit breaker
is closed in 3 poles information via auxiliary contacts. This is the optimal configuration for the control
functionality. For purely protection applications, it is also enough to capture just one of the 2 circuit-breaker
positions. When used as a protection and control device Siemens recommends the following analysis of the
circuit-breaker position:
[loauswer-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-102 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The following diagram shows the recommended routing, in which OH stands for active with voltage.
[scpolg3p-230311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-103 Routing for Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position via 2 Auxiliary Contacts
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for the control functions.
Parameter: Output Time
• Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s

The Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Parameter: Indicat. of breaking values
• Default setting (_:105) Indicat. of breaking values = always

With the Indicat. of breaking values parameter, you define whether the measured values are to be
indicated if the circuit breaker is opened by way of the control function.
always With this setting, the measured values are reported if the circuit breaker is
opened either via the control function or the trip command of a protection
function.
with trip With this setting, the measured values are only reported if the circuit
breaker is opened via the trip command of a protection function.
Measured Values
If a protection function trips the circuit breaker, the following measured values are stored in the fault log:
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN
• Break. voltage phs A
• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
The measured value Break. current 3I0/IN is the neutral-point current. Depending on the connection
type of the measuring point I-3ph connected with the Circuit-breaker function group, the neutral-point
current is differentiated as follows:
Connection Type of the Meas- Neutral-Point Current
uring Point I-3ph
3-phase Calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
3-phase + IN Measured neutral-point current IN
3-phase + IN-separate If, for sensitive current transformers, the secondary ground current exceeds
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep the linear range of the sensitive measuring input (1.6 Irated), the neutral-
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep point current of IN measured is switched to 3I0 calculated.
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep
Output Signal: Indication Suppression

Whereas in the case of feeders without an automatic reclosing function every trip command is final due to a
protection function, the use of an automatic reclosing function should only cause the motion detector of the
circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the circuit breaker) to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
definitive (see next figure for more details). Likewise, a tripping alarm should not be triggered for switching
operations by the control.
For this, the alarm activation circuit can be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device (output
signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is perma-
nently closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm.
You can find further information in the logic in chapter 5.5.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary
Contacts and Further Information.
[loschalt-081210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-104 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.5.7.7 Settings

Circuit break.
_:101 Circuit break.:Output 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:105 Circuit break.:Indicat. of • with trip always
breaking values
• always

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:58 Circuit break.:Position DPC C
_:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. SPS O
_:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
5.5.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary

Functions
5.5.8.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
• Trip logic (see 5.5.6.1 Function Description)
• Detection of manual closing (see 5.5.9.1 Function Description)
• Process monitor (Standard V/I) 5.6 Process Monitor)

The specified chapters describe the way the protection-related additional functions are processing the infor-
mation of this function block.
The control does not use this information. The control evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
[lozust3p-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-105 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Condition Position Function
Based on the link between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, shown in
Figure 5-105, the circuit breaker can assume the following positions. The following table shows the possible
circuit-breaker conditions:
Circuit-Breaker Condition Description
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Circuit-Breaker Condition Description

Possibly open, possibly These conditions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the
closed routing of the auxiliary contacts and the condition can no longer be deter-
mined reliably. These uncertain conditions are evaluated differently
by certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when, while a trip
command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current is
detected to have fallen below the threshold value. The reason for that is
that the current-flow criterion takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact
can open.
5.5.9 Detection Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)
Detection of Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)

The Manual closure function block detects any closure carried out by hand. This information is used in func-
tion, the automatic reclosing (AREC) and Process monitor functions (within protection function groups).
You can find detailed information in the chapters Automatic reclosing function and Process monitor.
The following figure shows the logic for manual closure detection.
[lohand3p-101210-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-106 Logic for Manual Closure Detection
External Manual Closure

An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input. The input signal can
also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. For this reason, detection is
suppressed in the event of a close command by the AREC function. Detection via the input signal >Input is
also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.
Internal Manual Closure

Manual closure is detected in all cases if a close command is transmitted by the internal control function of
the device. This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to inter-
locking.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Input Signals: >Input, >Blocking of Manual Closure

In practice, the input signal >Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing
coil (see following figure).
[losteuer-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-107 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed in the event
of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.
If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to prompt detection of a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
ensured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
Parameter: Action time
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Action time = 300 ms

In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is
extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time.
Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms.
Parameter: CB open dropout delay
• Default setting (_:102) CB open dropout delay = 0 ms

With the CB open dropout delay parameter, you can maintain the effectiveness of internal indication CB
open-circuited for the set time. If the input signal >Input becomes active after external delayed manual
closure, the indication (_:300) Detected is output as long as the dropout delay is active.
5.5.9.3 Settings

Manual close
_:101 Manual close:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Manual close
_:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
5.6 Process Monitor
All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.
The Process monitor function is used in the Standard V/I 3-phase protection function group.
The Process monitor function is provided by the manufacturer with the following function blocks:
• Cold-load pickup detection (optional)
• Current-flow criterion
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Closure detection
[dwpro3pt-061212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
You can activate the cold-load pickup detection as needed. All other stages of the process monitor run perma-
nently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
[lopro3pt-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-109 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor
5.6.3 Current-Flow Criterion
[loproikr-011112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-110 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several FG circuit-breakers, the
Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG circuit-breaker. The smallest setting value of
the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
5.6.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)
Parameter: Current thresh. CB open
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.100 A

The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A.
5.6.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-111 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both circuit
breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function block
connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj.
signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in the
event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state internally.
• The >Disconnector open input is active.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Closed state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.
• The >Disconnector open input is not active.
5.6.6 Closure Detection
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.
Logic
[loein6md-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-112 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from Manual close function block), the indication Closure is
active.

(Type)
Closure detec.
_:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
5.6.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-113 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
5.6.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
Parameter: Operating mode
• Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open

With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure that
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open

condition in at least one phase.
• The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current
• Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A

With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal
Cold-load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.
Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion
• Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s

With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.
Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed
• Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s

With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.
Parameter: Min. CB open time
• Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s

With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is acti-
vated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
5.6 Process Monitor
5.6.10 Settings

Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating • I open I open
mode
• CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:103 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 600 s 600 s
delay curr.crit.
_:104 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6 Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data 261

6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions 282
6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 283
6.4 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 321
6.5 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 352
6.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 385
6.7 Inrush-Current Detection 431
6.8 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 438
6.9 Arc Protection 445
6.10 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 464
6.11 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase 467
6.12 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 492
6.13 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 500
6.14 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection 511
6.15 Undercurrent Protection 568
6.16 Negative-Sequence Protection 573
6.17 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced 582
6.18 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 596
6.19 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage 608
6.20 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 615
6.21 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage 619
6.22 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 626
6.23 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 644
6.24 Overfrequency Protection 651
6.25 Underfrequency Protection 656
6.26 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 662
6.27 Vector-Jump Protection 668
6.28 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase 676
6.29 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 686
6.30 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 695
6.31 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole 713
6.32 Automatic Reclosing Function 716
6.33 Fault Locator 762
6.34 Temperature Supervision 775

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Phase-Sequence Switchover 785

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find them
in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data
The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dwandata-180912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Structure of the Power-System Data
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
NOTE
i You can find information on the supervision-function parameters in chapter 8.3 Supervision of the Secon-
dary System.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
• Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
• Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)
• Voltage 1-phase (measuring point V 1-ph)
• Current 1-phase (measuring point I 1-ph)

The measuring points have interfaces to the function groups requiring voltage and/or current measured values
of the power system.
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
Parameter: Phase sequence
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Phase sequence= ABC

The parameter Phase sequence is used to set the phase sequence (ABC) or (ACB). The setting value applies
to the entire SIPROTEC 5 device.
Use the General function to set the settings in the power-system data.
You can find detailed information about phase-rotation reversal in chapter 6.35.1 Overview of Functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3‑Phase (I 3-ph)
The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. You can find the description
of these parameters in chapter 8 Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate

The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformer for the 3‑phase
current measuring point. The parameter can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device
→ Settings → Power system → Measuring point I 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of the
current transformer in the Power system.
You can change the connection type of the current transformer only under measuring point routing in DIGSI 5.
Under Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Current measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
• 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep
• 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep
NOTE
i The following connection types are not allowed in the Capacitor bank function group:
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
current measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for current transformers in chapter
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers. The connection examples provide assistance when
selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: CT connection = 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep

The ground current is measured both by way of an input of normal sensitivity (I2) and a sensitive input (I4)
with the connection type 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep. The phase current IB is calculated via the ground
current IN2 measured with normal sensitivity.
The calculated phase current IB is not displayed in SIGRA. If you wish to display the current IB in SIGRA, you
must define the equation for calculating IB in SIGRA using the menu item Insert → Insert calculated signal.
Calculate IB in SIGRA using one of these 2 equations:
• IB = - IA - IC - IN2 or
• IB = - IC - IA - IN2
The currents in the equations are primary values.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i • This connection type is possible only in the Voltage/current 3-phase and Circuit-breaker function
groups.
• This connection type is possible only with current terminals of the type Current, 3x protec-
tion, 1x sensitive and the following routing in the Measuring point I-3-ph:
[sc_ENEL_MP_route, 1, en_US]
As long as IN2 and INare connected to the same core balance current transformer, the parameters
Rated primary current and Rated secondary current of CT IN are also valid for the CT
IN2. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings →
Power system → Measuring point I-3-phase. You can find more information on this in chapter
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 3‑Phase (I 3-ph).
IN is used as the measured ground current for ground-fault protection functions.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only
the 3-phase measuring points shall be considered.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active, the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling
rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter-
mining the sampling frequency, select the setting value inactive.
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
• Default setting (_:8881:130) Measuring-point ID = 1

The parameter Measuring-point ID is write-protected and displays the ID of the measuring point. If you
are using several measuring points, the Measuring-point ID is continuously incremented.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the Rated primary current parameter, you set the active rated primary current of the current trans-
former

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the active rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting (_:8881:117) Current range = 50 x IR

The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications. The current measuring range 1.6 x Irated applies for the
connection type 3-phase + IN-separate and the sensitive current input or for the measuring inputs.
Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj
• Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes

The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the
current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined
by the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer). For this
reason, the default setting of the parameter was defined as yes.
When switching the parameter, the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN-sepa-
rate is rotated device-internally.
[dwpolstromwdl-251013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-2 Polarity of Current Transformers
Parameter: Inverted phases
• Default setting (_:8881:114) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (see Chapter Phase-rotation reversal). This default setting may be retained for power-system
protection applications.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
• Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you set the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison measurement

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
Note Regarding Routable Data

You can find indications for the current rotating field and the information pertaining to the sampling-
frequency tracking in Information routing under Power system → General in DIGSI 5. The indication
Freq.out of oper.range means that the frequency operating range has been exceeded. Either the
frequency is out of range (10 Hz to 90 Hz) or the input signals are too small for a manual update. Should this
state occur, the system switches the update frequency to a sampling rate that corresponds to the rated
frequency.
Furthermore, there are 2 additional measured frequency values available. The measured value f sys displays
the current system frequency, and the measured value f track displays the sampling frequency currently
set. Siemens recommends routing both measured values as fault-recording channel.
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Current 1-Phase (I-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point I 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a current to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Current measuring points.
You can only route the current Ix.
Parameter: Rated primary current
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the Rated primary current parameter, you set the active primary rated current of the current trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the active secondary rated current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Current range = 50 x IR

The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Retain the default
setting for power-system protection applications.
Parameter: Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj.
• Default setting (_:2311:116) Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes

With the Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. parameter, you define the direction of the current. If you set
the parameter Term. 1,3,5,7 in dir. of obj. = yes, the direction of the current to the protected
object is defined as forward.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you set the magnitude (magnitude correction) for the
current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selectively.
The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison measurement
to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a primary
correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
circuit.
Parameter: Tracking

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
rates.

6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)
Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in chapter Supervision Functions.
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input. The different transmission
ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (see Figure 6-3).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-3 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3 Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN
When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_bsp1, 2, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V

Broken-delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the broken-delta winding
(500 V) is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an ohmic divider. In order to calcu-
late the matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_bsp2, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.

Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/√3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:
[fo_umrechnung2, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions:
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Measured-value supervision
• Scaling of the faulty and measured values

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: VT connection
• Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. You can find the parameter in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Settings → Power-system data → Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the voltage transformer in the power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device → Measuring-points routing → Voltage measuring points, select the
desired connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in the chapters
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices. The connection examples
provide assistance when selecting the type of connection.
• Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (see chapter 6.35 Phase-Sequence Switchover). This default setting can be retained for power-
system protection applications.
Parameter: Tracking

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
active If you set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point will be
included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the
3‑phase measuring points shall be considered.
Note: If the parameter Tracking is active, the determined sampling
rates.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


When using the Magnitude correction parameter, the magnitude (magnitude correction) is adjusted for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
circuit.
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1-Phase (V-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point V 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a voltage to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-points routing → Voltage measuring points.
You can route the following voltages:
• V A
• V B
• V C
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN8
• Vx
• VN broken-delta9
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated primary voltage = 400.000 kV

The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
8 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the neutral-point displacement voltage.
9 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the voltage measured directly at the broken-delta winding of the
voltage transformer.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point
Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).
NOTE
i The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V 1‑ph if the voltage
VN broken-delta has been routed.
Parameter: Tracking
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Tracking = inactive

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point shall
be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. The validity of this signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
mining the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.
active If you have set the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point
will be included when determining the sampling frequency.
rates.


When using the Magnitude correction parameter, the magnitude (magnitude correction) is adjusted for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, with a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If
a primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.1.8 Settings
General

General
_:2311:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB
Measuring Point I-3ph

General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- • not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT • CT protection CT protection
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:8881:116 CT 3-phase:Neutr.point • no yes
in dir.of ref.obj
• yes
_:8881:114 CT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:8881:107 CT 3-phase:CT error 1.00 to 10.00 1.00
changeover
_:8881:108 CT 3-phase:CT error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % 5.0 %
_:8881:109 CT 3-phase:CT error B 0.5 % to 50.0 % 15.0 %

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

CT IN2
range
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
CT IN
_:8881:104 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:105 CT 3-phase:Rated secon- • 1A 1A
dary current
• 5A
range
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
type
• CT measurement
• CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
CT 2
tion
_:3842:117 CT 2:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
CT 3
tion

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:3843:117 CT 3:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
CT 4
tion
_:3844:117 CT 4:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix
• IN2
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2491:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:2491:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:2491:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2551:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum I
_:2431:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:2431:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2431:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:2431:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:1 Supv.ADC sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100 000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary • 1A 1A
current
• 5A
_:2311:103 General:Current range • 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
• 100 x IR
• 50 x IR
_:2311:104 General:Internal CT type • CT protection CT protection
• CT measurement
• CT Process bus
_:2311:116 General:Term. 1,3,5,7 in • no yes
dir. of obj.
• yes
_:2311:105 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
CT 1
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase • IA
• IB
• IC
• IN
• INsens
• Ix

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Measuring Point V-3ph

General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- • not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd
tion volt. + VN
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted • none none
phases
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 2
tion

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 3
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
VT 4
tion
_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 0.200 kV to 1200.000 kV 400.000 kV
voltage
_:2311:102 General:Rated secondary 80 V to 340 V 100 V
voltage
_:2311:108 General:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:2311:103 General:Tracking • inactive inactive
• active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
VT 1
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase • VA
• VB
• VC
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
• VN
• Vx
• VCB
• VN broken-delta
_:3811:107 VT 1:Sequence number 1 to 2147483647 2147483647
device

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time
General

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:2311:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:2311:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
Meas.val.dist
_:8881:325 CT 3-phase:Meas.point mult.config. SPS O
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O
CT 2
CT 3
CT 4
Calc.IN
_:20191:300 Calc.IN:Sampled val. current SAV O
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:5581:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:5581:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:5581:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:5581:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:5581:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:5581:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:5581:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:5581:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:2491:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:2491:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:2491:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:2491:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:2551:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:2551:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:2551:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:2551:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum I
_:2431:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2431:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2431:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2431:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:2431:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O
Saturat. det.
_:17731:54 Saturat. det.:Inactive SPS O
_:17731:52 Saturat. det.:Behavior ENS O
_:17731:53 Saturat. det.:Health ENS O

(Type)
CT 1

(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
VT 2
VT 3
VT 4
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
Calc.VN
_:20221:300 Calc.VN:Sampled val. voltage SAV O

(Type)
VT 1
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.2 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.2.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate
indications of the following functions:
• Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases
• Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Instantaneous High-Current Tripping

The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage-selective pickup
and operate indications of the functions listed above (see also Figure 6-4):
• Pickup
• Operate
The pickup and operate indications are output, where present, with direction information.
[loocgri2-271112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-4 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Group Indications

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.3 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 50/51):
• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
• Can be used as backup overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, phases – advanced (50/51 OC-3ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, phases – basic (50/51 OC-3ph-B)

The Basic function type is provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more func-
tionality and is provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and with 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the Overcurrent protection, phase – advanced function type, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 2 stages Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 2 stages User-defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve

In the Overcurrent protection, phases – basic function type, the following stages can be operated simulta-
neously:
• Maximum of 4 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
characteristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The optional function block Filter offered in the advanced function allows to gain harmonics or to compensate
the amplitude attenuation for the RMS value.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_ocp_ad with Filter.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-5 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Advanced
[dwocpbp1-210113-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-6 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
• Automatic reclosing (AREC)
• Cold-load pickup detection
• Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.3.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain
6.3.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.
Logic
[lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards, the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the values of the respective parameters
h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes. Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
Functional Measured Values
Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

Iph:A Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current A
Iph:B Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current B

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Iph:C Gained RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current C
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Overcurrent
protection, phases – advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the functional measured values are shown as ---.
Parameter: Enable filter
• Default setting (_:1) Enable filter = no.

With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.
Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4)
• Default setting (_:2) h(0) = 0.000

With the default value of the coefficients, the filter has no effect and no gain is applied.
If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor,
the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response (gain factors) for the reactor. To
determine the coefficients h(0) to h(4) for the FIR filter, you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary PC
tool which is available in the SIPROTEC download area. The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool.
They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter. The amplitude attenuation of higher
frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated
by the filter.
To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device, set the following coefficients in the
filter.
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.3.3.3 Settings

Filter
_:1 Filter:Enable filter • no no
• yes
_:2 Filter:h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:3 Filter:h(1) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:4 Filter:h(2) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:5 Filter:h(3) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:6 Filter:h(4) -100.000 to 100.000 1.000

(Type)
Filter
_:301 Filter:Iph:A MV O
_:302 Filter:Iph:B MV O
_:303 Filter:Iph:C MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.3.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
6.3.4.1 Description
Logic of the Basic Stage
[loocp3b1-280113-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Advanced Stage
[lo_OCP_Adv_UMZ_StageControl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loocp3p1-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-10 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
Method of measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component:

This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
• Measurement of the RMS value:

This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.
RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage)

If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS
measurement.
• Normal RMS value
• Gained RMS value from the function block Filter

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati-
cally used.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
I0 Elimination (Advanced Stage)

In order to increase the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side, use the
I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent-protection application on one transformer.
In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents, the transformer neutral point current IY must be
measured.
[dwsgaocp-230414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-11 I0 Elimination Principle
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the Voltage/current 1-phase. The function group Voltage/current 1-phase must be connected to the func-
tion group Voltage/current 3-phase in which the function Overcurrent protection, phases is being used.
[sccpfoint-230414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Connection of the Voltage/Current 1-Phase Function Group with the Neutral Point Input of the
Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group
In case of an I0 elimination, the following calculations result:

IA-elim. = IA - 1/3 IY
IB-elim. = IB - 1/3 IY
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is applied.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.
Pickup delay (Advanced Stage)

If the current exceeds the threshold value, the pickup delay is generated. If the threshold remains exceeded
during the pickup delay time, the pickup signal is generated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Dropout Delay (Advanced Stage)

If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for the
specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still main-
tained, the stage operates.
Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)

The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.3.8.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.3.7.1 Description .
Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)

If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
• Automatic reclosing

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.3.8.1 Description .
Parameter: Method of measurement
• Default setting (_:661:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Consider that aperiodic DC
components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause
an overfunction.
For this method of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the
stage to less than 0.1 Irated,sec. If currents from more than one measuring
point are added up in the current interface of a function group, the setting
value should not be set lower than 0.1 Irated,sec multiplied by the number of
added currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay
• Default setting (_:661:3) Threshold = 1.500 A (for the 1st stage)
• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Therefore, set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to
approx. 20 % above the maximum load that is expected.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1
Settings in primary and secondary values result in the setting values:
[foocpph1-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system.
2nd Stage (High-Current Stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the begin-
ning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[fo_ocpph4_030311, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocp004-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance and line impedance have different angles, you have to use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold .
Parameter: I0 elimination
• Default setting (_:661:120) I0 elimination = no

This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer. This
increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side. The following condi-
tions must be fulfilled:
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
• The parameter Method of measurement is set to fundamental comp. .

With the I0 elimination parameter, you can switch the I0 elimination function on or off.
Parameter: Pickup delay
• Default setting (_:661:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

For special applications, it is desirable that a short exceeding of the current threshold does not lead to the
pickup of the stage and start fault logging and recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not triggered
if the current threshold is exceeded.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s as a default.
Parameter: Dropout delay
• Default setting (_:661:101) Dropout delay = 0.00 s

Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
Parameter: Dropout ratio
• Default setting (_:661:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed
• Default setting (_:661:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

The parameter must be set for the specific application.
no The stage always operates 3-pole.
yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device (generated in
the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always 3-pole because the
device does not support phase-selective tripping.
6.3.4.3 Settings

General
_:661:1 Definite-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:661:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:661:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
_:661:26 Definite-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:661:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. • no no
inrush curr. detect.
• yes
_:661:8 Definite-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:661:120 Definite-T 1:I0 elimina- • no no
tion
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:661:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:661:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:661:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:661:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:661:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:661:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready
• yes
_:661:35 Definite-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:661:29 Definite-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:661:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:661:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:661:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:661:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:661:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:661:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:661:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:661:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:661:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:661:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:661:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:661:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:661:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:661:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:661:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:661:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
_:661:302 Definite-T 1:I0el.Iph WYE O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.3.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
6.3.5.1 Description
[loocp3b2-280113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-13 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_Stage Control, 1, en_US]
[loocp3p2-310511-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-15 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
RMS-Value Selection (Advanced Stage)

If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement, the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS
measurement.

If the function block Filter is configured and if you have enabled the filter, the gained RMS value is automati-
cally used.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Minimum Time of the Curve (Advanced Stage)

With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time.
[DwOcp3Mi_20140715-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-16 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage)

With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time.
Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)



I0 Elimination (Advanced Stage)

In order to increase the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the transformer low-voltage side, use the
I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent-protection applications on one transformer.
In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents, the transformer neutral point current IY must be
measured.
[dwsgaocp-230414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-17 I0 Elimination Principle
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the Voltage/current 1-phase. The function group Voltage/current 1-phase must be connected to the func-
tion group Voltage/current 3-phase in which the function Overcurrent protection, phases is used.
[sccpfoint-230414-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-18 Connection of the Function Group Voltage/Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the
In case of an I0 elimination, the following calculations must be considered:

IA-elim. = IA - 1/3 IY
IB-elim. = IB - 1/3 IY
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is operating.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.
Pickup Delay (Advanced Stage)

If the current exceeds the threshold value, the pickup delay starts. If the threshold is exceeded during the
pickup delay time, the pickup signal is generated.

• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.3.8.1 Description ).



• Recommended setting value (_:691:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Type of character. curve
• Default setting (_:691:130) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.
Parameter: Min. time of the curve
• Default setting (_:691:113) Min. time of the curve = 0.00 s

This parameter is only available in the advanced stage.
With the Min. time of the curve parameter, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time. If the
setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
Parameter: Additional time delay
• Default setting (_:691:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
time.
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:691:3) Threshold = 1.500 A

Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded since
overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Settings in primary and secondary values result in the setting values:
[foocp005-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Parameter: I0 elimination
• Default setting (_:661:120) I0 elimination = no

The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent-protection applications can be used in a transformer. This
increases the sensitivity for the 2-phase short circuit on the low-voltage side of the transformer. The following
conditions must be fulfilled:
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
• The parameter Method of measurement is set to fundamental comp..

With the I0 elimination setting, you can switch the I0 elimination function on or off.

For special applications it is desirable if the current threshold is briefly exceeded, that this will not lead to the
pickup of the stage and starts fault logging or recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not trigger if
the current threshold is exceeded.
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s and is considered as a default.
Parameter: Time dial
• Default setting (_:691:101) Time dial = 1.00

With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
for the electrical power system.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting (_:691:131) Reset = disk emulation

With the Reset parameter, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
• Default setting (_:691:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device
(generated in the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always
3-pole because the device does not support phase-selective tripping.
6.3.5.3 Settings

General
_:691:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:691:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:691:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
_:691:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:691:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:691:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:691:120 Inverse-T 1:I0 elimina- • no no
tion
• yes
_:691:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:691:108 Inverse-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:691:130 Inverse-T 1:Type of char-
acter. curve

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:691:113 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
_:691:131 Inverse-T 1:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:691:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.00 to 15.00 1.00
_:691:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:691:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by AR • no no
off/n.ready
• yes
_:691:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:691:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:691:33 Inverse-T 1:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:691:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:691:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:691:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:691:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:691:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:691:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:691:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:691:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:691:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:691:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O
6.3.6 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
6.3.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.3.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).
User-Defined Characteristic Curve

With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30
value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve

When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed. An
integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the charac-
teristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char-
acteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-19 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.

This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only differences are described in chapter 6.3.6.1 Description . This chapter provides only the application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold (absolute) parameter. You
can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6.3.5.2 Application and Setting
Notes .
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)

With these settings, you define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to shift the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter.
NOTE
i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
• Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1

for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting (_:110) Reset = disk emulation

disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
but an instantaneous dropout is desired.
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)

NOTE
• Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

yes The stage operates phase-selectively. However, tripping by the device (gener-
ated in the trip logic of the Circuit-breaker function group) is always 3-pole
because the device does not support phase-selective tripping.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Threshold (absolute)
• Default setting (_:113) Threshold (absolute) = 0.000 A

With the Threshold (absolute) parameter, you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the
stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve.
The parameter is only used for special applications. With the default setting, this functionality is disabled. You
can find more information in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve ,
Page 309.
6.3.6.3 Settings

General
_:1 User curve #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:11 User curve #:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
_:26 User curve #:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:8 User curve #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:120 User curve #:I0 elimina- • no no
tion
• yes
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
(absolute) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:111 User curve #:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:110 User curve #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 User curve #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready
• yes
_:35 User curve #:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 User curve #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 User curve #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:65 User curve #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 User curve #:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O
6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
6.3.7.1 Description
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the blocking. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see chapter 11.8 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[loocp3pha-210812-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-20 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.
• Default setting (_:661:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
• In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold

value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that is
set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.
6.3.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings
6.3.8.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-21). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is
only available in function type Advanced.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loocp3dpa-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-21 Principle of the Dynamic Settings Exemplified by 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be
active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these settings become dynamic, that is,
instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal
becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)
[loocp3awe-040311-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-22 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
• AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)

The following signal can only block the protection stage:
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of AREC
off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.32.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)
[loocp3kal-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-23 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to
Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.6.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)
[loocp3bin-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-24 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must
activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.3.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Parameter: Dynamic settings
• Default setting (_:661:26) Dynamic settings = no

no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or
external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing
describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent stage (1st stage) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to be
used as fast stage before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
Influence of External Devices

The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, the AR ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.4 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 50N/51N):
• Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (50N/51N OC-gnd-A)
• Overcurrent protection, ground – basic (50N/51N OC-gnd-B)

The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection

In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground – basic the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:

The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay charac-
teristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The measured-value selection (only advanced stage) is general functionality and has a uniform effect on the
stages (see Figure 6-25 and chapter 6.4.3.1 Description). This ensures that all stages of the function receive
the same measured current value.
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwocpga2-060213-01.tif, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
[dwocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-26 Structure/Embedding of the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an

If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).
6.4.3 General Functionality
6.4.3.1 Description
Measured-Value Selection
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loMasValue-201507-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-27 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase +
IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Table 6-1 Threshold Setting Range
Connec- Measured CT Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting
tion Value Terminal Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.:
Type Type ph = 1 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 1 A, IN = 5 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 5 A)
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
3ph + IN
urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
3 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
3ph + IN-separate
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A

urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
3 * Protec- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
Parameter: Measured value
• Recommended setting value Measured value = IN Measured

This parameter is not available in the basic function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.
6.4.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:9 General:Measured • 3I0 calculated IN measured
value
• IN measured

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.4.4.1 Description
[loocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-28 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loocpgn1-291112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-29 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced




C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see chapter Influence of other functions via
dynamic settings and section 6.4.8.1 Description ).

is described in chapter 6.4.7.1 Description.



an overfunction.
added currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:751:3) Threshold = 1.20 A (for the first stage)
• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system.
2nd stage (high-current stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following example
illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
[fo_ocp005_030311, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[foocpgr4-030311-01.tif, 3, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
• Recommended setting value (_:751:101) Dropout delay = 0

Siemens recommends using the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as fast
as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
• Recommended setting value (_:751:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.4.4.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.4.5.1 Description
[lo_ocp_gr2, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-30 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loocpgn2-291112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-31 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ground) – Advanced
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define the minimum operate delay time. The operate
[Dwocpgr3Mi_20140716-01, 1, en_US]





• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and chapter 6.4.8.1 Description ).


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
is described in chapter 6.4.7.1 Description.





an overfunction.
added currents.

Type of character. curve, refer to chapter11.5.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the Min. time of the curve parameter, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
NOTE
• Recommended setting value (_:781:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
curve.
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
• Default setting (_:781:101) Time dial = 1

Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset

6.4.5.3 Settings

General
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

flt.rec. blocked
• yes
settings
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
acter. curve
the curve
• disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
6.4.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.4.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• You can define the characteristic curve as desired.
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).


When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed. An
integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the charac-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
teristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char-
acteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x Threshold value),
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only differences are described in chapter 6.4.6.1 Description . This chapter provides only the application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold (absolute) parameter. You
can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6.4.5.2 Application and Setting
Notes .

NOTE

for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset

but an instantaneous dropout is desired.

NOTE

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Threshold (absolute)
• Default setting (_:113) Threshold (absolute) = 0.000 A

With the Threshold (absolute) parameter, you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the
stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve.
The parameter is only used for special applications. With the default setting, this functionality is disabled. You
can find more information in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve ,
Page 340.
6.4.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
(absolute) 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
• disk emulation
_:115 User curve #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
User curve #
6.4.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
6.4.7.1 Description

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-
current detection (see section 11.8 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[loocpgrd-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-34 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage


value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that is
set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
transformer.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.4.8.1 Description
The Threshold and Operate delay settings used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically. Depending on
other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function type
Advanced.
[loocpgnd-030311-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-35 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)
[loocpgrnd-040311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-36 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.
• AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following signal can only block the protection stage:
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of AREC
off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.32.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)
[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-37 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.6.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection
(Optional) .
Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)
[loocpbingnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-38 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Binary Input Signal: Dynamic settings

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic
reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
Influence of External Devices

The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, an AREC ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.5 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 67):
• Detects short circuits at electrical equipment
• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 function
types are offered:
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases - advanced (67 Dir.OC-3ph-A)
• Directional overcurrent protection, phases - basic (67 Dir.OC-3ph-B)

The Basic function type is provided for standard applications. The Advanced function type offers more func-
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 directional, definite-time overcurrent
protection stages and with 1 directional inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the advanced function type Directional overcurrent protection, phases – advanced the following stages
can be operated simultaneously:
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced
• 1 stage User-defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve

In the Basic function type Directional overcurrent protection, phases – basic the following stages can be
operated simultaneously:

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay
characteristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The direction determination occurs on function level and has the same effects in all stages (see following
figure and chapter 6.5.7.1 Description ). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of a function receive the same
direction result. Every stage can be set to the forward or reverse direction.
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwdiocan-050213-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-39 Structure/Embedding the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Advanced
[dwdiocba-050213-01.tif, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-40 Structure/Embedding the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases – Basic
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.5.3 Stage Control
6.5.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lodocpn2-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Stage-Control Logic Diagram
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure (Basic and Advanced Stage)
The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions)
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
• The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and

switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked. Siemens recom-
mends that you retain the default setting, as correct direction determination
cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked.
6.5.4.1 Description
[lodocg6b-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-42 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lodocp31-141013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-43 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced
Directional Mode (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see section 6.5.7.1 Description ).
Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory (Basic and Advanced Stage)

If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter 6.5.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the basic stage
generally picks up without direction determination, that is non-directionally. For the advanced stage, the
response can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< &
mem.empty setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no
setting, the function does not pick up.
Directional Comparison Protection (Advanced Stage)

The stage can be used for directional comparison protection. This is set using the Directional compar-
ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold-value violation to determine the
direction (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction . The direction indicated is independent
of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes , the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the >Release delay &
op. input signal is active.

comp. or the calculated RMS value .




• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.5.3.1 Description )
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.5.3.1 Description )
• Via the dynamic settings function (only provided in the Advanced function type, see chapter Influence of
other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.3.8.1 Description )


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


Parameter: Directional mode
• Default setting (_:8131:105) Directional mode = forward

You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the direc-
tion of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.
Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal
• Default setting (_:8131:104) Directional comparison = no
• Default setting (_:8131:106) Release via input signal = no

These 2 parameters are not visible in the basic stage.
You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
Directional comparison protection is performed via the Direction and >Release delay & op. signals.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

no The stage is not used for directional comparison protection.
yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release
via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the
>Release delay & op. input signal become available.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start of
the time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are only
enabled if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The
>Release delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release
information from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal); see also the application example in chapter
6.5.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
Parameter: Non-directional pickup
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:107) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< &

mem.empty
at volt.< & mem.empty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed
at low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may
exist, for example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the
circuit breaker (CB) trips.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection. For
further information, refer to section 6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .
Parameter: Operate delay
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the system.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in the chapters 6.5.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.5.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect heavily fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
• Recommended setting value (_:8131:101) Dropout delay = 0 s


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Siemens recommends using this setting value, since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as
fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it
together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electro-
mechanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Tech-
nical Data) and set the result.
6.5.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8131:105 Definite-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:8131:107 Definite-T 1:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
tional pickup mem.empty
• at volt.< & mem.empty
_:8131:104 Definite-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:8131:106 Definite-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:8131:10 Definite-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
ratio
delay
delay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:8131:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8131:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.5.5.1 Description
[lodoci6b-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-44 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lodocp33-121013, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Phases - Advanced

You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.5.7.1 Description ).
Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory (Basic and Advanced Stage)

If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter 6.5.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the basic stage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
generally picks up without direction determination, that is non-directionally. For the advanced stage, the
response can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< &
mem.empty setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no
setting, the function does not pick up.

ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold-value violation to determine the direc-
tion (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent of the
directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the >Release delay &
op. input signal is active.
Advanced Stage)

[DwDocp01_040715-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.5.3.1 Description )
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.5.3.1 Description )
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only in the advanced function type, see subtitle Influ-
ence of other functions via dynamic settings and chapter 6.3.8.1 Description ).

also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.



You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the direc-
tion of the busbar).


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:8161:112) Release via input signal = no

These 2 parameters are not visible in the basic stage.
You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start of
the time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are only
enabled if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The
>Release delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release
information from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal); see also the application example in chapter
6.5.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
Parameter: Non-directional pickup
• Recommended setting value (_:8161:113) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< &

mem.empty
at volt.< & mem.empty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed
at low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may
exist, for example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the
CB trips.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
of character. curve required for your specific application.

NOTE

time delay.
curve.

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection.
Therefore, refer to chapter 6.3.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for further information.

Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system.
dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.5.5.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° 45 °
of ref. volt.
General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:8341:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:8341:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole • no no
operate allowed
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:8341:113 Inverse-T 1:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
_:8341:110 Inverse-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:8341:112 Inverse-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:8341:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
acter. curve
the curve
• disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:8161:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8161:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:8161:62 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:8161:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:8161:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:8161:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:8161:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:8161:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O
6.5.6.1 Description
The structure of this stage is identical to that of the advanced stage with directional inverse-time characteristic
curve (6.5.4.1 Description ). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.

With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using
up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic
curve from these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Figure 6-47 Pickup and Dropout Behaviors when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.

This stage is structured in the same way as the stage with a directional inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application
and setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-curve
point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for
the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve
is required, leave the Time dial parameter set to 1.
Parameter: Reset


NOTE
6.5.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:110 User curve #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:112 User curve #:Non-direc- • no at volt.< &
_:109 User curve #:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:111 User curve #:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:10 User curve #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

settings
• yes
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
• disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
User curve #
_:501 User curve #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:309 User curve #:Direction ACD O
6.5.7 Direction Determination
6.5.7.1 Description
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
Measurands for Direction Determining

The directional measuring element uses the short-circuit current of the phase concerned and the cross-polar-
ized phase-to-phase voltage (as the reference voltage) to determine the direction. This means that the direc-
tion can still be determined unambiguously and correctly, even if the short-circuit voltages collapse
completely when a 1-phase or 2-phase fault occurs (close-up fault).
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated when phase-to-ground voltages are connected.
The cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit voltages for 1-phase-
to-ground faults (Figure 6-48, left). For 2-phase short circuits, the position of the reference voltages changes
up to 30o, depending on the extent to which the short-circuit voltages collapse (Figure 6-48, right).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwdocp02-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-48 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
Table 6-2 Measurands for Direction Determining
Threshold- Measuring Element

Value A B C Ground
Exceeding Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A IA VBC – – – – – –
B – – IB VCA – – – –
C – – – – IC VAB – –
Gnd – – – – – – Ir V0
A, Gnd – VBC – – – – Ir V0
B, Gnd – – IB VCA – – Ir V0
C, Gnd – – – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B IA VBC IB VCA – – – –
B, C – – IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, C IA VBC – – IC VAB – –
A, B, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA – – Ir V0
B, C, Gnd – – IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
A, C, Gnd IA VBC – – IC VAB Ir V0
A, B, C IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB – –
A, B, C, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient for
reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available after the
storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain any voltages
(when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the Non-direc-
tional pickup parameter.
Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-49 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IscA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φsc. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A, is
rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt. param-
eter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.
[dwdocp33-070611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-49 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Phase-Measuring Element
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range, as shown in Figure 6-50. The forward
range is calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is
located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on
the backward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
[dwdocp34-240611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-50 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function, Phase-Measuring Element
Direction Determination for Test Purposes

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined as soon
as current and voltage are greater than approx. 7 % of their secondary rated values.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= 45o

The directional characteristic, that is, the position of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rota-
tion angle of ref. volt. parameter. The short-circuit angle is typically to be found in a range from 30°
to 60° inductive. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of +45o can be retained to position the reference
voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear in the following (Table 6-3). Please note that for phase-
to-ground faults (PG faults), the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit
voltage. This results in the following setting for the rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φsh phase-measuring elements (PG faults)
Please also note that for phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is rotated between 0° (distant fault) and
30o (close-up fault) dependent upon the collapse of the faulted voltage (see Figure 6-49). You can take this
into account with an average value of 15°.
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - φsh - 15o phase-measuring elements (PP faults)
Table 6-3 Example settings
Application φsh typical Setting

Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60o Range 30o to 0o for PP faults
Selected: 15o

Selected: 45o

Selected: 45o
Input signal: >Test of direction

without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.3.8.1 Description and chapter
6.3.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .
6.5.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends
Parallel Lines or Transformers

In parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end (see Figure 6-51), if there is no directional measuring
element, a fault on feeder T1 will also trip the other feeder T2. In contrast, a directional measuring element in
the devices on busbar B prevents the tripping of the circuit breaker in the parallel feeder. Therefore, in
Figure 6-51, directional overcurrent protection is used in the places marked with direction arrows. Please note
that the forward direction of the protection device represents the direction towards the object to be protected.
This does not have to be the same as the power direction of normal power flow.
Set time grading in opposition to the power flow with increasing time. As load can only flow in one direction,
you can set the directional devices without time delay.
[dwdocp05-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-51 Parallel Line with Transformers
Legend for Figure 6-51

Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

Cable runs with infeed at both ends and lines connected to form ring topologies also require that you supple-
ment overcurrent protection with the directional criterion. Figure 6-52 shows a ring system implementation,
with the 2 infeeds shown merging in the ring to form a single infeed. For the directional devices whose
forward direction matches the power-flow direction, set time grading in opposition to the power flow with
increasing time. As power flow from both ends is possible, grading has to be set at both ends.
[dwdocp06-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-52 Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Stage ▶: Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time
6.5.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection
The direction determination of directional overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional
comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends. Directional comparison protection is used for
the selective isolation of a faulted line section (for example, subsections of closed rings). Sections are isolated
in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the disadvantage of long grading times.
This technique requires that directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection
stations. You can implement this information exchange using a communication channel (protection interface
or IEC 61850 GOOSE) or with pilot wires for signal transmission via an auxiliary voltage loop.
Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-53. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite-time overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite-time overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following situa-
tions:
• Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
• Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.
[dwdocp07-240611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-53 Selectivity through Directional Comparison Protection

Stage ▶: Stage is set in the forward direction; stage 1 is instantaneous, stage 2 is graded
▶, ◀: If a threshold value is exceeded, the stage indicates the direction (forward or reverse)
If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, we recommend operation based on a closed-circuit connection. The device
uses a function chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period. In

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a loss of
communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and indicated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it you
must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all circum-
stances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the event of
failure followed by a system incident.
Configuration of the Stage, Function Chart

To configure the stage, proceed as follows:
• The Directional mode parameter of both stages must be set to forward
• The Directional comparison and Release via input signal parameters of the first stage
must be set to yes. This is so that the first stage is only released if the >Release delay & op. input
signal is active. Furthermore, the direction is indicated if a threshold value is exceeded.
• The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded
• The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the oppo-
site end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission
• A function chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information)
and release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 67N):
• Detects short circuits to ground affecting electric equipment
• Ensures selective ground-fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective ground-fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to
form ring topologies
The Directional overcurrent protection, ground function can be used in protection function groups which
provide zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage measurements. 2 function types are offered:
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground – advanced (67N Dir.OC-gnd-A)
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground – basic (67N Dir.OC-gnd-B)

The basic function type shall be used for standard applications. The advanced function type provides more
functionalities and is intended for more sophisticated applications.
Both function types are preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
stages and 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage.
In the advanced function type Directional overcurrent protection, ground – advanced, the following stages
can operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 4 Definite-time overcurrent protection – advanced stages
• 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage
• 1 Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
• 1 Logarithmic inverse time with knee-point overcurrent protection stage
• 1 User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage

In the basic function type Directional overcurrent protection, ground – basic, the following stages can
operate simultaneously:
• A maximum of 4 Definite-time overcurrent protection – basic stages
• 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection – basic stage

Referring to Figure 6-54 and Figure 6-55, the stages not preconfigured are shown in gray. Apart from the
operate-delay characteristic curve, the stages are similar in structure.
The general functionality includes the direction determination and the measured-value selection (only
advanced function). They take place on the functional level and have a uniform effect on the stages (see
Figure 6-54 and chapter 6.4.3 General Functionality). This ensures that all stages of the function receive the
same measured current value and the same direction result. Each stage can be set to work in forward or
reverse direction.
The group indication output logic generates the following group indications for the protection function by the
logic OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwrdirad-300913, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-54 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
[dwrdirba-300913, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Structure/Embedding of the Function Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic
If the following listed device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6.3.1 Measured-Value Selection
Logic
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.
[loMasValue-201505-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-56 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase +
IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Connec- Measured CT Terminal Type Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

tion Type Value Setting Range Setting Range Setting Range Setting Range
(rated I-sec.: (rated I-sec.: (rated I-sec.: (rated I-sec.:
ph = 1 A, IN = 1 ph = 1 A, IN = 5 ph = 5 A, IN = 1 ph = 5 A, IN = 5
A) A) A) A)
3I0 calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to N/A N/A 0.15 A to
35.000 A 175.00 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to N/A N/A 0.005 A to
3ph + IN
1.600 A 8.000 A
IN measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to N/A N/A 0.15 A to
35.000 A 175.00 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to N/A N/A 0.005 A to
1.600 A 8.000 A
3I0 calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 0.030 A to 0.15 A to 0.15 A to
35.000 A 35.000 A 175.00 A 175.00 A
3 * Protection, 1 * 0.030 A to 0.030 A to 0.15 A to 0.15 A to
sen. 35.000 A 35.000 A 175.00 A 175.00 A
3ph + IN-separate
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 0.001 A to 0.005 A to 0.005 A to

1.600 A 1.600 A 8.000 A 8.000 A
IN measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 0.15 A to 0.030 A to 0.15 A to
35.000 A 175.00 A 35.000 A 175.00 A
3 * Protection, 1 * 0.001 A to 0.005 A to 0.001 A to 0.005 A to
sen. 1.600 A 8.000 A 1.600 A 8.000 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 0.005 A to 0.001 A to 0.005 A to
1.600 A 8.000 A 1.600 A 8.000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6.3.2 Direction Determination
Logic of Direction Determination

The following figure represents the logic of the direction determination. It applies to all types of stages.
[lodirdet-280812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-57 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination
Measurand for the Direction Determination

With the parameter Polarization with you define whether the direction determination is calculated with
the zero-sequence components 3I0 and V0 or with the negative-sequence components I2 and V2, which are
present during faults in the network.
The angle between IN (=-3I0) and V0 (respectively -I2 and V2) in case of using the negative-sequence compo-
nents is available as a functional measured value. This value is only present during faults in the network.
[DwUIkenn-240812-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-58 Measured-Value Definition
Start of the Direction Determination

If the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the pickup threshold of a stage and the selected voltage (V0 or V2)
exceeds the parameter Min. voltage V0 or V2 as well, the direction determination is started.
Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Values

The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current -3I0 and the
rotated reference voltage Vref, rot. Contrary to the Directional overcurrent protection, phase function, which
works with the healthy voltage as reference voltage, the fault voltage V0 itself is the reference voltage for the
Directional overcurrent protection, ground function. To take different system conditions and applications

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
into account, the reference voltage V0 can be rotated through an adjustable angle (parameter Rotation
angle of ref. volt. ). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the
short-circuit current -3I0. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible.
Figure 6-59 illustrates the relationship based on a 1-phase-to-ground fault in phase A. The fault current has a
phase displacement of 180° to the fault current IscA and lags the fault voltage by the fault angle φsc. The
reference voltage V0 is rotated by φrot which is -45°.
[dwroreze-300913, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-59 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Function with
Zero-Sequence Values
The rotated reference voltage Vref, rot and the parameter Forward section +/- define the forward and
reverse ranges, see Figure 6-60. The forward range is calculated as ± Δφ° around the rotated reference voltage
Vref, rot. Δφ is set with the parameter Forward section +/- . If the short-circuit current vector -3I0 is
located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on
the reverse direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwforrev-281013, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-60 Forward/Reverse Characteristic of the Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground Function
Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence Values

The method works in the same way as for zero-sequence values. Instead of 3I0 and V0, the negative-sequence
values I2 and V2 are used for determining the direction.
Direction Determination for Test Purposes

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction , the direction is determined and indicated
even without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined as
soon as the zero-sequence current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds approx. 7 % of the secon-
dary rated values of phase current and voltage.
• Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = IN Measured

This parameter is not available in the basic function.
IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.
Parameter: Min. voltage V0 or V2
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Min. voltage V0 or V2 = 2 V

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
This parameter is not available in the basic function. The basic function uses a fixed value of 2 V.
You use the Min. voltage V0 or V2 parameter to define the minimum zero-sequence voltage or nega-
tive-sequence voltage for the direction determination. The minimum voltage must be set greater than the
maximum operational unbalance plus the voltage-transformer measuring errors.
As the measuring error of the individual voltage transformer is not added up, the critical measuring-error influ-
ence is the unbalance of the primary system.
Siemens recommends observing the operational zero-sequence voltage V0 of the protected object (for
example, the line) via the operational measured values of the device and providing the maximum value with a
certainty of 50 %.
EXAMPLE
Maximum operational measured value of zero-sequence voltage V0 = 0.5 Vsec
Min. voltage V0 or V2 = 1.5 ⋅ 0.5 V = 0.75 Vsec
If you have no information about maximum operational unbalance, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt. / Forward section +/-
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= -45°
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:103) Forward section +/- = 88°

The parameter Forward section +/- is not available in the basic function. The basic function uses a fixed
value of 88°.
The direction characteristic, that is, the area of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rotation
angle of ref. volt. and the Forward section +/- parameters. The short-circuit angle is typically to
be found in a range from -30° to -60° inductively. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of -45° can be
retained to position the reference voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear below Table 6-5. Note that for 1-phase-to-ground faults
(PG faults), the reference voltage is the zero-sequence voltage V0. This results in the following setting for the
rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = -φk ground-measuring elements (PG faults)
Table 6-5 Example Settings
Application φk Typical Setting

Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60° -60°
30° -30°

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
30° -30°
Parameter: Polarization with
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Polarization with = zero sequence

This parameter is not available in the basic function. The basic function uses always zero-sequence compo-
nents for the direction determination.
You use the parameter Polarization with to select the values for the direction determination.
zero sequence Select zero sequence to determine the direction via the zero-sequence
components V0 and 3I0.
Siemens recommends using the zero-sequence components for the direction
determination.
negative sequence Select negative sequence to determine the direction via the negative-
sequence components V2 and I2.
The negative-sequence system can be used in case of danger that the zero-
sequence voltage is too small due to unfavorable zero-sequence impedance
conditions or that a parallel line influences the zero-sequence system.
Input Signal: >Test of direction

without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.
6.6.3.4 Settings

General
_:2311:9 General:Measured value • 3I0 calculated IN measured
• IN measured
_:2311:101 General:Min. voltage V0 0.150 V to 20.000 V 2.000 V
or V2
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 ° to 180 ° -45 °
of ref. volt.
_:2311:103 General:Forward section 0 ° to 90 ° 88 °
+/-
_:2311:104 General:Polarization • zero sequence zero sequence
with
• negative sequence

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction I
_:2311:352 General:Test direction O
_:2311:351 General:Phi(I,V) O
6.6.4 Stage Control
6.6.4.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lostacon-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Blocking of Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stages can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
• From an internal source on the pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links to the trip of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not block the stage when the
Measuring-voltage failure detection function picks up.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
You can use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-
voltage failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting,
as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-
voltage failure occurs.
no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a meas-
uring-voltage failure is detected.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6.5.1 Description
[lodirovb-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-62 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lodirova-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-63 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
Measurand (Basic and Advanced Stage)

The function uses the zero-sequence current (3I0) as a criterion for the ground fault.
Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I-3ph, the zero-sequence
current is measured or calculated. Depending on the applied CT terminal type, the 3I0 Threshold range
varies according to the following table.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Connection Type of the Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range
Measuring Point (Secondary)
I-3ph
3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
x + IN Measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
x + IN-separate 3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nents numerically.

This measuring procedure determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
The direction determination works across all stages (see chapter 6.6.3.2 Direction Determination).

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.6.4.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.6.4.1 Description)
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (only available in the advanced function type, see Influence of
Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 6.6.10 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings)
Blocking of the Operate Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the operate delay and thus
also the generation of the operate signal. A running operate delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault
logging and fault recording take place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
is described in chapter 6.4.7.1 Description

In case of undershooting of the dropout threshold, the dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for
the specified time. The operate delay continues to run. If the operate delay expires while the pickup is still
maintained, the stage operates.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

ison parameter. With the yes setting, the direction indication Direction is released and the direction
(forward or reverse) is determined, if the current exceeds the threshold of the stage. The direction indicated is
independent of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal parameter and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
start of the operate delay, and therefore the operate signal of the stage, are only enabled when the
>Release delay & op. input signal is active.

If available in the device, the following functions can exert an influence on the overcurrent-protection stage:

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.6.10 Influence of Other Func-
tions via Dynamic Settings.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction (in the direction
of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction (in the direction
of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:4861:106) Release via input signal= no

The parameters Directional comparison and Release via input signal are not visible for the
basic stage.
You can use these settings to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the starts of
the operate delay and operate signal are only enabled when the >Release
delay & op. input signal is active. The >Release delay & op. input
signal must be connected to the enable information from the opposite end
(forward information from the Direction output signal).
See also the application example in chapter 6.5.10 Application Notes for
Directional Comparison Protection

This parameter is not visible for the basic stage.
yes If a device-internal function (Automatic reclosing or Cold-load pickup
detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-protection
stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or operate delay,
blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing/Cold-
load PU/Binary input as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate
delay, and Stage blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to
be set for the specific influence.
For further setting notes, refer to chapter 6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) of the func-
tion Overcurrent Protection, Ground.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies, for example, to the high-current stage that is set
according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer in such a
way that the stage only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side.
The transformer inrush current cannot become larger than the
maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current that
would lead to an operate of the stage, the start of the operate delay and
operate of the stage are blocked.
transformer.

For setting the threshold value, the same considerations apply as for the non-directional overcurrent protec-
tion function.
For further information, refer to chapter 6.4.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .

The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the stage.
• Recommended setting value (_:4861:101) Dropout delay = 0 s

Siemens recommends using the dropout delay of 0 s, since the dropout of a protection stage must be
performed as fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter ≠ 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it
together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electro-
mechanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Tech-
nical data) and set the result.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in sections 6.5.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable
Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.5.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6.5.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:4861:105 Definite-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:4861:104 Definite-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:4861:106 Definite-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:351 General:Phi(I,V) MV O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:4861:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:4861:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:4861:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O
6.6.6.1 Description
[lodiinvb-280812-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-64 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Basic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lodiinva-280812-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-65 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground – Advanced
Measurand (Basic and Advanced Stage)

The function uses the zero-sequence current (3I0) as a criterion for the ground fault.
Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I-3ph, the zero-sequence
current is measured or calculated. Depending on the applied CT terminal type, the 3I0 Threshold range
varies according to the following table.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Connection Type of the Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range
Measuring Point I-3ph (Secondary)
3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
x + IN Measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
x + IN-separate 3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A


This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nents numerically.

This measuring procedure determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
The direction determination works across all stages (see chapter 6.6.3.2 Direction Determination).
Advanced Stage)


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[DwMinTime_20140708-01.vsd, 1, en_US]


• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.6.4.1 Description)
• Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.6.4.1 Description)
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (only available in the advanced function type, see Influence of
Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 6.6.10 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings)
Blocking of the Operate Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the operate delay and thus
also the generation of the operate signal. A running operate delay is reset. The pickup is indicated. Fault
logging and fault recording take place.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
is described in chapter Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
For more information, refer to 6.4.7.1 Description.

ison parameter. With the yes setting, the direction indication Direction is released and the direction
(forward or reverse) is determined, if the current exceeds the threshold of the stage. The direction indicated is
independent of the directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal parameter and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
start of the operate delay, and therefore the operate signal of the stage, are only enabled when the
>Release delay & op. input signal is active.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

If available in the device, the following functions can exert an influence on the overcurrent-protection stage:

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.6.10 Influence of Other Func-
tions via Dynamic Settings.

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction (in the
direction of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:4891:112) Release via input signal= no

The parameters Directional comparison and Release via input signal are not visible for the
basic stage.
You can use these settings to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the
Release via input signal parameter, the Direction output
signal, and the >Release delay & op. input signal become avail-
able.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
starts of the operate delay and operate signal are only enabled when
the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The >Release
delay & op. input signal must be connected to the release informa-
tion from the opposite end (forward information from the Direc-
tion output signal).
See also the application example in chapter 6.5.10 Application Notes
for Directional Comparison Protection .

no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal
or external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (Automatic reclosing or Cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcur-
rent-protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold
value or operate delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be
changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing/
Cold-load PU/Binary input as well as the dynamic settings
Threshold, Time dial, and Stage blocked of the stage visible
and enables the settings to be set for the specific influence.
For further setting notes, refer to chapter 6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) of the func-
tion Overcurrent Protection, Ground.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


• In cases where the device is used on transformers and the
threshold value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-
current stage that is set according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc
of the transformer in such a way that the stage only picks up on
faults from the high-voltage side. The transformer inrush current
cannot become larger than the maximum transmittable shortcir-
cuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush
current that would lead to an operate of the stage, the start of the
operate delay and operate of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the
threshold value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current
of the transformer. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage,
which is used as a backup stage with grading time for faults on the
undervoltage side of the transformer.

NOTE

time delay.
curve.
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be detected.
Consider that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at
approx. 10 % above the Threshold.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

You can use the Reset parameter setting to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout
characteristic curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emula-
tion.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout does not have to be performed after a
disk emulation and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
6.6.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:4891:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:4891:110 Inverse-T 1:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:4891:112 Inverse-T 1:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:4891:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
acter. curve
the curve
• disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Inverse-T 1
_:4891:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:4891:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:4891:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:4891:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:4891:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:4891:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:4891:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:4891:300 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6.7 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse

Characteristic Curve
6.6.7.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lodiloin-280812-02.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-67 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection –
advanced stage (see chapter 6.6.6.1 Description).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.6.6.1 Description.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value 1/
Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve deter-
mines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the charac-
teristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit.
[dwloginv-300913, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-68 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse-Time Characteristic
The time to operate is calculated with the following formula:
[fomula01-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
3I0 Measured zero-sequence current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse-
time delay according to IEC and ANSI (advanced function type) (see chapter 6.6.6.1 Description).
This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.6.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Stage Type Selection

If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current level according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.
Dynamic Settings: Threshold
• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1.20 A

Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for time-graded stages, the settings of
the superordinate and of the subordinate stages in the time-grading chart must be taken into consideration.
Parameter: Threshold multiplier
• Default setting (_:116) Threshold multiplier = 1.1

You can use the Threshold multiplier parameter to define the beginning of the characteristic curve on
the current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.
EXAMPLE
Threshold (Secondary current) Ithresh = 1.2 A

Threshold multiplier Imul = 1.1
Pickup value (Secondary current) IPU = 1.2 A ×1.1 = 1.32 A
Dynamic Settings: Time dial
• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 1.250 s

You can use the Time dial parameter to change the slope of the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Max. time of the curve
• Default setting (_:114) Max. time of the curve = 5.800 s

The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 =
Threshold).
• Default setting (_:113) Min. time of the curve = 1.200 s

The parameter Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).
• Recommended setting value (_:115) Additional time delay = 0 s

You can set an additional current-independent time delay. This additional delay is intended for special applica-
tions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.
6.6.7.3 Settings

General
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:119 Log.-inv.-T #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:118 Log.-inv.-T #:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:120 Log.-inv.-T #:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:10 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:26 Log.-inv.-T #:Dynamic • no no
settings
• yes
_:27 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:3 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:6 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
of the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
of the curve
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.000 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 Log.-inv.-T #:Effect. by • no no
AR off/n.ready
• yes
_:35 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage • no no
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by • no no
AR cycle 1
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 Log.-inv.-T #:Effect. b. • no no
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage I
_:501 Log.-inv.-T #:>Release delay & op. I
_:84 Log.-inv.-T #:>Activ. dyn. settings I
_:500 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block delay & op. I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate O
_:62 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. O
_:65 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act O
_:66 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. CLP active O
_:67 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. BI active O
_:68 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup O
_:300 Log.-inv.-T #:Direction O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate O
6.6.8 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve
6.6.8.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lodilokn-280812-02.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Logic Diagram of the Directional Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Overcurrent Protec-
tion, Ground

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is almost identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protec-
tion – advanced stage (see chapter 6.6.6.1 Description). The only difference is that the dynamic settings
change functionality is not available.
Operate Curve
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the threshold value. An integrator accumulates the value
1/Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following graphic. The curve is composed of 2
sections with different slops. 7 parameters are used to define the logarithmic inverse time with knee-point
characteristic curve. The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial time value of the
characteristic curve, and relates to the 3I0 Threshold value. The transition point is defined by parameter
Knee-point current and parameter Knee-point time. The parameter Min. time of the curve
indicates the lower time limit, and parameter Current at Min. time determines the current value at
Min. time of the curve. The parameter Time dial servers as a time factor to the operate time.
[dwloinkn-300913, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-70 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Characteristic (In the Example
of Threshold = 0.004 A)

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is almost identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protec-
tion – advanced stage (see chapter 6.6.6.1 Description). The only difference is that the dynamic settings
change functionality is not available.
6.6.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

You can use the Threshold parameter to define the pickup value of the stage corresponding to the specific
application.
• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 0.2

You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the operate curve in the time direction.
Parameter: Knee-point
• Default setting (_:101) Knee-point current = 1.300 A
• Default setting (_:105) Knee-point time = 23.60 s

You use the Knee-point current parameter and the Knee-point time parameter to define the knee-
point of the operate curve.
General information cannot be provided. Define the values corresponding to the application.
Parameter: Minimum Time of the Operate Curve
• Default setting (_:102) Current at Min. time = 1.500 A

Via the parameters Min. time of the curve and Current at Min. time, the point of the operate
curve is defined where higher currents do no longer cause shorter operate times.
Parameter: Maximum Time of the Operate Curve

You can use the parameter Max. time of the curve to determine the initial value of the operate curve
(for 3I0 = Threshold).
6.6.8.3 Settings

General
_:1 Log.inv.T KP #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.inv.T KP #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:108 Log.inv.T KP #:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode
• reverse
_:8 Log.inv.T KP #:Method • fundamental comp. fundamental
of measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:107 Log.inv.T KP #:Direc- • no no
tional comparison
• yes
_:106 Log.inv.T KP #:Release • no no
via input signal
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:10 Log.inv.T KP #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:27 Log.inv.T KP #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:3 Log.inv.T KP #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:109 Log.inv.T KP #:Time dial 0.05 to 1.50 0.20
_:101 Log.inv.T KP #:Knee- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
point current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.500 A
_:105 Log.inv.T KP #:Knee- 0.00 s to 100.00 s 23.60 s
point time
_:102 Log.inv.T KP #:Current at 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
Min. time 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:104 Log.inv.T KP #:Min. time 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.80 s
of the curve
_:103 Log.inv.T KP #:Max. time 0.00 s to 200.00 s 93.00 s
of the curve

(Type)
Stage #
_:81 Log.inv.T KP #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Log.inv.T KP #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:500 Log.inv.T KP #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Log.inv.T KP #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.inv.T KP #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.inv.T KP #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.inv.T KP #:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:55 Log.inv.T KP #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Log.inv.T KP #:Direction ACD O
_:56 Log.inv.T KP #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.inv.T KP #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.6.9.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lodirusr-280812-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-71 Logic Diagram of the Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve Overcurrent Protection,
Ground
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.6.6.1 Description). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using
up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic
curve from these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with User-Defined Characteristic Curves

When the measured value falls short of the threshold value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 × 1.1× threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as outgoing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
weighted reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The following figure shows the pickup behavior and dropout behavior when a directional user-defined charac-
teristic curve is used.
[dwpidrbe-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-72 Pickup and Dropout Behaviors when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE

This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as required. This section only provides applica-
tion and setting notes for setting the characteristic curves. For guidance on the other parameters of the stage,
see chapter 6.6.6.2 Application and Setting Notes.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the Operate Curve)

point. The setting follows the characteristic curve you want to realize.
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you
want to displace the characteristic curve.
Specify the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE

You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the system. Where no grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is
required, leave the Time dial set to 1.
Parameter: Reset

The Reset parameter is used to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
disk emulation Both operate curve and a dropout characteristic curve have to be specified
with this setting.
Use this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical devices or
other devices performing dropout after disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation,
that is, if instantaneous dropout is required.
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the Dropout Curve)

point. The setting is determined by the characteristic curve you want to achieve.
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold setting afterwards if you
want to displace the characteristic curve.
Specify the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE
6.6.9.3 Settings

General
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:113 User curve #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:112 User curve #:Directional • no no
comparison
• yes
_:114 User curve #:Release via • no no
input signal
• yes
_:10 User curve #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
settings
• yes
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
• disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready
• yes
blocked
• yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
cold-load pickup
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input
• yes
blocked
• yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
User curve #
_:501 User curve #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate SPS O
_:300 User curve #:Direction ACD O
6.4.8.1 Description and 6.4.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) describe the influence of
other functions on dynamic settings.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.7 Inrush-Current Detection
The function Inrush-current detection
• Recognizes an inrush process on transformers
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for
protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on
• Allows a sensitive setting of the protection functions

The following protection functions evaluate the blocking signal
• Overcurrent protection with a pickup value below the maximum inrush current
• Negative-sequence protection as sensitive backup protection for transformers
The function Inrush-current detection is not an individual protection function. In the connection process of a
transformer, it transmits a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the inrush-current
detection must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be blocked.
The following figure shows the embedding of the function. The setting parameter Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. establishes the connection between inrush-current detection and the functions that are to be
blocked. If the parameter is set to yes, the connection is effective.
A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for
synchronization of the internal measurement methods.
The jump detection reacts to changes in the current. The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an
internal pickup of the protection function that is to be blocked.
[dwirsh01-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The function Inrush-current detection analyzes the trigger signal of the jump detection or the threshold-
value violation of the function to be blocked in a start logic, and synchronizes the method of measurement. In
order to securely record the inrush processes, the function uses the Harmonic analysis method of measure-
ment and the CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods work in parallel and link the results
through a logical OR.
If you wish to work with only one process, deactivate the other method by way of the parameters Blocking
with 2. harmonic or Blocking with CWA .

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loinru02-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-74 Basic Structure of the Inrush-Current Detection
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 95 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.95).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loinru10-040912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-75 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function (T = 1 Period)
CWA Method (Current Wave Shape Analysis)

The CWA method executes a wave shape analysis of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC. If all 3 phase currents
show flat areas at the same point in time, the inrush-current detection signal will be issued. This signal applies
for all 3 phases simultaneously. The following figure shows a typical inrush-current characteristic, with the
simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable.
[dwinru03-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-76 Inrush-Current Characteristic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loinru05-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-77 Logic of the CWA-Method Function (T = 1 Period)
Logic of the Inrush-Current Detection

The following logic diagram shows the link of the 2 methods of measurement Harmonic Analysis and CWA
method.
The crossblock function influences the Harmonic Analysis process. If you have set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes, you will receive in the event of threshold-value violation a blocking indication for all 3
phase currents and the measured or calculated zero-sequence current (l2nd harm / l1st harm). The crossblock func-
tion works via a timer. Set parameters for the time depending on the expected duration factor via the param-
eter Cross-blocking time.
If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat.-range limit Imax, the inrush-
current detection will be blocked.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loinru12-060912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-78 Logic Diagram of the Inrush-Current Detection
Parameter: Operat.-range limit Imax
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Operat.-range limit Imax = 7.5 A

With the parameter Operat.-range limit Imax, you can specify at which current the inrush-current
detection is blocked internally. Set the value to be greater than the RMS value of the maximum inrush
current of the transformer. A practicable value is 7.5 times the transformer rated current.
Parameter: Blocking with CWA
• Recommended setting value = (_:111) Blocking with CWA = yes

yes CWA process activated.
no CWA process deactivated.
Parameter: Blocking with 2. harmonic
• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blocking with 2. harmonic = yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

yes Harmonic analysis process activated.
no Harmonic analysis process deactivated.
NOTE
i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values.
Parameter: 2nd harmonic content
• Recommended setting value (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content, you can specify the pickup value of the harmonic anal-
ysis function. The setting value of 15 % is practicable for most transformers.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
• Recommended setting value (_:112) Cross-blocking = no

no Through the CWA process working in parallel in the inrush-current detec-
tion, the function is not activated as standard.
yes If a subfunction of the inrush-current detection is identified in the course of
the closure trials during commissioning, set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes.
Parameter: Cross-blocking time
• Default setting (_:109) Cross-blocking time = 0.06 s

You define the duration of this blocking with the Cross-blocking time parameter. The default
setting of 0.06 s (about 3 periods) has proven practicable. Set the time as short as possible and check
the value during the closure trials. The parameter Cross-blocking time is inactive at Cross-
blocking = no.
Parameter: Start flt.rec
• Default setting (_:114) Start flt.rec = yes

With the Start flt.rec parameter, you determine whether a fault record should be started upon
pickup of the inrush-current detection. The following settings are possible:

no No fault recording starts with pickup.
yes The fault recording starts with pickup. When the protection function is
blocked by the inrush-current detection, a fault recording is started never-
theless.
6.7.5 Settings

Inrush detect.
_:1 Inrush detect.:Mode • off on
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:106 Inrush detect.:Operat.- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
range limit Imax 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 37.500 A
_:111 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with CWA
• yes
_:110 Inrush detect.:Blocking • no yes
with 2. harmonic
• yes
_:102 Inrush detect.:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content
_:112 Inrush detect.:Cross- • no no
blocking
• yes
_:109 Inrush detect.:Cross- 0.03 s to 200.00 s 0.06 s
blocking time
_:114 Inrush detect.:Start • no yes
flt.rec
• yes

(Type)
Inrush detect.
_:81 Inrush detect.:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inrush detect.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inrush detect.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inrush detect.:Health ENS O
_:300 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase A SPS O
_:301 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase B SPS O
_:302 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase C SPS O
_:305 Inrush detect.:CWA SPS O
_:306 Inrush detect.:Cross-blocking SPS O
_:55 Inrush detect.:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.8 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
The Instantaneous high-current tripping function has the following tasks:
• Instantaneous tripping when switching onto an existing fault, for example, if a grounding switch is
closed.
• Instantaneous disconnection of high currents above the highest overcurrent-protection stage.
The Instantaneous high-current tripping function offers 2 different increment types:
• Stage with standard release method
• Stage with release method via protection interface (only applicable if the device is equipped with a
protection interface)
The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory-set.
[dwihcstr-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.8.3 Standard Release Procedure
Logic
[lo_hlore3, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-80 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method
Activation
Using the Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released.
• on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open)
or if the circuit breaker is being closed or if the binary input signal >release is active. The way signals
are generated Rel. by CB switch on is described in chapter 5.5.8 Circuit-Breaker Position Recogni-
tion for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions.
• always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and of the
binary input signal >release.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• only with binary signal

The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.
Method of Measurement, Threshold Value

The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement:

component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold.
• Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:

The stage also works with unfiltered sampled values. Thus, very short operate times are possible. The
current sampling values are compared with a threshold value of 2 · √2 of the preset threshold value.
Parameter: Activation
• Default setting (_:3901:101) Activation = on CB closure

Using the parameter Activation, you define the conditions under which the stage is released.
on CB closure Select this setting to activate the stage only when the circuit breaker is closed.
always active Select this setting to release the stage statically.
only with binary Select this setting to release the stage via an external signal.
signal
• Default setting (_:3901:3) Threshold = 10.0 A for Irated = 1 A or 50.0 A for Irated = 5 A
The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, shunt reactors or long lines with
low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110 kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 Ω/km;
X1/s = 0.43 Ω/km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:
[foglchzv-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):
[foglchik-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting value results:
[foglnste-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 1496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. It can be disconnected immediately.
NOTE
i The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.

The recommended setting value of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain high-precision measure-
ments, the Dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup
threshold, you can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the
tripping stage.
6.8.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface
This stage can be applied only if the device is equipped with a protection interface.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[lohinre3-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-81 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface
Release
If one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is present) (for
further information, see chapter 5.6 Process Monitor):
• No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or
• Switching to the local circuit breaker is imminent.

These conditions are recognized internally if a circuit breaker is open or just closed
Furthermore, the stage can be activated externally via the >release binary input signal.
NOTE
i To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of
the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be routed).
Method of Measurement, Threshold Value

The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold value.

If the current exceeds a preset threshold value by
current ≥ 2·√2·threshold value
this stage will use unfiltered measurands in addition. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
• Default setting (_:3901:3) Threshold = 2.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 12.5 A for Irated = 5 A
Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.

The recommended setting value of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate
measurements, the dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup
threshold, you can increase the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.8.7 Settings

Standard 1
_:3901:1 Standard 1:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:3901:101 Standard 1:Activation • on CB closure on CB closure
• only with binary signal
• always active
_:3901:3 Standard 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:3901:4 Standard 1:Dropout ratio 0.50 to 0.90 0.90

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Group indicat.
Standard 1
_:3901:500 Standard 1:>release SPS I
_:3901:81 Standard 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3901:54 Standard 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3901:52 Standard 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3901:53 Standard 1:Health ENS O
_:3901:300 Standard 1:Rel. by CB switch on ACT O
_:3901:55 Standard 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3901:57 Standard 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
6.9 Arc Protection
6.9.1 Overview of Function
The function Arc protection:
• Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgear parts without delay and in a fail-safe way
• Limits system damage through instantaneous high-speed tripping
• Protect systems from thermal overload
• Increases safety of personnel
• Trips in a 3-pole way
• Is suitable for use in all voltage levels
The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
• General
• 3 stages
• Output logic 3-phase

The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages. A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated
simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function.
[dw_structure_arcprot, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-82 Structure/Embedding of the Arc Protection Function

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
General Logic of the Function Block
[lo_fb0_arcprot, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-83 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_arcprotection, 1, en_US]
TheArc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.
NOTE
i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!
NOTE
i Once an optical sensor has detected an arc, you must replace the affected optical sensor!
Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
Method of Measurement, Current-Flow Criterion

The current-flow criterion works with 2 different methods of measurement.

component numerically. A direct-current component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the funda-
mental component is compared with the set threshold value.

If the current exceeds the threshold value set by the current amount ≥ 2 ⋅√2 ⋅threshold value, the stage
uses additional unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
NOTE
i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
If you use the current-flow criterion, arcs are typically detected in 4 ms!
Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to the
arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module. If the
test signal is not returned to the arc protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure is
generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm and the stage/function is
blocked.
6.9.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings
Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply
to all stages.
Parameter: Threshold I>
• Default setting (_:2311:3) Threshold I> = 2.000 A

Use the parameter Threshold I> to define the trigger threshold of the phase currents. The Threshold I>
is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold I> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold I> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.3.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .
Parameter: Threshold 3I0>
• Default setting (_:2311:4) Threshold 3I0> = 1.000 A

Use the parameter Threshold 3I0> to determine the tripping threshold for the zero-sequence current. The
Threshold 3I0> is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold 3I0> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold 3I0> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.4.4.2 Application and Setting Notes
NOTE
i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
6.9.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage
Parameter: External trip initiation
• Default setting (_:14551:9) External trip initiation = no

With the External trip initiation parameter, you set whether an external input signal is used to
trigger the stage.
no The stage does not operate with an external input signal.
current The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External current must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
In this setting option, the binary input signal >External current is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
light The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the stage operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External light must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing. In
this setting option, the binary input signal >External light is only
visible in the DIGSI 5 information routing
Note: When working with the light external trip initiation, do not select a
channel. If an additional channel is selected with this setting value, the
DIGSI 5 will signal an inconsistency.
• Default setting (_:14551:8) Operating mode = current and light

With the Operating mode parameter, you define the basic functionality of the stage.
current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light.
The current-flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an
arc.
Siemens recommends using this setting value.
light only This stage operates only with the input signal 'light' and is triggered even if
current is not measured.
This operating mode can cause a overfunction if light is detected suddenly.
Use this setting value only if the effect caused by external light signals is
impossible.
Parameter: Sensor
• Default setting (_:14551:11) Sensor = point sensor

With the Sensor parameter, you set which sensor type is connected to the device.
point sensor A point sensor is connected to the device.
line sensor A line sensor is connected to the device.
custom If you select this setting option, the parameter Threshold light is
visible.
Siemens recommends the default setting values point sensor or line
sensor. This allows arcs to be detected reliably regardless of diffused light.
Parameter: Threshold light
• Default setting (_:14551:7) Threshold light = -20.00 dB

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
With the Threshold light parameter, you set the light sensitivity. If you set Threshold light to a
smaller value, the sensitivity increases. If you set Threshold light to a higher value, the sensitivity
decreases. If the sensors even pick up in case of a switching arc of the circuit breaker, set the Threshold
light parameter to a higher value.
Siemens recommends the default settings for point or line sensors.
Set the parameter Threshold light manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.
Parameter: Channel
• Default setting (_:14551:10) Channel = No channel is selected

With the Channelparameter, you select which sensor channel the stage uses.
If the Arc protection function has several stages, a different channel must be selected for each stage.
For parameter Channel, the selection texts are identical to the name of the arc-protection module and its
channels.
6.9.6 Settings

General
_:2311:3 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:2311:4 General:Threshold 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
Stage 1
_:14551:1 Stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:14551:2 Stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:14551:9 Stage 1:External trip • no no
initiation
• current
• light
_:14551:8 Stage 1:Operating mode • light only current and light
• current and light
_:14551:11 Stage 1:Sensor • point sensor point sensor
• line sensor
• custom
_:14551:7 Stage 1:Threshold light -34.00 dB to -10.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14551:10 Stage 1:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection

Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
initiation
• current
• light
• line sensor
• custom
configuration
Stage 3
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
initiation
• current
• light
• line sensor
• custom
configuration

(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:301 General:Current detected SPS O
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection

(Type)
Stage 1
_:14551:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:14551:501 Stage 1:>External current SPS I
_:14551:502 Stage 1:>External light SPS I
_:14551:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:14551:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:14551:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:14551:318 Stage 1:Fault arc counter INC C
_:14551:58 Stage 1:Arc detected SPS O
_:14551:301 Stage 1:Light detected SPS O
_:14551:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:14551:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Stage 2
Stage 3
Information about the self-monitoring function of the arc protection module

(Type)
channel #
_:307 channel #:Sensor failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
Light Only
6.9.8.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Positioning the optical point sensors in the switchgear
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors:
[dw_arcprot-light-only, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-85 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Light only)
For this example, the following is assumed:
• The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off. This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart-
ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders are off.
Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartments (BB compartment) of the infeed and feeders.
Install additional optical point sensors in the circuit-breaker compartment (CB compartment) of the
feeders. Connect all optical point sensors to the protection device of the infeed.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
• The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart-
ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect it
to the protection device of the feeder. This allows for the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-
connection compartment.
Due to the pressure waves that occur during the formation of an arc, partitions can deform and cause
undesirable light influences in adjacent compartments. This can result in a non-selective tripping.
• If there is an arc in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must switch off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates in Operating mode = light only, the effects of external light
can result in non-selective tripping.
NOTE
i It must be considered that the number of arc protection modules connected to the device depends on the
hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular devices, a
maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection
device in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit
breaker in feeder 1.
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection
device in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2.
• Connect optical point sensors from all busbar compartments and all circuit-breaker compartments of
feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and
cleared by the device in the infeed.
Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1

The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed

The Arc protection function operates with 5 stages.
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
• Parameter: Operating mode = light only (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (Stage 2) → Circuit-breaker compartment supervision
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 2 (Stage 5) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed
Light and Current
6.9.9.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example:
• Setting notes about selected parameters in the stages of the function

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
[dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-86 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light
influences.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder,
the current will therefore be evaluated in the infeed.
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect
the optical point sensors to the protection device in the infeed.
• The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker
compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection
device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed.
• If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the
protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must trip.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
NOTE
i This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection
device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular devices,
a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect the optical point sensors from the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in the
busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable-connection compartment of
feeders 1 and 2 are detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.
• Connect an optical point sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in
the infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
the infeed.

• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Sensor = point sensor (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision in

feeder 1
in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 1 (Stage 4) → Busbar compartment supervision in
feeder 2
in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 3 (Stage 6) → Cable-connection compartment supervi-
sion in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 3 channel 1 (Stage 7) → Busbar compartment supervision in the
infeed
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.9.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.
6.9.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip
Initiation
6.9.10.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-87 Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation
cable-connection compartment of the feeder and the infeed. Connect the optical point sensors to the
respective protection device in the feeder and infeed.
• If the optical point sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment
of the feeders, the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface,
or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection device in the infeed
evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.9.10.2 Application and Setting Notes
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can also be switched off selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the Current detected pickup indication from the
infeed unit must be sent to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.
infeed, the superordinate protection device trips.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point
sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection
module).
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is feasible.
General Notes:
cable-connection compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
• Arcs in the busbar compartment and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders must be switched
off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder device must
send the indication Light detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection
interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off faults on the busbar and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders.
Connect the signals over 4 stages, using the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders are switched off locally. The protection device
in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold
I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in
the feeders. If, at the same time, an optical sensor in a cable-connection compartment detects light, the
protection device trips in the corresponding feeder.

Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
• Parameter: Channel = (Stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in feeder 1

Parameter: Channel = (Stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision in feeder 1
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
• Parameter: Operating mode = current and light
• Parameter: External trip initiation = current

The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no
• Parameter: Channel =

Stage 1 and 2 (supervision of busbar compartment and circuit-breaker compartment):
• Parameter: Channel = (Stage 1) → busbar-compartment supervision in feeder 2

Parameter: Channel = (Stage 2) → circuit-breaker compartment supervision in feeder 2
Stage 3 (supervision of cable-connection compartment):
• Parameter: External trip initiation = current

The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed returns the indica-
tion Current detected to the protection device in the feeder.
Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal >External
current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective.

Stage 1 (busbar-compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment of the infeed and the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0> are exceeded, an operate indication is generated immediately.

Stage 2 (circuit-breaker compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the circuit-breaker compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-87), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection

Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment supervision):

If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray point sensors in
Figure 6-87), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is switched off by a superordinate
protection device.
Depending where the arc is generated in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, it is not
always possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the current must be evaluated by the superordinate protection device.

Stage 4 to 7 (External trip initiation):
• Parameter: External trip initiation = light

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeder, the
feeder device sends the Light detected indication to the infeed device. Only if the indication in the
infeed device Light detected is connected with the signal >External light, an external trip
initiation via these stages is effective.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off the arc.
6.9.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with 1 infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
• Optical line sensor placement in the switchgear
• Optical line sensor connection to the protection device in the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the infeed protection device

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection
[dw_Liniensensor, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-88 Layout and Connection of the Optical Line Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional protection to prevent unwanted tripping caused by the
sudden effects of light.
• Figure 6-88 shows how the optical line sensors should be routed. Start in the infeed busbar compartment
and route the optical line sensor along the busbar and back again to the protection device in the infeed.
Connect the optical line sensor to the protection device in the infeed.
• Depending on the routing options in the control cabinet, you can also route the optical line sensor
through the circuit-breaker and cable-connection compartments of the feeders.
If this is not possible, you can detect arcs in these compartments using point sensors. For more detailed
information, see chapters 6.9.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light Only and 6.9.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light and Current.
infeed, the superordinate protection device will shut off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion will prevent unwanted tripping caused by external light effects.
NOTE
i Note that the number of arc protection modules that are connected to the device depend on the hardware
configuration of the equipment.
When using modular equipment, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular equip-
ment, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Depending on the use case, you can combine point and line sensors.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.9 Arc Protection

The Arc protection function operates with 1 stage.
• Parameter: Sensor = line sensor
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision (infeed,
feeder 1, feeder 2)
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.9.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.10 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto
a fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).
The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups . The
function is preconfigured with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dwstrsto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.10.3 Stage Description
Logic of the Stage
[logisotf-170312-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-90 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
Connection of the Stage

The stage is intended to initiate instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault. To do this, the stage must
be connected to one or more pickups from protection functions or protection stages, for example, to pickup of
an overcurrent-protection stage. That is, the stage of the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault func-
tion does not have its own measuring function but requires the pickup of another protection function or
protection stage to pick up.
The stage is active only if switching is pending or executed (for this, see chapter 6.3 Overcurrent Protection,
Phases).
NOTE
i If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush-current detection function, the Instan-
taneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up. In this case there is no fault recording
either.
Despite this, if a fault recording is necessary, you can activate it with the parameter (_:114) Start
flt.rec of the Inrush-current detection function (see chapter 6.7 Inrush-Current Detection).
Parameter: Configuration
• Default setting (_:5941:102) Configuration = no stage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The Configuration parameter is used to define the pickup of a protection function or protection stage that
the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function uses to respond.
Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected:
• Distance protection
• Overcurrent protection (phase and ground)
• Directional overcurrent protection (phase and ground)

A specific protection stage is generally used. This can be one of the protection stages provided for the protec-
tion application, which itself trips with a delay. An additional protection stage with settings optimized for this
use case, for example, increased threshold value and blocking of self-tripping, can also be used.
• Recommended setting value (_:5941:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s

When switching onto a fault, the tripping should usually be instantaneous. The tripping delay is therefore set
to 0.
6.10.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
_:5941:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:5941:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5941:102 Stage 1:Configuration Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.11 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.11.1 Function Overview
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function (ANSI 50N/51N):
• Detects and monitors the current measured in a transformer neutral point grounding
• Can operate as sensitive tank leakage protection
• Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks
• Switches off high-current faults instantaneously
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are available:
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced (50N/51N OC-1ph-A)
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic (50N/51N OC-1ph-B)

The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – advanced the following stages can be operated
simultaneously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection (UMZ)
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ)
• 1 stage Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection
• 1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection
• 1 Fast stage
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic, the following stages can operate simultane-
ously:
• Maximum of 3 stages Definite-time overcurrent protection
• 1 stage Inverse-time overcurrent protection

The non-preconfigured stages in Figure 6-91 and Figure 6-92 are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-delay
characteristic curve, the Definite-time overcurrent protection stage, the Inverse-time overcurrent protec-
tion stage, the Logarithmic inverse-time overcurrent protection stage, and the User-defined characteristic
curve-time overcurrent protection stage are structured identically.
The Fast stage uses a fast tripping algorithm. It is therefore suited in particular for sensitive ground-fault
detection according to the high-impedance principle.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwocp1pa-280113-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-91 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Advanced
[dwocp1pb-310113-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-92 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase – Basic
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of a Stage
[loinvocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-93 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Method of measurement



C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Blocking of the Stage

The picked up stage can reset completely via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Blocking of the Time Delay

also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.
Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
Blocking of tripping with the Inrush-current detection function is possible only if the following conditions
have been met:
• The central Inrush-current detection function has to be available in another protection function group
with 3-phase current measurement.
• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.
Related Topics
6.3.7.1 Description

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:12661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.11.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[lodefocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-94 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Method of Measurement




also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.
Blocking of tripping with the Inrush-current detection function is possible only if the following conditions
have been met:
• The central Inrush-current detection function has to be available in another protection function group
with 3-phase current measurement.
• You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree → Name of the device → Function group connections.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

an overfunction.
added currents.


Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.

Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the param-
eter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

6.11.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T 1
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

flt.rec. blocked
• yes
curr. detect.
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
acter. curve
• disk emulation

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Logic of the Stage
[lo_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-95 Logic Diagram of the Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
(see chapter 6.11.4.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.11.4.1 Description .

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Operate Curve
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value 1/
Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve deter-
mines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the charac-
teristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit.
[dw_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]
The time to operate is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
I 1-phase current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse-
time delay according to IEC and ANSI (see chapter 6.11.4.1 Description ).
6.11.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .
Stage Type Selection

If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current level according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.

With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so,
for the time-graded stages, the setting for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into
account in the grading chart.
Parameter: Threshold multiplier
• Default setting (_:116) Threshold multiplier = 1.1

With the parameter Threshold multiplier, you define the beginning of the characteristic curve on the
current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
EXAMPLE
Threshold (Secondary current) Ithresh = 1.2 A

Threshold multiplier Imul = 1.1
Pickup value (Secondary current) IPU = 1.2 A ×1.1 = 1.32 A
• Default setting (_:6) Time dial = 1.250 s

With the parameter Time dial, you change the slope of the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Max. time of the curve

The parameter Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for I =
Threshold).

The parameter Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).
• Default setting (_:115) Additional time delay = 0 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the parameter Additional time delay, you set an additional current-independent time delay. This
additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.
6.11.5.3 Settings

Log.-inv.-T #
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:27 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
of the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
of the curve
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.000 s
time delay

(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func-
tion type.
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only differ-
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.


When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE

This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only differ-
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

NOTE

dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset
• Default setting Reset = disk emulation



C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
6.11.6.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
• yes
measurement comp.
• RMS value
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.010 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.05 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.002 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
• disk emulation

(Type)
User curve #

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.11.7 Fast Stage
Logic of a Stage
The fast stage is only available in function type Advanced.
[loocp1hs-280113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-98 Logic Diagram of the Fast Stage, 1-Phase
Method of Measurement, Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Fast Stage

This stage evaluates the unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short response times are possible. When the abso-
lute values of 2 consecutive sampled values of the last half period exceed the Threshold, the stage picks up.
When all sampled values of the previous period are less than the dropout threshold, the stage drops out.

• Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s

Ensure that the sampled values are compared directly without an additional factor with the set threshold
value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Recommended setting value (_:4) Dropout ratio = 0.90

The recommended setting value of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain high-precision measure-
ments, the Dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup
threshold, you can increase the Dropout ratio setting. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.11.7.3 Settings

Fast stage #
_:1 Fast stage #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Fast stage #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 Fast stage #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:4 Fast stage #:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.90
ratio
_:6 Fast stage #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

(Type)
Fast stage #
_:81 Fast stage #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Fast stage #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Fast stage #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Fast stage #:Health ENS O
_:55 Fast stage #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Fast stage #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Fast stage #:Operate ACT O
6.11.8 Application Example: High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
With the high-impedance method, all current transformers operate in parallel at the limits of the protection
range on a common, relatively high-impedance resistor R, the voltage of which is measured.
The current transformers must be of the same type of construction and have at least one core of their own for
the High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection. Furthermore, they must have the same transfer ratio
and approximately the same knee-point voltage.
The high-impedance principle is especially suited for ground-fault detection in grounded networks at trans-
formers, generators, motors, and shunt reactors.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The left part of Figure 6-99 shows an application example for a grounded transformer winding or a grounded
motor/generator. The example at the right shows an ungrounded transformer winding or an ungrounded
motor/generator. In this example, it is assumed that the network is grounded at a different point.
[dwhimpef-310113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-99 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impedance Principle
Function of the High-Impedance Principle

The high-impedance principle is explained using the example of a grounded transformer winding.
In normal state, no residual currents flow, that is, in the transformer neutral point IY = 0 and in the phases
3I0 = IA + IB + IC = 0.
With an external ground fault (on the left in Figure 6-100), the short-circuit current of which is fed via a
grounded neutral point, the same current flows in the transformer neutral point and in the phases. The
respective secondary currents (with the same transfer ratio of all current transformers) draw each other off.
They are connected in series. At the resistor R, only a little voltage arises, which results from the internal resis-
tances of the transformers and those of the transformer connection lines. Even if a current transformer is
briefly saturated, it becomes a low-impedance during the time of the saturation and forms a low-impedance
shunt to the high-impedance resistor R. The high resistance of the resistor thus has a stabilizing effect (so-
called resistor stabilization).
[dwprhimp-310113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-100 Principle of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impedance Principle
With a ground-fault in the protection range (on the right in Figure 6-100), a neutral-point current IY flows in
any case. The magnitude of the residual current in the phase currents depends on the grounding conditions in
the rest of the network. A secondary current corresponding to the entire short-circuit current attempts to flow
via the resistor R. But since this resistor is high-impedance, a high voltage arises there which causes the satura-
tion of the current transformers. The effective voltage at the resistor therefore corresponds approximately to
the knee-point voltage of the current transformers.
The resistor R is thus dimensioned in such a way that even the smallest ground-fault current to be detected
leads to a secondary voltage that corresponds to half of the knee-point voltage of the current transformers
(see chapter 2.5.4).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Further information can be found at Sensitivity view for high-impedance ground-fault differential protection in
chapter 6.11.8.2 Application and Setting Notes .
High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection with a SIPROTEC 5 Device

Use the I4 measuring input of the SIPROTEC 5 device for the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protec-
tion. This input for this application is to be executed as a sensitive measuring input. Since this is a current
input, the current is detected by this resistor instead of the voltage at the resistor R.
Figure 6-101 shows the connection diagram. The protection device is connected in series with the resistor R
and thus measures its current.
The varistor V limits the voltage in case of an internal fault. The varistor cuts the high instantaneous voltage
peaks in the case of transformer saturation. Simultaneously, a smoothing of the voltage arises without any
relevant reduction of the average value.
[dwanedif-310113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-101 Connection Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impe-
dance Principle
As a protection against overvoltages, it is important that you connect the device directly at the grounded side
of the current transformer. The high voltage at the resistor is thus kept away from the device.
In a similar manner, the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection for generators, motors, and shunt
reactors is used. With auto transformers, you must connect the upper-voltage side and low-voltage side
current transformers and neutral-point transformer in parallel.
The method can be realized for each protected object. As busbar protection, the device, for example, is
connected via the resistor to the parallel connection of the transformers of all feeders.

A prerequisite for the application of the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection is that neutral-
point current detection is possible on the station side (see example in (Figure 6-101). Furthermore, a sensitive
input transformer must be available at device input I4. Set the pickup value for current at input I4 with the
function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase.
Observe the interaction between current-transformer characteristic curve, external resistor R, and the voltage
at R for the overall function of the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection. Notes on this follow.
Current Transformer Data for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

All affected current transformers must have the same ratio and approximately the same knee-point voltage.
This is normally the case when the current transformers are of the same type and have the same rated data.
You can calculate the knee-point voltage from the rated data as follows:
[foukniep-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
VKP Knee-point voltage

Ri Internal resistance of the current transformer
Prated Rated power of the current transformer
Irated Secondary rated current of the current transformer
n Rated overcurrent factor
Rated current, rated power, and overcurrent factor are found on the name plate of the transformer.
EXAMPLE
Current transformer with the following data on the name plate: 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA
You can read the following transformer data with this data:
Irated = 5 A (out of 800/5)
n = 10 (out of 5P10)
Prated = 30 VA
The internal resistance is frequently to be found in the test report of the transformer. If it is not known, it can
be approximately determined by a direct current measurement at the secondary winding.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of the knee-point voltage
Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 0.3 Ω
[foukp5aw-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current transformer 800/1; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 5 Ω
[foukp1aw-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Besides the current-transformer data, the resistance of the longest connection line between transformer and
device must be known.
Stability Consideration for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

The stability condition is based on the simplified assumption that one current transformer is completely satu-
rated and the others transfer their partial currents proportionately in the case of an external fault. This is theo-
retically the worst case. A safety margin is automatically provided, since, in practice, even the saturated trans-
former still delivers some current.
Figure 6-102 shows an equivalent circuit of this simplification. CT1 and CT2 are assumed to be ideal trans-
formers with their internal resistances Ri1 and Ri2. Ra are the core resistances of the connection lines between
transformer and resistance R; they are used doubled (forward line and return line). Ra2 is the resistance of the
longest connection line.
CT1 transmits the current I1. CT2 is assumed to be saturated. This is indicated by the dotted short-circuit line.
The transformer thus represents a low-impedance shunt by its saturation.
A further prerequisite is R >> (2Ra2 + Ri2).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwvebhdi-310113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-102 Simplified Connection Diagram of a Layout for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault
Protection
The voltage at R is, then,

VR = I1· (2Ra2 + Ri2)
A further assumption is that the pickup value of the SIPROTEC 5 device corresponds to half of the knee-point
voltage of the current transformers. In the edge case,
VR = VKP/2
The stability limit ISL results, which means the through fault current up to which the arrangement remains
stable:
[foistabl-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For the 5 A transformer as above with VKP = 75 V and Ri = 0.3 Ω
Longest connection line = 22 m with 4 mm2 cross-section; that corresponds to Ra = 0.1 Ω
[foisl5aw-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example, the stability limit is 15 × rated current or 12 kA primary.

For the 1 A transformer as above with VKP = 350 V and Ri = 5 Ω
Longest connection line = 107 m with 2.5 mm2 cross-section; that corresponds to Ra = 0.75 Ω
[foisl1aw-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example, the stability limit is 27 × rated current or 21.6 kA primary.
Sensitivity Consideration for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault Protection

The voltage present at the set of current transformers is supplied to the protection device via a series resistor R
as proportional current for evaluation. For dimensioning of the resistor, the following must be taken into
account:
The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection should pick up at approximately half of the knee-point
voltage of the current transformers. From this, you can calculate the resistor R.
Since the device measures the current through the resistor, the resistor and measuring input of the device
must be connected in series. Since the resistor still should be high-impedance (aforementioned condition R >>
2Ra2 + Ri2 ), the inherent resistance of the measuring input can be neglected. The resistance results thus from
the pickup current Ipick and half of the knee-point voltage:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[foberecr-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For the 5 A transformer as above
Desired pickup value Ipick = 0.1 A (corresponds to 16 A primary)
[fober5aw-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For the 1 A transformer as above

Desired pickup value Ipick = 0.05 A (corresponds to 40 A primary)
[fober1aw-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The series resistor R must be designed for a minimum continuous load Pcontinuous.
[fopdau5a-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fopdau1a-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Further, the series resistor R must be designed for a fault current lasting approximately 0.5 s. This time is
usually sufficient for fault clearing through backup protection.
The thermal stress of the series resistor depends on the voltage VRMS,stab that is present during an internal fault.
It is calculated according to the following equations:
[fousta5a-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fousta1a-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
IK,max,int corresponds to the maximum fault current here in the case of an internal fault.
5-A current transformer 800/5 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK,max,int = 250 A secondary.
1-A current transformer 800/1 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK,max,int = 50 A secondary.
This results in a temporary load for the series resistor over 0.5 s of:
[fop05s5a-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fop05s1a-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Observe that with the selection of a higher pickup value Ipick, the resistor value must be lowered and therefore
the dissipation rises sharply.
The varistor (see following figure) must be sized such that it remains high impedance up to the knee-point
voltage, for example:
• Approx. 100 V with 5 A transformer
• Approx. 500 V with 1 A transformer
[dwanedif-310113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-103 Connection Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impe-
dance Principle
Even with unfavorable wiring, the maximum occurring voltage peaks do not exceed 2 kV for safety reasons.
When for performance reasons, several varistors must be connected in parallel, give preference to types with
flat characteristic curves, in order to avoid an unbalanced load. Siemens therefore recommends the following
types by METROSIL:
600A/S1/S256 (k = 450, β = 0.25)
600A/S1/S1088 (k = 900, β = 0.25)
In the example, set the pickup value of the first Definite-time overcurrent protection stage (setting
Threshold) to 0.1 A for 5-A transformers or 0.05 A for 1-A transformers. No further protection stages are
needed. Delete these or switch them off. Set the Operate delay setting to 0 s.
If several current transformers are connected in series, for example, with use as busbar protection with several
feeders, the magnetization currents of the transformers switched in parallel can no longer be neglected. In
this case, add up the magnetization currents at half of the knee-point voltage (corresponds to the set
Threshold). These magnetization currents reduce the current through the resistor R. Thus, the actual pickup
value is correspondingly higher.
6.11.9 Application Example: Tank Leakage Protection
Tank leakage protection records short-circuits to ground – including high-impedance ones – between a phase
and the tank of a transformer. The tank is thus insulated, or at least grounded with high impedance. The tank
must be connected with a line to ground. The current that flows through this line is fed to the protection
device. If a short-circuit to ground occurs in a tank, a fault current (tank current) flows to substation ground
via the ground connection.
The function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase detects the tank current. If the tank current exceeds the set
Threshold, the function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase generates an operate indication. Depending on
the set Operate delay, the transformer is tripped immediately or time-delayed on all sides.
For tank protection, a sensitive, 1-phase current measuring input is used.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwprkess-310113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-104 Tank-Control Principle

A prerequisite for the application of tank protection is the availability of a sensitive input transformer at device
input I4.
If you connect Measuring point I 1-ph with the function group Voltage-current 1-phase, the function Over-
current protection, 1-phase works with the 1-phase current connected to input I4.
Use only the first definite-time overcurrent protection stage of function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase.
The Threshold setting is used to set the pickup value. No further protection stages are needed. Delete these
or switch them off. Set the Operate delay setting to 0 s.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.12 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often extinguish automatically and strike
again after some time. The fault duration can last between a few milliseconds and many seconds. Thus, such
faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are
extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path can pick up. Thus, selective tripping is not
ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function, such faults are too short to initiate switching off
the faulted cable. The short-circuit protection can clear such ground faults selectively only if the ground faults
have become permanent.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of damaging the equipment thermally. This is why
SIPROTEC 5 devices feature a protection function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and
accumulates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the
thermal rating has been reached. If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the
ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool
down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function is used to protect against intermittent
ground faults which occur, for example, in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function can be used in protection function
groups with current measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously. The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the
following figure.
[DwIntGFP, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[LoIntnon, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-106 Logic of the Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Measured Value 3I0

The intermittent ground-fault current 3I0 can either be measured via the standard ground-current input IN or
via the sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3-phase currents. The
current value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table 6-8 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types
Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting

the Measuring Point Range
I-3ph (Secondary)10
3-phase Calculated 3I011 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN12 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured IN and calculated 3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
Maximum 3I0 of the Fault

The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault. The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. With the coming operate signal, this value is logged via the information 3I0
max..
Pickup and Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

When 3I0 exceeds the threshold value, the pickup signals Pickup and Limited pickup (log) are issued.
The stage generates the Stabilized pickup signal by extending the Pickup for a defined time (param-
eter Pickup extension time).
The stage counts the Pickup signals. If the counted number reaches the configured No. pickups till
interm.GF, the Intermittent gnd.flt. signal is issued. The signal Limited pickup (log) is not
issued anymore after the issue of the Intermittent gnd.flt. signal.
[DwIntFaD, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-107 Fault Detection of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
10 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.
11 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
12 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Text. Defined time for extending the Pickup signal
Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of Pickup signals during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.
Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal stress,
the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value reaches
the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage issues the
signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.
Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs, the
Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike the
integrator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires, that is,
no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. Timer T-
reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermit-
tent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new
fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
• The Intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.

Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
• Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
Fault Log and Fault Recording

You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault
recording. If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and
fault recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.
Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals

Intermittent ground faults may cause other functions, based on overcurrent measurement, to pick up, which
may result in a burst of signals. In order to avoid an overflow of the fault log, a special mechanism is applied to

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
the signals of these functions after detection of an intermittent ground fault (signal Intermittent
gnd.flt.).
The special mechanism is applied for the following listed functions and other functions are not influenced:
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground
• Overcurrent protection, 1-phase
• Negative-sequence protection with definite-time characteristic curve
• Directional negative-sequence protection with definite-time delay
• Directional overcurrent-protection stage with cos phi or sin phi measurement
• Directional overcurrent-protection stage with 3I0-phi (V,I) measurement
• Sensitive ground-current protection with 3I0

If a function picks up, normally its output signals are sent directly to the information targets, for example, the
pickup signal is written to the fault log. To avoid overflow of logs due to intermittent ground faults, a special
log buffer mechanism is used. If one of the preceding functions or stages picks up after an intermittent ground
fault has been detected (signal Intermittent gnd.flt. has been issued), its output signals are processed
as shown in the following 2 tables.
Table 6-9 Processing of the Signal Status Changes
Processing of Signal Status Changes Description

Special buffering mechanism The status changes of signals are written to a special
buffer. This buffer can store a maximum of 2 status
changes (the most recent ones) for each signal.
With the pickup signal as example, if one of the
preceding protection functions or stages picks up
during an active Intermittent gnd.flt. signal,
the pickup signal is not written in the fault log
anymore unless one of the preceding functions oper-
ates. After the operation, the buffered signals are
written to the information target with the original
time stamp. This measure ensures that a pickup
signal, although delayed, is always signaled in associ-
ation with each operate command.
Discard The signal status changes are discarded.
Pass through The signal is forwarded to the information target
without restriction.
Special buffering does not apply for specific informa-
tion targets as protection measure, for example,
reverse interlocking, need these signals for proper
operation.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Table 6-10 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes
Information Target Processing of Signal Status Changes

Processing of Signal Status Operational log Special buffering mechanism
Changes Fault log
Ground-fault log
User-defined log
Communication interface IEC 61850-8-1 Client/Server Special buffering mechanism
IEC 60870-5-103/104
DNP V3.0
Protection interface PDI Pass through
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE Pass through
CFC Pass through
LEDs Pass through
Binary output Pass through
Fault recorder Pass through
Automatic reclosing function Discard
Circuit-breaker failure protection Discard
Group indications Discard
No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the protection function
only operates after repeated detection of a fault or after the integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times. Besides this, its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons, the
intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the automatic reclosing function.
Rooting of Pickup Signals

The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to LED and relay. The signal Limited pickup (log) is only
reported to the fault log and communication interface before the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued.
This scheme prevents a burst of messages.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.

With the Threshold parameter, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.
Parameter: No. pickups till interm.GF
• Default setting (_:11341:101) No. pickups till interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No. pickups till interm.GF, you set the number of counted Pickup signals after
which the ground fault is considered as intermittent.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Pickup extension time
• Default setting (_:11341:102) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s

You can get a stabilized pickup signal with the Pickup extension time parameter. This stabilization is
especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent protections.
Parameter: Sum of extended PU times
• Default setting (_:11341:103) Sum of extended PU times = 20 s

With the Sum of extended PU times parameter, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the
integration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the pickup state is present.
This Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 4 selectivity criteria (pickup threshold, pickup
extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of the relays on adjacent feeders.
It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection. The protection in the radial system which is
closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, has the shortest summation time Sum of extended PU
times.
Parameter: Reset time
• Default setting (_:11341:104) Reset time = 300 s

With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.
Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked
• Default setting (_:11341:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
EXAMPLE
[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-108 Example of Selectivity Criteria of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.12.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:11341:3 Stage 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:11341:101 Stage 1:No. pickups till 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:11341:102 Stage 1:Pickup extension 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:11341:103 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 100.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:11341:104 Stage 1:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:11341:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:11341:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:11341:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:11341:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:11341:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:11341:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:11341:307 Stage 1:No. of pickups MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.13 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection:
• Detects the intermittent ground faults in grounded, compensated, or isolated cable systems selectively
• Can be operated in 2 different modes:

– Operate only by counting directional ground-current pulses
– Operate by integration of the fault current in combination with a directional criterion by counting
directional ground-current pulses
The intermittent ground faults in cable systems are frequently caused by weak insulation or water ingress in
cable joints. The ground faults are characterized by the following properties:
• Intermittent ground faults show very short high ground-current pulses (up to several hundred amperes)
with a duration of less than 1 ms.
• Intermittent ground faults are self-extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several
periods, depending on the power-system conditions and the fault type.
• Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods (several seconds to minutes) and develop to
static ground faults.
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function groups
with current and voltage measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and
a maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously.
[DwStrDirIGFP_20140618, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Overview
[LoOverview, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-110 Logic of the Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure

• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic for Direction Determination and Pulse Counting
[LoIntdir1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-111 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination and Pulse Counting
(1) The input signal 3 is from Figure 6-112.
Measurement Values for Direction Determination

The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection determines the direction of the ground-
current pulse by comparing the maximum 3I0 and the VN changing trend of the ground-current pulse.
The zero-sequence voltage v0(t) can either be measured via the voltage input VN or can be calculated from
the sum of 3 phase-to-ground voltages. The measured value depends on the parameter Connection type of
the measuring point V-3ph.
The intermittent ground-fault current 3i0(t) can either be measured via the ground-current input IN or via the
sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3 phase currents. The current
value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.
Table 6-11 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types
Connection Type of Current Threshold 3I0/IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting

the Measuring Point Range
I-3ph (Secondary)13
3-phase Calculated 3I014 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN15 4 x Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured IN and calculated 3 x Protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Direction Determination and Pulse Counting

When the RMS value of 3I0 exceeds the set threshold value (signal no. 3 in Figure 6-111), the direction deter-
mination process is started and is continuously carried out until the function resets. At first, the current pulse
(current peak) detection takes place. If a current pulse is detected, the direction determination for this pulse is
carried out.
The direction is determined by the maximum 3I0 and the VN changing trend of the ground-current pulse. The
plus or minus sign of the maximum 3I0 is compared to the plus or minus sign of the VN changing trend,
resulting in the directional decision forward or reverse. If the VN changing trend is smaller than 0.03 Vrated
or if the maximum 3I0 is smaller than 0.1 Irated, the direction is undefined.
During the ongoing intermittent ground fault, the directional results for all current pulses are counted.
Directional Mode and Directional Pulse Counter Criterion

The parameter Directional mode defines whether the function operates in forward or in reverse direc-
tion. The pulses in the specified direction are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the threshold value set in
the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the signal Pulse no. reached is issued. Depending on
the operating mode (Counter or Integrator and counter) of the function, the signal can immediately
cause the operate of the function (Counter mode) or it is processed as directional release criteria (Inte-
grator and counter operating mode). Refer to the further description in the following sections.
The directional pulse counter is reset when a different direction than the set Directional mode is detected.
An undefined direction result does not reset the counter.
Operating Mode
2 different functional operating modes are available: Counter and Integrator and counter. You can
select the different operating modes using the parameter Operating mode.
• Operating mode Counter:

Many ground-current pulses of intermittent ground faults can result in a damage of the protected object.
In this mode, the criterion for operate is only the number of directional current pulses. This is similar to
the SIPROTEC 4 implementation.
• Operating mode Integrator and counter:

An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected object. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-current pulses are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal
stress, the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value
reaches the threshold value, one criterion for the operate is fulfilled. The 2nd criterion for the operate is
the ground-fault direction. The ground-fault direction is determined by counting the directional ground-
current pulses.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Counter Mode
Figure 6-112 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter
(1) The internal signal 4 is from Figure 6-111.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Integrator and Counter Mode
Figure 6-113 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Integrator and Counter
(1) The internal signal 4 and 5 are from Figure 6-111.
Measurement Value for Pickup and Integration

The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonic
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
Pickup, Limited Pickup, and Stabilized Pickup

Whenever 3I0 exceeds Threshold, the stage issues the signal Pickup. The signal is intended to be applied
for LED and relay output.
Stabilized pickup is formed by prolonging the pickup indication by a settable time Pickup extension
time. This stabilization is especially important for the coordination with the existing static or electromechan-
ical overcurrent protection.
The Limited pickup (log) signal is intend to be applied for logging and communication interface. The
Limited pickup (log) signal will be entered in the fault log and reported via the system interface unless
the Intermittent gnd.flt. indication is given. This behavior prevents a burst of indications.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

The stage counts the 3I0 pulses. If the sum of forward pulse counts, reverse counts, and directional undefined
counts is equal to or greater than No.of pulses for interm.GF, the signal Intermittent gnd.flt.
is issued.
If the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued, the pickup indications of some protection functions will be
restraint to avoid an indication burst during an intermittent ground fault.
Operate
The conditions for issuing the signal Operate depend on the operating mode.
Operating Mode Conditions for Issuing the Operate Signal
Counter • The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
Integrator and counter • The 3I0 current integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times, which is signaled via the Sum limit
reached indication.
• The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
When an opposite current pulse against the setting Directional mode is detected, the Integrator T-sum
and the Counter are reset.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, no operate is neces-
sary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer
T-reset with the setting Reset time and the Integrator T-sum are launched simultaneously. Unlike the inte-
grator, each new ground-current pulse restarts the reset time with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset
expires, that is, no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are
reset. The Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be
processed yet as intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs
later is considered as a new ground-fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset:
• The intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
• The general operate indication is going.

Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state:
• The Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
Maximum Value 3I0 of the Ground Fault

The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault.The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. If the function resets or operates, this value is logged via the signal 3I0 max..

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Fault Log and Fault Recording

You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault
recording. If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and
fault recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.
Start and Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the func-
tion group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Indications

In this case, the function uses the same mechanism as the Non-directional intermittent ground-fault
protection. For more information, refer to chapter Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals,
Page 495.
No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults. For this reason, the Direc-
tional intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the Automatic reclosing func-
tion.
Routing of Pickup Signals

The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to an LED and a relay. The signal Limited pickup (log) is
only reported to the fault log and communication interface until the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is
issued. This scheme prevents a burst of indications.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of indications, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and to the fault log.

With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.

With the parameter Directional mode, you define if the function operates in forward or in reverse
direction.
Parameter: Pickup mode
• Default setting (_:16291:102) Pickup mode = with 3I0>

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the parameter Pickup mode, you define under which conditions pickup is detected and fault logging
and recording start:
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with 3I0>, the signal Pickup is released without consid-
ering the ground fault direction. The signal Pickup is issued once the IN/3I0 exceeds the threshold
value.
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with direction, the signal Pickup is issued when at
least one pulse direction is the same as the direction specified by the set value of parameter Direc-
tional mode.
• Default setting (_:16291:103) Operating mode = Counter

With the parameter Operating mode, you define if the function operates in Counter or in Integrator
and counter mode.
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes
Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate criterion. This
is a simple method which is similar to the implementation in the 7SJ
SIPROTEC 4 devices. Siemens recommends using this method if no time
grading or only simple time grading between protection devices (time
grading of only 2 or 3 devices) is required.
Time grading is then carried out by increasing the parameter value No.
of pulses for operate towards the infeed.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate criteria while
the counter criterion is only used for the direction determination. The inte-
grator works in the same way as for the non-directional intermittent
ground fault function. This allows the same time-grading principles as for
the non-directional intermittent ground fault function. Refer to this func-
tion for more description.
Parameter: No.of pulses for interm.GF
• Default setting (_:16291:104) No.of pulses for interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No.of pulses for interm.GF, you set the total number of pulse counts (forward,
reverse and non-dir. pulses) at which the ground fault is considered to be intermittent. Siemens
recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Pickup extension time
• Default setting (_:16291:105) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s

With the parameter Pickup extension time, you get a prolonged and thus stabilized pickup signal. This
stabilization is especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent
protections.
Parameter: No. of pulses for operate
• Default setting (_:16291:108) No. of pulses for operate = 5

The pulses in the specified direction from Directional mode are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the
set value of the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the directional counter criterion is fulfilled.
The setting of parameter No. of pulses for operate depends on the Operating mode.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes

Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate
criterion. Thus do not set the value for parameter No. of
pulses for operate too small. Consider that a permanent
intermittent ground fault will cause many current pulses. If no
time-grading considerations are required, Siemens recommends
using a value in the range of 10 to 20.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate
criteria while the counter criterion is only used for the direction
determination. The value for parameter No. of pulses for
operate to fulfill the directional criterion can be set to a rather
small value in the range of 3 to 5.
Parameter: Sum of extended PU times
• Default setting (_:16291:106) Sum of extended PU times = 20.00 s

This parameter is only relevant in the operating mode Integrator and counter.
With the parameter Sum of extended PU times, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the
integration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the Pulse no. reached signal
and the pickup state is present.
The parameter Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 5 selectivity criteria (ground-fault direc-
tion, pickup threshold, pickup extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of
the relays on subordinate devices. It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection.
The Sum of extended PU times has the shortest summation time in the radial system for the device that
is closest to the intermittent ground fault and that picks up.
• Default setting (_:16291:107) Reset time = 300 s

With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.

With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
6.13.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:16291:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:16291:101 Stage 1:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:16291:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode • with 3I0> with 3I0>
• with direction
_:16291:103 Stage 1:Operating mode • Counter Counter
• Integrator and counter
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:16291:105 Stage 1:Pickup extension 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
time
_:16291:104 Stage 1:No.of pulses for 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:16291:106 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 100.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:16291:107 Stage 1:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
_:16291:108 Stage 1:No. of pulses for 2 to 100 5
operate

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:16291:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:16291:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:16291:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:16291:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:16291:308 Stage 1:Pulse no. reached SPS O
_:16291:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:16291:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:16291:310 Stage 1:Forward pulses MV O
_:16291:311 Stage 1:Reverse pulses MV O
_:16291:312 Stage 1:Non-dir. pulses MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
2 functions are available for ground-fault detection: a directional one and a non-directional one.
The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns) serves:
• For directional detection of permanent ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For directional detection of fast extinguishing transient ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems
• For determination of the faulty phase
• For detection of high-impedance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-impedance (semi-solidly)

grounded systems
The Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 51Ns) serves:
• For ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
• For detection of high-impedance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-impedance (semi-solidly)

grounded systems
Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups that
make current and voltage zero-sequence systems (3I0 and V0) available. The function comes factory-set with
a non-directional V0> stage with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage, a directional 3I0> stage with cos
φ or sin φ measurement, and a directional transient ground-fault stage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 2 non-directional V0> stages with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• 4 directional 3I0> stages with cos φ or sin φ measurement
• 2 directional transient ground-fault stages
• 4 directional 3I0> stages with φ(V0, 3I0) measurement
• 4 directional Y0> stages with G0 or B0 measurement (admittance method)
• 4 directional stages with phasor measurement of a harmonic
• 4 non-directional 3I0> stages
• 2 non-directional Y0> stages
• 2 non-directional pulse-pattern detection stages

The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[DwStrGFP-250113-01, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-114 Structure/Embedding of the Directional Function in Protection Function Groups
Non-Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups
that only make the zero-sequence system (3I0) available. The function comes factory-set with a non-direc-
tional 3I0> stage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• 4 non-directional 3I0> stages
• 2 non-directional Y0> stages
• 4 non-directional 3I0> harmonic stages
• 2 non-directional pulse-pattern detection stages

The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate indication

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[DwSGFPu4-230113-01, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-115 Structure/Embedding of the Non-Directional Function in Protection Function Groups
Logic
[LoGFPger-280113-01, 7, en_US]
Figure 6-116 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Directional Function

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[logfpnon-261012-01.tif, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-117 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Non-Directional Function
Operational Measured Value φ(I,V)

The function block calculates the angle between IN and V0 and makes the angle available as function meas-
ured value Phi(I,V).
[DwPhINU0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-118 Sign Definition for the Measured Value
Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending on
the system conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously falling
zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0, then the fault is considered extin-
guished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.
Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. Using the characteristic shown in the following figure, the device approaches the angle
error of the core balance current transformer with sufficient precision.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwerdwdl-110512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-119 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer
Ground-Fault Indication, Stabilization at Intermittent Ground Fault

The indication Ground fault indicates the ground fault and manages the ground-fault log (see Ground-
Fault Log, Page 515). The corresponding information of the stages used is accessed for the generation of this
indication.
The indication Ground fault contains the direction information, independent of the parameterized
working direction of a stage. The indication is thus suited for transfer to a station.
To avoid a flood of indications in case of an intermittent ground fault, a maximum of 30 status changes of this
indication is logged per ground fault. An intermittent ground fault must be treated as a ground fault so that
the stabilization can take action. This is ensured with the parameter Dropout delay, by the dropout of the
indication Ground fault being delayed. If the next ignition of the ground fault takes place during the
dropout delay, the indication does not drop out and the log remains open.
NOTE
i The Ground fault indication in the general stage must be routed to the ground-fault log. If not, you can
meet an overflow of the ground-fault log when an intermittent ground fault occurs.
Ground-Fault Log
Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer, the ground-fault log. As long as the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked parameter is set to yes, all indications routed into the ground-fault log are written in
the ground-fault log.
The criterion for opening the ground-fault log is the raising of any indication which is routed to the ground-
fault log, for example, the indication Ground fault . The criterion for closing is the clearing of all routed
indications.
Related Topics
You can find general notes on the ground-fault login chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log.
Value Indications
If the following value indications can be calculated, they are written into the log (ground-fault log or fault log)
at the time of the 1st raising ground-fault indication and the 1st operate indication of any stage.
• 3I0 (value)
• 3I0 active component
• 3I0 reactive component

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• V0
• φ (IN, V0)
Group-Indication Blocking
[lo_SGFP block group ind., 1, en_US]
Figure 6-120 Logic Diagram of the Group-Indication Blocking of the Directional and Non-Directional Func-
tions
By setting the Block. group indications parameter to yes, the following indications are blocked:
• The group indications of the function and the corresponding group indications of the function group
• The trip command from the Sensitive ground-fault detection function to the FB Circuit breaker
Fault recording and logging are not affected by the setting.
Indication: Ground fault

To indicate the ground fault and its direction via the protocol, Siemens recommends using the indication
(_:2311:302) Ground fault. The indication contains the direction information, independent of the
parameterized working direction of a stage. And this indication is also stabilized against a flood of indications
in case of an intermittent ground fault.
Parameter: Decay time V0
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Decay time V0 = 0.10 s

With the Decay time V0 parameter, you specify the time slot for the detection of a fault extinction. If V0
continuously falls within this time, fault extinction is detected and the indication Flt. extinction det. is
issued.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Dropout delay = 1.00 s

To avoid chattering of the indication Ground fault during an intermittent ground fault and thus a frequent
opening and closing of the ground-fault log, the dropout of the indication Ground fault (and thus the
closing of the log) can be delayed by the Dropout delay.
Using the default setting ensures that no flood of indications arises in case of an intermittent ground fault for
the indication Ground fault. The intermittent ground fault is then treated as a ground fault, and the stabili-
zation of the indication Ground fault can thus take action.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Angle-Error Compensation of the Core Balance Current Transformer
• Default setting (_:2311:103) Core balance CT- current 1 = 0.050 A
• Default setting (_:2311:104) Core balance CT- current 2 = 1.000 A
• Default setting (_:2311:105) CT angle error at I1 = 0.0°
• Default setting (_:2311:106) CT angle error at I2 = 0.0°

The high reactive-power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. For the burden actually connected, the maximum angle error CT angle error at I1
and the corresponding secondary current Core balance CT- current 1 as well as a further operating
point CT angle error at I2/Core balance CT- current 2 are entered, from which point the angle
error no longer changes appreciably.
In the isolated or grounded system, angle compensation is not necessary.
Parameter: Block. group indications
• Default setting (_:2311:119) Block. group indications = no

The Block. group indications parameter supports in applying the Sensitive ground-fault detection
function as a supervision function. If you set this parameter to yes, the following indications are blocked:
• The group indications of the function and the corresponding group indications of the function group are
blocked.
Consequently, the group-indications of the function group are then related to short-circuit protection
functions and can be forwarded to a station controller in the meaning of short-circuit protection.
• The trip command from the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function to the FB
Circuit breaker is blocked.
Fault recording and logging are not affected by the setting.
6.14.3.3 Settings
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection

General
_:2311:101 General:Decay time V0 0.03 s to 0.20 s 0.10 s
_:2311:102 General:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
_:2311:103 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
CT- current 1 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:104 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
CT- current 2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:2311:105 General:CT angle error at 0.0 ° to 5.0 ° 0.0 °
I1
_:2311:106 General:CT angle error at 0.0 ° to 5.0 ° 0.0 °
I2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:2311:119 General:Block. group • no no
indications
• yes
Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection

General
_:2311:102 General:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
_:2311:119 General:Block. group • no no
indications
• yes
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection

(Type)
General
_:2311:302 General:Ground fault ACD O
_:2311:303 General:Flt. extinction det. SPS O
_:2311:309 General:Pos. measuring window SPS O
_:2311:301 General:Phi(I,V) MV O
_:2311:306 General:IN MV O
_:2311:307 General:V0 MV O
_:2311:304 General:IN active MV O
_:2311:305 General:IN reactive MV O
Non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection

(Type)
General
_:2311:302 General:Ground fault ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
Logic
[logfp3i0stufe-280314-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[logfp3i0f-280314-01, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-122 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement

The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage VN is
converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to
the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement

The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the setting of the Connection type parameter of the measuring point I-3ph as well as the
current terminal block used, the following different linearity and settings ranges result in addition to the
common application:
Connection Type of the Current Threshold 3I0/IN Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Measuring Point I-3ph Settings Range
(Secondary)16
3-phase Calculated 3I017 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN18 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep Measured IN and calculated 3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep Measured IN 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep 4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
With the use of the function within a 1-phase function group and therefore at a 1-phase measuring point
I-1ph, the following different linearity and settings ranges result:
Measuring Point Current Threshold Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
I-1ph Settings Range
(Secondary) 19
Measured Sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, especially
the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.
Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value and
the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value,
the stage recognizes the ground fault. The direction determination (see the next paragraph) is started when
the V0 threshold value is exceeded. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the
General function block). If the direction result equals the parameterized direction (parameter Directional
mode), the stage picks up.
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
A.
A.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
cos-φ direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0 (parameter
φ correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-
suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 ⋅ cos φ is decisive for the direction determination.
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-123 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Cos φ Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0reactive axis for this example. For the direction determina-
tion, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is
decisive (3I0 dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current 3l0dir.
(here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. If
the current 3I0 dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current 3I0 dir. exceeds
the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured in case
of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45°.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45°.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwphicor-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-124 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos φ Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin φ and the φ correction parameter to 0, the
symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis. Since the
portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3l0dir.),
here, the current 3l0reactive is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here = 3I0reac-
tive) exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward. If the
current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwsinphi-011112-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-125 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Sin φ Measurement
Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal

You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.
Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the Blk.
after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault extinc-
tion.
Blocking the Time Delay

also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is opened.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019



enabled.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is linked with

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
detection of an inrush current.
Siemens recommends disabling the blocking. The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage is a
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by an enabling procedure.
Parameter: Blk. after fault extinction
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection of
the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or backward direction.
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value
• Default setting (_:12601:109) Dir. measuring method = cos φ
• Default setting (_:12601:107) φ correction = 0.0°

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:12601:102) Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. = 0.030 A
• Default setting (_:12601:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only a portion of the current vertical to the set direction-
characteristic curve (3I0dir.) is decisive, refer to 6.14.4.1 Description. This portion of the current is compared
to the threshold value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. In contrast, the absolute value of the current 3I0
is compared with the 3I0> threshold value parameter.
System Type/ Description
Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = cos φ

• φ correction = 0.0°
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger capacitive or inductive reactive current is superimposed on the small watt-metric
residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the fault eval-
uation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary considerably in its
values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device should only
evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the
Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. parameter, the rule of thumb is: Set the pickup
value only to half of the expected measuring current as only the watt-metric residual
current can be put into use.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter can also be set to half of the expected
measuring current, whereby here the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = sin φ

In an isolated system, the capacitive ground-fault currents of the entire electrically
connected system flow through the measuring point in case of a ground fault. The
ground current of the faulty feeder is compensated in the measuring point. As the
pickup value of the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold
value parameters, select about half of this capacitive ground-fault current flowing via
the measuring point.
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is decisive
Grounded for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = cos φ

• φ correction = -45.0°
Set the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold value parame-
ters to a value below the minimum ground-fault current to be expected.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: α1 reduction dir. area, α2 reduction dir. area
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:105) α1 reduction dir. area = 2°
• Recommended setting value (_:12601:106) α2 reduction dir. area = 2°

With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°.
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.
Parameter: V0> threshold value
• Default setting (_:12601:103) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V

The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage.
Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 that must
still be detected.
Parameter: Dir. determination delay
• Default setting (_:12601:104) Dir. determination delay = 0.00 s

The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.
• Default setting (_:12601:6) Operate delay = 2.0 s

The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to
issue the operate indication. The operate indication is issued when this time expires.
6.14.4.3 Settings

3I0> cos/sinφ1
_:12601:1 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12601:2 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate • no no
& flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:12601:10 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:12601:27 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:12601:110 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction
• yes
_:12601:108 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode
• reverse
_:12601:109 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Dir. • cos φ cos φ
measuring method
• sin φ
_:12601:107 3I0> cos/sinφ1:φ correc- -45 ° to 45 ° 0°
tion

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:12601:102 3I0> cos/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
sinφ1:Min.polar.3I0> for 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
dir.det.
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A
_:12601:105 3I0> cos/sinφ1:α1 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:12601:106 3I0> cos/sinφ1:α2 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:12601:101 3I0> cos/sinφ1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
_:12601:103 3I0> cos/sinφ1:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:12601:104 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Dir. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
determination delay
_:12601:6 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> cos/sinφ1
_:12601:81 3I0> cos/sinφ1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12601:501 3I0> cos/sinφ1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:12601:54 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Inactive SPS O
_:12601:52 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Behavior ENS O
_:12601:53 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Health ENS O
_:12601:60 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:12601:302 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Ground fault ACD O
_:12601:55 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Pickup ACD O
_:12601:56 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12601:57 3I0> cos/sinφ1:Operate ACT O
6.14.5 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Overview
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems often extinguish a short time after the igni-
tion, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In order
to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special method of measurement
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are not
suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs in
healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by an energy-integrating method to determine the

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
ground-fault direction. This method ensures high sensitivity and positive stability against parasitic signals in
the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process in healthy phases, those errors
will be detected as well.
This stage is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating zero-
sequence currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.
Stage-Control Logic
[lostuwis-240113-01.tif, 2, en_US]


• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
blocks the stage or not.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Transient Ground-Fault Functionality
[lowisfut-240113-01.tif, 8, en_US]
Figure 6-127 Logic Diagram of the Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Measured Values, Method of Measurement

The zero-sequence voltage and zero-sequence current are measured directly or calculated from the phase vari-
ables. When measuring directly, the following is detected:
• Zero-sequence voltage on the broken-delta winding
• Zero-sequence current via Holmgreen connection or via core balance current transformer
The voltage measured on the broken-delta winding will be converted to the zero-sequence voltage V0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) that are sampled at a high frequency (8 kHz)
serve to determine the point in time of the ground fault occurrence T0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) and the ground current 3i0(t), which are sampled
at a high frequency (8 kHz), are the basis for direction determination.
The fundamental-component values of the zero-sequence voltage V0 serve to release the directional result
and the pickup as well as a criterion for the stabilization against switching operations.
The positive-sequence system (if it exists as a measured value) serves as an additional criterion for the stabili-
zation against switching operations.
The fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 will be used for the pickup and the
optional trip logic.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Operational, meaning circulating zero-sequence currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems. This
type of zero-sequence current is also present in case of a failure and can falsify the directional result. There-
fore, an operational zero-sequence current is eliminated.
Determining the Time of the Ground-Fault Ignition

The algorithm uses the evaluation of the instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage to verify continu-
ously whether a ground fault occurred. This takes place regardless of whether the set threshold value for V0 is
exceeded. If a ground fault occurs, the measuring window for determining the direction is positioned and the
direction determination is performed. The position of the measuring window is logged via the indication Pos.
measuring window (in FB General). The precise identification of the time T0 at which the ground fault
occurs is decisive for the correct direction determination.
Determination of Direction, Method of Measurement

The active energy of the zero-sequence system is calculated for the direction determination. Once the ground-
fault occurrence has been detected, the active energy will be calculated across approximately 1 cycle
frequency. If the active energy of the zero-sequence system is negative, a forward fault is present; otherwise it
is a backward fault.
Directional Ground-Fault Signal, Pickup

Determining the time of the ground-fault ignition and the direction is always done with maximum sensitivity.
With the parameters V0> threshold value and 3I0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for
the indication of the direction and the pickup of the stage.
If both of the following conditions are met, the direction result will be reported:
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the V0> threshold
value within 100 ms after detecting the ground-fault ignition.
• The true RMS value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold value.
In this way, high-impedance ground faults are also reported in which the zero-sequence system values rise
only slowly, and, for this reason, the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably earlier than the
exceedance of the parameterized threshold value.
The direction result will be reported to the function via the (_:2311:302) Ground fault of the function
block General information. This indication is reported irrespective of the parameterized direction of the func-
tion.
If the determined direction corresponds with the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), a
pickup occurs.
Reset of the Algorithm

To allow a new directional measurement, the algorithm needs to be reset. The normal reset takes place when
all the following conditions are met:
• The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage V0 drops below the V0 reset threshold. This
reset threshold is a small device-internal V0 threshold. It is also depending on an operational V0 and is
thus a dynamic threshold. The threshold value is 2.0 V secondary without dynamic influence.
• The duration of 120 ms after T0 has expired.
Stabilization against Switching Operations

Switching operations in the system to be protected can cause transient signals in the zero-sequence system.
The stage is stabilized against possible overfunction due to switching operations.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following mechanisms are applied:
• For reporting the direction result, the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage must
exceed the V0> threshold value in a time slot of 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition. This effec-
tively suppresses wrong indications as a result of switching operations.
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 is not influenced by switching oper-
ations and is thus a good criterion for distinguishing the ground fault from a switching procedure. The
condition that the fundamental-component value must exceed the V0> threshold value for
reporting the direction result effectively suppresses the influence of switching operations.
For rare cases in which high zero-sequence voltages occur over longer time ranges after switching off the
feeder or line, a criterion based on the positive-sequence current is also effective. This criterion compares
the positive-sequence current before and after the transient event and thus detects a disconnection. In
case of disconnection, the direction result is not reported.
Through stabilization mechanisms, the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition.
Thus a pickup occurs with a 100-ms delay.
If the stage is used in a 1-phase function group, the additional criterion via the positive-sequence current
is not effective.
• The function detects transient ground faults using the zero-sequence voltage. In systems with opera-
tional zero-sequence voltages, if the measuring voltage is switched on, the function can internally be
started. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage does not exceed the threshold
of the Maximum operational V0 parameter in a time slot of 100 ms after the function start, the func-
tion is reset internally.
Trip Logic
[loauswis-240113-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-128 Trip Logic Diagram

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains disabled. However, this stage can also be used to disable a permanent
ground fault. For this, you enable the optional trip logic with the Operate functionality parameter. If
the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the
tripping delay (Operate delay parameter) starts with the pickup. If the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked is set to no, the stage operates when the tripping delay expires.
An intermittent ground fault has the characteristics of periodical extinction and reignition within one half
period up to several periods. You can find more information in chapter 6.13.1 Overview of Functions. Due to
the tripping delay and the too short fault durations (contact to ground), reliable tripping is not possible. To
ensure reliable tripping under such conditions, the parameter Dropout delay can be used. When the fault
extinguishes, the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 drop below the
threshold values. A dropout can be delayed for a time specified with the Dropout delay parameter. The
tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires within the dropout delay, the stage operates. You can
set the Dropout delay according to the application. The default setting is 0 s. The setting of the dropout
delay does not affect the direction determination. When the fault reignites, a new direction determination
takes place if the function has dropped out before. If the determined direction is opposite to the parameter-
ized direction or is unknown, the tripping delay is reset immediately.
Blocking the Tripping Delay with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value cycle of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction of the
ground fault can be detected faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the
pickup value. The fast detection of the fault extinction (see function block General information) blocks the
tripping delay after the dropout delay expires. With the parameter Blk. after fault extinction, this
accelerated blocking mechanism can be enabled or disabled.
Parameter: Operate functionality
• Default setting (_:13021:108) Operate functionality = no

If the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction, this optional trip logic is not required
and remains disabled. If the transient ground-fault stage is used to disable permanent faults as well, this
optional trip logic is enabled. Pickup of the stage will initiate the tripping delay.



enabled.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Recommended setting value (_:13021:107) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the tripping delay is reset after the detec-
tion of the fault extinction. Therefore, if the tripping delay is set for a short time, the possibility of an overfunc-
tion is avoided. The reason for an overfunction is a slower attenuation in the zero-sequence system following
the fault extinction. Siemens recommends keeping this default setting if the stage is used for tripping.
To protect against intermittent ground faults, the stage uses the parameter Dropout delay to delay a
dropout due to fault extinction. If you are using the stage for protection against intermittent ground faults,
disable the blocking.

• Default setting (_:13021:103) V0> threshold value = 15.000 V

With the parameter V0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction and
the pickup of the stage.
Note that the sensitivity of the direction determination itself is not influenced. The direction determination
always works with maximum sensitivity.
If high-resistive ground faults must also be reported, very sensitive settings are possible, for example, V0>
threshold value = 5 V secondary.
Parameter: Maximum operational V0
• Recommended setting value (_:13021:105) Maximum operational V0 = 3.000 V

With the parameter Maximum operational V0, you define the maximum operational zero-sequence
voltage V0. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 does not exceed the param-
eter Maximum operational V0 in a time slot of 100 ms after the function has started, the stage is reset.
The setting is made with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0 according to its definition.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Network Structure Description

Radial network In radial networks, operational zero-sequence voltages are rather small.
Siemens recommends using the default value of 3.000 V.
Ring network, meshed network Greater operational zero-sequence voltages can occur in ring or meshed
networks.
The secondary operational zero-sequence voltages can be determined by
reading the residual voltage VN sec or the zero-sequence voltage V0 sec under
the symmetrical components from the device or via DIGSI.
In case you read the secondary residual voltage VN sec, you convert it to V0 sec
with the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter. You can find more
information in chapter 6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring
Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).
If V0 sec is greater than 2.5 V, the value of Maximum operational V0
shall be increased to V0 sec ⋅ 1.2.
Example:
VN sec = 5.000 V
Matching ratio Vph / VN = √3
V0 sec = 5.000 V ⋅ √3 / 3 = 2.887 V
Maximum operational V0 = 2.887 V ⋅ 1.2 = 3.464 V
In most cases, the operational zero-sequence voltages are smaller than
2.500 V. Siemens recommends using the default value of 3.000 V.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold value
• Default setting (_:13021:109) 3I0> threshold value = 0.000 A

With the parameter 3I0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction
and the pickup of the stage.
In ring or meshed systems, you can use this parameter to reduce the number of ground-fault reporting
devices. The parameter needs to be set according to the user experience on the specific network. For radial
systems, normally you can keep the default value of 0 A which sets this parameter to inactive.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold for operate
• Default setting (_:13021:104) 3I0> threshold for operate = 0.030 A

The setting is significant only for optional trip logic for switching off permanent ground faults. Select the
setting such that the static ground-fault current exceeds the threshold value. You can disable this criterion by
setting the value to 0 A.
• Default setting (_:13021:7) Dropout delay = 0.00 s

The parameter Dropout delay allows you to use the function also as a protection against intermittent
ground faults. With the parameter Dropout delay, the dropout of the pickup state after fault extinction is
delayed or held until the next ignition. Thus, the operate delay can go on and trip the fault.
Set the time to a value within which the new ignition can still be assigned to the previous fault. Typical values
are in a range between several hundred milliseconds and a few seconds.

The setting of the Operate delay depends on the specific application. Ensure that the pickup is delayed by
100 ms regarding the time of the ground-fault ignition.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14.5.3 Settings

Trans.Gnd.flt1
_:13021:1 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13021:2 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13021:10 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:13021:107 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction
• yes
_:13021:108 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate • no no
functionality
• yes
_:13021:106 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Direc- • forward forward
tional mode
• reverse
_:13021:103 Trans.Gnd.flt1:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 15.000 V
threshold value
_:13021:105 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Maximum 0.300 V to 200.000 V 3.000 V
operational V0
_:13021:109 Trans.Gnd.flt1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.000 A
_:13021:104 Trans.Gnd.flt1:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
threshold for operate 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:13021:6 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:13021:7 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay

(Type)
Trans.Gnd.flt1
_:13021:81 Trans.Gnd.flt1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13021:54 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Inactive SPS O
_:13021:52 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Behavior ENS O
_:13021:53 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Health ENS O
_:13021:302 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Ground fault ACD O
_:13021:55 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:13021:56 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13021:57 Trans.Gnd.flt1:Operate ACT O
6.14.6 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement
Logic
[logfppvi-291112-02.vsd, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_dir sensGFP 3I0 phi VI, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-130 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement

The device can measure the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted
to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device
as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA,
VB, and VC using the defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

nent numerically.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point and on the current terminal blocks used, different
linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in chapter Measured Value 3I0, Method of
Measurement , Page 520.

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 vector exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value
and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 vector exceeds the threshold value Min. V0> for
dir. determ., the stage detects the ground fault. The direction determination (see in the following para-
graph) is started when the zero-sequence voltage exceeds the threshold. The result from the direction deter-
mination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 vector has also exceeded its threshold
value. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block).
As long as the direction result equals the parameterization direction (parameter Directional mode), the
stage picks up.
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage V0, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can be
rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the vector
of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of direc-
tion determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. The value ±
Δφ is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. The remaining area besides the forward area is the
reverse area. Between the forward and reverse area, a hysteresis is defined, refer to Figure 6-131.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwdirrot-011112-02.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-131 Directional Characteristic in Forward Mode


will be reset.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
blocks the stage or not.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

• Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


enabled.
• The binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to

• Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by an enabling procedure.
• Default setting (_:106) Directional mode = forward

the stage occurs in forward or reverse direction.
When the parameter Directional mode is set as non-directional, the direction determination is not
considered. The pickup condition depends only on the absolute values 3I0 and V0 and the respective thresh-
olds. The forward direction is the direction towards the motor.
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.,Forward section +/-
• Default setting (_:104) Rotation angle of ref. volt. = -45°
• Default setting (_:103) Forward section +/- = 88°

With the Rotation angle of ref. volt. and Forward section +/- parameters, you set the direc-
tion characteristic, that is, the areas of forward and reverse. With this, you set the direction characteristic
according to the system conditions and the neutral-point treatment.
Typical settings for the Rotation angle of ref. volt.parameter are:
• Arc-suppression-coil-ground system: 0°
• Isolated system: +45°
• Grounded system: -45°

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. A reduction of the forward
area by a few degrees is practical, for example, in an arc-suppression-coil-ground system with long cable
feeders, that generate high capacitive fault currents.
Parameter: Min. V0> for dir. determ.
• Default setting (_:102) Min. V0> for dir. determ. = 2.000 V

With the Min. V0> for dir. determ. parameter, you determine the minimum voltage V0 necessary for
the release of the direction determination that must be attained within the time delay Dir. determina-
tion delay.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold value
• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A

The 3I0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the ground-current sensitivity of the stage. Set
the threshold value lower than the minimum absolute value of the ground-fault current 3I0 that must still be
detected.
• Default setting (_:105) Dir. determination delay = 0.10 s

The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

6.14.6.3 Settings

3I0> φ(VI) #
_:1 3I0> φ(VI) #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:27 3I0> φ(VI) #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:106 3I0> φ(VI) #:Directional • non-directional forward
mode
• forward
• reverse
_:104 3I0> φ(VI) #:Rotation -180 ° to 180 ° -45 °
angle of ref. volt.
_:103 3I0> φ(VI) #:Forward 0 ° to 180 ° 88 °
section +/-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:102 3I0> φ(VI) #:Min. V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 2.000 V
for dir. determ.
_:101 3I0> φ(VI) #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:105 3I0> φ(VI) #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.50 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> φ(VI) #
_:81 3I0> φ(VI) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 3I0> φ(VI) #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> φ(VI) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> φ(VI) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> φ(VI) #:Health ENS O
_:301 3I0> φ(VI) #:Fault not in trip area SPS O
_:60 3I0> φ(VI) #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:303 3I0> φ(VI) #:Ground fault ACD O
_:55 3I0> φ(VI) #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> φ(VI) #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14.7 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement
Logic
[lo_stage_control_Y0G0B0, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[LoY0G0B0-300713-01, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-133 Logic Diagram of the Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement

voltages VA, VB, and VC using the definition equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans-
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very
large linearity and settings range.
nent numerically. The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to
harmonics, especially the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 520.
Y0, G0, B0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. You can
choose to use G0 or B0 to determine the direction.

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> release thresh.
value and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold
value, the stage recognizes the ground fault. The calculation of G0 or B0 is started with exceeding the
threshold values and then, the direction determination (see the following) is performed. The direction result is
indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block). If the direction result equals the para-
meterized direction (parameter Directional mode), the stage picks up.
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter φ
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[DwY0Dire-171012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-134 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the G0 Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0 axis.
The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for this
example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set direc-
tion-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the active
component G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and
compared with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the
positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value,
the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-135. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).
[DwY0meas-171012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-135 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the φ correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance B0dir.
(B0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is forward. If
the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between,
the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[DwSiCoY0-011112-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-136 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the B0 Measurement


will be reset.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the Blk.
after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault extinc-
tion.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


enabled.

• Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains untouched by an enabling procedure.
• Recommended setting value (_:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection of
the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
• Default setting (_:108) Directional mode = forward

Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value
• Default setting (_:109) Dir. measuring method = G0
• Default setting (_:107) φ correction = 0.0°
• Default setting (_:102) Polarized G0/B0 threshold = 2.00 mS
• Default setting (_:101) 3I0> release thresh. value = 0.002 A

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only the component of the admittance perpendicular to
the set direction-characteristic curve is decisive, see chapter 6.14.7.1 Description. This admittance component
is compared to the threshold value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. In contrast, the absolute value of the
current 3I0 is compared with the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt-metric residual current 3I0 · cos φ
of the arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt-metric residual current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0

The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger reactive current of capacitive or inductive character is superimposed on the small
watt-metric residual current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and
the fault evaluation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary consider-
ably in its values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device
should only evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle measure-
ment of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Polarized
G0/B0 threshold parameter, the following formula applies:
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt-metric residual current) of
the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0 must
also be smaller than:
where:
ks: Safety margin ≥ 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here, the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = B0

In isolated systems, a ground fault allows the capacitive ground-fault currents of the
entire electrically connected system, except for the ground current in the faulty cable
itself, to flow through the measuring point as the latter flows directly away from the

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

ment
fault location (that is, not via the measuring point). The following formula can be used
to determine the pickup value of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter.
where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case

In healthy operation, B0 ≤ 0.
For the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter, select around half of this capac-
itive ground-fault current flowing via the measuring point.
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is decisive
Grounded for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
• Dir. measuring method = G0

• φ correction= -45.0°
For the setting of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter, the rule of thumb
is: Set the pickup value according to the following formula where only the active
ground-fault current can be put into use.
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected line
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.
Parameter: α1 reduction dir. area, α2 reduction dir. area
• Recommended setting value (_:105) α1 reduction dir. area = 2°
• Recommended setting value (_:106) α2 reduction dir. area = 2°

With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2°.
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to set
a somewhat larger angle α1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.
• Default setting (_:103) V0> threshold value = 30.000 V

The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:104) Dir. determination delay = 0.10 s

The start of the ground fault normally indicates a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed for this reason from the occurrence of the zero-
sequence voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The duration of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault charac-
teristics. If you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

6.14.7.3 Settings

Y0> G0/B0 #
_:1 Y0> G0/B0 #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:27 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:110 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. after • no yes
fault extinction
• yes
_:108 Y0> G0/B0 #:Directional • forward forward
mode
• reverse
_:109 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. meas- • G0 G0
uring method
• B0
_:107 Y0> G0/B0 #:φ correc- -45 ° to 45 ° 0°
tion
_:102 Y0> G0/B0 #:Polarized 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
G0/B0 threshold
_:105 Y0> G0/B0 #:α1 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:106 Y0> G0/B0 #:α2 reduc- 1 ° to 15 ° 2°
tion dir. area
_:101 Y0> G0/B0 #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
release thresh. value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:103 Y0> G0/B0 #:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:104 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
Y0> G0/B0 #
_:81 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> G0/B0 #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> G0/B0 #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> G0/B0 #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14.8 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Logic
[lo_gfps v0, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-137 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement

voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component (standard filter):

This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
• Measurement of the RMS value (true RMS):

This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value.
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window:
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
11.16.6 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

With the Detection of faulty phase parameter, you can enable or disable the determination of the
ground-fault phase. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the threshold value
V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and one phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty ph-to-gnd
volt., the last phase is determined to be faulty and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• From inside on pickup of the measuring-voltage failure detection function. The Blk. by meas.-
volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or
does not block it.
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or not.

The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
into account (for example at capacitor banks).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

fund. comp. long filter To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient
faults, select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length of the
filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Note that in this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly (see
11.16.6 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage).
• Recommended setting value (_:12391:107) Pickup delay = 0 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0 ms.
• Default setting (_:12391:3) Threshold = 30 V

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. Siemens recommends setting the value between
20 V and 40 V. A higher sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• Siemens recommends setting a more sensitive (smaller) value in grounded systems. This value must be
higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.

The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

enabled.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is
linked with the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
• Default setting (_:12391:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the stage responds to determine which phase
is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults, for example for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to determine which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:12391:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V

Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:12391:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V

Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground measurand.
The set value must be above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 70
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V.
Operation as Supervision Function

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, the generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14.8.3 Settings

V0> 1
_:12391:1 V0> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:12391:2 V0> 1:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:12391:10 V0> 1:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure
• yes
_:12391:109 V0> 1:Detection of faulty • no no
phase
• yes
_:12391:8 V0> 1:Method of meas- • fundamental comp. fundamental
urement comp.
• fund. comp. long filter
• RMS value
_:12391:3 V0> 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
_:12391:4 V0> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:12391:107 V0> 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:12391:6 V0> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 3.00 s
_:12391:101 V0> 1:V> healthy ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 70.000 V
gnd volt.
_:12391:104 V0> 1:V< faulty ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
gnd volt.

(Type)
V0> 1
_:12391:81 V0> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:12391:54 V0> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:12391:52 V0> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:12391:53 V0> 1:Health ENS O
_:12391:300 V0> 1:Faulty phase ACT O
_:12391:55 V0> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:12391:56 V0> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:12391:57 V0> 1:Operate ACT O
6.14.9 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional 3I0 stage also works on
demand.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[lo_sensitive ground-current protection 3I0, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-138 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional 3I0 Stage
Measured Value 3I0



C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019



• Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the tripping is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.
• Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

an overfunction.
added currents.

The Threshold parameter allows you to set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0.
• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

6.14.9.3 Settings

3I0> #
_:1 3I0> #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 3I0> #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:27 3I0> #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:8 3I0> #:Method of meas- • fundamental comp. fundamental
urement comp.
• RMS value
_:3 3I0> #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:102 3I0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 3I0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
3I0> #
_:81 3I0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 3I0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 3I0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 3I0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.14.10 Non-Directional Y0 Stage
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional Y0 stage also works on
demand.
Logic
[logfpsy0-240614-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-139 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional Y0 Stage

converted to a value with reference to the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available,

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage V0 from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and
VC using the defining equation.
The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.

nent numerically.
Y0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 through the
formula Y0 = 3I0/V0. This stage uses Y0 as a condition to recognize the ground fault.
Minimum 3I0 Threshold

To start the Y0 calculation, the IN/3I0 value must exceed a minimum 3I0 threshold. For protection-class
current transformers, the threshold value is 30 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 150 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A). For sensitive
current transformers, the threshold value is 1 mA (Irated, sec = 1 A) or 5 mA (Irated, sec = 5 A).

If the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value
and Y0 exceeds the threshold value Threshold Y0>, the stage recognizes the ground fault. If the threshold
values remain exceeded during the Pickup delay, the stage picks up.

Blocking of the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the
event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

will be reset.
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no


measuring-voltage failure is detected. A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if 1 of the following 2
conditions is met:

switched on.

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting).

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the operate is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.
• Default setting (_:101) V0> threshold value = 5.000 V

The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.
Parameter: Threshold Y0>
• Default setting (_:102) Threshold Y0> = 2.00 mS

With the parameter Threshold Y0>, you set the threshold value of the ground admittance Y0. If the ground
admittance for the setting value is unknown, you can assume the following relation:
[fo_SeGfY0-270614-01, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
ks Factor, takes into account the ohmic components of the current

(1.2 for overhead lines, 1.0 to 1.05 for cable systems)
Ic,line Secondary capacitive ground-fault current for the protected line
Vph-gnd Secondary phase-to-ground voltage in the healthy case
3I0min Secondary ground current in the healthy case (resulting from transformer error),
5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0> Secondary pickup threshold of the residual voltage
• Default setting (_:103) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Pickup delay, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

6.14.10.3 Settings

Y0> #
_:1 Y0> #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Y0> #:Operate & flt.rec. • no no
blocked
• yes
_:10 Y0> #:Blk. by meas.-volt. • no yes
failure
• yes
_:27 Y0> #:Blk. w. inrush curr. • no no
detect.
• yes
_:101 Y0> #:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 5.000 V
value
_:102 Y0> #:Threshold Y0> 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
_:103 Y0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 Y0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
Y0> #
_:81 Y0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> #:Pickup ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:56 Y0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.15 Undercurrent Protection
The Undercurrent protection function (ANSI 37):
• Detects the going current in a feeder after the opening of the infeed circuit breaker
• Detects the loss of loads
• Detects and protects pumps from running idle
The Undercurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory. A
maximum of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function. The protection stages are
structured identically.
[lostuundcu-150813, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[loundcur-200713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-141 Logic Diagram of the Undercurrent Protection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Measurement of the fundamental comp.:

This measurement method processes the sampled current values and numerically filters out the funda-
mental component.
• Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:

This measurement method determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
definition equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).
Blocking the Stage

When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out. Blocking the stage is possible externally or inter-
nally via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Activation and Blocking of the Stage Depending On the Circuit-Breaker Condition

With the parameter Activation, you define if the Undercurrent protection stage is always active or only
active if the circuit breaker is indicating closed.
If the parameter Activation is set to with CB closed and the local circuit breaker is not closed, the func-
tion Undercurrent protection is blocked and no pickup is generated.
The circuit-breaker position is detected as closed if one of the following conditions is met:
• The binary inputs are connected to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. The circuit-breaker switch
position is detected as closed via the related binary inputs of the Position indication. This is also true
under the condition that no phase current is flowing.
• The current-flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed. This is also true under the condition
that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open.
Parameter: Activation
• Default setting (_:13051:103) Activation = with CB closed

with CB closed The Undercurrent protection is active only when the circuit-breaker posi-
tion is detected as closed.
A precondition is, that the Position indication is routed to binary inputs to
obtain the CB position information via the CB auxiliary contacts. If this is not
the case, the function will always be inactive.
always active The Undercurrent protection stage is always active independent of the
position of the circuit breaker.


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

an overfunction.
added currents.
• Default setting (_:13051:102) Pickup mode = 3 out of 3

Use the Pickup mode parameter to define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling below the current threshold does not lead to
the pickup of the stage and to the start of fault logging and recording.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you define a time interval during which a pickup is not triggered if the
current falls below the threshold.

Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

Operate delay must be set according to the specific application. No general application notes can be given.
6.15.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13051:103 Stage 1:Activation • always active with CB closed
• with CB closed
_:13051:8 Stage 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:13051:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 3 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:13051:104 Stage 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:13051:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.16 Negative-Sequence Protection
The function Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46):
• Detects 1-phase or 2-phase short circuits in the electrical power system with clearly increased sensitivity
compared to the classical overcurrent protection
• Protects electric machines during excessive unbalanced load
• Reports unbalanced load conditions in the electricity supply system
• Detects phase interruptions in the primary system
• Locates short circuits or inversions in the connections to the current transformers
The Negative-sequence protection function is used in protection function groups with current measure-
ment.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time negative-sequence protection
stages.
In the function Negative-sequence protection, the following stages can be operated simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time negative-sequence protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time negative-sequence protection

The stages have an identical structure. Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following
figure.
[dwnspstr-271112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the general functionality which applies across all configured
stages. It contains:
• Selection of the reference value
• Current-release criterion
[lo_General Functionality.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-143 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality
(1) Switchover to I1 with (_:2311:106) Reference value = pos. seq. current
Reference Value
With the parameter Reference value, the negative-sequence current I2 is normalized to the rated object
current Irated, obj or to the positive-sequence current I1. When I2 is normalized to I1, the sensitivity of the func-
tion for low short-circuit currents is increased.
Current Limitation and Maximum Phase Current

With the parameters Current limitation Imax and Maximum phase current, you restrict the oper-
ating range of the function. When the limiting is activated, pickup of the stages is blocked as soon as the
maximum phase-current threshold value is exceeded. For more information, refer to the stage description.
Release Current
The threshold value of the Release current serves to release the negative-sequence protection.
Parameter: Reference value
• Default setting (_:2311:106) Reference value = rated current

With the parameter Reference value, you define the normalization of the negative-sequence current I2 to
the rated object current Irated, obj (I2/Irated, obj) or to the positive-sequence current I1 (I2/I1).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

I2/Irated, obj The negative-sequence current is referred to the rated current of the
protected object. This is a preferred normalization for electrical machines,
because the permissible limiting values are indicated exclusively referred to
the machine rated current. You can also use this normalization for other
applications.
I2/I1 The normalization of the negative-sequence system to the positive-
sequence system yields a higher sensitivity. Use this normalization when
detecting interruptions in the primary system.
Set the parameter depending on the application.
Parameter: Current limitation Imax, Maximum phase current
• Default setting (_:2311:107) Current limitation Imax = no
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Maximum phase current = 10.0 A at 1 A

If the protection function needs a maximum current limitation, set the value of the Current limitation
Imax parameter from no to yes. With the parameter Maximum phase current, you set the upper limit of
the phase current. CT saturation will cause negative-sequence current in the secondary system. To avoid over-
function due to the CT saturation, a suitable phase-current limit value is 10 times of the rated protection-
object current.
Parameter: Release current
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Release current = 0.05 A at 1 A

For the safe calculation of negative-sequence currents, the current in at least one phase must be greater than
5 % of the secondary rated device current. For a 1-A device, the value of Release current is 0.05 A (0.25 A
for a 5-A device).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.16.4.1 Stage Description
Logic of a Stage
[logiknsp-070312-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-144 Logic Diagram of the Stage Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Characteristic
Curve
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.

When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out.
Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Recommended setting value (_:1981:3) Threshold = 10 %

The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is
a practicable value for fault indications of electrical machines.
• Recommended setting value (_:1981:6) Operate delay = 1500 ms

The setting of the Operate delay depends on the application. Observe the time grading in the power-
system protection and do not set the time for monitoring too short. The default setting is practicable. For
motors, the time depends on the permissible time period for the set unbalanced load.

With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.
6.16.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:106 General:Reference value • pos. seq. current rated current
• rated current
_:2311:107 General:Current limita- • no no
tion Imax
• yes
_:2311:101 General:Maximum phase 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 50.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 10.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 50.000 A
_:2311:104 General:Release current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:1981:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 10.0 %

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

ratio
• yes
delay
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:1982:3 Definite-T 2:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 65.0 %
ratio
• yes
delay
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:Overcurrent blocking SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Logic of a Stage
[lo_NSP_Inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-145 Logic Diagram of the Negative-Sequence Protection with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out.
Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage.
6.16.5.2 Application and Settings Notes
• Default setting (_:105) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 11.18.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve.
• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 10.0 %

The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application. A threshold value of 10 % is
a practicable value for fault detection for different applications.
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Time dial = 1.00

With the parameter Time dial, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the parameter Time dial is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared
dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

With the parameter Reset, you define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019


With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect., the stage can be stabilized against tripping on
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.
6.16.5.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 5.0 % to 999.9 % 10.0 %
_:104 Inverse-T #:Blk. w. inrush • no no
curr. detect.
• yes
_:105 Inverse-T #:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:106 Inverse-T #:Reset • instantaneous disk emulation
• disk emulation
_:107 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:300 Inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:59 Inverse-T #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.17 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables) against
thermal overloads
• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function is used in protection function groups with
current measurement.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
advanced stage.
The non-preconfigured function block Filter can optionally be applied to gain the RMS value used by the
Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced stage.
[dw_TOLP_with Filter stage, 2, en_US]
6.17.3 Filter for RMS Value Gain
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies by the device (due to the anti-
aliasing filter)
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[lo_TOLP_FilterStage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-147 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Filter
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the respective parameters h(0), h(1),
h(2), h(3) and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes . Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
Values Description Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
Iph:A Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current A
Iph:B Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current B
Iph:C Filtered RMS measured kA A Parameter Rated current
value of current C
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Thermal over-
load protection, 3-phase - advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the function values are shown as ---.
Parameter: Enable filter
• Default setting (_:1) Enable filter = no.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.
Parameter: h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4)

With the default value of the coefficients, the filter has no effect and no gain is applied.
If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor,
the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response (gain factors) for the reactor. To
determine the coefficients h(0) to h(4) for the FIR filter, you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary PC
tool which is available in the SIPROTEC download area. The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool.
They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter. The amplitude attenuation of higher
frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated
by the filter.
To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device, set the following coefficients in the
filter.
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170
6.17.3.3 Settings

Filter
_:1 Filter:Enable filter • no no
• yes
_:2 Filter:h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:3 Filter:h(1) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:4 Filter:h(2) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:5 Filter:h(3) -100.000 to 100.000 0.000
_:6 Filter:h(4) -100.000 to 100.000 1.000

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Filter
_:301 Filter:Iph:A MV O
_:302 Filter:Iph:B MV O
_:303 Filter:Iph:C MV O
6.17.4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Logic
[lo_TOLP_withFilterstage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-148 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Stage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_Stage Control, 1, en_US]
RMS-Value Selection
The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement:

The gained RMS value is automatically used if the function block Filter is configured and the filter has been
enabled.
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one current measuring point I-3ph is allowed to be
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents based on a thermal single-
body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fo_diffgl-170914, 2, en_US]
With the following standardization:
[fo_normie-170914, 3, en_US]
Θ Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permissible

phase current k Irated, obj
ΘAmb Standardized ambient temperature, where ϑAmbdescribes the coupled ambient temperature.
The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can be the measured ambient temperature or the
ambient temperature preset using the Default temperature parameter.
Δ ϑrated obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
τ th Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The factor refers
to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated, obj)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
• In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control
• In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold Θwarn ( Threshold thermal warn. ), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and corre-
sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-150 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-150 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents ( K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the thermal
threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping temper-
ature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling , the Cooling time
constant is activated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you can get the operate curve as following:
[foauslos-211010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration. The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40°C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit increases.
The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated ).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog unit. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is faulty, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the RTD
unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function changes to
Warning. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under
the Default temperature parameter, depending on which value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal
replica must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding l threshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Freezing of the thermal memory
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing
rated current.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate , the
trip command is canceled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).
Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure

The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the setting parameter
Storage of thermal replica . You can save the thermal state for a time of 500 min. Once the supply
voltage returns, the thermal replica continues to function with the saved thermal state.
If the thermal replica is not saved, it will be reset to 0 upon failure of the auxiliary voltage.
Resetting the Thermal Map

You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica . The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start , tripping is
blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel .
Blocking the Function

Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The tripping function can be blocked externally or inter-
nally by the binary input signal >Block stage .
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and canceled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.

(_:601:305) Time until trip Expected time until tripping s s s
(_:601:304) Time until close Time until close release s s s
(_:601:306) Overload phase A Thermal measured values of % % Tripping temperature
(_:601:307) Overload phase B the phases
(_:601:308) Overload phase C
(_:601:309) Overload Thermal measured value of the % % Tripping temperature
maximum overload protection
(_:601:310) Equival. current Current measured value which A A Rated operating current of
phs A serves as basis for the overload the primary values
(_:601:311) Equival. current measured value
phs B
(_:601:312) Equival. current
phs C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(_:601:313) Equival. current Maximum current measured A A Rated operating current of
max. value which serves as basis for the primary values
the overload measured value
Parameter: Threshold current warning
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.000 A at Irated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for the K-factor .
Parameter: Threshold thermal warn.
• Default setting (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %

The default setting can be left at a K-factor , of 1.1, as the thermal memory results for 83 % at continu-
ously flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to ( K-factor )2 and
x % corresponds to 12.
[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.
Parameter: Dropout threshold operate
• Default setting (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %

The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to drop out pickup and tripping when the value
drops below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended.
You can select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling or longer blocking of
closing.
Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.
Parameter: Emerg. start T overtravel
• Default setting (_:112) Emerg. start T overtravel = 300 s

This functionality is not required for protection of lines and cables. If the logical binary indication is not routed,
the Emerg. start T overtravel will be ineffective. The Emerg. start T overtravel presetting
can therefore be retained.
Parameter: K-factor
• Default setting (_:106) K-factor = 1.10

The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous load.
The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, cable) is the basic current for overload sensing.
You can determine the K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:
[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.
EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj= 369 A
Parameter: Thermal time constant
• Default setting (_:110) Thermal time constant = 900 s

The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the tripping characteristics of the stage. If no
data on the Thermal time constant is available, you can determine this from the short-time current-
rating capacity of the cable, for example, from the 1-s current. The 1-s current is the maximum current permis-
sible for 1 s application time. The 1-s current can be found in the cable specifications. Calculate the Thermal
time constant according to the following formula:
[fo_perm_1.0-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
If the short-term current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-term current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:
[fo_perm_0.5-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE for a Cable

For a cable
Permissible continuous current: Imax, perm = 406 A
Maximum short-circuit current for 1 s: I1s = 21.4 kA
Therefore, for the Thermal time constant, it follows
[fokonsta-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
with 46.29 min = 2777 s
Parameter: Cooling time constant
• Default setting (_:111) Cooling time constant = 3600 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The Cooling time constant parameter is used to define the dropout behavior of the stage. Cables and
overhead lines have the same time constant for both heating and cooling. Therefore, set the same value for
the Cooling time constant as for the parameter Thermal time constant.
Parameter: Imax thermal
• Default setting (_:107) Imax thermal = 2.5 A at Irated = 1 A
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
Parameter: Imin cooling
• Default setting (_:108) Imin cooling = 0.500 A

If only the thermal time constant (parameter Thermal time constant ) must provide protection, set the
current parameter Imin cooling to 0 A.
Parameter: Temperature rise at Irated
• Default setting (_:109) Temperature rise at Irated = 70 K

As a value, set the overtemperature that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the rated
current and at an ambient temperature of 40°C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object. You can
find the temperature value in the technical data of the equipment or measure it. If you use a temperature
sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or the coolant tempera-
ture from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40°C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (ϑmax) and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120°C (80 K + 40°C) can be derived when using a temperature sensor for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155°C (105 K + 40°C) derives.
From these values, the K factor can be derived:
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If you select a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
NOTE
i For electrical machines, the limits can vary depending on the type of coolant.
Consult the machine manufacturer to agree on a setting value for the overtemperature.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Storage of thermal replica
• Default setting (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no

If a continuous auxiliary voltage for the bay units is ensured, the bay default setting can be retained.
Parameter: Behav. at I> Imax therm.
• Default setting (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting

The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
freeze therm. rep. If input currents exceed the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal
replica will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This param-
eter value is provided to enable compatibility with older products!
current limiting The input currents are limited to the value set in the Imax thermal
parameter. If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the
limited current value is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current
threshold is approx. 2 to 2.5 Irated, obj.
Parameter: Temperature sensor
• Default setting (_:44) Temperature sensor = none

With the Temperature sensor parameter, you determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor is used to measure the ambient temperature of the protected object and to feed it to
the device via an RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) or via an IO111 module. The Thermal
overload protection, 3-phase - advanced function receives the measured temperature value via the func-
tions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit Serial, or Temperature module IO111 from the function group Analog
units.
Parameter: Default temperature
• Default setting (_:118) Default temperature = 40°C

The Default temperature is set as ambient temperature under the following conditions:
• No temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is connected.
• The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Parameter: Minimal temperature
• Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20°C

If the measured ambient temperature drops below the set value, the set value is assumed as the ambient
temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this temperature
drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal temperature is also
used.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.17.4.3 Settings

49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:112 49 Th.overl. #:Emerg. 0 s to 15000 s 300 s
start T overtravel
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:111 49 Th.overl. #:Cooling 10 s to 60000 s 3600 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
thermal 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:108 49 Th.overl. #:Imin 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
cooling 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated
_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of • no no
thermal replica
• yes
_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at • current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm.
• freeze therm. rep.
_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55°C to 55°C 40°C
temperature
_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55°C to 40°C -20°C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:502 49 Th.overl. #:>Emergency start SPS I
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase A MV O
_:307 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase B MV O
_:308 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase C MV O
_:309 49 Th.overl. #:Overload maximum MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs A MV O
_:311 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs B MV O
_:312 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs C MV O
_:313 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current max. MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.18 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Monitor the permissible voltage range
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
• Decouple systems (for example, wind power supply)

Abnormally high voltages in power systems are caused by voltage controller failure at the transformer or on
long transmission lines under low-load conditions.
When using common-mode reactors in the protected power system, the device must shut down the line
quickly if the reactors fail (for example, due to fault clearance). The insulation is endangered by the over-
voltage condition.
Overvoltages at capacitor banks can be caused by resonances with line or transformer inductances.
In power plants increased voltage levels can be due to one of these factors:
• Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually
• Failure of the automatic voltage controller
• After full load shedding of a generator
• Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time over-
voltage protection stages. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time overvoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time overvoltage protection

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
[dw3phovp-030211-01.tif, 5, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[lo3phasi-090611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-152 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Measurement RMS value:

Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
tion counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued imme-
diately after the input voltage exceeds the Threshold.
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the overvoltage
condition (1 out of 3).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage.

component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
• Default setting (_:181:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

Depending on the Measured value , the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-
to-ground quantity. The default setting assumes that the voltage range is monitored on long-distance trans-
mission lines under low-load conditions.
Parameter: Stabilization counter
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Stabilization counter = 0

You can configure the Stabilization counter parameter in the function block General.
For special applications, it could be desirable that a short exceeding of the input voltage above the pickup
value does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by
setting the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
Threshold for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.
• Default setting (_:181:6) Operate delay = 3 s

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement preci-
sion, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.
• Recommended setting value (_:181:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition (1 out of 3).
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects how
the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:
Threshold value: 10 % above Vrated
Vthreshold, sec = 1.1 Vrated, sec = 1.1 × 100 V = 110 V

This requires that the primary rated voltages of protected object and voltage transformer are identical. If they
are different, you have to adjust the pickup value.
For the Operate delay set a value of 3 s.
• 2. Stage:
The second overvoltage-protection stage is intended for high overvoltages with short duration. A high
pickup value is selected here, for example, 1.5 times the rated voltage. A time delay setting of 0.1 s to
0.2 s is sufficient then.
Stage Setting Values

Threshold value Time delay
1 1.1 Vrated 3s
2 1.5 Vrated 0.1 s to 0.2 s
6.18.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Stabilization 0 to 10 0
counter
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:181:9 Definite-T 1:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:181:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:181:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
ratio
delay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
ratio
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:181:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:181:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:181:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[lo3phinv, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-153 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value .
• Measurement fundamental comp. :


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Measurement RMS value :

zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued imme-
diately after the input voltage exceeds the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.
Pickup and Operate Curve

When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor , the stage picks up
and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. Operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum of
inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay )
After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure.
[dwovpinv, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-154 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial )
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold )
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k )
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c )
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 × pickup factor × threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time . Instan-
taneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired
delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Blocking the Stage

binary input signal >Block stage .

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
• Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the tripping stage monitors the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor
• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 110.000 V
• Default setting (_:101) Pickup factor = 1.10

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-to-
ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay after
pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short exceeding of the input voltage above the pickup
value does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by
setting the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.

elements detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the over-
voltage condition (1 out of 3).
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, Charact. constant c
• Default setting (_:102) Charact. constant k = 1.00
• Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant α = 1.000
• Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant c = 0.000

With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.

As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
• Default setting (_:106) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.
• Default setting (_:107) Reset time = 0.00 s

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise Siemens
recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.18.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:108 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup factor 1.00 to 1.20 1.10
_:102 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.00 to 300.00 1.00
constant k
constant α
constant c
_:106 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:107 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.19 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
6.19 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual

Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function (ANSI 59N):
• Detects ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems
• Determines the phase affected by the ground fault
• Works with electrical machines to detect ground faults in the stator winding
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function is used in protection
function groups with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function comes factory-set with
1 stage. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.
[dwu0ovps-030211-01.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of a Stage
[loovpu03-090611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-156 Logic Diagram of an Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Stage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement

The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted to
the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the zero-
sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• Measurement of the fundamental comp. (standard filter):

• Measurement of the RMS value parameter value (true RMS):

the defining equation of the RMS value.
• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical Data).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

You can use the Detection of faulty phase parameter to enable or disable the determining of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the
threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.

The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
fund. comp. long filter To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient
disturbances, select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length
of the filter is longer than that of the standard filter.
Please note that in this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly
(see Technical Data).
• Recommended setting value (_:331:107) Pickup delay = 0.00 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0.00 ms.
• Default setting (_:331:3) Threshold = 30.000 V 20

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. It should range between 20 V and 40 V. A higher
sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher than
the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
• At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0.5 ⋅ 57.7 V = 28.9 V ≈ 30 V

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. The dropout ratio can be reduced
for example, to 0.98 to achieve a high measurement precision.
20 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.


switched on.
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
• Default setting (_:331:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the stage responds to determine which phase
is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults. For example, applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage the device tries to determine, which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:331:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V 21

Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
• Default setting (_:331:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V 22

Set the threshold value for the two healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must lie above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
75 V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. =
75.000 V.

6.19.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:331:109 Stage 1:Detection of • no no
faulty phase
• yes
_:331:8 Stage 1:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• fund. comp. long filter
• RMS value
_:331:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 30.000 V
_:331:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:331:107 Stage 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 320.00 s 0.00 s
_:331:101 Stage 1:V> healthy ph- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
to-gnd volt.
_:331:104 Stage 1:V< faulty ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
gnd volt.

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:331:300 Stage 1:Faulty phase ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.20 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages
• Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
identical structure.
[dwovpu1s-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of a Stage
[logovpu1-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-158 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Blocking the Stage


The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.
• Default (_:211:6) Operate delay = 3 s


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

The default value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement precision, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
6.20.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
Stage 2
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.21 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage (ANSI 47) is used to:
• Monitor the power system and electric machines for voltage unbalances
• Establish a release criterion of overcurrent protection for unbalanced faults

Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example due to a tripped 1-phase fuse, a
broken conductor, etc.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 stages.
A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.
[dwu2ovpsExt.vsd, 2, en_US]
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the average-value calculation of the negative-sequence voltage.
The average value is forwarded to all subordinate stages.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_GeneralFunctionality_20150323, 1, en_US]
Measurand
The average value of negative-sequence voltage is determined by a settable time interval (parameter: Meas-
uring window). With the parameter Measuring window, you can adapt this function to all power-system
conditions.
You can set the parameter Measuring window with a large value to get a more accurate calculated result,
which leads to a longer pickup time however.
Blocking the Function with Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking options is available for the function:
• From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions).
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the function or does not block it.
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Measuring window = 1 cycle

With the parameter Measuring window, you can optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time
of this function.
For sensitive settings of the parameter Threshold, for example, lower than 10 % of the rated voltage,
Siemens recommends using a higher number of cycles. Siemens recommends 10 cycles, and in this
case, the pickup time is increased.
For further information, refer to chapter 11.23 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage .

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the function when a

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

switched on.

yes The protection function is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
no The protection function is not blocked.
6.21.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:10 General:Blk. by meas.- • no yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:2311:101 General:Measuring 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles
window

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:V2 average MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.21.4 Stage with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lou23pol-090611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-161 Logic Diagram of the Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the average value of the negative-sequence voltage, which is calculated from the function
block General Functionality. For more information, refer to chapter 6.21.3.1 Description.
Blocking the Stage

In case of blocking, the picked up function is reset. The following blocking option is available for the function:
• From an external or internal source via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Default setting (_:271:3) Threshold = 5.800 V

The parameter Threshold is set according to the definition of the negative-sequence system.
The secondary voltage of the voltage transformer can be used if the voltage transformer is adapted to the
rated voltage. The value of the 10 % negative-sequence voltage at a 100 V rated secondary voltage is:
100 V / 1.73 * 0.1 = 5.77 V

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:271:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The default setting of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
You can decrease the dropout ratio to avoid chattering of the stage if the threshold value is low. For example,
for the stage with a 2 % setting, you can use a dropout ratio of 0.90.

Specify the Operate delay for the specific application. 3.00 s is a practicable value.
For a higher threshold value, a shorter tripping delay is required.

Example 1:
Releasing an overcurrent protection stage for unbalanced faults
The following section describes how to set the function to release an Overcurrent-protection stage when
unbalanced faults occur. Set the Overcurrent-protection stage only slightly higher than the load current, that
is very sensitive. To prevent the Overcurrent-protection stage from picking up inadvertently, the Overcur-
rent-protection stage is released when the Negative-sequence voltage stage picks up. The Overcurrent-
protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative-sequence voltage stage has not picked up.
Figure 6-162 shows the voltage phasors during a 2-phase local fault between phases B and C. The phase-to-
phase voltage VBC is virtually 0.
[dwuazeig-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-162 Voltage Phasors during a 2-Phase Local Fault
A 2-phase local fault generates a relatively large negative-sequence voltage of up to 50 % referred to the
phase-to-ground voltage. The portion of the negative-sequence decreases in case of a remote fault. The lower
setting limit results from the possible unbalance at full load. If you assume for example 5 % negative-
sequence voltage, the pickup value must be higher. A setting value of 10 % warrants sufficient stability during
unbalanced operating states and sufficient sensitivity to release the Overcurrent-protection stage when a
fault occurs.
For a secondary rated voltage of 100 V, set the following secondary threshold value:
[fo_OVP_V2_Secondary Threshold, 1, en_US]
You can keep the default setting of 0.95 for the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the stage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Set the Negative-sequence voltage stage so that it does not generate a fault when it picks up and does not
initiate tripping. The Overcurrent-protection stage generates a fault indication. The pickup of the Negative-
sequence voltage stage is used as the release criterion because the Short-circuit function must be released
immediately when the Negative-sequence voltage stage has picked up. The time delay is thus not relevant
and can be left at the default setting.
You implement the release of the Overcurrent-protection stage using a logic block chart. An inverter links
the pickup of the Negative-sequence voltage stage with the Overcurrent-protection stage blocking.
[loinvert-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-163 Linking the Pickup of the Negative-Sequence Voltage Stage

Secondary Threshold Value Time Delay Dropout Ratio
1 5.800 V 3.00 s 0.95
The second stage is not needed. It is deleted or remains off.
Example 2:
A negative-sequence voltage in the auxiliary system of the power plant causes negative-sequence currents on
motors. This leads to a thermal overload of the rotors. The following estimation can be used as a basis: 1 %
negative-sequence voltage can lead to approximately 5 % or 6 % negative-sequence current.
A negative-sequence voltage can be caused by a broken conductor on the high-voltage side. If a negative-
sequence voltage occurs, this can, for example, initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a protec-
tion trip of an unbalanced-load protection of the motors.
Siemens recommends using multiple stages for a better grading, whereby a sensitive setting of the threshold
permits an increased tripping delay.
For a reference, only 2 stages are discussed.
The first stage has a pickup threshold of 10 % with a time delay of 1.5 s. The second stage has a pickup
threshold of 3 % with a time delay of 8 s, see Table 6-12. Further, it is assumed that the voltage transformer is
well adapted to the rated voltage.
[fo_OVP_V2_SecondaryThreshold2, 1, en_US]
Table 6-12 Recommended Settings
Stage Threshold Operate Delay

Stage 1 5.800 V 1.50 s
Stage 2 1.730 V 8.00 s
6.21.4.3 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:V2 average MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.22 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 27):
• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage
• Handles disconnection or load shedding tasks in a system
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time under-
voltage protection stages.
In the function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
• 3 stages Definite-time undervoltage protection
• 2 stages Inverse-time undervoltage protection

Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-164). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstru3p-110211-01.tif, 5, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[louvp3ph-140611-01_stagecontrol.vsd, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[louvp3ph-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-166 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
• Measurement fundamental component:


Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the Threshold.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay param-
eter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved
by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-166 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
block it.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:421:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. Parameter Value

phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

The Threshold is set in accordance with the Measured value as either a phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground variable.
For the default setting, the lower limit of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the
rated voltage of the protected object.
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object: Vrated, obj.= 10 kV

Voltage transformer:
Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.
The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[foschwlw-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input voltage below the pickup value
does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by setting
the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps being below
the Threshold for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
• Default setting (_:421:102) Pickup delay = no

The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
When applied in parallel, the pickup delay and the delay through pickup stabilization add up.
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.
• Default (_:421:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).
• Default setting (_:421:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-

switched on.
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions).

Parameter: Current-flow criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on

Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged on either the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup drops out when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit breaker is closed. Siemens recom-
mends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated transformer
current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To speed
up dropout, increase the default setting.

6.22.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion
• on

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:103 General:Stabilization 0 to 10 0
counter
Definite-T 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
_:421:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
ratio
delay
Definite-T 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
value
• phase-to-phase
measurement comp.
• RMS value
• 3 out of 3
_:422:102 Definite-T 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

ratio
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Definite-T 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[lo_UVP3ph_In_StageControl, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_UVP3ph_In, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-168 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
comp. or the RMS value.
• Measurement fundamental comp.:


Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
picked up.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
Pickup and Operate Curve

When the input voltage falls below the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks
up and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the
sum of inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_UVP3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]
Where
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure:
[dwUVP3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-169 Inverse-Time Characteristics for Undervoltage Protection
Pickup Delay
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal is
going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time. Instanta-
neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay
time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
view of Functions) . The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
block it.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
• Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase


phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor
• Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 80.000 V
• Default setting (_:109) Pickup factor = 0.90

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after
pickup, Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.

For special applications, it could be desirable that a short falling of the input voltage below the pickup value
does not lead to the pickup of the stage, which starts fault logging and recording. This is achieved by setting
the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than zero.
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps being below
the pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
• Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = no

required.
With the Pickup delay parameter, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
When applied in parallel, the pickup delay and the delay through pickup stabilization add up.
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted trip-
ping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
permitted to result in stage pickup.
the operate time.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, Charact. constant c
• Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant k = 1.00
• Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant α = 1.000
• Default setting (_:105) Charact. constant c = 0.000

With the Charact. constant k, Charact. constant α, and Charact. constant c parameters,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic.

As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
• Default setting (_:108) Reset time = 0.00 s

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage exceeds
the dropout value. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value > 0 s to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens
recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.
• Default setting (_:107) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.
• Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter, you control the behavior of the stage when a meas-

switched on.


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged on either the supply side or the junction side.
These 2 possible voltage-transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and
opening of the circuit breaker:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.

on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
6.22.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured • phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value
• phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of • fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement comp.
• RMS value
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup mode • 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
• 3 out of 3
_:102 Inverse-T #:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V
_:109 Inverse-T #:Pickup factor 0.80 to 1.00 0.90
constant k
constant α
constant c
_:107 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:108 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Inverse-T #

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.23 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function (ANSI 27):
• Monitors the permissible voltage range
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damages caused by under-
voltage
• Protects motors and generators from inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability in the
event of voltage dips
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-phase
measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This makes this
function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 tripping
stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-170). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstuvu1-110211-01.tif, 3, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[louv3pu1-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-171 Logic Diagram of the Stage Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Pickup Delay
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup
delay parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker
opens. This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
NOTE
i If the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched off, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
view of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not
block the tripping stage when the measuring-voltage failure detection picks up.
block it.

Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application. For the default setting, the lower limit
of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the rated voltage of the protected object.
• Default setting (_:481:101) Pickup delay = no

required.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want tripping-stage pickup to be
subject to a time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup
and, where applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
pickup of the tripping stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for
undervoltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted
tripping, you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
permitted to result in tripping-stage pickup.
the operate time.
• Default setting (_:481:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The recommended setting value of 1.05 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate indi-
cations, the Dropout ratio can be reduced.
• Default setting (_:481:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes


switched on.


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers can be located on the supply or the output side. These 2
possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and opening
of the circuit breaker:
• If they are located on the output side, the voltage does not exist.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

on If the voltage transformers are located on the output side, you can use the
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold value I>).
off In the case of undervoltage, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit breaker is closed. Siemens recom-
mends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated transformer
current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To speed
up dropout, increase the default setting.

If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
EXAMPLE of a 2-stage undervoltage protection

The undervoltage protection can be used for the protection of motors within the power plant's own power
system. The example describes the possible settings for a two-stage undervoltage-protection function. We will
look at the settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
1. Stage:
Set the Threshold to approx. 80 % of the rated voltage. In the case of voltage dips down to that value, the
motors can still start up. Depending on the machine characteristic, the Threshold can also be set somewhat
lower.
The following data apply:
Rated motor voltage: Vrated,M = 6 kV
Minimum startup voltage: 80 % of rated motor voltage
Voltage-transformer ratio:
When setting the threshold value, make sure that the positive-sequence voltage as defined is equal to the
value of one phase-to-ground voltage. Taking into account the rated primary voltage of the motor, the
primary setting value of the first stage is calculated as follows:
[fobglei1-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
When setting secondary values, you calculate the secondary setting value as follows, taking into account the
voltage-transformer ratio:
[fobglei3-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Set a value of 3 s for the Operate delay.

2. Stage:
Undervoltage causes excessive torques and current surges which place inadmissible strains on the motor. The
voltage at which motors do no longer start up is in the range of (0.55 … 0.70) Vrated,M. If no data are available,
use the empirical value of approx. 70% of the rated voltage for setting the parameter Threshold. Set the
Operate delay so that it slightly overlaps the tripping time of the overcurrent protection for the power-
plant auxiliary power. Unless otherwise required by the motor manufacturer, set an Operate delay
between 0.5 s and 3 s. The shorter time should be preferred.
Threshold value Time delay
1 0.70 to 0.85 Vrated,M Approx. 3 to 5 s
(for example, 0.80 Vrated,M)
2 0.55 to 0.70 Vrated,M 0.5 s to 3 s
(for example, 0.70 Vrated,M)
6.23.5 Settings

General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow • off on
criterion
• on
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Stage 1
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
volt. failure
• yes
_:481:101 Stage 1:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:481:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000V 46.000V
Stage 2
• on
• test
flt.rec. blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

volt. failure
• yes
_:482:101 Stage 2:Pickup delay • no no
• yes
_:482:3 Stage 2:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000V

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.24 Overfrequency Protection
The Overfrequency protection function (ANSI 81O):
• Detect overfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
• Disconnect generating units when the power frequency is critical
• Provide additional turbine protection if the speed limiter fails

Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Over-
frequency is caused by load shedding (island network), power system disconnection or disturbances of the
frequency controller. Overfrequency implies a risk of self excitation of machines which are connected to long
lines without load.
Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dwstofqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.24.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lostofqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-173 Logic Diagram of the Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Frequency-Measurement Method
Overfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):

The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
• Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short pickup
time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Functional Measured Value

The angle-difference method provides the following measured value:
Measured Value Description
f Frequency calculated with the angle-difference method
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Externally or internally via the logical binary input >Block stage
• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:31:3) Threshold = 50.20 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
• Recommended setting value (_:31:6) Operate delay = 10 s

The Operate delay parameter is used to set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.
Parameter: Minimum voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37.5 V

For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
Parameter: Dropout differential
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 50.20 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 50.10 Hz.
Application example of the overfrequency protection

Overfrequency protection can be used for monitoring the frequency range. If the frequency deviates from the
rated frequency by for example, 0.2 Hz, an alarm indication is generated. The trip command is delayed to
avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example, switching operations). A delay of a few seconds
(for example, 10 s) is deemed to be a good value. You can leave the Dropout differential at the default
value of 20 mHz. The following table shows a setting recommendation.
For this application, 1 stage of the overfrequency protection is used. The following table shows a setting
suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1> Warning 50.20 Hz 60.20 Hz 10.00 s
f2> Not used (OFF) - - -
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.24.5 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
_:31:3 Stage 1:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 51.50 Hz
Stage 2
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
_:2311:301 General:f MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.25 Underfrequency Protection
The Underfrequency protection function (ANSI 81U) is used to:
• Detect underfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
• Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
• Decouple power systems
• Load shedding to ensure power system stability and protect motors
• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed. Under-
frequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the power
generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or distur-
bances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. A maximum of 5 tripping stages
can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dwstufqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.25.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lostufqp-040411-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-175 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
• Angle-difference method (method A):

The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
• Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

The sampling-frequency tracking makes a wide frequency operating range possible. If the stage has picked up
before leaving the frequency operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set minimum
voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
• Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the security of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle-difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
• Recommended setting value (_:61:3) Threshold = 49.80 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.

The Operate delay parameter is used to set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37 500 V

When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For example, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the stage
will drop out at 49.9 Hz.
Application Example of Underfrequency Protection

Frequency protection can be used for load shedding. The UCTE has defined a 5-stage plan for the Western
European power grid. The setting values of the stages are based on that plan (see table below).
Table 6-13 Stage Plan
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3rd load-shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00 s
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00 s
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00 s
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.25.5 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Stage 2
• on
• test
blocked
• yes
Stage 3
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.26 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
The function Rate of frequency change protection is used to:
• Detect a frequency change quickly
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Network decoupling
• Load shedding
The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate simul-
taneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.
[dwdfdt01-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.26.3 General Functions (Undervoltage Test, df/dt Calculation)
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lodfdtgf-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-177 Logic Diagram of General Functionality
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.24.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.
Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change
• Recommended setting value (_:13171:101) Minimum voltage = 37.500 V

The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage. When determining the setting
value, keep in mind that the absolute value of the sound positive-sequence voltage is equal to the absolute
value of the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
• Default setting (_:13171:137) Measuring window = 5 periods

You can use the Measuring window parameter to optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function. For information regarding pickup time and measuring accuracy, refer to the technical data.
The default setting provides maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.
Logic of the Stage
[lodfdtst-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-178 Logic Diagram of Rate of Frequency Change Protection
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.

• Via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:13231:3) Threshold = 3.000 Hz/s

The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power-system conditions. In most cases, a
network analysis will be necessary. A sudden disconnection of loads leads to a surplus of active power. The
frequency rises and causes a positive frequency change. On the other hand, a failure of generators leads to a
deficit of active power. The frequency drops and results in a negative frequency change.
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation. They apply for the change rate at the begin-
ning of a frequency change (approximate 1 s).
Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
Typical data for H:

For hydro generators (salient-pole machines) H = 1.5 s to 6 s
For turbine-driven generators (non-salient pole rotors) H = 2 s to 10 s
For industrial turbine-driven generators H = 3 s to 4 s
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s

You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example,
switching operations). If the protection function is supposed to respond quickly, set the Operate delay
parameter to 0 s.
For monitoring small changes (< 1 Hz/s), a small time delay is useful to avoid overfunctioning.
• Recommended setting value (_:13231:4) Dropout differential = 0.10 Hz/s

You can use the Dropout differential parameter to define the dropout value. The recommended value
is 0.10 Hz/s.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func-
tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking
input >Block stage and connect it via CFC.
6.26.5 Settings

General
_:13171:101 General:Minimum 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
voltage
_:13171:137 General:Measuring 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
window
df/dt falling1
_:13231:1 df/dt falling1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13231:2 df/dt falling1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13231:3 df/dt falling1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13231:4 df/dt falling1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13231:6 df/dt falling1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay
df/dt rising1
_:13201:1 df/dt rising1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13201:2 df/dt rising1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13201:3 df/dt rising1:Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s 3.000 Hz/s
_:13201:4 df/dt rising1:Dropout 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
differential
_:13201:6 df/dt rising1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
delay

(Type)
General
_:13171:301 General:df/dt MV O
Group indicat.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
df/dt falling1
_:13231:81 df/dt falling1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13231:54 df/dt falling1:Inactive SPS O
_:13231:52 df/dt falling1:Behavior ENS O
_:13231:53 df/dt falling1:Health ENS O
_:13231:55 df/dt falling1:Pickup ACD O
_:13231:56 df/dt falling1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13231:57 df/dt falling1:Operate ACT O
df/dt rising1
_:13201:81 df/dt rising1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13201:54 df/dt rising1:Inactive SPS O
_:13201:52 df/dt rising1:Behavior ENS O
_:13201:53 df/dt rising1:Health ENS O
_:13201:55 df/dt rising1:Pickup ACD O
_:13201:56 df/dt rising1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13201:57 df/dt rising1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.27 Vector-Jump Protection
The Vector-jump protection function:
• Is used for network decoupling of the power generating unit in case of a load loss
• Evaluates the phase-angle jump of the voltage phasors
The Vector-jump protection function can be used in the following function groups:
• Voltage-current 3-phase
• Voltage 3-phase
The Vector-jump protection function comes factory-set with a Δφ stage.
The following stages can operate simultaneously within the function:
• 1 Δφ stage
• 1 I1 < Release stage
[dw_VJP_Structure, 1, en_US]
Basic Principle of Vector-Jump Protection

The following 2 figures show the basic principle of the Vector-jump protection function.
The following figure shows the voltage vector of the steady state condition. The load current causes a voltage
drop between the internal voltage Vp and the generator terminal voltage V.
If the load is switched off, the following situations occur:
• The current is reduced.
• A smaller voltage drop is caused.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_load loss, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-180 Voltage Vector of the Steady State
The following figure shows the situations after the load is switched off:
• The terminal voltage V changes to V'.
• An additional phase-angle jump occurs.

A phase-angle jump occurs with load loss and is the evaluation criterion for the Vector-jump protection func-
tion. If the phase-angle differential exceeds a set threshold, the generator circuit breaker or the circuit breaker
of the system switch opens. Therefore, the generator unit can be protected against unacceptable stress.
[dw_vector change, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-181 Vector Change after the Load Shedding
Table 6-14 Vector Description
Vector Description
Vp Vector of the generator internal voltage (rotor voltage)
V Vector of the generator terminal voltage
ΔV Vector of the voltage differential
V' Vector of the terminal voltage after the load shedding
ΔV' Vector of the voltage differential after the load shedding

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The following measures are applied to avoid unwanted tripping:
• Correction of steady-state deviations from rated frequency
• Frequency operating range limited to frated ± 3 Hz
• High measuring accuracy by using frequency-tracked measured values and evaluation of the positive-
sequence phasor
• Enabling the minimum voltage for the Vector-jump protection function
• Blocking the function when the primary voltage is switched on or off as switching can lead to a phase-
angle jump
Logic
[lo_VJP_General, 1, en_US]
[lo_VJP_General_2, 1, en_US]
Phase-Angle Calculation
The phase-angle differential is calculated at different time intervals (t-T, t-2T, t-3T) from the vector of the posi-
tive-sequence voltage via a delta-interval measurement. With the current measured power frequency, the
measuring errors of the angle measurement caused by frequency deviations are compensated.
Range
If the measured frequency or voltage is below the set threshold, the Vector-jump protection is blocked.
The voltage and frequency bands have the following limits:
• The threshold of the voltage band is configurable.
• The frequency band ranges is fixed from frated - 3 Hz to frated + 3 Hz.
Measurand
The general functionality calculates the phase-angle displacement Δφ and sends it to the Δφ stage. Δφ is used
for comparison with the parameter Threshold Δφ. Δφ is displayed in the functional measured value and can
be routed in a fault record and displayed in the fault log.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The functional measured values of Δφ in HMI are displayed differently in the following situations:
• If the Vector-jump protection function is inactive, the function value of Δφ is displayed as “---”
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has not picked up, the functional measured value of
Δφ is displayed as 0.0°
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has picked up, the functional measured value of Δφ
is displayed as a calculated value (for example, 12.0°) and remains unchanged until the next pickup of
the Vector-jump protection function.
Parameter: Threshold V1 min
• Default setting (_:2311:102) Threshold V1 min = 46.189 V

With the parameter Threshold V1 min, you can define the minimum threshold of the voltage band.
The setting value is closed to the allowed lower limit of the voltage band. The default setting is 80 % of the
rated positive-sequence voltage. The value of the rated positive-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3.
Parameter: Threshold V1 max
• Default setting (_:2311:101) Threshold V1 max = 75.058 V

With the parameter Threshold V1 max, you can define the maximum threshold of the voltage band.
The setting value is closed to the allowed higher limit of the voltage band. The default setting is 130 % of the
rated positive-sequence voltage. The value of the rated positive-sequence voltage is 100 V/√3.
Parameter: T Block
• Default setting (_:2311:6) T Block = 0.10 s

With the parameter T Block, you set the dropout delay of the Δφ stage.
When voltages are connected or disconnected, the overfunction can be avoided with the timer T Block.
Siemens recommends to use the default setting of the parameter T Block. Keep in mind that the parameter
T Block has always to be set to 2 cycles more than the measuring window for vector-jump measurement.
6.27.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Threshold V1 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.189 V
min
_:2311:101 General:Threshold V1 0.300 V to 175.000 V 75.058 V
max
_:2311:6 General:T Block 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:301 General:Δφ MV O
_:2311:300 General:Δφ out of meas. range SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.27.4 Δφ Stage
Logic
[lo_DeltaPhi_Stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-183 Logic Diagram of the Δφ Stage
In the logic diagram, the I1 < Release stage is instantiated. You can find more information in chapter
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the AND operation has no influence. The Operate indication is
issued under the following conditions:
• The parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked is set to no.
• The operate delay expires.
• The phase-angle differential exceeds the parameter Threshold Δφ.
Measurand
The Δφ stage gets the measured value Δφ from the general functionality.
Pickup
The Δφ stage compares the value of the vector jump Δφ with the Threshold Δφ.
If the value of the Threshold Δφ is exceeded, the pickup delay starts.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The vector jump Δφ is stored in an RS flip-flop. Trippings can be delayed by the associated time delay.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
• The parameter Mode is in the state off.
• The binary input signal >Block stage is active.
• The signal Δφ out of meas. range is active.

With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log. If you want the stage to have a warning indication only, set the parameter
Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes.
Parameter: Threshold Δφ
• Default setting (_:19261:101) Threshold Δφ = 10°

With the parameter Threshold Δφ, you can set the pickup value of the Δφ stage.
The parameter value to be set for the vector jump depends on the supply and load conditions. Load changes
cause a jump of the voltage vector. The value to be set must be established in accordance with the particular
power system. An estimation can be done based on the system equivalent circuit in Figure 6-181. A network
calculation considering the relevant source and load situations will be more precise.
If the setting for the parameter Threshold Δφ is too sensitive, every time loads are connected or discon-
nected, the protection function performs a network decoupling. Therefore, If no other calculated value is
applicable to the setting of this parameter, Siemens recommends using the default setting.

With the parameter Operate delay, you can set the operate delay of the Δφ stage. For the tripping stage,
set the operate delay between 0.00 s and 60.00 s.
Siemens recommends the default setting.
The following requirements can necessitate a change of the parameter Operate delay with respect to the
default setting:
• The operate indication should be transmitted with delay to a programmable logic.
• There shall be enough time for an external blocking to take effect.
Parameter: T Reset
• Default setting T Reset = 5.00 s

With the parameter T Reset, you can set the reset time for the Pickup indication stored in the RS flip-flop.
When the timer T Reset expires, the protection function is reset automatically.
The reset time meets the following conditions:
• The reset time depends on the decoupling requirements
• The reset time must expire before the circuit breaker is reclosed

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.27.4.3 Settings

Stage Δφ 1
_:19261:1 Stage Δφ 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:19261:2 Stage Δφ 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:19261:101 Stage Δφ 1:Threshold 2.0° to 30.0° 10.0°
Δφ
_:19261:6 Stage Δφ 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:19261:7 Stage Δφ 1:T Reset 0.00 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s

(Type)
Stage Δφ 1
_:19261:81 Stage Δφ 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:19261:54 Stage Δφ 1:Inactive SPS O
_:19261:52 Stage Δφ 1:Behavior ENS O
_:19261:53 Stage Δφ 1:Health ENS O
_:19261:55 Stage Δφ 1:Pickup ACD O
_:19261:56 Stage Δφ 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:19261:57 Stage Δφ 1:Operate ACT O
6.27.5 I1 < Release Stage
Logic
[lo_UndercurrentRelease_Stage, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-184 Logic Diagram of the I1 < Release Stage
The I1 < Release stage is an optional stage and is used to reduce the risk of overfunction.
The indication Undercurrent release is an additional safety criterion to avoid an unexpected trip. It indi-
cates a load loss of the connected line to the system and the phase-angle criterion is released. If any load in
the network is switched on or off, an unexpected trip can occur.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the Δφ stage works without current-flow criterion. You can find
more information in chapter 6.27.4.1 Description.
If the positive-sequence current falls below the parameter I< Threshold, the message Undercurrent
release is issued and is forwarded to the Δφ stage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: I< Threshold
• Default setting (_:101) I< Threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter I< Threshold, you can set the pickup value of the I < Release stage corresponding to
the specific application. Consider that the current measuring point must be on the line side. The parameter I<
Threshold depends on the load situation.
6.27.5.3 Settings

I1 < Release #
_:101 I1 < Release #:I< 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
Threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
I1 < Release #
_:300 I1 < Release #:Undercurrent release SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.28 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to:
• Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold
• Monitor agreed power limits and output warning indications
• Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines
• Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.
• Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function can be integrated in function groups, which provide measured
voltages and currents of the 3-phases for calculation of the power.
The 3-phase power protection (P,Q) function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and the
reactive power. The following stages are preconfigured:
• Power P>
• Power Q>
• Power P<
• Power Q<
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the func-
tion. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dw_GPP 3-phase structure, 2, en_US]
Logical Combination of Output Signals

The operate indications of the active and reactive power stage(s) can be logically combined in CFC. When an
operate indication is present in both the active and the reactive power stage, an alarm indication is generated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_GPP operate indication logical comb, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-186 Logical Combination of Operate Indications in CFC
6.28.3 Active Power Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_3-phase active power, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-187 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power P<).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
[dw_tilt-power active power, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-188 Tilt-Power Characteristic
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> or Power P<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, a picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
• Internally or externally via the binary input signal >Block stage
• The frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.28.4 Reactive Power Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_3phase reactive power, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-189 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power Q<).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_tilt-power reactive power, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-190 Tilt-Power Characteristic
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> or Power Q<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally
via the binary input signal >Block stage.
6.28.5 Application Example
The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-191 tripping zone defined by characteristics), an
alarm indication is generated. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications of
the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement. Figure 6-191
shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dw_GPP PQ diagram, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-191 Pickup Values and Characteristic Curves
6.28.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage
Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-phase
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P<.
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:105) Measured value = positive seq. power

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the active power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to
0 %.
NOTE
i If you use several settings groups, consider the following:
• The dropout value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive dropout value to a negative dropout value or vice versa is not allowed. As a
result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the dropout value of a stage in an additional settings group, instan-
tiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group,
disable the stage there.

A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 1.05.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Tilt power characteristic
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:103) Tilt power characteristic = +70°

The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the above
example, an inclination is required. The setting value is +70° (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-188).
• Recommended setting value (_:6271:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.
6.28.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage
Stage Type
In the example, the reactive power is to be monitored if it falls below the threshold. In the 3-phase circuit
breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power Q<.
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:105) Measured value = positive seq. power

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to 0
%.
NOTE
i If you use several settings groups, consider the following:
• The threshold value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive threshold value to a negative threshold value or vice versa is not allowed. As
a result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the threshold value of a stage in an additional settings group, instan-
tiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group,
disable the stage there.

A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 0.95.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Tilt power characteristic
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:103) Tilt power characteristic = +20°

The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the example
(see Figure 6-191), the power characteristic has a tilt of 20°. Set the Tilt power characteristic param-
eter to +20° (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-190).
• Recommended setting value (_:6331:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.
6.28.8 Settings

Power P> 1
_:6241:1 Power P> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6241:2 Power P> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6241:104 Power P> 1:Measured value • power of phase A positive seq.
power
• power of phase B
• power of phase C
• positive seq. power
_:6241:3 Power P> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 80.0 %
_:6241:101 Power P> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6241:103 Power P> 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6241:7 Power P> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6241:6 Power P> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power P< 1
_:6271:1 Power P< 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6271:2 Power P< 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6271:105 Power P< 1:Measured value • power of phase A positive seq.
power

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:6271:3 Power P< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 5.0 %
_:6271:101 Power P< 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.10 1.05
_:6271:103 Power P< 1:Tilt power char- -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
acteristic
_:6271:7 Power P< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6271:6 Power P< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q> 1
_:6301:1 Power Q> 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6301:2 Power Q> 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6301:105 Power Q> 1:Measured • power of phase A positive seq.
value power
_:6301:3 Power Q> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 70.0 %
_:6301:101 Power Q> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6301:103 Power Q> 1:Tilt power -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
characteristic
_:6301:7 Power Q> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6301:6 Power Q> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q< 1
_:6331:1 Power Q< 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6331:2 Power Q< 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:6331:105 Power Q< 1:Measured • power of phase A positive seq.
value power
_:6331:3 Power Q< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % -30.0 %
_:6331:101 Power Q< 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6331:103 Power Q< 1:Tilt power -89.0 ° to 89.0 ° 0.0 °
characteristic
_:6331:7 Power Q< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6331:6 Power Q< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

(Type)
Power P> 1
_:6241:81 Power P> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6241:54 Power P> 1:Inactive SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:6241:52 Power P> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6241:53 Power P> 1:Health ENS O
_:6241:55 Power P> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6241:56 Power P> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6241:57 Power P> 1:Operate ACT O
Power P< 1
_:6271:81 Power P< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6271:54 Power P< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6271:52 Power P< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6271:53 Power P< 1:Health ENS O
_:6271:55 Power P< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6271:56 Power P< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6271:57 Power P< 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q> 1
_:6301:81 Power Q> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6301:54 Power Q> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6301:52 Power Q> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6301:53 Power Q> 1:Health ENS O
_:6301:55 Power Q> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6301:56 Power Q> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6301:57 Power Q> 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q< 1
_:6331:81 Power Q< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6331:54 Power Q< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6331:52 Power Q< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6331:53 Power Q< 1:Health ENS O
_:6331:55 Power Q< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6331:56 Power Q< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6331:57 Power Q< 1:Operate ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.29 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function (ANSI 27/Q):
• Detects critical power-system situations, mainly in case of regenerative generation
• Prevents a voltage collapse in power system by disconnecting the power-generation facility from the
main power systems
• Ensures reconnection under stable power-system conditions
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.29.3 Protection Stage
Logic of the Stage
[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-193 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
• The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the para-
meterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.

• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage
• Measuring-voltage failure
For further information, refer to chapter 6.6.4.1 Description.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.3.7.1 Description .

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

yes The Protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is
detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as there is
no assurance that the Protection stage will function correctly if the
measuring voltage fails.
no The Protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure
is detected.

You use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to determine whether the operate delay and
operate signal are blocked during the detection of an inrush current.
Parameter: I> release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:13921:105) I> release threshold = 0.100 A

You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can pick up. The
default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: V< threshold value
• Recommended setting value (_:13921:103) V< threshold value = 85.000 V

You use the V< threshold value parameter to define one of the 2 pickup criteria. If all 3 phase-to-phase
voltages drop below the parameterized undervoltage threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
The setting should be set below the lower value of the permissible voltage range, according to the national
transmission code. In Germany, the recommended undervoltage threshold is 85 % of the rated voltage. There-
fore Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Q> threshold value
• Default setting (_:13921:3) Q> threshold value = 5 %

You use the Q> threshold value parameter to define the second of the 2 pickup criteria. If the positive
reactive power exceeds the parameterized Q> threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
In the following example, the pickup takes place if Q exceeds 5 % of the power-supply system rated power.
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Default setting (_:13921:6) Operate delay grid CB = 1.50 s
• Default setting (_:13921:108) Oper. delay generator CB = 0.50 s

You can set the Operate delay grid CB for the circuit breaker at the power-supply system connection
point, or set the Oper. delay generator CB for the circuit breaker of the facility, for example, the gener-
ator.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The time of the Operate delay grid CB should always be set longer than the time of the Oper. delay
generator CB.
Parameter: Trip interface contains
• Default setting (_:13921:101) Trip interface contains = operate (grid)

The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid).
You use the Trip interface contains parameter to define whether one or none of them will be
forwarded to the trip interface of the circuit-breaker interaction. The selected operate signal will trip the circuit
breaker that has been connected to the protection function group.
The setting depends on the specific application.
Parameter: Q sign
• Default setting (_:13921:102) Q sign = not reversed

The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the main protected object (for example, a feeder). You use the Q
sign parameter to reverse the sign and therefore the direction of the reactive-power flow Q. This reversal
may be required for specific application, where the main protected object (for example, a line towards the
main power systems) is in different direction to the power-generation facility.
not reversed The protected object is in the same direction as the power-gener-
ation facility.
reversed The protected object is not in the same direction as the power-
generation facility.
6.29.3.3 Settings

Prot. stage 1
_:13921:1 Prot. stage 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13921:2 Prot. stage 1:Operate & • no no
flt.rec. blocked
• yes
_:13921:10 Prot. stage 1:Blk. by • no yes
meas.-volt. failure
• yes
_:13921:27 Prot. stage 1:Blk. w. • no no
• yes
_:13921:101 Prot. stage 1:Trip inter- • no operate operate (grid)
face contains
• operate (generator)
• operate (grid)
_:13921:102 Prot. stage 1:Q sign • not reversed not reversed
• reversed
_:13921:3 Prot. stage 1:Q> 1.00 % to 200.00 % 5.00 %
threshold value
_:13921:103 Prot. stage 1:V< 3.000 V to 175.000 V 85.000 V
threshold value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:13921:105 Prot. stage 1:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13921:108 Prot. stage 1:Oper. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
generator CB
_:13921:6 Prot. stage 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s
delay grid CB

(Type)
Group indicat.
Prot. stage 1
_:13921:81 Prot. stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13921:54 Prot. stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13921:52 Prot. stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13921:53 Prot. stage 1:Health ENS O
_:13921:60 Prot. stage 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:13921:55 Prot. stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13921:301 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(gen.) ACT O
_:13921:302 Prot. stage 1:Operate (generator) ACT O
_:13921:56 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(grid) ACT O
_:13921:57 Prot. stage 1:Operate (grid) ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.29.4 Reclosure Stage
Logic of the Stage
[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-194 Logic Diagram of Reclosure Stage in Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.
Release for Reconnecting

The release for reconnecting the power-generation facility is given under the following conditions:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the threshold value.
• The power frequency is within a specified range.
• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
External Start of Reclosure Time Delay

Reclosure time delay can be started via the binary input signal >V, f trip, which can be connected to
external voltage and frequency protection trip signals.

The stage can be blocked via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Parameter: Configuration
• Default setting (_:13951:102) Configuration = no stage

You use the Configuration parameter to define which operate signal of specific protection functions starts
the release time delay of the Reclosure stage:
• Overfrequency protection
• Underfrequency protection
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
• Protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection

When the protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection is selected, only the signal
Operate (generator) can start the release time delay of this stage. The signal Operate (grid) cannot
start the release time delay.
The configuration depends on the specific application.
Parameter: I> release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:106) I> release threshold = 0.100 A

You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can work.
The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: V> threshold value
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:101) V> threshold value = 95.000 V

You use the V> threshold value parameter to set one of the 2 release criteria. The setting should be set
above the lower value of the allowed voltage range, according to the national transmission code. In Germany,
the recommended overvoltage threshold is 95 % of the rated voltage. Therefore Siemens recommends using
the default setting.
Parameter: Frequency range
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:104) f difference positive = 0.05 Hz
• Recommended setting value (_:13951:105) f difference negative = -2.50 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f differ-
ence positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the lower
frequency range limit.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
Parameter: Time delay
• Default setting (_:13951:108) Time delay = 0.00 s

You use the Time delay parameter to specify the minimum time delay for releasing the reconnection of the
power-generation facility after tripping by protection.
The setting depends on the specific application.
6.29.4.3 Settings

Reclos. stage
_:13951:1 Reclos. stage:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:13951:101 Reclos. stage:V> 3.000 V to 340.000 V 95.000 V
threshold value
_:13951:104 Reclos. stage:f difference 0.01 Hz to 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz
positive
_:13951:105 Reclos. stage:f difference -5.00 Hz to -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz
negative
_:13951:106 Reclos. stage:I> release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:13951:108 Reclos. stage:Time delay 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 0.00 s
_:13951:102 Reclos. stage:Configura- Setting options depend on
tion configuration

(Type)
Reclos. stage
_:13951:81 Reclos. stage:>Block stage SPS I
_:13951:501 Reclos. stage:>V, f trip SPS I
_:13951:54 Reclos. stage:Inactive SPS O
_:13951:52 Reclos. stage:Behavior ENS O
_:13951:53 Reclos. stage:Health ENS O
_:13951:301 Reclos. stage:Release closure ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.30 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new Circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dwstrbfp-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-196 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system checks continuously whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[losvsbfp-090712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-196 Function Logic Overview
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function is started by device-internal protection functions and/or exter-
nally (via a binary input or an interface, such as GOOSE). Figure 6-197 and Figure 6-198 show the function-
ality.
Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage that has to control the local circuit breaker starts the circuit-
breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In the default setting,
the starting signal Internal start (see Figure 6-197) is held when the pickup signal has a falling edge or
the protection function has tripped. The Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only drop
out if the circuit breaker is detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker auxil-
iary contact criterion. If necessary, the Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the
pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
Using routing, you can specify whether individual protection stages or protection functions are used as a
starting source or whether starting happens only externally.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device Figure 2-6).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loanwint-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-197 Internal Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[loanwext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-198 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel operation, the start is initiated with the binary input signal >Start only.
In 2-channel operation, the binary input signal >Release must also be activated to initiate the start. In the
default setting, the starting signal External start drops out immediately when the input signals have a
falling edge (see Figure 6-199). If necessary, the starting signal can be held. In this case the start remains
active when the binary input signals have a falling edge.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set supervision time of the corre-
sponding signal without the function picking up, an error in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corre-
sponding signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output,
and the Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal
drops out.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.
• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the super-
vision blocking the function.
If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of the settable supervision time for
the starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes
to the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-199).
[logikext-070611-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-199 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker switch position. A circuit-
breaker pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase
currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the
associated threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the
threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with the
sensitive threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of the crite-
rion.
If you are using the transformer connection type 3-phase, 2prim.trans., the ground current is neither meas-
ured nor calculated. The plausibility check via the ground current is therefore not possible. The setting
Direct release via the ground current does not lead to a pickup of the circuit-breaker failure protection.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
In the case of ground faults, the sensitive threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase currents as
well. The current-flow criterion is fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value. The phase-
current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for the switch-
over.
If you set the 3I0 criterion parameter to Direct release, you prevent the plausibility check of the
zero-sequence current. In this way, a pickup only by way of this current can be achieved. With the Threshold
3I0 dir. release parameter, you set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the I2 criterion parameter to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. With the Threshold I2 dir. release parameter, you set the threshold
value to be exceeded.
If you set the I2 criterion parameter to Direct release, a plausibility check is performed via the phase
currents with 1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lostrom1-030211-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-200 Current-Flow Criterion
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion

Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the
circuit-breaker position.
The double-point indication 3-pole position (from the Circuit-breaker function block) is used to deter-
mine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed. If the double-point indication is not routed, the
output is an error message. Furthermore, the Health signal changes to the state Warning.
The detection of a static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact criterion is not used (the internal signal Aux.co.crit.: CB Clsd is disabled).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lokriter-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-201 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contact Criterion
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker is closed. The current-flow criterion and the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because the current-flow criterion is the most reliable criterion for detecting whether the circuit
breaker is closed. This means that the circuit breaker is deemed to be closed if it is closed according to the
current-flow criterion but at the same time open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker is detected as closed and the starting condition is present, the function picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the delay is running, the system checks continuously
whether the circuit breaker has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the circuit breaker is checked on
the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow criterion because it is preferred. If
until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values has been detected, the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion becomes effective.
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the circuit
breaker to be open (dropout with auxiliary contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-197 and Figure 6-199). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur on the falling edge of the starting signal (that is, when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protec-
tion function trips), holding of the start signal must be disabled.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loanreg1-030211-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-202 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. If the local CB was not yet tripped, for example, in the event of an external start of the
circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of the circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1
elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed and the backup
tripping signal Tripping T2 is output. If there is a protection interface in the device, if needed a transfer-trip
signal can be sent to the opposite end.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With help of the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named global parameter that is set in the Device settings.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo-bbp-verza-3ph.vsd, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-203 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Figure 6-204 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loextpol-021112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-204 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Start, Tripping Repetition, and 3-‑Pole Tripping
(T2)
Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function)

Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit-
breaker interaction entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device, Figure 2-2).
By default, the function can be started by any tripping of the internal protection functions that control the
local circuit breaker. Depending on the specific application, it can be necessary to exclude certain device-
internal protection functions from starting the CBFP. For instance, busbar disconnection following a local
circuit-breaker failure can be undesirable in the case of load-shedding applications or ground faults in isolated/
resonant-grounded systems.
Where a start exclusively from external sources is required, all internal protection functions must be routed so
that they are excluded as a starting source.
Parameter: Start via binary input
• Default setting (_:107) Start via binary input = no

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

no If no external start is intended, the parameter is set to no.
2 channel 2-channel start is used if there is a risk that the circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion causes a tripping due to a faulty activation of the start binary input.
This is the case in the following situations:
a) The CBFP pickup value (threshold value) is set to less than the load
current.
b) There can be operating conditions under which the current flow is higher
than the pickup value.
To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-channel
start.
1 channel The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit of a binary
input is available for starting the CBFP.
Input Signals: >Start, >Release

The start and release input signals have a filtering time of 10 ms as default setting. If a transient control signal
to the binary inputs is to be expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and due to
environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended. This delays the start of the CBFP function.
Input Signals Description
>Start The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection
device (see Figure 6-204).
>Release The release input signal is normally linked with the pickup of the external
protection device (see Figure 6-204). Another common configuration is the
parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs (start and
release).
Parameter: Supervision time release signal
• Default setting (_:111) Sup.time f. release signal = 0.06 s

The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal. If the pickup or tripping of
the external protection is used as release signal, the default setting can be kept. If it is ensured that the release
signal is always present before the starting signal, the time can be set to 0.
Parameter: Holding internal start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:105) Holding int. start signal = yes

yes For an internal start, the starting signal is hold. The dropout of the CBFP
depends exclusively on the determination of the circuit-breaker position.
This setting must be selected if it is not ensured that all 3 poles of the CB
have opened when the pickup signal of the protection function has a falling
edge.
no Holding of the starting signal can be disabled if it is ensured by the applica-
tion that the CB has reliably opened when the starting signal has a falling
edge, or if the CBFP is explicitly required to drop out when the starting
signal has a falling edge.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
EXAMPLE
Holding internal starting signal (setting value: Yes)

In the event of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.
Parameter: Holding external start signal
• Recommended setting value (_:106) Holding ext. start signal = no

no The CBFP drops out when the external starting signal has a falling edge. This
setting prevents the CBFP from generating a tripping signal when an
unwanted pulse is received at the binary input and the current flow is high
enough.
yes You can hold the starting signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is
open when the external starting signal has a falling edge.
EXAMPLE
Holding external starting signal (setting value: Yes)

The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start.
Parameter: Threshold phase current/Threshold sensitive
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold sensitive = approx. 0.50 Isc,min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
Input Signal: >Threshold sensitive

In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power-supply system (exam-
ples: opposite end of line open, switching onto a ground fault), the setting of the parameter Threshold
sensitive can be applied dynamically to all currents – including phase currents – in the presence of ground
faults. For this purpose, the binary signal >Threshold sensitive must be activated. This can be done via a
device-internal function for ground-fault detection (if provided in the device), for example, using Overvoltage
protection with zero-sequence voltage. In this case, the pickup of the V0> function must be linked with the
binary signal. Alternatively, the signal can be coupled from a separate device for sensitive ground-fault detec-
tion via a binary input.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion allowed for protection
• Recommended setting value (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit. allowed = no

no If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed,
Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite-
rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the
current flow is the most reliable criterion.
w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.' The auxiliary contacts must be permitted as a further criterion in applica-
tions (see the following examples) where the current is no reliable criterion
for determining the circuit-breaker position.
Parameter: 3I0 criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:120) 3I0 criterion = Plausibility check

Plausibility check The ground current serves only for the plausibility check of the phase
currents. The threshold for the ground current uses the value set in the
Threshold sensitive parameter.
Direct release The current-flow criterion can be fulfilled only by the ground current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The
threshold for the ground current uses the value set in the Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter in this case.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To ensure a Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
also with this setting, you can set the 3I0 criterion to Direct release and set the Threshold 3I0
dir. release to be appropriately smaller than the Threshold phase current.
Parameter: I2 criterion
• Recommended setting value (_:121) I2 criterion = Plausibility check

Plausibility check The negative-sequence current serves only for the plausibility check of the
phase currents. The threshold for the negative-sequence current uses the
value set in the Threshold sensitive parameter.
Direct release If a phase current exceeds 1/3 of the Threshold I2 dir. release, the
current-flow criterion can be fulfilled just by the negative-sequence current
without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value. The
threshold for the negative-sequence current uses the value set in the
Threshold I2 dir. release parameter in this case.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have a Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-
anced faults also with this setting, you can set the I2 criterion to Direct release and set the
Threshold 3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than the Threshold phase current.
Parameter: Threshold 3I0 dir. release

Recommended setting value (_:122) Threshold 3I0 dir. release = approx. 0.5 Iscmin
This parameter is effective only if the 3I0 criterionparameter is set to Direct release. Siemens
recommends setting the threshold to half the minimum short-circuit current (Iscmin) to ensure that the discon-
nection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out quickly.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Threshold I2 dir. release

Recommended setting value (_:123) Threshold I2 dir. release = approx. 0.5 I2min
This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterion parameter is set to Direct release. Siemens recom-
mends setting the parameter to half the permissible negative-sequence current (I2min) to achieve a fast fault
clearing in case of an undesired negative-sequence system component.
Parameter: Monit. time for BI ">Start"/Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release"
• Default setting (_:124) Monit. time for BI ">Start" = 15 s
• Default setting (_:125) Monit.tm. f.BI ">Release" = 15 s

With these parameters, you set the monitoring time of the binary inputs >Start/>Release. If the Circuit-
breaker failure protection does not pick up during this monitoring time, a failure in the binary-input circuit is
assumed. Siemens recommends retaining the default setting of 15 s.
EXAMPLES
Applications which require you to permit the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion:
• Tripping of the high and low-voltage side CB on the transformer. If only one of the 2 CBs trips, there is no
more current flow.
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions
• Injection of the tripping signal from Buchholz protection
Parameter: Dropout
• Recommended setting value (_:104) Dropout = with effective criterion

The parameter Dropout is available if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted (see param-
eter CB aux.cont. crit. allowed).
with effective crite- Siemens recommends keeping the default setting, because it prefers the
rion current as a reliable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for
dropout of the CBFP function.
w. aux.c. and Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators (see the
curr.crit. preceding examples) in which the current flow is such that the current is no
longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB.
Parameter: Retrip after T1
• Default setting (_:108) Retrip after T1 = no

no Where no redundant CB control is provided, a repetition of the trip signal to
the local CB is not required.
start T2 after T1 Where a redundant CB control (2nd trip coil with 2 trip circuits) is provided,
a repetition of the trip signal to the local CB makes sense.
Siemens recommends the setting start T2 after T1 because it
provides a clear chronological separation of the processes for trip repeat
and backup tripping. Remember here that the overall fault-clearance time in
case of a failure of the local CB is the sum of T1 and T2.
parallel start T2, T1 As an alternative to the setting start T2 after T1, the user can start T2
and T1 in parallel.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip
• Default setting (_:109) Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip = 0.05 s

The parameter is visible only when retripping is set.
The setting depends on the user's philosophy.
The following settings make sense:
• If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.
• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms

(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T1) 130 ms
Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip
• Default setting (_:110) Delay T2 for 3-pole trip = 0.13 s

This setting has to ensure that after opening of the local CB the function drops out reliably and that backup
tripping is avoided under all circumstances. The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1.
If T2 is started after T1, there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms

(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Security Factor 2
Total (time T2) 130 ms
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
EXAMPLE
Simultaneous start of T2 and T1
Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms

opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms
Parameter: Minimum operate time
• Default setting (_:112) Minimum operate time = -

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device
contacts will burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reaches its final position open
reliably after a control operation.
Input Signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a default filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input
signal from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be
caused by the pressure change when the CB opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient pickup of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the CB
design.
Output Signal: Retrip T1

If only 1 control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, it is not mandatory to route the output signal
because the signal also controls the circuit-breaker trip logic.
If a 2nd Control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output Signal: Trip T2

In order to operate the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2) must be routed to
a binary output; andif necessary, to an interface (intertripping to opposite end).
6.30.5 Settings

50BF Ad.CBF #
_:1 50BF Ad.CBF #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:105 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no yes
int. start signal
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:107 50BF Ad.CBF #:Start via • no no
binary input
• 2 channel
• 1 channel
_:106 50BF Ad.CBF #:Holding • no no
ext. start signal
• yes
_:111 50BF Ad.CBF #:Sup.time 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
f. release signal
_:103 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB • no no
aux.cont. crit. allowed
• w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.'
_:104 50BF Ad.CBF #:Dropout • with effective criterion with effective
criterion
• w. aux.c. and curr.crit.
_:108 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip • no no
after T1
• start T2 after T1
• parallel start T2, T1
_:102 50BF Ad.CBF #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
phase current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
sensitive 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:109 50BF Ad.CBF #:Delay T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.050 s
for 3-pole retrip
_:110 50BF Ad.CBF #:Delay T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s 0.130 s
for 3-pole trip
_:112 50BF Ad.CBF #:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:120 50BF Ad.CBF #:3I0 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
• Plausibility check
_:121 50BF Ad.CBF #:I2 crite- • Direct release Plausibility
rion check
• Plausibility check
3I0 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
I2 dir. release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:124 50BF Ad.CBF #:Monit. 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
time for BI ">Start"
_:125 50BF Ad.CBF 0.05 s to 60.00 s 15.00 s
#:Monit.tm. f.BI
">Release"

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
50BF Ad.CBF #
_:501 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Start SPS I
_:502 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Release SPS I
_:82 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Block function SPS I
_:503 50BF Ad.CBF #:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF Ad.CBF #:>Threshold sensitive SPS I
_:54 50BF Ad.CBF #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF Ad.CBF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF Ad.CBF #:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF Ad.CBF #:Pickup ACD O
_:305 50BF Ad.CBF #:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:306 50BF Ad.CBF #:Trip T2 ACT O
_:302 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI start routing miss. SPS O
_:304 50BF Ad.CBF #:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. SPS O
_:300 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'start' SPS O
_:307 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. no BI release SPS O
_:301 50BF Ad.CBF #:Fail. BI 'release' SPS O
_:315 50BF Ad.CBF #:Immediate Operate SPS O
_:316 50BF Ad.CBF #:CB failure pole ACD O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.31 External Trip Initiation 3-Pole
The External trip initiation function:
• Processes any signals from external protection or supervision devices
• Enables the integration of any signals from external protection equipment in the indication and tripping
processing, for example from transient ground-fault relays or Buchholz protection
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end
The External trip initiation function contains one stage. You can instantiate the External trip initiation func-
tion in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dwstrext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[lotrip3p-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-206 Logic Diagram for the External Trip-Initiation Stage
Binary Input Signal >External Trip

The binary input signal >External trip starts the Pickup and the Operate delay.
Blocking the Stage

The stage can be switched to ineffective via a number of signals. If the stage is in the pickup state at the time
of blocking, it will be immediately reset. However, the operate indication remains stopped for the minimum
operating time (_:102) Minimum operate time.

The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application. After expiry of the Operate delay
the time-out and tripping are signaled. The duration of the initiation signal as well as the adjustable minimum
command time determine the signal duration of the Operate.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.31.5 Settings

Stage 1
• on
• test
blocked
• yes

(Type)
Stage 1
_:901:82 Stage 1:>Block function SPS I
_:901:501 Stage 1:>External trip SPS I

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.32 Automatic Reclosing Function
The Automatic reclosing function:
• Automatically closes overhead lines after arc short-circuits
• Is only permissible for overhead lines, because only the possibility of self-activated extinguishing of an
arc short-circuit exists here
• Can be controlled by integrated protection functions and by external protection devices
• The automatic reclosing can occur through an external automatic reclosing function via binary inputs.
The automatic reclosing after switching off through a short-circuit protection is taken over by the automatic
reclosing function (AREC). The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time
automatic reclosing where the second automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw2awewz-090210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-207 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing With Action Time (2nd Reclosing Successful)
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption
cycles can work with different parameters.
The Automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers. In a function group for circuit
breakers, one of the 3 types of functions illustrated in the following figures can be used. The Automatic
reclosing function has a central function control.
[dw_structure ARC 7SJ81, 1, en_US]
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

The Cyclic automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-209) allows up to 8 reclosing attempts. Here each disruption
cycle can work with different settings.
For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can add
and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwzykawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-209 Structure/Embedding of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function

The cooperation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs via the function
mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-210). The function only provides
binary inputs for the influence of the protection functions in the SIPROTEC protection device. The external
reclosing device delivers the close command. The SIPROTEC protection functions then provide for the trip
commands.
[dwextawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-210 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function
Function Control
The Automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the chapter Function/Stage Control.
[loarcfkt-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-211 Function Control for the Automatic Reclosing Function

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.32.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions
The Automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
• The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages. The start is independent of the set operating mode for the AREC.
• Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started, the
blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
• The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of special
stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.
[loawesig-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-212 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions
The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-212. The configuration occurs in a matrix view
in DIGSI, see the following figure..

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-213 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be conducted separately
• For starting the automatic reclosing function and
• For the blocking of the automatic reclosing function

The Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which
the external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
6.32.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
6.32.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

For the cyclic automatic reclosing function, there are 4 operating modes, from which one can be selected for
the parameterization (parameter (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode).
The selection of the operating mode is dependent on the tripping behavior of the protection functions and the
circuit breaker.
For applications with 3-pole tripping, all 4 operating modes are available.
• Operating mode 1: with op., with act. time
• Operating mode 2: w.pickup, w. action time
• Operating mode 3: with op., w/o act. time
• Operating mode 4: w.pickup, w/o act. time

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Operating Mode 1: with op., with act. time

The operating mode with op., with act. time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the tripping type and operate time of the protection function(s). With this operating mode, the automatic
reclosing must be started with the operate indications. Additionally, the general pickup must also be consid-
ered.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and clearing operate indication, the automatic reclosing
cycle to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the
expiring automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example in Figure 6-214 shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle
1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Cycle 2 is now active.
Within the following reclaim time, there will be another pickup and tripping. Since cycle 2 is already complete,
these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The 2nd operate indication comes during the running
action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is now active.
[dwarce1d-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-214 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/With Action Time
Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing func-
tion. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with
longer tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed
faults this does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time
allows for different automatic reclosing cycles depending on the operate time of the protection function(s).
Operating Mode 2: w.pickup, w. action time

The operating mode w.pickup, w. action time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the operate time and type of fault. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole tripping.
With this operating mode, the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the
protection functions. Additionally, the pickup sample from the conductor pickups and the general pickup are
considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is active
with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.
[dwarcbm2-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-215 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/With Action Time
Operating Mode 3: with op., w/o act. time

With the operating mode with op., w/o act. time, the respective dead time is started after each trip
command. The pickups are not considered. If more than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the
sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is identical with the cycle number (1, 2, and 3.).
[dwaweb3d-240810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-216 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/Without Action Time
Operating Mode 4: w.pickup, w/o act. time

With the operating mode w.pickup, w/o act. time, the automatic reclosing must be started with the
operate indications from the protection functions. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole
tripping.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The start of the dead time occurs after each trip command. Additionally, the pickup sample from the
conductor pickups is considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
[dwarcbs4-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-217 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/Without Action Time
6.32.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

In Figure 6-218, the functional structure of the cyclic automatic reclosing function is illustrated as a block
diagram. The figure displays the important signals, coming from outside of the cyclic automatic reclosing
function, and the most important signals between the individual function blocks.
The automatic reclosing function works as a state machine. From the idle state AREC ready, the automatic
reclosing function gets through the tripping or pickup indications of the protection functions to the Dead time
state. After expiration of the dead time, the subsequent state is reached with the closing indication. The
reclaim time is also started together with the closing indication. If the reclaim time can expire without further
operate or pickup indications, the automatic reclosing is successful and the automatic reclosing function turns
back to idle state.
If the automatic reclosing function is restarted during the current reclaim time, there will be either a dynamic
blocking or other reclosing cycles will be executed. If other reclosing cycles are possible, there will be a dead
time start and the described process starts again.
After the end of a dynamic blocking, the automatic reclosing function switches back to idle state or it goes
into the state Static Blocking if the blocking condition is permanently present. In the following sections, the
individual function blocks are described in detail.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lozykawe-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-218 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Block Diagram of Automatic Reclosing
6.32.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping

The operate indications are used as starting signals. For operating modes with action time, the start of the
action time(s) occurs with the pickup messages. During all operating modes, the pickup indications are also
required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Applications with 3-Pole Tripping

For applications with only 3-pole tripping options, the internal operate indications are always 3-pole. For
external starts, there is a binary input, which signalizes a 3-pole tripping of the external protection device.
The outputs of the input logic signalize that the reclosing start has occurred through a 3-pole operate indica-
tion.
[lobtaaus-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-219 Input Logic for Operating Modes: With Tripping
6.32.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup

The operate indications and the pickup indications are used as starting signals. The internal pickup indications
are processed selective to the phase. Through binary inputs, the pickup information can also be coupled by
external protection devices (>Pickup A for start, >Pickup B for start and >Pickup C for
start). Optionally, the pickup information can be externally captured as a pickup sample, thus, as a 1-phase,
2-phase and 3-phase pickup.
The outputs of the input logic signalize if the automatic reclosing start occurs through a 1-phase, 2-phase, or
3-phase pickup:
• On Start with 3-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing outgoing pickup indication.
• On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.
• On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications.
During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all
operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.
[lobtaanr-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-220 Input Logic for Operating Modes: With Pickup
6.32.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-221. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.
Start-Signal Supervision Time

The start-signal supervision stops the automatic reclosing if the short circuit is not switched off within the
normal time; for example, in the case of a circuit-breaker failure.
With the first raising operate indication, the start-signal supervision time is initiated, parameter Start
signal supervis.time. The time is stopped as soon as no operate indication is active.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked if there is an expiration of the start-signal supervision time
through a long operate indication. The blocking lasts until the operate indication stops, extended by a further
0.5 s.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Transition to the Dead-Time State

The transition of the automatic reclosing function to the dead-time state occurs for:
• Clearing operate indications if none of the signal inputs for operate indications are active
• or if the circuit breaker can no longer be recognized as 3-pole
• and the start-signal supervision time is not expired

Additionally, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The circuit breaker signalizes the readiness for automatic reclosing typically through a binary input. If the
circuit breaker is not ready, the automatic reclosing function can be statically blocked. In this situation,
the automatic closing function is not in idle state automatic closing function ready. The control of the
circuit-breaker readiness is optional and can be turned off through settings, see also chapter
6.32.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and 6.32.4.17 Blockings.
• The circuit breaker must be closed before the 3-pole trip command. This condition is not considered if the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead time state through the binary input >Dead time start delay.
As long the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not
be started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set,
parameter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is
present longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the end of the binary
signal, additionally extended by another 0.5 s. See also chapter 6.32.4.17 Blockings.
[logistar-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-221 Logic for Function Block Start
6.32.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-222, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing function if the Dead time

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
aft. 1-pole trip 23 is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of fauts that lead to
1-pole tripping.
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
23 is not available for devices with only 3-pole tripping

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loauswir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-222 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time
6.32.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-223, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loanrwir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-223 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time
6.32.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-224, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing function after 1-pole tripping
if the Dead time aft. 1-pole trip 24 to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respec-
24 is not available for devices with only 3-pole tripping

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
tive automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can
block the associated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead to
1-pole tripping.
[loauowrk-210311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-224 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time
6.32.4.9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-225, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
[loanowrk-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-225 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/Without Action Time
6.32.4.10 Stage Release

The function block Stage release creates output indications for the release or switching over of special stages
for protection functions (stage release in the 1st cycle or stage release in the n. cycle). Examples for this are
the release of overreaching zones with distance protection and the dynamic adjustment of delays or threshold
values with overcurrent protection.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Figure 6-226 shows the tripping stage release for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. With available automatic
reclosing functions, the tripping stage release typically occurs up to the expiration of the dead time. The cycle
number in this state is on 1. However, if the automatic reclosing cycle is set only for 1-phase 25, the tripping
stage release will be reset to the beginning of the 1-phase dead time. This is necessary, since every additional
evolving fault that occurs within the dead time causes a 3-pole cut-off, and subsequently, the automatic
reclosing function can no longer take place.
[lo1awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-226 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle
The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical to
the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end is open.
[lo2awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-227 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting With the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle
6.32.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes With Tripping

In the Dead time function block, that dead time which corresponds with the previous trip command is started.
After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status Switch on.
Figure 6-228shows the dead time logic.
There are the following time stages that can be set differently:
• Dead time after 3-pole tripping
• Dead time after evolving fault

Setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to ∞ (= invalid) avoids an automatic reclosing after
3-pole tripping.
25 not for devices with only 3-phase tripping

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time),
switching to an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption occurs. With the 3-pole cut-off of the
evolving fault, a separate adjustable dead time for the evolving fault begins. The total dead time is composed
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the first disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault to ∞
(= invalid), no other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping by the evolving fault. The tripping
through evolving faults is then finished.
[lopausjk-021212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-228 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping
6.32.4.12 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Pickup

In the dead time function block, the dead time corresponding to the type of short circuit that led to the trip
command is started. The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with
3-pole tripping. After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status
Switch on. Figure 6-229 shows the dead time logic.
There are 4 time stages that can be set differently:
• Dead time after 1-phase short circuits
• Dead time for evolving faults

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup .
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time),
a separate dead time for faults begins with the stopping of the fault. The total dead time is composed of the
part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the 1st disruption plus the dead
time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the Dead time aft. evolv. fault to invalid, no
other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault. The tripping through
evolving faults is then finished.
[lopauare-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-229 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Pickup
6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time

Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time. This may be
the case during 1-pole tripping and there is a short circuit in the non-switched conductors after this.
After 3-pole tripping there may also be evolving faults if the line is fed through a second (non-3-pole) opened
circuit breaker, for example, for systems with a 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The evolving-fault detection is divided into components:
• Detection of Evolving Faults
• Evolving-Faults Processing
• 3-pole circuit-breaker intertripping during evolving faults

The procedure during evolving faults is illustrated in Figure 6-230.
Detection of Evolving Faults

For the detection of an evolving fault, the following criteria can be selected through parameters:
• Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with trip

For this setting, any tripping during the dead time leads to evolving-fault detection. At any tripping it is
decided if an internal protection function is tripped or if the tripping is signaled through a binary input.
Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured for the start of the Automatic
reclosing function or not.
• Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with pickup

Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function configured for the Automatic
reclosing function start is picked up or if an external pickup is recognized through a binary input.
• Binary input >Evolving fault start

The evolving-fault detection can also be introduced through a binary input without an internal protection
pickup being available.
Reaction to Evolving Faults

After a recognized evolving fault, the Automatic reclosing function can be influenced in 2 ways.
• Parameter Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79

As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, the reclosing function will be blocked. There are no other
reclosing attempts and the Automatic reclosing function is blocked until the pickup and operate indica-
tions causing the evolving fault disappear.
• Parameter Response to evolv. faults = strt. evol.flt.dead time

As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption is
switched to. The Automatic reclosing function does not allow any 1-pole tripping until the fault is solved
or there is a final switch off; thus, every following trip command will be 3-pole. When the evolving fault is
fixed, the separate dead time for faults will start, see also chapter Dead time. The further process is as by
3-pole cycles.
[dwbspffe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-230 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault
For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-231.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lofolsjk-021212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-231 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of Evolving-Fault Detection
6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command

After the expiration of the dead time, the Automatic reclosing function is in the closing state.
The closing state can depend on the following influences, see Figure 6-232:
• Through a synchrocheck if the circuit breaker was opened during the 3-pole dead time
• Through the readiness of the circuit breaker signaled through the binary input
• Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the
circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation. With the release of the closing indi-
cation, the Automatic reclosing function switches to the reclaim time state.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[loeinsha-141111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-232 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Closing Indication
Testing the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before Closing

For each of the automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a test of the circuit-breaker readiness should occur
directly before closing (parameter CB ready check bef.close, Figure 6-233). Independent of this, a test
of the circuit-breaker readiness before the start of the 1st automatic reclosing cycle can be set, see
6.32.4.5 Start and chapter 6.32.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness .

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lolsvoei-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-233 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before
Closing
Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a synchrocheck should be executed and
which functionality should be used here, see Figure 6-234. You can use the internal synchrocheck only if the
device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the Automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.
[losyncro-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-234 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism
Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the Auto-
matic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the Automatic reclosing
function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
• Close command after 3-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc
• Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the 2nd cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)
Creation of the Signal Remote close signal

The cyclic automatic reclosing function can create information Remote close signal. This information
can be transferred to the protection device as a binary signal on the line that is to be protected on the oppo-
site end. Furthermore, the binary signal may be arranged as information for transmission via an existing
protection interface.
The information Remote close signal is generated by the closing logic. It can be delayed by a set time
over the local close indication. With this delay, you can make sure that information is only set if the automatic
reclosing was successful and there was no further tripping. The pulse duration of the inter-close signal has a
fixed length of 500 ms.
6.32.4.15 Reclaim Time

With the assignment of the close command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time
state. During this time, it is decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.
• If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle, and
thus the entire automatic reclosing, was successful.
• If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to
continue the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the auto-
matic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.
Short Circuits during Running Reclaim Time

A trip command that occurs during a reclaim time leads to a cancellation of the reclaim time. If further auto-
matic reclosing cycles are allowed, the regulation of the cycle depends on if the automatic reclosing function
is executed in an operating mode with action times or without action times, see Figure 6-235.
• With operating modes with action time, the action times of all higher cycles are started with the begin-
ning of the new general pickup if these are not blocked. The cycle with the lowest cycle number is
selected, whose action time is not yet expired with the incoming trip indication. If no further cycles are
possible or if the action times of all possible cycles are expired before the operate indication, there will be
no further reclosing.
• With the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[losperre-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-235 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the reclaim time
6.32.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness

The Automatic reclosing function requires the circuit-breaker readiness for the following purposes, see
Figure 6-236:
• Recognition of the circuit-breaker readiness from the beginning:

In idle state of the Automatic reclosing function, an unavailable circuit breaker leads to the blocking of
the Automatic reclosing function. This monitoring is optional and must be switched off through settings
if the readiness signal is not available for the protection device.
• Analysis of the circuit-breaker readiness directly before the close command:

For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, it can be set whether the circuit-breaker readiness
is a requirement for the assignment of the close command. This monitoring is also optional.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lolsbere-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-236 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness
6.32.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-237:
• Static blocking
• Dynamic blocking
Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The dynamic blocking is signaled with
the indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to the static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary Inactive
input or internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the
parameter Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for automatic reclosing function, Inactive
recognition through binary input. This cause can be switched on
or off through the parameter CB ready check bef.close.
Circuit breaker of non-closed 3-pole, recognition through binary Inactive
input.
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
• Automatic reclosing cycle is not set.

• Automatic reclosing cycles are set, but all are blocked, for
example, via binary input.
• There is no internal device function and no binary input
configured for starting the automatic reclosing function.
• With operating modes with tripping:
– both 1-pole and 3-pole cycles are blocked via binary
inputs
• With operating modes with pickup:
– 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase automatic reclosing
cycles, the blocking is done through binary inputs.
• With operating modes without action time:
– the first automatic reclosing cycle is blocked via binary
input.
• With the dead-line check functionality:
– if the voltage measurement is not available or is
disrupted.
Dynamic Blocking
The automatic reclosing function is blocked dynamically if a blocking condition occurs while an automatic
reclosing function is running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked in intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can be
removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime, the
blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
Block. by no cycle
• With operating modes with tripping:
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs during the
automatic reclosing function start input, however, the auto-
matic reclosing function does not start in accordance with
the parameterization for this type of tripping, the respective
dead time will be set to invalid.
• With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup indication occurs
during the automatic reclosing function starting process,
but the automatic reclosing function may not be started in
accordance with the parameterization for this type of
pickup.
If a protection function causes the automatic reclosing function Not ready
to be blocked in accordance with the configuration Block. by protection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of the Not ready
dead time through the binary input >Dead time start Blk.by max. d.t. delay
delay expires without the binary input becoming inactive
during this time lapse
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after Not ready
the expiration of the maximum dead-time prolongation are not Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
fulfilled before the assignment of the close command
If the inquiry of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready
directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup.
the maximum dead-time prolongation expires Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input Not ready
>Delay close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead time Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
extension is exceeded before the assignment of the close
command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to Not ready
evolv. faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the start-signal supervision time for the operate indication Not ready
starting from the automatic reclosing function or the starting Blk.by strtsig.superv.
binary input expires.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the automatic reclosing function a dead time Not ready
is already running and a blocking binary input is active, with the Block. by binary input
following binary inputs:
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of automatic reclosing attempts is Not ready
reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles Blk.by action time exp
expire without a trip command
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not
fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the
measuring voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the
dynamic blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued
failure of the measuring voltage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lobloawe-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-237 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Blocking Logic in the Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and Dynamic
Blocking)
6.32.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)

The additional functions Dead-line check (DLC) and Reduced dead time (RDT), are only possible for applica-
tions with a voltage-transformer connection. Another requirement is that the voltage of the line being
switched on can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This is only possible if the voltage trans-
former is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Both additional functions DLC and RDT are mutually exclusive, because the DLC checks if the value falls below
a voltage threshold, while the RDT checks if the value exceeds the voltage threshold.
The respectively selected additional function runs in the automatic reclosing state dead time.
Reduced Dead Time (RDT)

With the Reduced dead time, a close command can be assigned before the expiration of the set dead times if
the line to switch on is recognized as fault-free through the measurement of the line voltage.
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-phase-voltages.
In systems with a grounded neutral point, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages are additionally observed.
In systems with compensated or with isolated neutral points, the largest 2 of the 3 phase-to-ground voltages
are additionally considered. Through this, a RDT can also be executed with 1-phase ground connections.
For the approval of the close command with RDT, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
• Each measured voltage is above the set threshold values Volt. thres.f. live line/bus
The phase-to-phase voltages are divided by √3 prior to comparing the threshold value. Thus, the phase-
to-ground voltage UN√3 applies as the reference size for the parameterization.
• Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.
Dead-Line Check (DLC)

If after switching off a short-circuit the voltage on the switched off line does not disappear, the automatic
reclosing function can be avoided with the dead-line check (DLC).
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-ground voltages.
For the release of the close command with DLC, the following conditions apply:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
• All measured voltages for the set duration Voltage supervision time are below the set threshold
Volt. thres.f. live line/bus.
• The set dead time is expired.

As soon as the voltages fall below the threshold value for the set duration, the allowance for automatic
reclosing with DLC is assigned. This also applies if the values are not below the voltage threshold until the
expiration of the set dead time. In this way, an automatic reclosing is executed if the automatic reclosing func-
tion is first switched to at the end of the protected line and thus, the line is exposed to voltage again.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked by the DLC under the following conditions:
• The automatic reclosing function is in the Closure state, the dead time has expired
• All measured voltages were not simultaneously below the set threshold values Volt.thres. f. dead
line/bus for the set duration Voltage supervision time during the dead time.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lovrkarc-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-238 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line Check
6.32.4.19 Settings

General
_:6601:1 General:Mode • off on
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:6601:101 General:79 operating • with op., w/o act. time with op., with
mode act. time
• with op., with act. time
• w.pickup, w/o act. time
• w.pickup, w. action time
_:6601:102 General:CB ready check • no no
bef. start
• yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready superv. 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
time
_:6601:107 General:3-pole operate • no yes
by 79
• yes
_:6601:108 General:Evolving-fault • with trip with trip
detection
• with pickup
_:6601:109 General:Response to • strt. evol.flt.dead time blocks 79
evolv. faults
• blocks 79
_:6601:110 General:Max. dead-time 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:112 General:Send delay f. 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ ∞
remot. close
DLC, RDT
_:6601:113 General:Dead-line check/ • without without
reduc.d.t
• Reduced dead t. RDT
• Dead-line check DLC
_:6601:114 General:Voltage supervi- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
_:6601:116 General:Volt.thres. f. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 30.000 V
dead line/bus
Cycle 1
_:6571:102 Cycle 1:Start from idle • no yes
state allow.
• yes
_:6571:103 Cycle 1:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; ∞ 0.20 s
_:6571:108 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 3- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 0.50 s
pole trip
_:6571:107 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 1- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
pole trip
_:6571:104 Cycle 1:Dead time 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ 1.20 s
aft.1ph. pickup
aft.2ph. pickup

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

aft.3ph. pickup
_:6571:109 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.20 s
evolv. fault
_:6571:111 Cycle 1:CB ready check • no no
bef.close
• yes
_:6571:110 Cycle 1:Synchroch. aft. • none none
3-pole d.t.
• internal
• external
_:6571:112 Cycle 1:Intern. synchro- Setting options depend on
check with configuration

(Type)
General
_:6601:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I
_:6601:502 General:>Blk. with 1-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:505 General:>Blk. 1-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:506 General:>Blk. 3-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:510 General:>Pickup 1ph for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:518 General:>Trip 1-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:519 General:>Trip 3-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:520 General:>Evolving fault start SPS I
_:6601:521 General:>Dead time start delay SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:313 General:Evolv.-fault detected SPS O
_:6601:314 General:RDT CloseCmd indicat. SPS O
_:6601:315 General:Dead t. aft.1pole trip SPS O
_:6601:316 General:Dead t. aft.3pole trip SPS O
_:6601:317 General:Dead t. aft.1ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:320 General:Dead t. aft.evolv.flt. SPS O
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:322 General:Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:323 General:Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:324 General:CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc SPS O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:326 General:Remote close signal SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:332 General:Blk.by max. d.t. delay SPS O
_:6601:333 General:Blk. by evolving fault SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:334 General:Blk.by dead-line check SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
_:6601:339 General:Cyc1 1p AR INS O
_:6601:340 General:Cyc1 3p AR INS O
_:6601:341 General:Cyc2+ 1p AR INS O
_:6601:342 General:Cyc2+ 3p AR INS O
Cycle 1
_:6571:51 Cycle 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6571:500 Cycle 1:>Block 79 cycle SPS I
_:6571:52 Cycle 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6571:53 Cycle 1:Health ENS O
_:6571:301 Cycle 1:Cycle running SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:6571:302 Cycle 1:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6571:303 Cycle 1:Synchrocheck request SPS O
6.32.5 Cooperation with External Automatic Reclosing Function
The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function
mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function. In this function mode, the SIPROTEC protec-
tion functions create the trip command and the external reclosing device creates the close command.
The following figure shows the interaction of an external reclosing device with the functions of the SIPROTEC
5 device.
[loaweext-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-239 Connection of an External Automatic Reclosing Function
There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
• From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching zone
with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Ext
_:6661:51 Ext:Mode (controllable) C
_:6661:501 Ext:>Release stages I
_:6661:502 Ext:>1-pole trip permitted I
_:6661:503 Ext:>1-pole AR only I
_:6661:52 Ext:Behavior O
_:6661:53 Ext:Health O
_:6661:54 Ext:Inactive O
6.32.6 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings
For the Automatic reclosing function, 2 functions are available in the function library of the device. In each
circuit-breaker function group, a function from the Automatic reclosing function can be used.
Configure one of the 3 following function specifications:
• Cyclic Automatic reclosing function
• Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function
Starting the Automatic Reclosing Function

The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and the Automatic reclosing func-
tion can be set separately for each protection function. The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI. The
Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which the
external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
Configure the starting and blocking condition for the Automatic reclosing function at the position shown in
Figure 6-240 in DIGSI (for example, a protection function group Line is shown here) or route the corre-
sponding binary inputs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-240 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI
General Settings
If you use the Cyclic automatic reclosing function function, set the following settings under General.
There are no settings for the function Operation with external automatic reclosing function. The control
occurs exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.
Parameter: 79 operating mode
• Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
With the 79 operating mode parameter, you can determine which start criteria the Automatic reclosing
function works with.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

with op., with act. The Automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s). The start occurs with all protection function(s) or
protection stages that are configured through the Automatic reclosing function
start matrix.
Siemens generally recommends this setting for applications with 1/3-pole trip-
ping and for applications with 3-pole tripping if a single dead time, independent
of the type of connection working, is required in the Automatic reclosing func-
tion cycle.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.32.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function, in the section Operating Mode 1.
w.pickup, w. action The Automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s) and the type of fault. The start occurs with all protec-
tion function(s) or protection stages that are configured through the Automatic
reclosing function start matrix.
For applications with 3-pole tripping and dead time dependent on the circuit
type, Siemens recommends this setting.
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function, in the section Operating Mode 2
with op., w/o act. Each operate indication starts the Automatic reclosing function. The start
time occurs with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured
through the Automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The Automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an Automatic reclosing should
occur after tripping.
w.pickup, w/o act. Each operate indication starts the Automatic reclosing function. The Automatic
time reclosing function cycles are dependent on the type of fault. The start occurs
with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through
the Automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The Automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an Automatic reclosing should
occur after tripping.
Parameter: CB ready check bef. start
• Default setting (_:6601:102) CB ready check bef. start = no

With the CB ready check bef. start parameter, you can determine if the readiness of the circuit
breaker should be tested before starting the Automatic reclosing function.
Additionally or alternatively, it is possible to check the readiness of the circuit breaker after the expiration of
the dead time, directly before the assignment of the close command. There is another parameter described in
chapter 6.32.7 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function for this
function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

yes The Automatic reclosing function checks the readiness of the circuit breaker for
a switching cycle, consisting of a tripping-reclosing-switching.
If the circuit breaker is ready - signaled through a binary input - the startup of
the Automatic reclosing function can occur. If the circuit breaker is not ready,
the Automatic reclosing function reports the static blocking.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
Note: The default setting of this parameter does not correspond to the recom-
mended setting value for operation. The Automatic reclosing function would
otherwise be blocked with a non-available circuit breaker-ready-signal. Please
set the parameter as recommended.
no The readiness of the circuit breaker is not checked before starting the Auto-
matic reclosing function. The test also does not occur if the readiness signal
from the circuit breaker is connected to a binary input on the device.
Parameter: Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc.
• Default setting (_:6601:103) Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. = 3.00 s

With the Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. parameter, you can decide if the currently running reclosing
cycle was successful or not. You can find more detailed information on the function of the reclaim time in
chapter 6.32.4.15 Reclaim Time.
The default setting for the reclaim time can be frequently maintained. In regions where thunderstorms and
storms often occur, a shorter reclaim time makes sense in order to minimize the danger of the final disconnec-
tion due to sequential lightning strikes or cable spark over.
Select a long reclaim time if there is no possibility for circuit-breaker supervision with multiple automatic
reclosing, for example, due to missing auxiliary contacts or lacking circuit-breaker-ready-information. In this
case, the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker.
Parameter: Block. time aft. man.close
• Default setting (_:6601:104) Block. time aft. man.close = 1.00 s

With the Block. time aft. man.close parameter, the time is determined for which the automatic
reclosing should be blocked after a manual connection.
Set the time so that the circuit breaker can be safely switched on and off during connection to a short circuit
without the Automatic reclosing function being automatically closed.
Parameter: Start signal supervis.time
• Default setting (_:6601:105) Start signal supervis.time = 0.25 s

With the Start signal supervis.time parameter, set the maximum time after which a circuit breaker
must be opened after a trip command. If the time expires, a failure of the circuit breaker is assumed and the
Automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
You can find detailed information about the start supervision time function in chapter 6.32.4.5 Start.
NOTE
i With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay. With this,
you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the busbar, no
Automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: CB ready superv. time

The setting of this parameter is only important if the cycle-specific parameter CB ready check bef.close
is set to yes. Otherwise, this parameter has no effect.
• Default setting (_:6601:106) CB ready superv. time = 3.00 s

With the CB ready superv. time parameter, you can determine after which maximum time after the trip-
ping the circuit breaker must be ready for the reclosing function.
Set the time somewhat longer than the regeneration time of the circuit breaker after an OFF-ON-OFF cycle.
You can find detailed information on this function in the chapters 6.32.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.
Parameter: Evolving-fault detection
• Default setting (_:6601:108) Evolving-fault detection = with trip

With the Evolving-fault detection parameter, you can determine which criteria is used to recognize an
evolving fault. The actual effect of the recognized evolving fault on the Automatic reclosing function can be
set with the parameter described below Response to evolv. faults.
Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time.
You can find detailed information about evolving-fault detection in chapter 6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detec-
tion During Dead Time.
with trip Evolving faults are recognized if an operate indication occurs during the dead
time. Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured
for the start of the Automatic reclosing function or not.
The pickup of a protection function without an operate indication does not lead
to evolving-fault detection.
with pickup Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function
configured for the Automatic reclosing function start is picked up or if an
external pickup is detected through a binary input.
For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is
adequately interconnected.
If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.
Parameter: Response to evolv. faults
• Default setting (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79

With the Response to evolv. faults parameter, you can determine how the Automatic reclosing func-
tion reacts to recognized faults.
You can find detailed information about the Automatic reclosing function for faults in chapter
6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time.
blocks 79 The Automatic reclosing function is immediately blocked until the disconnec-
tion of the fault.
For blockings through faults during the 1-pole dead times, you can force a 3-
pole trip command through the Automatic reclosing function if the you set the
parameter 3-pole operate by 79 to yes.
strt. evol.flt.dead After the 3-pole trip command to clear up the fault, the Automatic reclosing
time function starts a new 3-pole Automatic reclosing function cycle with the set
Dead time aft. evolv. fault.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Max. dead-time delay
• Default setting (_:6601:110) Max. dead-time delay = 0.5 s

With the Max. dead-time delay parameter, you determine at which time the starting of the dead time
may be delayed before the Automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
The delay of the start of the dead time is possible with the binary input >Dead time start delay.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in chapter 6.32.4.5 Start.
Parameter: Max. dead-time extension
• Default setting (_:6601:111) Max. dead-time extension = 1.2 s

With the Max. dead-time extension parameter, you determine the time by which the dead time may be
extended before the Automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
With the setting oo (invalid), the extension is unlimited.
An extension of the dead time can be required under the following conditions:
• Waiting for the readiness of the circuit breaker
• Inquiry of a synchronous test
• Delay through binary input in order e.g. to give the leading Automatic reclosing function priority in a
system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in chapter 6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command.
Parameter: Voltage supervision time

This parameter is relevant only if you use the subfunctions RDT or DLC. If you do not use any of these func-
tions, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:114) Voltage supervision time = 0.1 s

With the Voltage supervision time parameter, you can determine the measuring time that is available
as a criteria for the voltage decision. It should be longer than all transient oscillations through switching oper-
ations.
For the subfunction Reduced dead time (RDT), this measuring time applies for the determination of the
surpassing of a voltage threshold. For the subfunction Dead-line check, the surpassing of a voltage threshold
is checked.
Siemens recommends the setting 0.10 s.
You can find detailed information on the functionality in the following parameters, and in chapter
6.32.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT).
Parameter: Volt. thres.f. live line/bus

This parameter is only important if you use the subfunction RDT. If you do not use any of these functions, the
setting of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:115) Volt. thres.f. live line/bus = 48 V

With the Volt. thres.f. live line/bus parameter, you can determine the limit voltage above which
the line should be seen as fault-free. It must be lower than the smallest expected operating voltage. The
phase-to-ground voltage applies as the reference value.
You can find detailed information on the functionality in the following parameters and in chapter
6.32.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT).
Parameter: Dead-line check/reduc.d.t
• Default setting (_:6601:113) Dead-line check/reduc.d.t = without

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the Dead-line check/reduc.d.t parameter, you can determine if the Automatic reclosing function
should work with one of the additional functions Dead-line check DLC or Reduced dead t. RDT.
without The Automatic reclosing function occurs after the expiration of the parameter-
ized dead times. DLC or RDT are not activated.
Reduced dead t. RDT The Automatic reclosing function works with a reduced dead time (RDT).
Dead-line check DLC The Automatic reclosing functions works with dead-line check. The closing indi-
cation is only assigned if the line was really de-energized during the dead time.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in chapter 6.32.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT).
NOTE
i Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This
is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
Parameter: Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus

This parameter is only important if you use the Dead-line check subfunction. If you do not use any of this
subfunction, the setting value of this parameter is free to select.
• Default setting (_:6601:116) Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus = 30 V

With the Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus parameter, you can determine the limit voltage below which
the line should be seen with certainty as idle or switched off. The threshold value is used by the Dead-line
check subfunction (dead-line check). The reference size is the phase-to-ground voltage.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in chapter 6.32.4.18 Dead-Line Checking (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT).
Parameter: Send delay f. remot. close

With the Send delay f. remot. close parameter, you can determine after which time after the Auto-
matic reclosing function the information is sent to the remote closing.
• Default setting (_:6601:112) Send delay f. remot. close = oo (invalid)

The transmission delay prevents the device operating in the adaptive dead time mode on the opposite side
from closing unnecessarily if the local reclosing function remains unsuccessful. On the other hand, it must be
remembered that the line is not available for transporting energy as long as the opposite end is also closed.
Thus, the Send delay f. remot. closemust be added to the dead time in order to determine the
system stability.
You can find detailed information about this functionality in chapter 6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command.
6.32.7 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function
For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
Parameter: Start from idle state allow.

This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with action time.
• Default setting (_:6571:102) Start from idle state allow. = yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
With the parameter Start from idle state allow. you can determine whether the action time of this
automatic reclosing cycle is started, if the automatic reclosing function is in idle state during with incoming
general pickup. Please set the parameter always to yes , if the automatic reclosing function is configured for
only 1 cycle. If several cycles are configured, you can control the effectiveness of the automatic reclosing
cycles with this parameter and various action times.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in Chapters 6.32.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating
Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time und 6.32.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With
Action Time.
Parameter: Action time

mode with action time.
• Default setting (_:6571:103) Action time = 0.2 s

With this parameter Action time you can determine, within which time frame the trip command must
appear, in order to start the automatic reclosing function. If the trip command occurs only after the action
time has expired, automatic reclosing does not occur within the active automatic reclosing cycle.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in
Chapters 6.32.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time and 6.32.4.7 Cycle
Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time.
Parameter: Dead time aft. 3-pole trip

mode with tripping.
• Default setting (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip = 0.5 s

With this parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip , you can determine after which dead time the auto-
matic reclosing function will be executed. After a 3-pole trip of the circuit breaker, the system stability is
priority. Since the switched off line cannot develop synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is permitted in
most cases. The usual duration is 0.3 s to 0.6 s. A longer period can be tolerated if a synchrocheck is carried
out prior to reclosing. Longer 3-pole dead times are also possible in radial systems.
Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
mode with pickup.
• Default setting (_:6571:104) Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s

With the 3 dead-time parameters, you can determine after which dead time the automatic reclosing function
will be executed. Please set the times as desired for the respective type of short circuit.
• The parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup applies to dead times after 1-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A, B, C, or A-Gnd, B-Gnd, C-Gnd
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd
NOTE
i If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 s. The automatic reclosing
function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
• Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s
• Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
• Dead time aft.3ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
Parameter: Dead time aft. evolv. fault

These parameters are only significant if the parameter (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults is
set to strt. evol.flt.dead time .
• Default setting (_:6571:109) Dead time aft. evolv. fault = 1.2 s

With the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault , you can determine after which dead time the auto-
matic reclosing function should be executed, if based on an evolving fault during the current dead time, a 3-
pole trip has occurred. For this 3-pole dead time, stability concerns for the system are also important. Often,
this dead time as well as the parameter (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip can be set.
Detailed information about the function during evolving faults during dead time are described in Chapter
6.32.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During Dead Time.
Parameter: CB ready check bef.close
• Default setting (_:6571:111) CB ready check bef.close = no

With the parameter CB ready check bef.close you can determine if after the expiration of the dead
time (meaning, directly prior to assigning the close command) readiness of the circuit breaker should be
queried.
no With the setting no , the automatic reclosing function does not check again
the readiness of the circuit breaker prior to assigning the close demand.
Siemens recommends this setting, if it is sufficient to check the readiness of the
circuit breaker for the entire switching cycle once before the start of a reclosing
function, consisting of tripping-reclosing-tripping. The setting for checking the
readiness of the circuit breaker prior to the start of the automatic reclosing
function is done using the parameter (_:6601:102) CB ready check
bef. start .
yes With the setting yes , the dead time can be extended if after the expiration of
the dead time the circuit breaker is not ready for the next ON-OFF cycle. The
maximum delay of the dead time can be set with the parameter
(_:6601:111) Max. dead-time extension .
Siemens recommends this setting, if it can be assumed that the circuit breaker
becomes available to switch on the reclosing function only after an additional
waiting period.
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.32.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command.
Parameter: Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t.
• Default setting (_:6571:110) Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. = none

With the parameter Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. you can determine if a synchrocheck must be
carried out for the configured automatic reclosing cycle.
If during a 3-pole interruption in the system stability problems may be a concern, the synchrocheck should be
carried out. If only 1-pole reclosure cycles are possible or stability problems are not to be expected during the

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
3-pole dead time, for example, due to a highly intermeshed system or radial system, please select the param-
eter none .
none During the automatic reclosing cycle a synchrocheck is not executed.
internal In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
For the synchrocheck a synchrocheck stage of the internal synchronization
function is used, which is contained in the same function group as the circuit
breaker and the automatic reclosing function. The selection of the synchro-
check stage that is used in the automatic reclosing cycle occurs through the
following described parameter Internal synchrocheck.
external In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
An external synchrocheck device initiates the synchrocheck. The external
synchrocheck device is connected with the binary signals Synchrocheck
request and >Release by ext.sync. . Detailed information about the
function can be found in Chapter 6.32.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command under the section Synchrocheck.
Parameter: Internal Synchrocheck

These parameters are only significant if the previously described parameter (_:6571:110) Synchroch.
aft. 3-pole d.t. is set to internal .
With the parameter Internal Synchrocheck, you can determine which function block of the synchroniza-
tion function for the automatic reclosing function is used after a 3-pole dead time. This selection is only
possible for function blocks of the synchronization function, and which are included in the same circuit-
breaker function group as the automatic reclosing function. The setting options of the parameter will be
generated dynamically, according to the actual parameterization.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
6.33 Fault Locator
The Fault locator function is used to determine the distance to the fault location.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Fault-location determination is based on the
determination of the reactance of the short-circuited measuring loops.
The Fault locator function can be used in protection function groups with 3-phase current and voltage meas-
urement.
[dwstbafo-090812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The fault location is calculated based on the line parameter. The fault-location determination is always carried
out with going pickup of the short-circuit protection. There is an option to limit the fault-location deter-
mination to cases with tripping (setting value for parameter Start = with operate).
The fault locator can be started as follows:
• Via the phase-segregated binary inputs >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B and
>Fault detected phs C
•
• Via the directional overcurrent protection, phases or ground
• Via the overcurrent protection, phases or ground
• Via the non-phase segregated binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd.
If multiple protection functions are operating in parallel, the fault locator is only started by the protection-
function pickup with the highest priority. The functions are listed in decreasing priority.
The Fault locator function only works with the following current and voltage-transformer connection types
(see parameter value).
Parameter Parameter Value
CT connection • 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
NOTE
i The Fault locator function does not work with all possible current and voltage transformer connection
types. An error message is displayed in DIGSI 5 if the Fault locator function cannot work with the set
connection types. In this case check the current and voltage transformer connection type. You will find the
CT connection or VT connection parameters in DIGSI 5 under Power system → Meas.point I-3ph or
Power system → Meas.point V-3ph.
Starting Conditions
Each protection function that can start the fault locator also provides the fault locator with information on
the pickup and tripping times. If several protection functions pick up at the same time, the fault locator is
started only by the function with the highest priority. The pickup pattern for the other protection functions is
discarded.
The fault locator uses the pickup and tripping information for the protection function being started to form its
own measurand memory for the following calculations. Depending on the pickup duration of the protection
function, the measurand memory is positioned in such a way that it contains prefault processes, short-circuit
processes, and switch-off processes. If the pickup lasts for a longer time, only the short-circuit processes and
switch-off processes are recorded by the measurand memory. The fault-location determination always starts
only after the dropout of the pickup.
Fault-location determination is also possible via the starting condition with going pickup, if the protec-
tion device only picks up and does not trigger. Fault-location determination is performed via the starting
condition with operate only if the protection device has reported the tripping and if the pickup has
dropped out.
Alternatively, the fault locator can be started via one or more binary inputs. If the phase-segregated indica-
tions >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B, and >Fault detected phs C are routed
in the DIGSI 5 Information routing, the fault locator interprets the binary inputs as a phase-segregated
external protection function and treats them with the highest priority.
If the binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd. is routed, the binary input is interpreted as a non-segre-
gated external protection function and is treated with the lowest priority. The fault locator starts when the
binary input drops out.
If with operate is set and the fault locator is started via the binary input, the fault-location determination
is started only if a device-internal protection function generates an operate indication or if the binary input
>Fault locator start is activated.
[sc_rout_BE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-242 Routing Matrix for the Triggering of the Fault Locator via Binary Input
Determining the Fault Location

The recorded sampled values of the short-circuit currents and voltages are transferred to an own measurand
memory. The pickup indications are used to determine the short-circuited loops. The measurand memory is
searched for an optimal measurement window. The largest possible measurement window is selected. If
possible, the measurement window is positioned at the end of the short-circuit process. This means that the
steady-state process and the decay process have the least possible impact on the measuring result.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
[dw_sigra_flo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-243 Determining the Measurement Window
The impedances of the short-circuit loops are calculated using the measurement-window data. If there are
several short-circuited loops, a selection process is used to select a loop and the results are then issued.
If it is not possible to determine a sufficient data window with usable measured values or a plausible short-
circuited loop, the indication FLO invalid signals the invalid measuring result.
Output of the Fault Location

The following results for the fault location are output:
• The fault reactance X in Ω primary
• The fault resistance R in Ω primary
• The fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the
basis of the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line
• The fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized reac-
tance per unit length and the parameterized line length
• The selected fault loop for calculation of the fault location
NOTE
i Specification of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is relevant only for homogenous line sections. If
the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-line-
cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate calcula-
tion of the fault distance. Alternatively, you can use the Fault locator plus function, with which the non-
homogeneous lines can be parameterized in line sections.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
Impedance-Based Fault Location

The determination of the fault distance is based on the evaluation of the imaginary part of the calculated
short-circuit impedance. The fault distance is determined by dividing the calculated reactance X with the
parameterizable reactance per unit length (parameter X per length unit). Both the impedance up to the
fault location and the fault distance are issued by the fault locator.
An impedance measuring element is available for each of the 6 possible short-circuit loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. The loop to be measured is selected depending on the fault type.
For 2‑phase short circuits with grounding, the phase-to-phase loop is preferred for fault location. For 3‑phase
short circuits, the average reactance, determined from the reactance of the 3 phase-to-phase loops is used.
A 2-phase short circuit B-C, for example, is used for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop.
[dw_llschleife_flo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-244 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop
The loop equation for the calculation of the short-circuit impedance of the phase-to-phase loop B-C is:
[fo_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
where:
VB, VC Short-circuit voltage phasor for phases B and C
IB, IC Short-circuit current phasor phases B and C
m Proportionate distance to the fault
mZL = m ⋅ (RL + jXL) Line impedance up to fault location
The line impedance is calculated as follows:
[fo_R_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
[fo_X_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
In case of a phase-to-ground short circuit, for example, A-gnd, for the calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it
must be considered that the impedance of the ground-return path does not match the impedance of the
phases.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
[dw_leschleife_flo, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-245 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop
In case of A-gnd short circuit, the phase-to-ground voltage VA, the phase current IA, and the ground current Ignd
are measured.
[fo_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
The impedance to the fault location is calculated as:
[fo_R_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
and
[fo_X_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
where:
VA Short-circuit voltage phasor
IA Short-circuit current phasor phase A
Ignd Ground-fault current phasor
IR = IA - kr⋅Ignd Auxiliary quantity
Ix = IA - kx⋅Ignd Auxiliary quantity
The factors kr = Rgnd/RL and kx = Xgnd/XL depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the fault.
Measured-Value Correction at Load Current on Lines Fed on Both Sides

In the case of faults on lines fed on both sides and with load transport and contact resistance (see
Figure 6-246), the fault voltage VA is influenced not only by the voltage source on side A, but also by the
voltage source on side B if both voltage sources feed to the fault location. Without special measures, this leads
to measuring errors in the impedance, since the current portion IB cannot be recorded at measuring point A.
For long and highly loaded lines, this measuring error in the X portion of the fault impedance can be consider-
able. This X component is critical for the distance calculation.
The X component can be corrected when using load compensation. When using load compensation, the calcu-
lated R component comprises the combination of the fault resistance to be determined and the resistance of
the line up to the fault location. This form of impedance calculation corresponds to the distance-protection
measurement protocol using the reactance method. The load compensation impacts both the 1-pole short
circuit and the 2-pole short circuit. You can activate and deactivate the load compensation via the Load
compensation parameter. If the distance protection operates with the reactance method, Siemens recom-
mends switching on the load compensation for the fault locator, too.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
The following figure serves as an example of the description of the impedance calculation:
[dw ueb impedanzber, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-246 Fault Currents and Voltages of a Line Fed on Both Sides (1-Pole Display)
A Measuring point
VA, VB Voltage source
IA, IB Partial fault currents
IF Total fault current
VA Fault voltage at measuring point A
RF Common fault resistance
Z L, (1-m) ZL Fault impedances
ZA, ZB Source impedances
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Ground Loops

For calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it must be considered that the impedance of the ground-return
path generally does not match the impedance of the phases. This is the case, for example, for an A-gnd short
circuit.
[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-247 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop
The loop equation for calculating the impedance is:
[fo schl le ohne icomp, 3, en_US]
The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.
[fo schl le mit icomp, 4, en_US]
The following applies:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
[fo x impber, 1, en_US]
The reactance X of the phase-to-ground loop is calculated as follows:
[fo xf impber, 2, en_US]
where:
A Measuring point
VA, Fault voltage at measuring point A (phase-to-ground voltage)
IA, IGnd Partial fault currents
IF Total fault current
RF Common fault resistance
ZL, ZB Line impedance
ISubst. Equivalent current
k0 Ground-fault factor
δComp Compensation angle
You can select the equivalent current ISubst. in such a way that the impact of the fault current IB is compensated
at the fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in R can be compensated only partially.
R is calculated as follows:
[fo rf impber, 3, en_US]
The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. Therefore, either 3I0 or 3I2 is used as an
equivalent for IF. In order to achieve the best result, the procedure uses the larger one of the 2 equivalent
currents. If the angles of the source impedances and the line impedance are not equal, you can compensate
the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles δ comp depend on the network conditions and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas:
[fo kompwi nullsys impber, 1, en_US]
[fo kompwi gegensys impber, 1, en_US]
where:
ZA,0, ZB,0 Source impedances in the zero-sequence system
ZL,0 Line impedance in the zero-sequence system

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
δcomp,0 Compensation angle in the zero-sequence system

ZA,2, ZB,2 Source impedances in the negative-sequence system
ZL,2 Line impedance in the negative-sequence system
δcomp,2 Compensation angle in the negative-sequence system
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Phase Loops

A 2-phase short circuit B-C is assumed as an example for the calculation:
[dw_llschleife_rmd, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-248 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop
The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:
[fo schl ll ohne icomp, 2, en_US]
Thus, X is calculated as follows:
[fo xf impber LLschl, 2, en_US]
Whereby the following applies for the B-C loop: Isubst = (a - a2)⋅I2 and a = e j120°.
The negative-sequence system rotation, which depends on the fault loop, performs the fault-locator algorithm
internally.
R is calculated as follows:
[fo rf impber LLschl, 3, en_US]
The function requires the following key line data to calculate fault distance:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
• Residual-compensation factors in the setting format Kr and Kx
Parameter: Start
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Start = with going pickup

The Start parameter is used to define the criterion for starting the fault location.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator

with going pickup If a pickup signal of the protection functions designated for the start has
dropped out, the fault-location determination starts.
with operate If one of the protection functions designated for start has reported the trip-
ping and the pickup has dropped out, the fault-location determination
starts.
As an alternative, the fault locator can be started using external binary input.
Parameter: Load Compensation
• Default setting (_:103) Load compensation = no

With the Load compensation parameter, you can correct measuring errors for 1-phase and 2-phase short
circuits on lines fed on both sides.
no The load compensation does not become effective with this setting.
yes The load compensation becomes effective with this setting.
If you use the load compensation, the following parameters are relevant
and are shown automatically:
• (_:104) Substitute for IF

• (_:106) Comp. angle zero seq.
• (_:107) Comp. angle neg. seq.
Parameter: Substitute for IF
• Default setting (_:104) Substitute for IF = 3I0

The parameter Substitute for IF is only visible and relevant if you use the load compensation.
With the Substitute for IF parameter, for ground-impedance loops, you define which substitute value to
use at the fault location for the fault current IF that cannot be measured due to the fault resistance.
First, calculate the compensation angles for the zero-sequence system and the negative-sequence system. Set
the parameter Substitute for IF according to the smaller compensation angle. The smaller compensa-
tion angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence or negative-sequence system) is more homo-
geneous and that the fault current can be approximated in a better way through the fault resistance at the
fault location.
Parameter: Compensation Angle for Zero-Sequence System/Negative-Sequence System
• Default setting (_:106) Comp. angle zero seq. = 0.00°
• Default setting (_:107) Comp. angle neg. seq. = 0.00°

The parameters Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq. are only visible and relevant if
you use the load compensation.
If you have determined an angle difference between the measured 3I0 or 3I2 and IF based on network model
tests or calculations, you can compensate this with the parameters Comp. angle zero seq. or Comp.
angle neg. seq..
A setting of the compensation angle deviating from 0 is only relevant for non-homogeneous systems.
With the Comp. angle zero seq. parameter, you compensate the angle difference between the 3I0 calcu-
lated by the device and the fault current IF.
With the Comp. angle neg. seq. parameter, you compensate the angle difference between the 3I2 calcu-
lated by the device and the fault current IF.
Parameter: X per length unit
• Default setting (_:113) X per length unit = 0.210 Ω/km

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
With the X per length unit parameter, you set the reactance per unit length for the line to be protected.
You set the X per length unit parameter as a relative value in Ω/km or Ω/miles.
Parameter: Line length
• Default setting (_:114) Line length = 60 km

With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected as a unit of length in km
or miles.
Parameter: Line angle
• Default setting (_:108) Line angle = 85.00°

Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the line constants for the line to be protected
as follows:
[folwinkl-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 with the data

R´1 = 0.19 Ω/km
X´1 = 0.42 Ω/km
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:
[fo tan phi, 1, en_US]
[fo arctan phi, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
• Default setting (_:104) Kr = 1.00
• Default setting (_:105) Kx = 1.00

The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and Kx
parameters are relevant for the Fault locator function.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio
where:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line

X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 with the data:
R1/s 0.19 Ω/km positive-sequence system resistance

X1/s 0.42 Ω/km positive-sequence system reactance
R0/s 0.53 Ω/km zero-sequence system resistance
X0/s 1.19 Ω/km zero-sequence system reactance
s Line length
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[fo kr, 1, en_US]
[fo kx, 1, en_US]
Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)
• Default setting K0 = 1.000
• Default setting Angle (K0) = 0.00°
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are only visible if you have set the parameter
Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device. The Set. format residu. comp. parameter
can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Parameter → Device settings.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex grounding-resistance factor.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex grounding-resistance factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex grounding-resistance factor from the line data as follows:
[fo K01, 1, en_US]
where:
Z0 (Complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (Complex) positive-sequence impedance

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-conductor liquid-filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
Z1/s 0.408 · ej73° Ω/km positive-sequence impedance

Z0/s 0.632 · ej18.4° Ω/km zero-sequence impedance
s Line length
The values for calculation of the grounding-resistance factor K0 are:
[fo1 k0, 1, en_US]
[fo2 k0, 1, en_US]
The setting value of the parameter K0 is calculated from:
[fo3 k0, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary Part tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fo phi K0, 1, en_US]
6.33.5 Settings

Fault locator
_:1 Fault locator:Mode • off off
• on
• test

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.33 Fault Locator

_:101 Fault locator:Start • with operate with going
pickup
• with going pickup
_:103 Fault locator:Load compen- • no no
sation
• yes
_:113 Fault locator:X per length 1A 0.0001 Ω/km to 9.5000 Ω/km Ω/km
unit 5A 0.0000 Ω/km to 1.9000 Ω/km 0.0000 Ω/km
_:114 Fault locator:Line length 0.10 km to 1000.00 km 60.00 km
_:108 Fault locator:Line angle 10.00 ° to 89.00 ° 85.00 °
_:104 Fault locator:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:105 Fault locator:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:118 Fault locator:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:150 Fault locator:Angle (K0) -180.00 ° to 180.00 ° 0.00 °

(Type)
Fault locator
_:54 Fault locator:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Fault locator:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Fault locator:Health ENS O
_:302 Fault locator:Fault resistance prim. MV O
_:303 Fault locator:Fault reactance prim. MV O
_:308 Fault locator:Fault resistance sec. MV O
_:309 Fault locator:Fault reactance sec. MV O
_:304 Fault locator:Fault distance MV O
_:305 Fault locator:Fault distance in % MV O
_:306 Fault locator:Fault loop ENS O
_:307 Fault locator:FLO invalid ENS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.34 Temperature Supervision
The Temperature supervision function checks the thermal state of:
• Motors
• Generators
• Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD =
Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. or
RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group.
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 tempera-
ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function.
Each temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
[dwstrtmp-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-250 Logic Diagram for a Temperature Supervision Location
The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value
in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units
function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 5.4.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit .

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Sensor location
• Default setting (_:11101:46) Sensor location = Other

You inform the device of the sensor installation location using the Sensor location parameter. Oil,
Ambient, Turn, Bearing and Other are available for selection. The selection is not evaluated in the device,
it only serves an informational purpose in the medium in which the temperature measurement takes place.
Parameter: Sensor number
• Default setting(_:11101:44) sensor number = no function block selected

With the sensor number parameter, you assign a specific sensor whose temperature is to be monitored to
the Location function block. You perform the assignment in DIGSI using a list box that contains all connected
RTD units and their sensors.
Parameter: Threshold stage 1
• Default setting (_:11101:40) Threshold stage 1 = 100°C

With the Threshold stage 1 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 1st tripping stage.
Parameter: Operate delay of stage 1
• Default setting (_:11101:41) Operate delay of stage 1 = 5 s

With the Operate delay of stage 1 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 1st
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to ∞ the operate indication is blocked.
Parameter: Threshold stage 2
• Default setting (_:11101:42) Threshold stage 2 = 120°C

With the Threshold stage 2 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 2nd tripping stage.
Parameter: Operate delay of stage 2
• Default setting (_:11101:43) Operate delay of stage 2 = 0 s

With the Operate delay of stage 2 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 2nd
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to ∞ the operate indication is blocked.
Temperature Unit
Temperature Unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt
the DIGSI user default settings accordingly (see 5.4.7.5 Temperature Sensor).
6.34.5 Settings

Point 1
_:11101:46 Point 1:Sensor location • Oil Other
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:11101:1 Point 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11101:40 Point 1:Threshold stage 1 -50°C to 250°C 100°C
_:11101:41 Point 1:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; ∞ 5s
stage 1
stage 2
_:11101:44 Point 1:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 2
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 3
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Point 4
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 5
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 6
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

stage 2
uration
Point 7
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 8
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 9
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 10
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 11
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Point 12
• Ambient
• Turn
• Bearing
• Other
• on
• test
stage 1
stage 2
uration

(Type)
Point 1
_:11101:81 Point 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11101:54 Point 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11101:52 Point 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11101:53 Point 1:Health ENS O
_:11101:61 Point 1:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11101:62 Point 1:Operate stage 1 SPS O
Point 2
Point 3

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
6.35 Phase-Sequence Switchover
The Phase-sequence reversal function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and supervi-
sion functions, independently of the phase sequence of the phases in a system or system section.
The phase sequence is set via parameters. You can select between the phase sequences ABC or ACB.
Binary inputs also provide the option of switching over the phase sequence with respect to the parameter
setting. For example, in pumped-storage hydropower plants with motor or motor/generator operation you
temporarily change the direction of rotation by changing over the phase sequence.
The phase sequence has an effect on calculation of the positive-sequence system and negative-sequence
system values and on calculation of phase-to-phase values. A phase-rotation reversal therefore has an effect
on all protection and supervision functions that use these values.
You can change the phase sequence in 2 ways via binary inputs.
• Change over the phase sequence for the entire device.

In doing so, all 3-phase measuring points are switched over. All analog inputs are therefore affected (for
example current and voltage inputs simultaneously).
• Change over the phase sequence per measuring point.

In doing so, only the activated measuring points are switched over. The other measuring points remain
unaffected.
The Phase-sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power-system data. You will find the signals in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings. There you will find the parameter for setting
the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influence a change in the phase sequence.
[dwphrein-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
General
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter. You will find the
signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Power-system data → General.
There are 3 methods to change the phase sequence for different operational requirements.
• Changing the phase sequence via the setting parameter.

– Note: With version V7.50 and higher, this setting parameter is a reset parameter. If the parameter is
changed and transmitted to the device, the device performs a startup. The parameter change affects
all 3-phase measuring points. If the device is in operation and if measurands are present at the
measuring points, perform a parameter change carefully since this affects all measuring points.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal, you change over the phase sequence of all meas-
uring points.
• With the binary signal >Invert Phases, you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available for each measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3‑phase measuring point.
The 2 binary-signal mechanisms are explained separately below.
Switchover of the Phase Sequence of All Measuring Points

The direction of rotation of the currents and voltages depends on the phase sequence. The following drawing
shows the vector definitions for the 2 phase sequences.
[dwphrdrf-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-252 Vector with Different Phase Sequences
The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is initi-
ated via the binary input >Phs-rotation reversal. This switches over the phase sequence simultane-
ously at all 3-phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC, activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the phase
sequence ACB.
NOTE
i The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase meas-
uring points are below 5 % of the rated variables, this is recognized as machine standstill.
A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred posi-
tion.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwphrpsys1-151013, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-253 Phase Sequence Switchover
Changing Over the Phase Sequence per Measuring Point

A switchover of the phase sequence per measuring point can also be necessary for operational reasons. This
switchover enables proper behavior of the protection equipment, for example at the transition from generator
operation to motor operation (pump operation).
The following example shows an application in a pumped storage plant. The switchover of the phase
sequence (change in rotational direction) realizes the transition there from generator operation to motor oper-
ation. Which phases and measuring points are changed over depends on the conditions in the system.
[dwphrapp-240211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-254 Application Example for Phase-Rotation Reversal in a Pump Station
The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3) with
the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert Phases.
The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring point.
In accordance with Figure 6-254 the phase sequence is set to ABC. A is swapped with C in motor operation.
The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the measuring points of current measured values 2
and current measured values 3. As a result, the phase assignment for the differential protection IED2 and the
impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence current is calculated
correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending
at the selected measuring points. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change
in the phase sequence is only implemented if the measurands at the measuring points that are to be switched
are under 5 % of the rated variables. If the currents of the measuring points of current measured values 2 and
current measured values 3 of the example fall below 5 % of their rated variables, the switchover is released
and the set phases are switched with active binary input.
[lophrgph-190517-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-255 Measured Values for Changed-Over Phases
Parameter: Phase sequence
• Default setting (_:101) Phase sequence = ABC
ABC Phase sequence A, B, C

ACB Phase sequence A, B, C
• Default setting (_:106) Inverted phases = none
none No phase exchange

AC Phase A changed over with phase C
BC Phase B changed over with phase C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
AB Phase C changed over with phase B
NOTE
i If you change the setting value of the parameter Inverted phases, consider the following:
The device can take the new setting value only if the binary input signal >Invert Phases is not active.
Input signal: >Phs-rotation reversal

The >Phs-rotation reversal binary input is used to switch between the ABC phase sequence and the
ACB phase sequence. The switchover direction depends on the setting of the Phase sequence parameter. In
doing so, the phase sequence of all 3-phase measuring points is changed. Changing of the phase-rotation
reversal via the binary input is only possible if no measurands (< 5 % of the rated variables) are present at all 3-
phase measuring points.
Input signal: >Invert Phases

The binary input >Invert Phases is used to activate the setting of the parameter Inverted phases. In
doing so, the phase sequence of the selected measuring point is changed. Changing of the phase sequence
via the binary input is only possible if no measurand (< 5 % of the rated variables) is present at the respective
3-phase measuring point.
6.35.5 Settings

General
_:101 General:Phase sequence • ABC ABC
• ACB
General
_:101 VT 3-phase:Rated primary 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
_:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:103 VT 3-phase:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:104 VT 3-phase:VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN 3 ph-to-gnd
volt. + VN
_:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted phases • none none
• AC
• BC
• AB
_:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking • inactive active
• active
_:107 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:322 General:f sys MV O
_:323 General:f track MV O
General
_:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
7 Control Functions
7.1 Introduction 792

7.2 Switching Devices 795
7.3 Control Functionality 823
7.4 Synchronization Function 845
7.5 Switching Sequences 886
7.6 CFC-Chart Settings 893
7.7 Transformer Tap Changers 895

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
(1) Position (connect with binary inputs)

(2) Signalization of the current condition
(3) Command output (connect with relay)
The trip, opening and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
4 different control models are available:
• Direct without feedback monitoring (direct w. normal secur.)
• With reservation (SBO)26 without feedback monitoring (SBO w. normal secur.)
• Direct with feedback monitoring (direct w. enh. security)
• With SBO with feedback monitoring (SBO w. enh. security)

The next figure shows the command sources, command types, and control models.
[dwsteuer-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-1 Command Sources, Command Types and Control Models
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
26 SBO: Select Before Operate

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
7.2.1 General Overview
The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching-
devices function groups (see following figures).
[sc_swi. device FG CB 7SJ81, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Menu
[sc_swi. device FG SD 7SJ81, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu
7.2.2 Switching Device Circuit Breaker
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device

This chapter describes the control properties of the Circuit-breaker switching device.
The Circuit-breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control:
• Function block Circuit breaker
• Function block Control
• Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices, additional functions can be
contained in the Circuit-breaker switching device, for example, Synchrocheck, the Automatic reclosing
(AREC), the Trip logic or Manual On function. However, these are not relevant for the control function. The
description of these functions can be found in the chapter Protection and Automatic Functions. In addition,
other functions can be initialized. The description of these functions can be found in the chapter Protection
Functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dwbreake-220512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-4 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker
Table 7-1 Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Function Description Parameter Function

Block
Circuit The Circuit-breaker function Output time The circuit breaker forms the
breaker block in the SIPROTEC 5 switch position from the posi-
device represents the physical tions of the binary inputs and
switch. also outputs the command via
the binary outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command check, communica-
SBO time-out tion with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block Circuit breaker
Check switching
authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Check blk. by protection
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (depos- The Interlocking functionality
locking protection ited in CFC) generates the releases for
switchgear interlocking
protection.
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Setting Options of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Element

The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance.
Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function
blocks are nevertheless available:
Table 7-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker.
Properties Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control function
detection block 27
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filtering time on/off by changing block27
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block27
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block27
the duration of the software
filtering time.
27 First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

Treatment of spontaneous If you select the General soft- Position of the Control function
position changes (Gen. Soft- ware filter setting, the general block27
ware Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and
for position changes caused by a
switching command apply. By
selecting Spontaneous soft-
ware filter, a separate filtering
is activated for spontaneous posi-
tion changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control function
filtering time neous position changes block27
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block27
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block27
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Inhibit intermediate posi- When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control function
tion for a spontaneous neous change to the intermediate block27
chng. (yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
Table 7-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Circuit-breaker
function block27
Table 7-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings having Effects on the Circuit Breaker

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
status changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter idle time
Chatter check time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit-breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (see 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see the general chapter
7.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
[dwfuncls-140212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.
Table 7-5 Inputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
>Ready The signal >Ready indicates that the OFF-ON-OFF SPS Going
cycle is possible with the circuit breaker.
This signal is used for the AREC standby status.
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting the acquisition blocking and the substi-
tution is blocked.
>Reset switch Among other things, the binary input sets the opera- SPS Unchanged
statist. tion counter for the switch to the value 0.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
External health The binary input External health reflects the ENS Unchanged
circuit-breaker status (EHealth).
This input will be set by the CFC using the BUILD_ENS
block. In turn, BUILD_ENS can query binary inputs that
represent the conditions OK, Warning, or Alarm (as
a result of the function Trip-circuit supervision).
Position The signal Position can be used to read the circuit- DPC Unchanged
breaker position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.
Table 7-6 Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type

Definitive trip Protection has finally been tripped. SPS
Alarm suppression The signaling contact for external alarm inhibition is suppressed during SPS
the runtime of automatic reclosing (optional) as well as during the
command output of switching commands.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of switching cycles of the circuit INS
breaker.
Trip/open cmd. This logic output is responsible for the command output Off. SPS
Close command This logic output is responsible for the command output On. SPS
Command active The binary output Command active is responsible for signaling a SPS
running command (relay active or selected switching device (SEL)).
CB open hours The statistical value counts the hours the circuit breaker is open. INS
Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is INS
greater than the Current thresh. CB open parameter.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation28), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security29 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
28 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
29 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dwsteue1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
Table 7-7 Control Function Block Input and Output
Signal Description Type Value if Signal

Name Quality=Invalid
Cmd. with With the Cmd. with feedback signal, the circuit- Controllable Unchanged
feedback breaker position is accepted via the double-point indi- (DPC)
cation of the Circuit-breaker function block and the Unchanged
command is issued.
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker

For each switching device, you can establish the number of poles (for example, 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole)
that are switched with or without feedback. This results in the necessary amount of information to be
processed, thus establishing the command type.
Whether the circuit breaker is triggered 1-, 1.5-, or 2-pole, depends on the design of the auxiliary and control-
voltage system. In most cases, the activation of the opening coil of the circuit breaker is 1-pole.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Table 7-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants
Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviation of the Connection Variants

BO Binary output
L+; L- Control voltage
A Trip command
Gnd Close command
Table 7-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI
Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI

V Unsaved trip command
Click the right mouse button and enter V.
X Close Command
Click the right mouse button and enter X for the respective binary output.
OH The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter OH.
OL The switching-device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (L).
Click the right mouse button and enter OL.
GH The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is voltage present at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CH.
CL The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is no voltage present at
the routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter CL.
TL Trip command stored
Click the right mouse button and enter TL.
Connection Variant: 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

This is the standard type for the control function. All 3 individual poles of the circuit breaker are triggered
together by a double command.
[dw3polls-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-7 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-8 1-Pole Triggering
[scrang1pLS1p, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-9 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-10 1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-11 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker

The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit
breaker. It is intended for common use by 1-pole protection and control functions.
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device.
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally, only the open
poles are closed.
[dw1polls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-14 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw1panls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-15 1-Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scrang1pLS13pz, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-16 Routing in DIGSI
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases ( Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C ). The protection trip command is routed for
the 3 phases ( Trip/open cmd. 3-pole ). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In
addition, the 3 U (Unlatched) routings of the trip and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also
used by protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
Example: Trip Command during Transition from 1-Pole to 3-Pole

During a transition from 1-pole to 3-pole tripping, Trip only pole A remains active. To inform, for
example, an external AREC whether it is a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, you can use the indication Trip
logic:Trip indication:1-pole and Trip logic:Trip indication:3-pole.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position

The binary inputs for feedback of the switch position are routed as shown in the previous figure (also see
chapter 5.5.7.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scrang1pLSHk, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-17 Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI
The meaning of abbreviations can be found in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
7.2.2.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
normal current
_:2311:102 General:Rated 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
thresh. CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode • unbalancing unbalancing
BFP
• I> query

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

Trip logic
_:5341:103 Trip logic:Reset of • with I< with I<
trip command
• with dropout
Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
break.:Output time
_:4261:105 Circuit • with trip always
break.:Indicat. of
breaking values
• always
Manual close
_:6541:101 Manual 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
close:Action time
_:6541:102 Manual close:CB 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
open dropout delay
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control • status only SBO w. enh.
model security
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
monitoring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:4201:105 Control:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check • no yes
double activat. blk.
• yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. • no yes
by protection
• yes
Switching authority
_:4201:151 Control:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:4201:152 Control:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1
_:4201:115 Control:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:4201:153 Control:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:4201:155 Control:Ident. Freely editable text
sw.auth. 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

sw.auth. 2
sw.auth. 3
sw.auth. 4
sw.auth. 5
_:4201:154 Control:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1
CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
_:6151:102 CB test:Trip only • 0 false
• 1
_:6151:103 CB test:Consider • 0 false
current criterion
• 1
_:6151:104 CB test:Current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:504 Circuit break.:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:ΣI Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:ΣIA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:ΣIB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:ΣIC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(Type)
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:317 Circuit break.:Break. current 3I0/IN MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O
Reset LED Group
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
CB test
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device
7.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device

Like the circuit breaker, the Disconnector switching device contains the following 3 function blocks:
• Function block Disconnector
• Function block Control
• Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XSWI, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
NOTE
i In contrast to the Circuit-breaker switching device, the Disconnector switching device cannot contain any
additional functions because protection functions or synchronization can have no effect on the discon-
nector.
The following figure shows the structure of the Disconnector switching element:
[dwdiscon-190612-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-18 Control-Relevant Function Blocks of the Disconnector Switching Device

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference is
the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit
breaker). Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block.
The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 1 variant:
• Disconnector with 3-pole connection

The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously.
Function Blocks of the Disconnector
Table 7-10 Function Blocks of the Disconnector Function Group
Function Description Parameter Function

Block
Discon- The disconnector represents Maximum output time The disconnector replicates
nector the physical switch in the Seal-in time the switch position from the
SIPROTEC 5 device. Switching-device type status of the binary inputs
and also transmits the
command via the binary
outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command checks, commu-
SBO time-out nication with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the func-
tion block Disconnector
Check switching authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Inter- Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (deposited The Interlocking function-
locking protection in CFC) ality generates the releases
for switchgear interlocking
protection.
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Settings of Disconnector Switching Element

The settings of the disconnector are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance. Additional
disconnector settings that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks and are identical to the
circuit-breaker settings are available:
Table 7-11 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker
Characteristics Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control(1) function
detection block
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filtering time on/off by changing block
the position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control(1) function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block
the duration of the software
filtering time.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

Spontaneous position If the General software Position of the Control(1) function
changes filtered by (Gen. filter setting is selected, the block
Software Filt./Spont. Software Filt.) general settings for software
filtering of spontaneous position
changes and for position changes
caused by a switching command
apply. By selecting Spontaneous
software filter, a separate
filtering is activated for sponta-
neous position changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
filter time neous position changes block
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Spontaneous suppress When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
intermediate position neous change to the intermediate block
(yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
(1) First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
Table 7-12 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Disconnector Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Disconnector (1)
function block
(1) First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
Table 7-13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with Effects on the Disconnector

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
state changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Number of chatter tests
Chatter dead time
Chatter test time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Disconnector switch function block will be
described in the next chapter (see 7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector). The Control function block is
described identically as the Circuit-breaker function block, with the exception that the command check
blocking is available through protection only with the circuit breaker.
More information on this is can be found in chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see the general chapter
7.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Disconnector
The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is to
replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that
register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
The Disconnector function block makes the following settings available (see next table).
(_:5401:101) Maximum output time 10.00 s 0.02 s to 1800 s
The Maximum output time specifies the duration (Increment: 0.01 s)
of the output pulse created by the switching
command.
(_:5401:102) Seal-in time 0.00 s 0 s to 60 s
If the target actuating position is not yet attained
although feedback has already been received, the
output time is extended by the Seal-in time. The
Seal-in time is relevant for equipment that sends
feedback before the switching operation is
completely performed. The Seal-in time is only
considered for control models with feedback moni-
toring.
(_:5401:103) Switching-device type disconnector switch-disconnector
The Switching-device type specifies the type of disconnector
the switching device. grounding switch
fast grounding switch
NOTE
i The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. This parameter is
used to set the disconnector switching device type for communication via IEC 61850. It is a mandatory data
object in the IEC 61850 standard.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Disconnector function block.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dwoutinp-150212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Table 7-14 and Table 7-15 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
Table 7-14 Inputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Value if Signal

Quality=Invalid
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting of the acquisition blocking and of the
substitution is blocked.
>Reset switch The binary input sets the operation counter for the SPS Unchanged
statist. switch to the value 0.
Position The binary input Position can be used to read the DPC Unchanged
disconnector position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.
Table 7-15 Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block

Open command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output Off.
Close command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output On.
Command active The binary output Command active is a running SPS
command for the signalization (command active or
selected switching device). During Command active
either an On or Off command is active.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

Op.ct. The information counts the number of disconnector INS
switching cycles.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation30), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security31 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s -
(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 10.00 s -
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector

The activation types are identical to those for the circuit breaker. The meaning of abbreviations can be found
in 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker and 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
Whether the disconnector is triggered for 1-, 1.5-, or 2-phases depends on the design of the auxiliary and
control voltage system.
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1ptren-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
30 In the IEC 61850 standard, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
31 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scrangtrenn1p, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.
1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-22 1.5-Pole Triggering

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Figure 7-23 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The feedback is routed via the position with the disconnector.
7.2.3.4 Settings

Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
toring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes
_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
Disconnector
_:5401:101 Disconnector:Maximum 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
output time
_:5401:102 Disconnector:Seal-in time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:5401:103 Disconnector:Switching- • switch-disconnector disconnector
device type
• disconnector
• grounding switch
• fast grounding switch

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(Type)
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening(fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
Disconnector
_:5401:500 Disconnector:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:5401:501 Disconnector:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:5401:53 Disconnector:Health ENS O
_:5401:58 Disconnector:Position DPC C
_:5401:300 Disconnector:Open command SPS O
_:5401:301 Disconnector:Close command SPS O
_:5401:302 Disconnector:Command active SPS O
_:5401:305 Disconnector:Op.ct. INS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.3 Control Functionality
7.3.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
• Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
• Switching authority (local/DIGSI/station/remote)
• Switching direction (set=actual)
• Bay interlocking and substation interlocking
• 1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking)
• Blocking by protection function
Confirmation IDs (with Inactive RBAC)

SIPROTEC 5 devices can operate using role-based access control (RBAC). If RBAC is active in the device, the
authorizations to execute various actions are linked directly to the role concept.
If RBAC is inactive in the device, various actions are secured using the confirmation IDs. The following confir-
mation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:
[scconf89-061016-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-26 Confirmation IDs in DIGSI 5: Settings Menu
The following table identifies the meanings of the confirmation IDs:
Table 7-16 Relevant Confirmation IDs for Controls
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Set/operate Changing settings The confirmation ID is requested before device
parameters can be changed.
Operation (function Process data access via Access to process data is possible with the help of
buttons) function buttons push-buttons and function buttons. The confirma-
tion ID of Set/operation is requested.
Control (process) General release for control The confirmation ID is usually not needed for bay
of switching devices controllers. In the case of protection devices, this
confirmation ID can be used to safeguard control
of switching devices.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Control (non-interlocked) Switching non-interlocked Switching mode:
Release for switching without querying the inter-
locking conditions (S1 operation). The fixed
interlocking conditions (for example, >Enable
opening(fixed) and >Enable closing
(fixed)) are still queried if this is set in the
parameters.
The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
Switching authority Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values:
• Set/operate 222222
• Control (process, interlocked) 333333
• Control (not-interlocked) 444444
• Switching authority local 666666

If you have configured a device with key switches, the confirmation IDs for non-interlocked switching and
switching authority are not displayed or editable in DIGSI; the function is handled by the position of the key
switch.
To increase security, change these codes with DIGSI.
Switching Mode (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked)

The switching mode determines whether or not the switchgear interlocking that has been configured in the
CFC is checked before the command is output.
You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 (interlocking off/normal). For devices without a
key switch, you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display (after
entering a confirmation ID). You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources
DIGSI, station or remote.
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off.
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
² Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scmoscha-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-27 Switching Mode in Function Block General
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
Table 7-17 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks
Command Check Switching Mode

Interlocked Non-Interlocked
Switching authority Checked Checked
Switching direction (set=actual) Checked Checked
Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked
Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked
1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking) Checked Not checked
Blocking by protection function Checked Not checked
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
• Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Local) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of on-site operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
• DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance) is
accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
• Station:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Station or Automatic station) is accepted if the
switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from the
device or from outside the station (cause-of-error source Local, Remote or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the this switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
• Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Station is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set to
Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the station (cause-of-error source Local, Station or Automatic station) are rejected.
[schoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-28 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to non-interlocked.
The following table shows the dependency of the switching mode on the key-switch position and the
switching authority. In the case of switching commands from Remote, the information on whether a locked
or non-interlocked switching should take place is also sent. For this reason, the position of the key switch is
irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases. The information in the table assumes that, in the case of
remote switching commands or those from the station, the switching mode is interlocked in each case.
Table 7-18 Dependency of the Switching Mode on the Key-Switch Position and Switching Authority
Switching Authority
Key Switch for Switching Mode Local Remote Station
Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked Interlocked
Non-interlocked Non-interlocked Interlocked Interlocked

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The signals shown in Figure 7-28 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
• In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
• The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
• The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish
the output signals (see Figure 7-29 and Figure 7-30).
[dwhoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-29 Establishing Switching Authority
[dwmodsch-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-30 Establishing Switching Mode
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The following additional settings are available for the switching authority:
• Activation of Switching Authority Station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2):

If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control.
• Multiple Switching Authority Levels:

This option permits switching commands from several command sources in the device if the switching
authority Remote is selected. Subsequently, a distinction between these command sources can also be
made. You can find more details in the following table. Activate this option by setting the check mark
General/Control.
• Specific sw. authorities:

You can enable additional options for the switching authority check. You can find more information
about these options in section Specific Switching Authority, Page 829. By default, these are not used.
[scakthoh-161014, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-31 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels
Table 7-19 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled with/
without Activation of the Station Switching Authority
Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting

Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
Levels vated Authority
Local – – – Local
No Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Station and

Not signed on
remote
Yes Set Station
Not set Remote
Local – – – Local
Yes Signed on – – DIGSI
Remote No – Local and station

Not signed on
and remote
Yes Set Local and station
Not set Local and station
and remote

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority
and the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command
sources when using Station and Remote).
Table 7-20 Result of a Switching-Authority Check
Cause Source Switching Authority

Local DIGSI Station Remote
Local Release Blocked Blocked Blocked
Station Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
Remote Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
Local automatic Release Release Release Release
operation
Station automatic Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
operation
Remote automatic Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
operation
DIGSI Blocked Release Blocked Blocked
Specific Switching Authority

Special switching authorities can be configured as extension of the switching-authority check. This makes it
possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level. Switching authority can be routed to
or revoked from different control centers that can, for example, belong to different companies. Thus, precisely
one of these command sources can switch at a certain time. This function is based on extending the
switching-authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source (field Originator/orIdent of
switching command). In order to turn on the function, go to General/Control and set the check mark for the
parameter Specific sw. authorities. More settings for the configuration of the identifiers and the
behavior of the function as well as additional signals appear (see Figure 7-33). In order to permit an additional
command source to switch, you must activate this specific switching authority. In order to do this, set the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[sc_act additional options sw authority, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-32 Activating Additional Options of the Switching Authority
The additional parameters allow you to set the following options:
• Specific sw.auth. valid for (for station/remote, only remote or only station):
With this parameter, you determine for which command source the extended switching-authority check
is used.
Table 7-21 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw.auth. valid
for and the Level of the Command Source (Field Originator/orCat of the Switching
Command)
Command Source Specific sw.auth. valid for

station station/remote remote
Local, local automatic No check No check No check
Station, station automatic Check Check No check
Remote, remote auto- No check Check Check
matic
DIGSI No check No check No check

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
• Num. of specific sw.auth.:

With this parameter, you determine how many specific switching authorities are available. This deter-
mines the number of parameters Identifier switching authority as well as the controllable
Active. Sw. auth..
• Identifier switching authority 1 to Identifier switching authority 5:

The number of names that appear corresponds to the number set in the previous parameter. You can
select the names as you wish, 1 to 64 characters are allowed. The command check verifies whether these
titles correspond with those sent by the command source. This applies to the switching commands as
well as to the activation of a specific switching authority. The requirement for this is the system interface
IEC 61850. The field Originator/orIdent is used.
• Multiple specific sw.auth. ensures the simultaneous validity of the various command sources.
The following table shows how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating
the command sources of Remote or Station. If this parameter is activated, all parameterized command
sources get permissible automatically (see last row in the table) and they cannot be deactivated via the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5. Otherwise, the enabled command
source with the lowest number has always the highest priority and prevails against the other numbers.
Table 7-22 Determining Switching Authority if Multiple Command Sources Are Available
Multiple Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Resulting
specific auth. 1 auth. 2 auth. 3 auth. 4 auth. 5 Specific
sw.auth. Switching
Authority
No On * * * * Switch. auth. 1
No Off On * * * Switch. auth. 2
No Off Off On * * Switch. auth. 3
No Off Off Off On * Switch. auth. 4
No Off Off Off Off On Switch. auth. 5
No Off Off Off Off Off None
Yes On On On On On All
The * symbol in the previous table refers to any value.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[sc_sw authority and mode in info routing, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-33 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Information Routing (in Function
Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities
Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices
In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority as
described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all
switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit. In addition, you can configure an individual switching
authority and specific switching authority as well as individual switching modes for single switching devices.
Therefore, individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta-
neously.
This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks:
• Circuit-breaker function group
• Disconnector function group
• Transformer tap changer function group
• Switching sequence function block

This allows to select individual settings for each switching device. This is useful if, for example, switching
devices of different utilities are managed within a single bay.
In order to activate this option, go to the function block Control of a switching device and set the parameter
Check switching authority to advanced. An additional table containing initially 2 parameters is
displayed.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[sc_add parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-34 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device
When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as
an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured. Additional signals are displayed in the
Control function block of the corresponding switching device.
[sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device
[sc_switching auth sw mode changeable, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-36 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices
The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching
mode for the switching devices. For this switching device, these inputs overwrite the central switching

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the
states only for this switching device.
When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching
device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed.
[sc_Parameters FB control all additional options, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-37 Parameters of the FB Control with All Additional Options
The functionality of the specific switching authority for the individual switching device and the significance of
the additional parameters is identical to the operating mode of the central specific switching authority. Addi-
tional signals are displayed in the Control function block.
[sc_Specific sw authority changeable per sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 Specific Switching Authority, Modifiable for Each Switching Device
Switching Direction (Set = Actual)

With this check, you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved. For
instance, before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker, its current position is determined. If this circuit
breaker is already in the Off position, no command is issued. This is logged accordingly.
Switchgear Interlocking Protection

Switchgear interlocking protection means avoiding maloperation by checking the bay and substation inter-
locking and thus preventing equipment damage and personal injury. The interlocking conditions are always
system-specific and for this reason are stored as CFC charts in the devices.
SIPROTEC 5 devices recognize 2 different types of interlocking conditions:
• Normal interlocking conditions:

These can be revoked by changing the switching mode to non-interlocked.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
• Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions:

These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked.
Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium-
voltage switch.
Each of the 2 categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the
result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure
below). The default setting for all release signals is TRUE, so that no switchgear interlocking checks take place
if no CFC charts have been prepared.
[scverrie-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-39 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking
EXAMPLE
For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[ScAbgang-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-40 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[scverpla-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-41 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking
Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for the linkage. A simple OR suffices.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the Circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 7-41).
EXAMPLE
For system interlocking

This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupler bay = E02 (see the figure below).
[ScAnlage-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-42 System with Feeder and Coupler Bays
The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus-coupler circuit-breaker command block at the end:
If the 2 busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the CFC
of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Bus coupler closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure below).
[scplanve-241013, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-43 Interlocking Chart for Substation Interlocking

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking)

The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You
can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block.
The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).
[scdoppel-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-44 Activating the Double-Activation Blocking
With SIPROTEC 5, it is also possible to achieve multibay double-activation blocking.

In this case, send the signal not selected to other devices for analysis using IEC 61850-GOOSE. This signal
is available under Position in every Circuit-breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching device
function groups (see figure below).
[scnotselected-090315_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-45 Signal Not selected in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).
Blocking by Protection Function
• Default setting (_:107) Check blk. by protection = yes

In devices with protection and control functions, Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be
issued while protection functions have picked up.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
This applies to automatic reclosing as well. Switching commands must be prevented as long as automatic
reclosing is active.
The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this
blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 7-44).
NOTE
i Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.
NOTE
i The command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling circuit breakers,
because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions and automatic reclosing has been
configured. In disconnectors, this relationship is not always unique, precisely with regard to the 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout, and it must be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following
indications (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
• Group indication: Pickup (Function group Line)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)
• General: In progress (Automatic reclosing function)
7.3.2 Command Logging
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
• Date and time
• Name of the switching device (or function group)
• Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
• Status or switching direction
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
• Successful command output
• Interrupted command
• Command interrupted by switchgear interlocking
• Command ended due to missing feedback
• Spontaneous change of switch position without command output

Figure 7-46 to Figure 7-52 indicates command logging for various scenarios of the standard control model
SBO with feedback monitoring.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scposcas-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-46 Positive Case (Display 1)
[scposca2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-47 Positive Case (Display 2)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scposcan-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-48 Positive Case with Command Cancellation
[scnegint-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-49 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scnegtim-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-50 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1)
[scnegti2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-51 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 2)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scsponta-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-52 Spontaneous Status Change
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 7-23 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
Reason for Transmission Value

Selected (SEL) Desired value
Operate (OPR) Desired value
Command cancellation (CNC) Desired value
Command execution and termination (CMT) Actual value
Spontaneous change (SPN) Actual value
7.3.3 Settings

Control
_:101 Control:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:104 Control:Check switching • no yes
authority
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

_:105 Control:Check if pos. is • no yes
reached
• yes
_:106 Control:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:107 Control:Check blk. by • no yes
protection
• yes

(Type)
Control
_:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4 Synchronization Function
The 1-channel Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk
to the stability of the system when interconnecting 2 parts of an electrical power system.
Typical applications are as follows:
• Synchronization of a line and a busbar
• Synchronization of 2 busbars via a cross-coupling
• Synchronization of a generator and a busbar

A power transformer between the 2 measuring points can also be taken into consideration.
The following operating modes are covered:
• Synchrocheck
• Switching synchronous power systems
• Switching asynchronous power systems
• Switching to dead line/busbar
The Synchronization function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group.

The following stage types can be used within the function:
• Synchrocheck stage
• Synchronous/asynchronous stage
The Synchrocheck and Synchronous/Asynchronous (Sychr./Asycr.) stage types are preconfigured at the
factory.
You can operate a maximum of 2 stages of the Synchrocheck stage type or 6 stages of the Synchronous/
asynchronous in parallel.
As soon as the function is available in the device, the functional measured values are calculated and displayed.
[dwsynfn1-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.3 Connection and Definition
Connection
You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 7-56 shows
an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler.
The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference
side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2). The reference voltage of side 1 is
designated in the synchronization function as V132. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is
connected to the Sync. voltage 1 interface of the Circuit-breaker function group. The voltage to be set as
reference is designated with V232. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the
Sync. voltage 2 interface of the Circuit-breaker function group. The assignment of the measuring points to
the interfaces of the Circuit-breaker function group can be configured, see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding
in the Device.
The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary
system:
• Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1-phase and a 3-phase meas-
uring point (Figure 7-54 and Figure 7-56):
The voltage connected to the 1-phase measuring point is definitive here. If. for example, this is the
phase-to-ground voltage VA, the voltage VA is also used by the other side of the 3-phase measuring point.
• Connection of the primary system via 6 voltage inputs and hence use of two 3-phase measuring points
(Figure 7-55):
The phase-to-phase voltage VAB of both sides is always used for the test.
You can connect both the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase-to-phase voltages to the device. The
possible interface connections are listed in the Appendix.
[dwsyns01-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-54 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
32 Do not confuse the designations V1 and V2 with the numbering of the voltage inputs V1 to V4 (Figure 7-54) and V1 to V8
(Figure 7-55).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dwsyns02-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-55 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs
[dwsyns03-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-56 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
Definition of the Variables

The definition of the variables is important for understanding the following implementation. The reference
side 1 indicates the function with 1. This yields the reference values voltageV1, frequencyf1, and phase angle
α1. The side to be synchronized indicates the function with 2. The electrical variables of side 2 are then the
voltageV2, frequencyf2, and phase angle α2.
When forming the differential variables, the function is oriented to the definition of the absolute measuring
error (Δ x = measured value – real value). The reference value and hence the real value is side 1. This results in
the following calculation specifications:
Differential voltage dV = V2 – V1
A positive sign means that the voltage V2 is greater than the voltage V1. In other cases, the sign is negative.
Differential frequency df = f2 – f1
A positive result means that according to the example from Figure 7-54 the busbar frequency is greater than
the line frequency.
Phase-angle difference dα = α2 – α1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The representation is limited to ±180o. A positive result means that α2 leads by a maximum of 180o. In the
case of a negative value, α2 lags by a maximum of 180o. Figure 7-57 shows the circumstances. The phase
angle α1 was added to the zero axis as a reference system.
If asynchronous systems are present and the frequency f2 is greater than f1, the angle dα then changes from
the negative value to 0 and then to the positive value. As shown in Figure 7-57, the direction of rotation is
counterclockwise (mathematically positive). At f2 < f1, the direction of rotation is clockwise.
[dw_synp_04, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-57 Phase-Angle Difference Representation dα
Only positive values are permissible for the setting parameters. Inequalities are used to characterize the
setting parameters uniquely. The representation is explained with the example of differential voltage. 2
setting values are necessary to allow unbalanced settings.
The inequality V2 > V1 yields a positive value for dV. The associated parameter is Max. voltage diff.
V2>V1. For the 2nd setting parameter Max. voltage diff. V2<V1, the inequality V2 < V1 applies. It
corresponds to a negative dV.
The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle.
7.4.4.1 Description
Overview of a Synchronization Stage (Sync Stage)

A synchronization stage can be integrated in the following blocks (see Figure 7-58):
• Stage control with mode, state control, standby and blocking (description in this chapter)
• Supervision (description in this chapter)
• Functional sequence for issuing the closing release (see chapter 7.4.6 Sequence of Functions)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[losyn001-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-58 Overview of the Stage Logic
Stage Control
The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage (see Figure 7-58).
Note the following special features:
• As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measured values are calculated
and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to start
the stage for this purpose.
• If all synchronization stages are deactivated within the function, closure via the control will no longer be
possible, as none of the stages can generate a closing release. If the synchronization function is deleted,
the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization. In this case, it is
possible to activate via the control without synchronization.
• If more than one synchronization stage is activated, the >Selection signal must be active for exactly
one stage, so that it can be activated via the controls.
You can block the entire synchronization stage via the binary signal >Block stage. A started process is
completed and the entire stage reset after blocking. The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching
procedure. The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions. The measured values are still
calculated and displayed.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Operating Range
[losyn002-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-59 Logic of the Operating Ranges
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configurable voltage limits Min.
operating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax, as well as by the specified frequency band
frated ±4 Hz.
If one or both voltages are outside the permitted operating range when the measurement is started or a
voltage leaves the range, this is displayed via corresponding indications Frequency f1 > fmax,
Frequency f1 < fmin, Voltage V1 > Vmax, Voltage V1 < Vmin etc. The closing conditions are
then not checked.
Supervision
The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the supervisions picks up,
the Health goes to alarm. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close command is
not possible in this case.
• For consistency of settings of specific parameters

Definite threshold-value settings are checked after a parameter change. If there is an inconsistency, the
error message Setting error is issued.
• For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization
If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time, the error
message Multiple selection is issued.
Measuring-Voltage Failure
If a voltage-transformer fault (measuring-voltage failure) is recorded via the binary input signal >Open of one
of the voltage-measuring points, then the closing conditions of the synchronization stage are no longer
tested. This means that a release of the closure based on the measurement is no longer possible. The readi-
ness of the stage turns to warning. Direct close command is still possible.
The device-internal supervision function measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) does not
have any effect on the synchronization stage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Function Measured Values

The function measured values for the Synchronization function are displayed in their own primary, secondary
and percentage measured value windows. Voltage measurements are always displayed as ph-ph voltages,
even if the associated measuring point records phase-to-ground voltages. The function measured values are
determined and displayed as soon as the device is functional. The difference values are calculated as soon as
the stage is activated.
Table 7-24 Protection-Specific Values of the Synchronization
Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
V1 Reference voltage V1 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V2 Voltage to be synchronized V2 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
f1 Frequency of the voltage V1 Hz Hz Rated frequency
f2 Frequency of the voltage V2 Hz Hz Rated frequency
dV Voltage difference V2-V1 kV V –
df Frequency difference f2–f1 Hz Hz –
dα Angle difference α2–α1 o – –
Multiple Synchronization Points

The synchronization function can only be used within a Circuit-breaker function group. It always operates on
the circuit breaker that is linked to the Circuit-breaker function group. The reference to the circuit breaker is
therefore unique. If you wish to switch several circuit breakers (synchronization points) with the device, you
must create several Circuit-breaker function groups.
Different Synchronization Conditions per Synchronization Point

Within the synchronization function, you can operate maximum 2 stages of the stage type Synchrocheck and
maximum 6 stages of the type Synchronous/asynchronous in parallel. All setting parameters for a synchroni-
zation point are included in each synchronization stage.
If you have to synchronize with different synchronization conditions (parameter settings), several synchroniza-
tion stages are used for a synchronization point/circuit breaker. In this case, you must define which of the
synchronization stages is currently active via the binary signal >Selection (synchronization stage x). The
closing conditions are checked if the respective stage is activated via the >Selection binary signal and the
stage is activated.
The fault indication Multiple selection is issued upon simultaneous selection of different synchroniza-
tion stages. If several synchronization stages are activated and the input signal >Selection (synchronization
stage x) is missing at the starting time, a valid selection is awaited during the supervision time Max.durat.
sync.process. If this does not come, the process is terminated.
Different Voltage-Transformer Ratios of Both Parts of the Electrical Power System

The settings of the rated parameters of the transformer for the measuring points automatically takes the
different voltage-transformer transformation ratios of both parts of the electrical power system into account.
The Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed for this purpose.
Synchronization via a Transformer

There are systems in which a power transformer is located between the voltage measuring points of the circuit
breaker to be synchronized. The device automatically considers the different voltage stages by setting the
transformer ratios (within the measuring points).
A phase displacement must be taken into account based on the transformer vector group, via the Angle
adjust. (transform.) parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The parameter is defined as -Δα = –(α2 – α1).

To calculate the Delta parameters, the voltage of side 2 is converted to the voltage of side 1 using to the
settings of both parameters.
In the Application and Setting Notes, several examples are provided for using both parameters.
Different Connection Types on Both Sides

If both the measuring points used by the synchronization functions record different voltages of the 3-phase
system, the calculation of the phase-angle difference is automatically taken into consideration.
EXAMPLE:
The 1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 1 records the phase-to-phase voltage VAB. The 1-
phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 2 records VA. In this case the phase angle between VAB
and VA takes into consideration the delta variable Δα during calculation..
This automation guarantees that several voltage sources can be switched between during running operation,
each of which records different voltages.
Stage-Type Selection
The following 2 types of stage are available:
Stage Type Application
Synchrocheck stage Select this type of stage to issue, for example, an additional release
during an automatic reclosing or a manual reclosing for safety reasons.
With this type, the variables ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before
connecting the 2 parts of the power system.
Synchronous/asynchronous stage Select this type of stage if it is necessary to differentiate between
synchronous and asynchronous systems, depending on the switch posi-
tion.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous
systems are present. A typical characteristic of synchronous systems is
equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). In this state, the conditions Δα and ΔV
are checked.
If the systems are galvanically isolated, asynchronous systems can be
present. At the same time, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV
and frequency difference Δf conditions is checked. The time of the
direct close command is calculated taking into account the angle differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. The time of the
direct close command is calculated such that the voltages are equal at
the moment of pole contact of the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).
Configuration of the Voltages V1 (Reference Side) and V2

The voltages V1 and V2 are established via the connection of the measuring points to the interface of the
function groups (refer to chapter 7.4.3 Connection and Definition). The measuring point connected to the
interface Voltage is the reference side 1 with the reference voltage V1. The measuring point connected to the
interface Sync. voltage is the side 2 with V2. The definition of the Delta parameters that can be derived from
this is also described in chapter 7.4.3 Connection and Definition.
Parameter: Min. operating limit Vmin, Max. operat. limit Vmax
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:101) Min. operating limit Vmin = 90 V
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:102) Max. operat. limit Vmax = 110 V

The values define the voltage operating range of the synchronization stage. A normal setting is approx. ±10 %
of the rated voltage.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
NOTE
i All voltages connected according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to
the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test. Therefore, connected phase-to-ground voltages are multiplied by √3 as
the threshold values with reference to the rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) must be set.
[lohyster-010415-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
If the Synchronization function is started within the hysteresis, no switching is performed as a result of the
minimum and maximum operating limit (parameters Min. operating limit Vmin and Max. operat.
limit Vmax). If the Synchronization function is started within the voltage operating range and the voltage
exceeds the minimum or maximum operating limit during the synchronization process, selecting can occur in
the area of the hysteresis.
Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process
• Default setting (_:5071:110) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s

The parameterized conditions must be fulfilled within this time. If the conditions are not fulfilled, no further
closing release takes place and the synchronization stage is stopped. If this time is set to ∞, the conditions are
checked until they are fulfilled. This is also the default setting. Observe the operating conditions when
defining the time limitation. This must be defined specifically for each system. If 0 or 0.01 s is set, then all
conditions are checked once at the starting time point. Thereafter the process is stopped immediately.
Parameter: Voltage adjustment
• Default setting (_:5071:126) Voltage adjustment = 1.00

The parameter can be used for correction of amplitude errors, for example, due to indirect measurement (for
example, tap changer).
To apply a transformer between measuring points, the Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed. The
transformer ratios are set for the measuring points and the function will take them into account automatically.
Parameter: Angle adjust. (transform.)
• Default setting (_:2311:127) Angle adjust. (transform.) = 0 o

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The parameter can be applied under the following conditions:
• 1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points
• 2. Correction of phase-angle errors

1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points:
[losynae1-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-60 Transformer Between the Measuring Points
If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized,
you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a vector group deviating from 0. Figure 7-60 shows such
an application. The Angle adjust. (transform.) parameter is used to save the phase-angle rotation.
The vector group of the transformer is defined by the upper-voltage side to the lower-voltage side. If the refer-
ence voltage transformer V1 is connected on the upper-voltage side of the transformer (as in Figure 7-60),
enter the phase-angle rotation directly according to the vector group. A vector-group figure of 5, for example,
means an angular rotation of 5 ⋅ 30o = 150o. Set this value for the Angle adjust. (transform.) param-
eter.
If the voltage connection V1 is on the lower-voltage side due to the system, you then have to apply the exten-
sion angle with 360o. A transformer with vector group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o –
(5 ⋅ 30o) = 210o.
2. Correction of phase-angle errors:
You can correct a phase-angle error between the voltage transformers in increments. Ascertain a possible
correction value during commissioning.
Parameter: CB make time
• Default setting (_:5041:113) CB make time = 0.06 s

If you are to interconnect under asynchronous system conditions with the device as well, the closing time of
the circuit breaker must be taken into account. The device uses this to calculate the time of the direct close
command, so that the voltages are in phase at the moment of closure of the switch poles. Note that apart
from the operating time of the switch, this also includes the pickup time of an auxiliary relay that may be
upstream. You can determine the closing time using the protection device (see commissioning notes in
chapter 10.12 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function).
This parameter only occurs for the stage type Synchronous/asynchronous.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:127 General:Angle adjust. -179.0 ° to 180.0 ° 0.0 °
(transform.)
General
_:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
operating limit Vmin
_:5071:102 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:5071:126 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
General
_:5041:1 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:5041:101 Sychr./Asycr.1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:5041:102 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asycr.1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:5041:126 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
7.4.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching
Dynamic measuring-point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro-
check function to various measuring points. In this way, for example, it is possible to use the correct voltage
on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices. If more than 1 measuring point is connected to V
sync1 or V sync2, you must create the V sync select. function block in the Circuit-breaker function
group.
Selection of the desired voltage measuring points (V sync1 and V sync2) for the Circuit-breaker function
group is controlled via Continuous Function Chart.
Connecting Measuring Points to Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The following figure shows the connection of the Circuit-breaker function group with several measuring
points in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in parentheses after the name.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scdynms2-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface.
• It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to 1 voltage interface, a function block must be expanded to
enable selection of the synchronization voltage.
CFC Control
The voltages are selected by CFC logic on the basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than one measuring
point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit-breaker function group, theV sync select.
function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit-breaker function group. A CFC logic (see
following example) has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to
ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function.
[scdynmsx-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-62 CFC Logic: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
If no measuring point can be selected because of the switch or disconnector positions, the ID0 is used. If ID0 is
selected, the indication (_:2311:304) Blocked no V selected is set. The synchrocheck is blocked. If
you have activated the parameter (_:5071:108) Direct close command, unsynchronized switching is
still possible.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.6 Sequence of Functions
[losynf01-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-63 Sequence of Functions
Start
The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be
started device-internally by the control and the reclosing, or externally via binary input signals, for example, by
an external automatic reclosing (AREC), (see chapter 7.4.11 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing
(AREC), and External Triggering).
At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection of the synchronization stage (see chapter
Supervision in chapter 7.4.4.1 Description). If this is the case, the process is terminated. After a successful
start, the indication In progress is cleared and the supervision time for the maximum duration of the
synchronization process (parameter Max.durat. sync.process) is started. The system also checks
whether the voltages and frequencies are in the operating range (see chapter 7.4.4.1 Description). If this is
not the case, the closing conditions are not checked.
Checking the Closing Conditions, Closure

After starting, the parameterized closing conditions are checked, depending on the selected operating mode
(see chapter 7.4.8.1 Description to 7.4.10 Direct Close Command ). Every condition fulfilled is explicitly indi-
cated here. Conditions not fulfilled are also indicated. If all conditions are fulfilled, the synchronization stage
sets the indication All sync. conditio. OK. The indication is active until all conditions are fulfilled. The
further behavior for issuing the release for closing depends on the type of the stage (see chapters
7.4.7.1 Description and 7.4.8.1 Description). The release is signaled via the Release close cmd. indica-
tion. This indication is active for 100 ms. With an internal start, the control or the AREC performs the actual
closure, depending on the internal starting source.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Switching to Dead Line/Busbar

If operating modes for switching to dead parts of an electrical power system are configured, the associated
conditions are also checked after the start (see chapter 7.4.9.1 Description). The fulfilled conditions are
signaled. An adjustable supervision time is started after the closure conditions are fulfilled (parameter CB
make time). If the conditions remain valid until expiry of the time, the function gives the release for closure
after expiry of the time.
Direct Close Command

If the Direct close command operation is active, the function instantaneously initiates the release for closure
after the successful start (see chapter 7.4.10 Direct Close Command ). A combination of direct close command
with other release conditions is not advisable, as these conditions are bypassed by the direct close command.
End of the Process

If the function is started via the device-internal control or AREC, these functions also terminate the synchroni-
zation process upon closure. The process is terminated via the corresponding binary signals in case of external
starting.
If the supervision time (Max.durat. sync.process parameter) has expired, the process is also completed
and the indication Max. time exceeded is issued. A renewed synchronization is only possible if the stage is
restarted.
Blocking Closure
You can use the input signal >Block close command to block the release signal for the closure (signal
Release close cmd.) as well as the closure itself. The measurement continues to operate during the
blocking. If the blocking is revoked and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release is given for closure.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.7 Stage Synchrocheck
7.4.7.1 Description
Checking Closing Conditions
[losynche-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-64 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Function
With this operating mode, the values ΔV, Δf, and Δα are checked before connecting the 2 parts of the elec-
trical power system. The indication All sync. conditio. OK signals that the setting values (conditions)
have been reached and that the release for closure has been given (see section Checking the Closing Condi-
tions, Closure in chapter 7.4.6 Sequence of Functions).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK, Frequency
diff. OK, and Angle difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica-
tions. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Parameter: Maximum Differential Values of Voltage, Frequency and Angle
• Default setting (_:5071:122) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 5.0 V
• Default setting (_:5071:123) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 5.0 V
• Default setting (_:5071:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:5071:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:5071:124) Max. angle diff. α2>α1 = 10o
• Default setting (_:5071:125) Max. angle diff. α2<α1 = 10o

2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing ranges
can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts of
the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.
7.4.7.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
operating limit Vmin
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5071:105 Synchrocheck 1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:5071:103 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
with voltage
_:5071:109 Synchrocheck 1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

Synchr. conditions
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5071:117 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
frequency diff. f2<f1
_:5071:124 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:5071:125 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1

(Type)
Synchrocheck 1
_:5071:81 Synchrocheck 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5071:500 Synchrocheck 1:>Selection SPS I
_:5071:502 Synchrocheck 1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5071:503 Synchrocheck 1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5071:504 Synchrocheck 1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5071:506 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5071:505 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5071:507 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5071:508 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5071:501 Synchrocheck 1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5071:54 Synchrocheck 1:Inactive SPS O
_:5071:52 Synchrocheck 1:Behavior ENS O
_:5071:53 Synchrocheck 1:Health ENS O
_:5071:328 Synchrocheck 1:In progress SPS O
_:5071:324 Synchrocheck 1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5071:305 Synchrocheck 1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5071:325 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5071:326 Synchrocheck 1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5071:327 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5071:307 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:306 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:308 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:309 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:310 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:313 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:314 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(Type)
_:5071:317 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5071:318 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5071:319 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5071:320 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5071:329 Synchrocheck 1:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:5071:321 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5071:322 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5071:304 Synchrocheck 1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5071:323 Synchrocheck 1:Setting error SPS O
7.4.8 Stage Synchronous/Asynchronous
7.4.8.1 Description
A distinction according to synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made with this type of stage.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical character-
istic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency (Δf ≈ 0). If the frequency difference falls below the
setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the
frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, asynchronous
systems are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions. Both operating modes can be
switched on and off separately (parameter Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the set
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN,,
the operating mode synchronous is active. In other
cases, the operating mode asynchronous is active.
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
operating mode is exclusively active asynchro-
nously.
on off If the frequency difference is below the set
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN,,
the operating mode synchronous is active. In other
cases, the stage is inactive, that is, a switching
release cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No activa-
tion release can be be given via these operating
modes either.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Checking the Closing Conditions in Synchronous Systems
[losynsyn-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-65 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems
The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication.
The parameters ΔV and Δα are checked for issuing an activation release (see Figure 7-66). The indication All
sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions remain
fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is given (see
also chapter 7.4.7.1 Description).
Every condition fulfilled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica-
tions. If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too
large(V2<V1) is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be
increased for a successful synchronization.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[losynzus-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-66 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Checking Closing Conditions in Asynchronous Systems
[losynasy-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-67 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems
In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf conditions is
checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular differ-
ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at
the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker (ΔV ≈ 0, Δα ≈ 0).
Ranges in the Voltage-Frequency Diagram (V-f Diagram)

Figure 7-68 shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V-f diagram.
The frequency band is very narrow owing to the functional principle in the case of synchronous systems.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[losynarb-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-68 Operating Range under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)
Parameter: Synchronous operating mode, Asynchronous operating mode
• Default setting (_:5041:119) Sync. operating mode = off
• Default setting (_:5041:114) Async. operating mode= off

The operating modes of the stages can be activated or deactivated via the parameters. The operating modes
are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons.
The following combination options are possible:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description

on on If the frequency difference is below the set threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the operating
mode synchronous is active. In other cases, the oper-
ating mode asynchronous is active.
If you wish to interconnect galvanically isolated
systems, then select this operating mode.
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
asynchronous operating mode is exclusively active.
The closing time of the circuit breaker is this always
taken into account for determining the connecting
point.
Select this operating mode if you wish to activate
machines, for example generators or asynchronous
motors.
However, if synchronous conditions with a low Δf are
present, a close command is generated in this oper-
ating mode without a kick pulse.
on off Use this operating mode for galvanically connected
systems.
Closure is only possible with synchronous systems
(with low Δf).
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No closing
release can be therefore be given via this operating
mode.
This configuration is only advisable for special applica-
tions. Select this operating mode if you only wish to
switch, for example de-energized parts of the power
system.
Parameter for asynchronous operation: Max. voltage diff. of voltage and frequency
• Default setting (_:5041:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
• Default setting (_:5041:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz

For information, see Parameter for synchronous operation
Parameter for synchronous operation: Maximum voltage diff. of voltage and angle
• Default setting (_:5041:124) Max. angle diff. α2>α1 = 10o
• Default setting (_:5041:125) Max. angle diff. α2<α1 = 10o

2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing ranges
can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts of
the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.
Parameter: Switchover between synchronous and asynchronous operation
• Recommended setting value (_:5041:120) f-threshold ASYN<->SYN = 0.01 Hz

This parameter is used to set the frequency difference for switching over between synchronous and asynchro-
nous operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 0.01 Hz.
7.4.8.3 Settings

General
• on
• test
ating limit Vmin
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asycr.1:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5041:105 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:5041:103 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
with voltage
_:5041:109 Sychr./Asycr.1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:5041:114 Sychr./Asycr.1:Async. • off on
operating mode
• on
_:5041:113 Sychr./Asycr.1:CB make 0.01 s to 0.60 s 0.06 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

_:5041:117 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Synchr. op.mode
_:5041:119 Sychr./Asycr.1:Sync. • off on
operating mode
• on
_:5041:120 Sychr./Asycr.1:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
threshold ASYN<->SYN
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:124 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:5041:125 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:5041:121 Sychr./Asycr.1:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command

(Type)
Sychr./Asycr.1
_:5041:81 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5041:500 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Selection SPS I
_:5041:502 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5041:503 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5041:504 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5041:506 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5041:505 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5041:507 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5041:508 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5041:501 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5041:54 Sychr./Asycr.1:Inactive SPS O
_:5041:52 Sychr./Asycr.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5041:53 Sychr./Asycr.1:Health ENS O
_:5041:328 Sychr./Asycr.1:In progress SPS O
_:5041:324 Sychr./Asycr.1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5041:305 Sychr./Asycr.1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5041:303 Sychr./Asycr.1:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:5041:325 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5041:326 Sychr./Asycr.1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5041:327 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5041:307 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:306 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:308 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:309 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(Type)
_:5041:310 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:313 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:314 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:317 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5041:318 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5041:319 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5041:320 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5041:329 Sychr./Asycr.1:dfdiff/dt too large SPS O
_:5041:321 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5041:322 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5041:304 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5041:323 Sychr./Asycr.1:Setting error SPS O
7.4.9 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar
7.4.9.1 Description
If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes.
If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the part
of the electrical power system is detected. In this case, all phases are compared to the parameter V1, V2
without voltage. The energized side must be in the defined operating range with respect to voltage and
frequency (see chapter 7.4.4.1 Description) and all phases must exceed the threshold V1, V2 with
voltage.
The following additional closing conditions can be selected, which are then applied next to the closing condi-
tions for the synchronism:
Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1> & V2< Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is energized and the part of the electrical power system
U2 is de-energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2> Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is de-energized and the part of the electrical power
system U2 is energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2< Closing release provided mains adapters V 1 and V2 are de-ener-
gized.
Each of these conditions can be made effective individually via parameters or binary input. You can also set
parameters for combinations, for example a release for closure, if Close cmd. at V1> & V2< or Close
cmd. at V1< & V2> has been fulfilled.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[losyn003-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-69 Release Conditions for Switching to De-Energized Line/Busbar
The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled and Cond. V1<V2<
fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled.
You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which the closing conditions
must at least be fulfilled with de-energized connection, before closing is allowed.

If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power system
can be connected together via the following operating modes. The above potential release conditions are
independent of one another and can also be combined.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
NOTE
i For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no.
Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no for
reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for
example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also Figure 7-69). This prevents one of these operating
modes from being incorrectly activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2>
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:105) Close cmd. at V1< & V2> = no
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1of the power system is de-energized and part V2 of the power
system is energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1> & V2<
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:106) Close cmd. at V1> & V2< = no
yes If part V1of the power system is energized and part V2 of the power
system is de-energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
information.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2<
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:107) Close cmd. at V1< & V2< = no
yes If the parts V1 and V2 of the power system are de-energized, the release
for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the
supervision time has passed.
information.
Parameter: V1, V2 with voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:104) V1, V2 with voltage = 80 V

The setting value indicates the voltage above which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as activated with certainty.
You must set the value below the minimum expected operational undervoltage. Siemens therefore recom-
mends a setting value of approx. 80 % of the rated voltage. All voltages connected according to the parame-
terized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test.
Parameter: V1, V2 without voltage
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:103) V1, V2 without voltage = 5 V

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The setting value indicates the voltage below which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as deactivated with certainty.
Siemens recommends a setting value of approx. 5 % of the rated voltage for this. All voltages connected
according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax
test.
Parameter: Supervision time
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:109) Supervision time = 0.1 s

The parameter defines a supervision time for which the above additional closing conditions have to be at least
fulfilled at de-energized switching, before the release for closing is given. In order to include transient
phenomena, Siemens recommends a value of 0.1 s.
Parameter: Direct close command
• Recommended setting value (_:5071:108) Direct close command = no

In this operating mode, the function initiates a closing release without any testing upon start of the synchroni-
zation stage. The closure occurs immediately.
NOTE
i For safety reasons, Siemens recommends leaving the setting atno. If a direct close command is necessary,
Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' (see also Figure 7-71). This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly acti-
vated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
7.4.10 Direct Close Command
You can activate the operating mode direct close command statically via the Direct close command
parameter or dynamically with the binary input signal >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see Figure 7-70).
[losyndir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-70 Activation of the Operating Mode Direct Close Command
The operating mode Direct close command function initiates a closure release without any testing upon start
of the synchronization stage. The closure occurs immediately.
The combination Direct close command with other operating modes is not recommended, as the other oper-
ating data is bypassed.
If the synchronization function is defective (standby of the sync stage = alarm or warning), a direct close
command is executed or not executed, depending on the type of fault (see also supervisions in chapter
7.4.4.1 Description).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.11 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering
With Control
The control and synchronization functions are always located in a Circuit-breaker function group. The control
and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the Circuit-
breaker function group.
As soon as the synchronization function is in the Circuit-breaker function group, the circuit breaker is subject
to compulsory synchronization. If all synchronization stages are deactivated, the circuit breaker cannot be acti-
vated via the control, as no release can be generated for the closure. The circuit breaker is no longer subject to
compulsory synchronization after deletion of the synchronization function. Closure without synchronization is
then possible via the control.
If closure is to be synchronized via the control, the control automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.4.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the control, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.
[losynaw1-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-71 Interaction of the Control with the Synchronization Function
With Automatic Reclosing

The automatic reclosing mechanism (AREC) can also work with the synchronization function. Both functions
are always located in a Circuit-breaker function group. Consequently the AREC and synchronization function
always work with the circuit breaker that is linked to the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must select a synchronization stage via settings within the AREC so that closure is synchronized by the
AREC. The tests for the synchronization stage are used for the closure by the AREC. If no synchronization stage
is selected, the AREC then activates without synchronization.
If closure is to be synchronized via the AREC, the AREC automatically generates an internal signal which starts
the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.4.6 Sequence of Functions.
After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the AREC, which closes the
circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Figure 7-72 Connection of the AREC to the Synchronization Function
With External Control

You have the option of controlling the synchronization function externally via binary input signals. This can be
done as follows:
• Edge-controlled
• Via the signals >Start syn. process and >Stop syn. process
• State-controlled, via the signal >Start / stop syn.proc. (see also chapter 7.4.6 Sequence of Func-
tions).
The start is followed by the functional sequence (see chapter 7.4.6 Sequence of Functions). If the conditions
are fulfilled, the output signal Release close cmd. is issued. The switched object QAx of the Circuit-
breaker function group is not closed. The output signal Release close cmd. must be explicitly routed to
the binary output in order to close the circuit breaker.
Figure 7-73 Interaction of the Synchronization Function with External Control

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.12 External Synchronization
The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device.
[dw_ctrl_ext_sync_device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-74 Triggering an External Synchronization Device
The bay controller in bay x should switch the circuit breaker in bay x in synchrony. The synchronization check
is carried out in the central paralleling device 7VE6. In addition to the paralleling device, another central bay
controller ensures the switching of the correct measuring voltages and the routing of the CB close command
from the 7VE6 to the correct circuit breaker in bay x. The bay controller x provides the information to the
central bay controller via IEC61850-GOOSE.
The External synchronization is designed as a function block which can be used in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group. The additional External synchronization function block integrates the external synchronization
into command processing, so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source.
If a circuit-breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present, the external synchroniza-
tion device is started. After successfully checking the synchronization conditions, the close command is issued
from the external synchronization device to the circuit breaker. If a circuit-breaker close command without
synchronization requirement is present, the circuit-breaker close command is issued directly from the Circuit-
breaker function group to the circuit breaker. Also, each circuit-breaker trip command is issued directly to the
circuit breaker.
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dwextsyn-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-75 Interaction between Control and External Synchronization
Parameterization with DIGSI

In the DIGSI library, the function is visible inside the Circuit-breaker function group as the External synchro-
nization function block. You can instantiate the function block in the Circuit-breaker function group and the
Circuit-breaker (control) function group. You can instantiate only 1 External synchronization function block
within these function groups at a time.
[scextsyn-041116-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-76 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit-Breaker Function
Group
It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchroniza-
tion function in the same Circuit-breaker function group.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Notes for Optional Input Interconnections

You have the option of connecting the input signals >Close cmd. released and >In progress. If you
omit these interconnections, observe the following instructions:
Input >Close cmd. released:
If you do not interconnect the input signal >Close cmd. released, the execution of a circuit-breaker close
command with synchronization requirement is confirmed directly (execution successful: OPR+), as soon as the
output signal Start syn. process is set. In this case, the (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process
setting has no meaning. If you use a control model with feedback monitoring, consider that the feedback
monitoring will start immediately when the Start syn. process signal is tripped. The (_:4201:103)
Feedback monitoring time setting must therefore be set higher than the maximum synchronization
time of the external synchronization device plus the circuit-breaker closing time. If >Close cmd. released
is not routed, the output Start/stop syn. proc. is not set.
Input >In progress:
The interconnection of the input signal >In progress is intended to check whether the synchronization
device has received the Start syn. process signal. If you do not interconnect this input signal and the
external synchronization device rejects a start command, the negative acknowledgment of the circuit-breaker
close command does not occur until the maximum synchronization time (parameter (_:109) Max.durat.
sync.process) has expired.
Input >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd':
In case of a failure of the external synchronization device, you can also close the circuit breaker directly
without considering the synchronization conditions. To do this, activate the input signal >Op. mode
'dir.cls.cmd' or the parameter (_:110) Direct close command. The close command is then issued
directly by the bay controller.
7.4.12.2 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

With the Mode parameter, you switch the external synchronization function on or off. If you set the Mode
parameter to off, a circuit-breaker close command with synchronization requirement is rejected.
Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process
• Default setting (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s

The Max.durat. sync.process parameter defines the maximum synchronization time. The time starts
when the External synchronization function block sends a close command to the external synchronization
device. The command must be executed within this time. If the close command is not executed within this
time, the External synchronization function block sends a command to cancel closing to the external
synchronization device.
Parameter: Direct close command
• Default setting (_:110) Direct close command = no

In case of a failure of the external synchronization device the Direct close command parameter is used to
close the circuit breaker directly without considering the synchronization conditions. If the parameter is acti-
vated a close command with synchronization requirement will not be transmitted to the external synchroniza-
tion device, but directly carried out by the bay controller.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.4.12.3 Settings

General
_:1 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:102 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:110 Syn./ 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
Asy.bal.#:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:108 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Direct • no no
close command
• yes
_:126 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:105 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Close • no no
cmd. at V1< & V2>
• yes
cmd. at V1> & V2<
• yes
cmd. at V1< & V2<
• yes
_:103 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:104 Syn./Asy.bal.#:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:109 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:114 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Async. • off off
operating mode
• on
_:113 Syn./Asy.bal.#:CB make 0.01 s to 0.60 s 0.06 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:117 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
_:118 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
Synchr. op.mode
_:119 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Sync. • off off
operating mode
• on
_:120 Syn./Asy.bal.#:f- 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
threshold ASYN<->SYN

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:124 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2>α1
_:125 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Max. 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
angle diff. α2<α1
_:121 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
close command
Balancing V
_:131 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Balancing • off off
voltage V2
• transformer tap
• balancing pulses
_:132 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T V pulse 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0.10 s
min
_:133 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T V pulse 0.01 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
max
_:134 Syn./Asy.bal.#:dV per 0 V/s to 0 V/s 0 V/s
second
_:135 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause V 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:136 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:137 Syn./Asy.bal.#:(V/ 1.00 to 1.40 1.10
Vrated)/(f/frated)
Balancing f
_:141 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Balancing • off off
frequency f2
• balancing pulses
_:142 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T f pulse 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0.10 s
min
_:143 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T f pulse 0.01 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
max
_:144 Syn./Asy.bal.#:df/dt of 0.05 Hz/s to 5.00 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s
the controller
_:145 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T pause f 0.10 s to 60.00 s 5.00 s
_:146 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf set -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
point for balancing
_:147 Syn./ 1 to 100 1
Asy.bal.#:Smoothing
_:148 Syn./Asy.bal.#:T close 1.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
without balancing
_:149 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Release • off off
for the kick pulse
• on
_:150 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Δf for the -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz 0.04 Hz
kick pulse
_:151 Syn./Asy.bal.#:Stabiliza- 0 to 1000 0
tion

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

External sync.
_:1 External sync.:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:109 External 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
sync.:Max.durat.
sync.process
_:110 External sync.:Direct • 0 false
close command
• 1

(Type)
External sync.
_:506 External sync.:>Synch. device ready SPS I
_:508 External sync.:>In progress SPS I
_:507 External sync.:>Close cmd. released SPS I
_:509 External sync.:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:52 External sync.:Behavior ENS O
_:54 External sync.:Health ENS O
_:55 External sync.:Start syn. process SPS O
_:56 External sync.:Stop syn. process SPS O
_:57 External sync.:Start/stop syn. proc. SPS O
7.4.13 Settings

General
_:2311:127 General:Angle adjust. -179.0 ° to 180.0 ° 0.0 °
(transform.)
General
• on
• test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 1:Max.durat. 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct close • no no
command
• yes
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5071:105 Synchrocheck 1:Close cmd. • no no
at V1< & V2>
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

at V1> & V2<
• yes
at V1< & V2<
• yes
without voltage
with voltage
_:5071:109 Synchrocheck 1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.1 s
sion time
Synchr. conditions
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5071:124 Synchrocheck 1:Max. angle 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
diff. α2>α1
_:5071:125 Synchrocheck 1:Max. angle 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
diff. α2<α1
General
• on
• test
ating limit Vmin
_:5041:102 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. operat. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max.durat. 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; ∞ 30.00 s
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct close • no no
command
• yes
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5041:105 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close cmd. • no no
at V1< & V2>
• yes
at V1> & V2<
• yes
at V1< & V2<
• yes
without voltage
_:5041:104 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 with 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
voltage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

_:5041:109 Sychr./Asycr.1:Supervision 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.1 s
time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:5041:114 Sychr./Asycr.1:Async. oper- • off on
ating mode
• on
_:5041:113 Sychr./Asycr.1:CB make 0.01 s to 0.60 s 0.06 s
time
_:5041:115 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. voltage 0.000 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
diff. V2>V1
diff. V2<V1
Synchr. op.mode
_:5041:119 Sychr./Asycr.1:Sync. oper- • off on
ating mode
• on
_:5041:120 Sychr./Asycr.1:f-threshold 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
ASYN<->SYN
diff. V2>V1
diff. V2<V1
_:5041:124 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. angle 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
diff. α2>α1
_:5041:125 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. angle 0 ° to 90 ° 10 °
diff. α2<α1
_:5041:121 Sychr./Asycr.1:Delay close 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
command
dfdiff/dt limitation
_:140 Adv. options:Limit dfdiff/dt • 0 false
for sync. op
• 1
_:141 Adv. options:Max. value 0.010 Hz/s to 0.025 Hz/s 0.010 Hz/s
dfdiff/dt syn
_:142 Adv. options:Limit dfdiff/dt • 0 false
for asyn. op
• 1
_:143 Adv. options:Max. value 0.050 Hz/s to 0.500 Hz/s 0.050 Hz/s
dfdiff/dt asyn
Frequ. oscillations
_:150 Adv. options:Suppr. frequ. • 0 false
oscillations
• 1
_:151 Adv. options:Max. diff. "f 0.000 Hz to 0.100 Hz 0.000 Hz
threshold"

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(Type)
Measurements
_:2311:303 General:Multiple selection SPS O
_:2311:304 General:Blocked no V selected SPS O
_:2311:330 General:f1 MV O
_:2311:332 General:f2 MV O
_:2311:300 General:dV MV O
_:2311:301 General:df MV O
_:2311:302 General:dα MV O
Synchrocheck 1
_:5071:81 Synchrocheck 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5071:500 Synchrocheck 1:>Selection SPS I
_:5071:502 Synchrocheck 1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5071:503 Synchrocheck 1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5071:504 Synchrocheck 1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5071:506 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5071:505 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5071:507 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5071:508 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5071:501 Synchrocheck 1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5071:54 Synchrocheck 1:Inactive SPS O
_:5071:52 Synchrocheck 1:Behavior ENS O
_:5071:53 Synchrocheck 1:Health ENS O
_:5071:328 Synchrocheck 1:In progress SPS O
_:5071:324 Synchrocheck 1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5071:305 Synchrocheck 1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5071:325 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5071:326 Synchrocheck 1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5071:327 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5071:307 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:306 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:308 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:317 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5071:318 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5071:319 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions

(Type)
_:5071:320 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5071:321 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5071:322 Synchrocheck 1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5071:304 Synchrocheck 1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5071:323 Synchrocheck 1:Setting error SPS O
Sychr./Asycr.1
_:5041:81 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5041:500 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Selection SPS I
_:5041:502 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5041:503 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5041:504 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5041:506 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5041:505 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5041:507 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5041:508 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5041:501 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5041:54 Sychr./Asycr.1:Inactive SPS O
_:5041:52 Sychr./Asycr.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5041:53 Sychr./Asycr.1:Health ENS O
_:5041:328 Sychr./Asycr.1:In progress SPS O
_:5041:324 Sychr./Asycr.1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5041:305 Sychr./Asycr.1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5041:303 Sychr./Asycr.1:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:5041:325 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5041:326 Sychr./Asycr.1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5041:327 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5041:307 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:306 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:308 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:317 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5041:318 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5041:319 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5041:320 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5041:321 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2>α1) SPS O
_:5041:322 Sychr./Asycr.1:α dif.too large(α2<α1) SPS O
_:5041:304 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5041:323 Sychr./Asycr.1:Setting error SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.5 Switching Sequences
Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
[scudeffb-150816-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-77 Function block Switching Sequence in the Library
These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block is
to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking condi-
tions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 7-78). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dwswseq1-110913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-78 Switching Sequence Function Block
Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence

One of the following methods can be used to start a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Start during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP
• Input >Start via a function key
• Controllable Start via a function key

One of the following methods can be used to cancel a switching sequence:
• On-site operation: menu or display page
• Input >Cancel during rising edge, for example, via binary input
• Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or
DNP
• Input >Cancel via a function key
• Controllable Cancel via a function key
On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry is
shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 7-79, example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Figure 7-79
Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display
The function block offers similar settings to the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector (see
chapter 7.2.1 General Overview).
[scccs4pa-13112014_DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-80 Settings of the Switching Sequence Function Block
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:101) Check switching authority = yes

With the Check switching authority parameter, you can determine whether the switching authority
should be checked before the execution of the switching sequence.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
• Default setting (_:102) Check double activat. blk. = yes

With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you can determine whether the double activation of
switching devices should be checked. The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will be
started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are active, provided that double-
activation blocking was activated for those switching devices.
Parameter: Time-out monitoring
With the Time-out monitoring parameter, you can determine whether the feedback from the process
should be evaluated. The feedback is gathered via the inputs >Successful and >Failed.
Parameter: Monitoring time
• Default setting (_:104) Monitoring time = 30.00 s

With the Monitoring time parameter, you can determine the duration of the monitoring time.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Parameter: Control model
• Default setting (_:105) Control model = SBO w. normal secur.

With the Control model parameter, you select between direct w. normal secur. or SBO w.
normal secur. to start the switching sequence.
It is not possible to set a control model for cancelation of the switching sequence. The control model direct
w. normal secur. is always used to cancel the function.
Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data:
[scinfof1-13112014, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-81 Data Provided by the Switching Sequence Function Block
In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it
is possible to use it in the switching sequence:
• >Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.
• >Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the time-out monitoring is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback must take
place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching sequence
was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feedback of the last
switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and does not have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current state of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out monitoring is activated. The
event Start Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.
Example for a Switching Sequence with CFC

The following figure shows a single-line diagram for a substation with 4 bays: Busbar grounding, infeed, bus-
coupler circuit-breaker, and feeder bay.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[dwbspunt-120913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-82 Example of a Substation
The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 7-83) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.
[Scssc4as-110913-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-83 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Command Execution
As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 887, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC-
DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs. The
DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
• VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
• SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)
• OPERATE = Switch switching device (1 = Switching device is switched on or off)

Using the connected DPC-EXE building block, the command checks can be deactivated (REL_...). In the appli-
cation example, all inputs are set to 0 and therefore, all checks are activated.
After the open command of circuit breaker QA1 is acknowledged via the auxiliary contacts, the OK output of
the CFC block DPC_EXE becomes active and triggers the next switching object. With the input PT the signal for
the OK output is time-delayed (in the example by 10 ms) and creates a dead time between individual
switching commands and the switching sequence. This dead time is important for the updating of the inter-
locking conditions.
If QB1 is closed, QB1 will be opened. If QB2 is closed, QB2 will be opened. In order to implement this logic, the
OK output signal of QA1 is linked with the respective positions of circuit breakers QB1 and QB2 via the logical
AND function. This signal serves as a trigger for the trip command of QB1 or QB2.
Because in this example the time-out monitoring is activated, the feedback about the successful or unsuc-
cessful execution of the switching sequence must be parameterized. The Switching sequence function block
provides the inputs >Successful and >Failed. In order to acknowledge the entire switching sequence
positively, the OR operation of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient. The feedback
of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices. The
benefit of such assessment is the fact that, in case of a failure, waiting for the time-out is not necessary, but
the active switching sequence can be ended immediately.
In this example, the use of the EN_I input of building block DPC-DEF fulfills 2 tasks:
• Cancelation of the entire switching sequence
• Resetting of the outputs OK and ERR on building block DPC-EXE

By linking all EN_I inputs and EN_O outputs of building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE, the execution of the
switching sequence can be controlled centrally since the value is transmitted between the building blocks.
Only if input EN_I on the DPC-EXE is set to 1, a switching command is issued. If the input drops back to 0 while
a command is being processed, this command will be canceled. With this behavior, cancelation of an entire
switching sequence can be achieved. As recognition of a cancelation, the canceled signal of the indication
Execution is used in the CFC chart and connected with the input EN_I of the first switching device, in this
example, with the DPC-DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1.
Since the OK and ERR outputs of the DPC-EXE building block maintain their value until execution of the next
command, it is necessary to reset the continuous output after each execution of the switching sequence for
correct execution of the entire CFC switching sequence multiple times. In this case, the use of the EN_I input
is also helpful. In the input drops back to 0, the OK and ERR outputs are also reset to 0. The triggers for ending
the switching sequence are the events failed and successful. For this reason, in the above example, the
signals failed and successful of the indication Execution were connected with EN_I of the DPC-DEF
building block.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.5.4 Settings

Swi. seq. #
_:101 Swi. seq. #:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:102 Swi. seq. #:Check double • no yes
activat. blk.
• yes
_:103 Swi. seq. #:Time-out • 0 true
monitoring
• 1
_:104 Swi. seq. #:Monitoring 0.02 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s
time
_:105 Swi. seq. #:Control • direct w. normal secur. SBO w. normal
model secur.
_:106 Swi. seq. #:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
Switching authority
_:151 Swi. seq. #:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:152 Swi. seq. #:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1
_:115 Swi. seq. #:Specific • station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for
• station/remote
• remote
_:153 Swi. seq. #:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:154 Swi. seq. #:Multiple • 0 false
specific sw.auth.
• 1

(Type)
Swi. seq. #
_:501 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start SPS I
_:502 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start (fixed) SPS I
_:503 Swi. seq. #:>Start SPS I
_:504 Swi. seq. #:>Cancel SPS I
_:505 Swi. seq. #:>Successful SPS I
_:506 Swi. seq. #:>Failed SPS I
_:53 Swi. seq. #:Health ENS O
_:302 Swi. seq. #:Execution ENS O
_:304 Swi. seq. #:Start SPC C
_:305 Swi. seq. #:Cancel SPC C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.6 CFC-Chart Settings
If you want to process a parameter in a CFC chart and this parameter is to be changeable during runtime using
DIGSI or HMI, you can use the function blocks CFC chart of Boolean parameters, the CFC chart of integer
parameters and the CFC chart of floating-point parameters. Instantiate the appropriate function block
depending on the parameter value needed (logical, integer, or floating point). In this way, the current value of
the parameter can then be used in the CFC chart at runtime.
You can find the CFC-chart parameters Chrt sett.Bool , Chart setting Int , and Chrt sett.real
in the DIGSI library in the User-defined functions folder. Drag and drop the desired function block into a func-
tion group or a function. Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param-
eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item. You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC
charts.
NOTE
i The user-defined function groups and the user-defined functions can be used to group the CFC-chart
parameters. You can rename for the function block and change the parameter value in the DIGSI Informa-
tion routing matrix to suit your specific application.
[sccfcparam, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-84 CFC-Chart Parameters within Information Routing
Parameter: Chrt sett.Bool
• Default setting Chrt sett.Bool = False

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
You can use the parameter Chrt sett.Bool in a CFC chart as an input signal with a Boolean value. This
input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chart setting Int
• Default setting Chart setting Int = 10

You can use the parameter Chart setting Int in a CFC chart as an input signal with an integer value.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
Parameter: Chrt sett.real
• Default setting Chrt sett.real = 100.000

You can use the parameter Chrt sett.real in a CFC chart as an input signal with a floating-point number.
This input value can then be changed during the runtime of the CFC chart.
7.6.4 Settings

Chrt sett.Bool
_:105 Chrt sett.Bool:Value • 0 false
• 1

Chart setting Int
_:105 Chart setting Int:Value -2147483648 to 2147483647 10

Chrt sett.real
_:105 Chrt sett.real:Value -10000000000.000 % to 100.000 %
10000000000.000 %

(Type)
Chrt sett.Bool
_:305 Chrt sett.Bool:Setting value SPS O

(Type)
Chart setting Int
_:305 Chart setting Int:Setting value INS O

(Type)
Chrt sett.real
_:305 Chrt sett.real:Setting value MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.7 Transformer Tap Changers
With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor
the proper execution of the adjusting commands.
The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervision
and monitoring functions. The supervision and monitoring functions are used to check the voltage and supply
information about the tap position for adaptive matching of the transformer differential protection
The following options are provided for control:
• Direct user commands via the device keypad or routed binary inputs
• User-defined conditions via the CFC

If the tap changer reaches the end positions, the control function issues the (_:301) End higher
pos.reached or (_:302) End lower pos.reached indication.
The transformer tap controller is controlled by the function group Tap changer, which you can select from the
DIGSI library (group Switching devices).
[sc_tssdig, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-85 Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix
The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position Information,
based on IEC 61850). You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired number of binary inputs that
indicate the current tap position.
You can find more information in chapter 7.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Position Controllable also contains parameters. If you wish to change the settings, you must select the
Controllable in the DIGSI information matrix and change the settings by way of the Properties dialog. The taps
are controlled via the commands Higher command and Lower command, each of which must be connected
to one binary output.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Example
The following 2 figures show a CFC chart as an example for transformer tap control with the routing of the
function keys for stepping up or stepping down.
[schilocd-280316-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-86 Routing of the Function Keys and CFC Signals
To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications (SPS). These are used for the func-
tion keys (for example, <F1>, Higher function key and <F2>, Lower function key) and as the input signals for
the appropriate CFC blocks. In addition, you must use the controllable Cmd. with feedback for the CFC
chart and set the control model to direct w. enh. security.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
You can select the control direction using the following values at the Val input of the BSC_DEF building block:
• 1 means step up
• 0 means step down
[scbivctv-280715-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-87 CFC Chart
Pressing the function keys to step up or down incrementally can be displayed using this simple CFC chart.
Motor Supervision Time

The runtime of the motor-drive mechanism can be monitored from the device. This function is used to identify
failures of the motor-drive mechanism during the switching procedure and to trip actions if necessary. To use
the Motor supervision time, you must route the motor sliding contact (most significant binary input)
and set the proper motor runtime.
The motor sliding contact is active until the tap changer has reached the new position. This time is compared
to the Motor supervision time. If the new tap position is not reached within the motor runtime, the
Motor sup. time expired indication is set. The Trigger motor prot. sw. indication with which
the motor can be switched off is output for a duration of 1.5 s.
Adjusting-Command Supervision
Adjusting-command supervision is used for checking the proper operation of the tap-changer mechanism. The
Tap changer function calculates the next logical tap position as a result of the higher/lower tap command.
The time of position detection is determined as a function of the availability of the motor sliding contact. After
resetting the active motor sliding contact, the Tap changer function reads the new tap position value. If the
value for the calculated tap position could not be received within the parameterized time Motor supervi-
sion time, the error message Position failure is output.
The following position errors of the tap changer are taken into consideration during this:
• Invalid tap position: The tap position is outside the predefined range of minimum value and maximum
value
• Adjusting command in the wrong direction (for example, if a higher tap was commanded and the tap
changer responds with a lower position and vice versa)
• No operation of the tap changer (for example, if the tap-changer motor is defective or the position indi-
cation is not functioning)
• Illogical tap-change operation (for example, if no logical tap position following the previous position is
indicated)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
The value of 0 during an unexpected interruption of the auxiliary voltage represents a special case. An invalid
tap-changer position without a corresponding adjusting command is signaled in the Position controllable
only as an invalid tap position.
[lotcmoue-090713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-88 Position and Motor Supervision Logic
The user-defined signals Higher command and Lower command are provided via a CFC chart (see
Figure 7-87).
Supervision Behavior
Depending on the setting of the Supervision behavior parameter, the function reaches a health state of
Alarm or Warning. You can set the parameter Supervision behavior to off, alarm block, or
warning.
In the alarm block mode, the function is set to the health state Alarm. All tap-changer commands are
blocked.
In the warning mode, the function is set to the health state Warning. Executing tap-changer commands is
still possible.
You can manually reset the health state of alarm block or warning using the controllable Reset errors
(Main menu → Device functions → Reset functions → Tap changer). As an alternative to this, you can also
switch off the supervision function and then switch it on again.
Operating Counter
The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting commands with the Op.ct. switching
cycle counting value. The counting and memory levels are protected against an auxiliary-voltage failure. The
switching cycle counting value can be set to 0 or to any other starting value.
You can access the statistical values via the operation panel on the device (measured values/statistics), via
DIGSI, or using various communication protocols.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Parameters of the Tap Changer Function Group
[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-89 Parameters of the Tap Changer
NOTE
i If run positions, this means internal tap changer positions without voltage changes, are available, the
following must be observed:
If these tap changer positions contain a suffix a and c or + and -, and additional switching pulses are not
required, adjust the parameter for the feedback and motor supervision time to the actual motor runtime
when passing through a run position. Siemens recommends parameterization with capturing of the motor
sliding contact.
Parameter: Check switching authority
• Default setting (_:104) Check switching authority = yes

With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (on site,
remote) is checked in the case of an adjusting command (see also chapter 7.3.1 Command Checks and
Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Parameter: Control model
• Default setting (_:108) Control model = SBO w. enh. security

Use the Control model parameter to specify the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2. The following
selection options are available:
• status only

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Parameter: SBO time-out
• Default setting (_:109) SBO time-out = 30 s

With this setting, you specify the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Parameter: Feedback monitoring time
• Default setting (_:110) Feedback monitoring time = 10 s

Reaching a new tap position after the switching command is monitored. If a new tap position is not reached,
you specify with this setting the time when the command is canceled. The range of values extends from 0.01 s
to 1800.00 s.
Parameter: Maximum output time
• Default setting (_:111) Maximum output time = 1.50 s

This parameter specifies the maximum output time. The range of values extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. For
activating motors to change the tap position, a time of 1.50 s is practical.
Parameter: Supervision behavior
• Default setting (_:112) Supervision behavior = alarm block

You can select whether the supervision is switched off (off) or if only a warning is indicated (warning). With
the alarm block setting, an alarm indication is generated and the function is blocked.
Parameter: Motor supervision time
• Default setting (_:113) Motor supervision time = 10 s

After the motor supervision time has elapsed, the indication Motor sup. time expired is displayed. You
can find additional information in section Motor Supervision Time, Page 897. The range of values extends
from 5 s to 100 s.
Parameter: Highest tap changer pos.
• Default setting (_:116) Highest tap changer pos. = Lowest voltage tap
With the Highest tap changer pos. parameter, you specify whether the lowest or highest voltage is
present at the highest tap changer position.
Additional Settings (Properties Dialog Position)

Additional settings are assigned to the controllable Position. To display and adjust the settings, select
Position in the DIGSI information matrix and select the Properties dialog. To do this, click the Properties
tab.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[scdeegts-170216-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-90 Properties Dialog
Parameter: Minimum value
• Default setting Minimum value = 1
Parameter: Maximum value
• Default setting Maximum value = 15

The parameters Minimum value and Maximum value are initially calculated by DIGSI 5 on the basis of the
tap coding, the Number of tap positions and the Tap-display offset. They represent the allowed
control area of the position value. Positions outside this area are defined as invalid. This control area can be
further restricted within the initially set physical range (see Number of tap positions and Tap-
display offset).
Parameter: Tap-display offset
• Default setting Tap-display offset = 0

If you want to move the height of the displayed value in a positive or the negative direction with respect to
the height of the actual value, enter the value for this in the Tap-display offset field.
Parameter: Number of bits f. tap code
• Default setting Number of bits f. tap code = 4

With the Number of bits f. tap code parameter, you set the number of bits you need for encoding the
transformer taps. The number is dependent on the selected Encoding and on the Moving contact. For
example, you need 3 bits for 7 binary-encoded transformer taps. The range of values extends from 2 to 32.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Parameter: Number of tap positions
• Default setting Number of tap positions = 15

With the Number of tap positions parameter, you set the number of transformer taps. The range of
values extends from 2 to 127. The output of the tap position is limited from -63 to +63. If the number of taps
is > 63, set the Tap-display offset parameter so that the output of the tap position is within the range of
-63 to +63.
Parameter: Tap-coding type
• Default setting Tap-coding type = binary

In the Tap-coding type list box, select the interpretation type of the indication pending at the binary input.
You can select from the following options:
• binary
• 1-of-n
• BCD
• table
• BCD signed
• gray
The tap changer position can also be routed via a GOOSE signal (BSC) or a 20-mA measuring transducer input.
You can find more information on this in the document Measuring the transformer tap changer using an
analog measuring transducer input in SIPROTEC 5 in the Download area under SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI
5 downloads → SIPROTEC 5 General → Application Notes → Control.
A selection of tap-coding types is described in greater detail using examples in the following text.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type binary)

The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 3) with 4 transformer tap positions desig-
nated 3 to 6. BI4 is the moving contact. The encoding is in binary.
Table 7-25 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type binary)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X X – –
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving – –
contact
Tap = 1 1 0 0 – –
With 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 23 -1 = 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code. If all routed binary
inputs indicate 0, this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position --- or -64 with quality
invalid. The representation of transformer taps should start with the metered value 3. You must configure the
information properties as follows for the example:
Tap-coding type: binary
Number of tap positions: 7
Number of bits f. tap code: 4
Tap-display offset: 2
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes
The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, and BI 4 for the moving
contact.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD)

The following table shows the routing of 6 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 6) with 39 transformer tap positions desig-
nated 1 to 39. The encoding is in BCD. BI 7 is the moving contact.
Table 7-26 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7
Tap changer X X X X X X X
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 BCD 4 BCD 8 BCD 10 BCD 20 Moving
contact
Tap = 21 1 0 0 0 0 1 –
With 6 binary inputs, a maximum of 39 tap positions can be mapped with the tap-coding type of BCD. This
yields the number of tap positions from 1 to 39. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is detected as tap 0.
The 7 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3, BI 4, BI 5, BI 6, and BI 7 for
the moving contact.
Tap-coding type: BCD
Moving contact (highest binary input): Yes
Individual Tap-Coding Type (table)

With the table parameter setting, you can specify an individual Tap-coding type.
In the Representation of encoding section, select the number system in which your code table entries
will take place, alternatively:
• Binary (2 characters)
• Octal (8 characters)
• Decimal (10 characters)
• Hexadecimal (16 characters)

The selected option is valid for all inputs in the Encoding column.
If you change the number system and there are already entries in this column, these will be converted to the
new number system. The selection area becomes visible as soon as you have selected the setting table in the
Tap-coding type list box.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
[sccotabi-111016-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-91 Code Table for the Tap-Coding Type table
NOTE
i If the binary inputs used for encoding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of
the display offset). For an invalid tap position, the display shows the position --- or -64 with quality invalid,
exception BCD signed, see Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed), Page 904.
Enter the encoding for the tap in the Encoding column in the Code table. Enter the value according to the
number system previously selected. Select the desired number of taps and number of bits for tap coding. Taps
with the same encoding and taps with 0 coding are not permitted.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)

The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI -3) with 7 transformer tap positions desig-
nated 3 to 3. The encoding uses BCD signed.
Table 7-27 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap-Coding Type BCD signed)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X – – –
Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 Sign – – –
Tap = 1 1 0 1 – – –
Using 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD signed.
This yields the number of tap positions from -3 to 3. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is recognized as
tap 0. The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially.
Tap-coding type: BCD signed
Moving contact (highest binary input): No

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
Routing the Tap Position to Binary Outputs

For the output of the adjusting commands, route the information step up and step down on one relay each,
see following figure.
[sc_trass7, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-92 Routing the Tap Setting Commands
Parameter: Moving contact (highest binary input)
• Default setting Moving contact (highest binary input) = no

If the tap position is only to be recognized as valid and implemented when the motor sliding contact signals
that it has reached the taps, then activate the Moving contact (highest binary input) option. If this
parameter is set, the new position is only labeled with an * when the moving contact drops out.
Parameter: Software filter time
• Default setting Software filter time = 1000 ms

With this parameter, you set the Software filter time for capturing the tap position. The range of
values extends from 0 ms to 100 000 ms. Within this time, brief changes on the binary inputs are suppressed.
Parameter: Retrigger filter
• Default setting Retrigger filter = Yes

With this parameter, you switch retriggering of the filtering time by a position change on or off.
Parameter: Indication timestamp before filtering
• Default setting Indication timestamp before filtering = no

With this parameter, you specify whether the hardware filtering time is accounted for in the time stamp of
position capture.
Parameter: Chatter blocking
• Default setting Chatter blocking = no

With this parameter, you switch Chatter blocking on or off.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Control Functions
7.7.3 Settings

Tap changer
_:104 Tap changer:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
_:108 Tap changer:Control model • status only SBO w. enh.
security
_:109 Tap changer:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:110 Tap changer:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
monitoring time
Tap changer
_:111 Tap changer:Maximum 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 1.50 s
output time
_:112 Tap changer:Supervision • off alarm block
behavior
• warning
• alarm block
_:113 Tap changer:Motor supervi- 5 s to 100 s 10 s
sion time

(Type)
Tap changer
_:500 Tap changer:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:501 Tap changer:>Enable SPS I
_:53 Tap changer:Health ENS O
_:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached SPS O
_:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached SPS O
_:308 Tap changer:Position BSC C
_:305 Tap changer:Higher command SPS O
_:306 Tap changer:Lower command SPS O
_:307 Tap changer:Command active SPS O
_:309 Tap changer:Motor sup. time expired SPS O
_:310 Tap changer:Trigger motor prot. sw. SPS O
_:311 Tap changer:Position failure SPS O
_:312 Tap changer:Op.ct. INS O
_:319 Tap changer:Reset failure SPC C

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8 Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview 908

8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 909
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 914
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 954
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 959
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 960
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 961
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 962
8.9 Group Indications 971

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous supervi-
sion:
• Ensures the availability of the technology used
• Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
• Protects persons and primary technical devices
• Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing

The following areas are monitored:
• Supervision the resource consumption of the application
• Supervision of the secondary system, including the external auxiliary power supply
• Supervision of device hardware
• Supervision of device firmware
• Supervision of hardware configuration
• Supervision of communication connections

When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
8.2.1 Load Model
SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents you
from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sclasjsk-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the present
application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is overloading the
device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 8-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates that
functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such a
case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quanti-
ties on device utilization:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts that must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
gered, fast processed especially fast (for process range
example, to invoke interlock-
ings between protection func-
• Create CFC chart
tions) • Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for protection, control, and
measurement functions
• Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
Editor)
• Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions (for example, Line
function group and Circuit-breaker function group)
• FG • Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups, for
tions example, between the
• Protection functions and their stages
• Fast Line function group and • Circuit-breaker function groups
GOOSE the Circuit-breaker func- • Fast GOOSE connections
tion group
• Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
Protection Signal transmission via protec- Adding or removing
Communica- tion communication and differ-
tion ential protection communica-
• Communication modules for the protection interface
(in the DIGSI 5 Hardware and logs view)
tion
• Routings to the protection interface
Function Function Groups Adding or removing function groups such as:
Groups
• FG V/I 3-phase
Overcurrent Overcurrent protection Adding or removing
protection
• Overcurrent protection, phases
• Overcurrent protection, ground
Measuring • Measuring-point supervi- Adding or removing measuring points or individual super-
point super- sion functions vising functions, such as
vising func-
tion, protec-
• Scope of the data trans- • 3-phase current measuring point
mission via the protection
tion communi- communication
• 3-phase voltage measuring point
cation • Measuring-voltage failure detection
Add to or remove from transmission values via the protec-
tion communication
• Single-point indications
• Measured values
Other protec- Protection functions with low Adding or removing
tion requirements for fast operate
times
• Overload protection functions
• Functions and stages of voltage protection
• All functions not listed previously

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
CFC event-trig- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
gered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard
GOOSE
• Create CFC chart
• Delete CFC chart
• Change the process range in the properties of the CFC
chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
• Control • Control and interlocking Adding or removing
• Other • CFC charts in the area of • Function blocks for control and interlocking
contin- control, measured-value
uous preprocessing, and event-
• CFC charts in the control area
function controlled • Switching devices (except circuit breakers), for
chart example, Disconnector function groups
• Operational measured
• Opera- values • Operational measured values
tional • CFC charts in the measured values area
measured
values
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you may be able to return to the
permitted area by taking the following measures:
• Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
• Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function or stage has
been switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function or stage,
delete it rather than switching it off.
Use the general Circuit-breaker function group only in the following cases:
• Interaction with a protection-function group is essential.

That is, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the Circuit-
breaker function group to be switched off.
• You want to use functions such as the automatic reclosing function or circuit-breaker failure protection in
the Circuit-breaker function group.
8.2.2 Function Points
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[scfpunkt-141210-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator.
8.2.3 CFC Resources
Task Levels of the CFC Function

A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4 task
levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the other,
in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:
Task Level Description
Fast Event-Triggered Use the Fast Event-Triggered task level for time-critical tasks, for
example, if a signal should block a protection function within 2 ms to 3 ms.
Functions on this task level are processed in an event-triggered way with
the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is immediately
processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection functions
and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-Triggered Use the Event-Triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
Fast event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-Triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or line
protection, the functions on the Event-Triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.
Measurement Use the Measurement task level for processing measured values. Functions
on this task level are processed cyclically every 500 ms.
Interlocking Use the Interlocking task level preferably for logic functions that should
be executed with lower priority than functions in the Event-Triggered
task level. If the available ticks of the Event-Triggered task level shown
in the following figure are sufficient for the required CFC functionality, you
do not need to use the Interlocking task level.
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels. You
reach this dialog with the following call: Device → Device information → Resource consumption.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sc-cfc-statistic, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-3 CFC Statistics
NOTE
i The fast-event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks. At
this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended to
configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in
any other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should be
deleted.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.1 Overview
The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The
measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni-
tored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the supervi-
sion of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
Measuring circuits (voltage):
• Measuring-voltage failure
• Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Voltage balance
• Voltage sum
• Voltage rotating field

Measuring circuits (current):
• Broken conductor of the current circuits
• Current balance
• Current sum
• Current rotating field
Trip circuits
When the supervisions listed in the previous section pick up, corresponding warning indications are output.
Some supervisions lead directly to the blocking of affected protection functions or to the marking of meas-
uring points that have become invalid, so that affected protection functions can go into a secure state.
A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the respective
function descriptions.
External auxiliary voltage

The supervision of the external auxiliary voltage is described in the subchapter Error Responses and Corrective
Measures starting at 8.8.1 Overview.
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Measuring-voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits:
• Non-connected transformers
• Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit breaker (in the event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
• Broken conductor in one or more measuring loops

All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage transformer secondary circuits which can lead to failures of
the protection functions.
Each of the following protection functions has the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure. With the
setting value of the parameter, you can specify whether the protection functions react to a measuring-voltage
failure or not (block/not block).
• Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection

The following protection functions are automatically blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
• Distance protection
• Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems

The function is part of protection function groups which are connected with a 3-phase voltage and current
measurement point.
[dwstrffm-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The function is broken down into 3 subfunctions (see Figure 8-5):
• Supervision for unbalanced measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for 3-phase measuring-voltage failure
• Supervision for switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lozusamm-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-5 Breakdown of the Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection Function
Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[looppode-200812-05.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-6 Logic Diagram Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is exceeded and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6). The
indication Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker open).
Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious instanta-
neous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) combined
with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked. The
device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative-sequence and positive-sequence
current.
Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, the monitoring can be delayed using the
Asym.fail. - time delay parameter.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. The monitoring seals in
and the Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance
has disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults outside the protection
zone, this seal-in time prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection
functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[losymmet-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-7 Logic Diagram 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Balanced Fault – VA, VB, VC <

A 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultaneously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• A jump of the voltage (signal Jump V)

If these criteria are fulfilled and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the 3ph.failure-alarm indica-
tion is output. When the voltage returns (even as 1-phase), the monitoring drops out.
Release by Phase Current

When all phase currents exceed the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release the monitoring is
released.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Blocking in the Case of a System Incident

In the case of a 3-phase system incident, supervision must be blocked. The device detects a 3-phase system
incident with a jump in the current. This change is detected via the internal signal Jump I or when the
change in current of a phase current exceeds the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump. The
change in current of phase currents is formed from the difference between the present current phasor and the
current phasor of the previous period. This allows to take into account a jump of the current phase.
NOTE
i If a voltage-transformer circuit breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions).
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load
Logic
[lozuscha-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-8 Logic Diagram Switching to 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
• All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <.
• The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the ≥1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 5.6.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected
Object.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
A voltage jump – such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit breaker (see chapter
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure) – does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is started.
After the time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the moni-
toring is only possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection function
group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit breaker, because the circuit-breaker condition is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 8.3.2.4 3-Phase
Measuring-Voltage Failure) is not released in this situation, for example, because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.
Parameter: Asym.fail. - time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:113) Asym.fail. - time delay = 10.00 s

The Asym.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the time during which a system incident
detected after the occurrence of the unbalance resets the monitoring. This setting is important in the case of
weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) in order to give certain protection functions (such as distance
protection) more time for detecting system incidents. As long as the time delay runs, it is assumed that the
unbalance is due to a system incident.
As soon as the time has elapsed, the supervision assumes a measuring-voltage failure and seals in.
If you want the seal-in function to operate sooner or at once, you can reduce the time.
Parameter: Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt.
• Recommended setting value (_:115) Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. = No

no After elapse of the time delay the supervision function seals in. Even if the
system incident criterion is fulfilled, the protection functions concerned will
remain blocked.
This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an
absence of the measuring voltage in the case of an unbalanced system inci-
dent.
This is the default setting.
yes The seal-in function is switched off. The supervision drops out immediately
when a system incident is detected. With this setting, the unbalanced meas-
uring-voltage failure is only reported, and in the event of a double failure
(measuring-voltage failure and system incident in parallel), unselective trip-
ping is preferred.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
• Recommended setting value (_:101) 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < = 5 V

The 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < parameter allows you to set the pickup value of the monitoring.
If you expect major disturbances acting upon the voltage inputs, you can increase this value. Increasing the
values makes the supervision more sensitive to 3-phase system incidents.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release
• Recommended setting value (_:102) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or

0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release parameter is used to define the phase current threshold above
which the monitoring is released.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump
• Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or
0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Parameter: SO 3ph.fail. - time delay
• Recommended setting value (_:106) SO 3ph.fail. - time delay = 3.00 s

The SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the delay of the monitoring.
NOTE
i Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will
not be possible any more.
Parameter: Switch-on 3ph. failure
• Recommended setting value (_:107) Switch-on 3ph. failure = on

on The subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is
active.
In the case of low loads, the subfunction for detection of a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure is not released, for example, because the current flow
is too low. In this situation, the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure can perform the monitoring task.
Siemens recommends to switch that subfunction on.
off With the setting off the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure is not active.
8.3.2.7 Settings

Mes.v.fail.det
_:1 Mes.v.fail.det:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:115 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- • no yes
DO on netw.flt.
• yes

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:113 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail. 0.00 s to 30.00 s 10.00 s
- time delay
_:102 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr.release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:103 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr. jump 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
VA,VB,VC <
_:107 Mes.v.fail.det:Switch-on • off on
3ph. failure
• on
_:106 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 0.01 s to 30.00 s 3.00 s
3ph.fail. - time delay

(Type)
Mes.v.fail.det
_:82 Mes.v.fail.det:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Mes.v.fail.det:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Mes.v.fail.det:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Mes.v.fail.det:Health ENS O
_:300 Mes.v.fail.det:Alarm SPS O
_:304 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-inst.alarm SPS O
_:303 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-alarm SPS O
_:301 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
_:302 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
8.3.3 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function detects the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker due to short circuits in the voltage-transformer secondary circuits.
The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function works independently of Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion and should be used – if possible – in parallel to it.
The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker has an impact on the quality of the recorded measured-
value data (see chapter 3.3 Processing Quality Attributes).
The following protection function is automatically blocked if the voltage-transformer circuit breaker trips:
• Directional negative-sequence protection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
For the following functions the reaction (block/not block) can be set within the function in cases of a tripping
of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker:
• Directional overcurrent protection, ground
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
• Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage
• Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
• Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
• Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage

The Figure 8-9 shows the position of the function in the device. Every voltage measuring point contains the
Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function.
[dwmcbstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is captured via the binary input signal >Open. With an
active input signal the information about the measuring-voltage failure is relayed to the affected functions
(see 8.3.3.1 Overview of Functions). The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained
in the specific protection-function descriptions.
Response Time of the Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker can be slower than the pickup time of the
distance protection. This bears the risk of an overfunction. The response time is communicated to the device
with the Response time parameter. For a timely detection of the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker, the pickup of the distance protection is delayed by that response time.

The function is always active and need not be switched on.
Input Signal: >Open
• Input signal: (_:500) >Open

The input signal >Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. As a rule,
this occurs via the routing to a binary input.
Parameter: Response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Response time = 0 ms

When the voltage-transformer circuit breaker drops out, the device must block the distance protection imme-
diately to prevent an unwanted tripping of the distance protection due to the absence of the measuring
voltage while the load current is flowing.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The blocking must be faster than the 1st stage of the distance protection. This requires an extremely short
response time of the miniature circuit breaker (≤ 4 ms at 50 Hz, ≤ 3 ms at 60 Hz rated frequency). If the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact does not fulfill this requirement, you have to set the response time accordingly.
8.3.3.5 Settings

VT miniatureCB
_:101 VT miniatureCB:Response 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
time

(Type)
Definite-T #
_:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
8.3.4 Voltage-Balance Supervision

In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.
[dwstrusy-300913, 2, en_US]

The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest phase-
to-phase voltage to the largest phase phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lokenuns-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-11 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
Logic
[lospasym-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-12 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is meas-
ured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-phase
voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Delay failure indication

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the delay of the failure indication begins, (parameter: Delay
failure indication). If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

The following blockings reset the picked up function completely:
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block function
• A protection pickup
The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V

With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Delay failure indication
• Recommended setting value (_:6) Delay failure indication = 5.00 s

Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as
switching operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
8.3.4.5 Settings

Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. V:Threshold 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
8.3.5 Voltage-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit. For
summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of an
open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/VN • VN| > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_kenvss-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-14 Characteristic of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
Logic
[lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-15 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold the parameter Delay failure indication
triggers the indication Failure.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA + VB + VC - Vph/UN • UN|, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
You can find more information in this respect in chapter 8.3.5.1 Overview of Functions ).

When the threshold value for the delay of the failure indication (parameter: Delay failure indication)
is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.

The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indication.
• Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V

The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

8.3.5.5 Settings

Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3.6 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Logic
[lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-17 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the voltage phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase-to-phase voltages are
greater than 40 V.
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Delay failure indi-
cation, the indication Failure is generated.

8.3.6.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3.7 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

The Voltage-comparison supervision function (ANSI 60):
• Monitors the voltage-transformer circuits by comparing the voltages from 2 voltage transformers
If failures in the voltage circuits are detected, voltage-related protection functions can be blocked.
• Requires the connection of 2 voltage measuring points to the voltage interface of the function group
You can take one of the voltages as the reference voltage and then the other becomes the main voltage.
The reference voltage is used for comparison.
NOTE
i The voltage selection for the protection function in the FGs works independent of the status of the
Voltage-comparison supervision function.

The Voltage-comparison supervision function can be used in the following function groups:
• Generator stator
• Generator side
• Voltage-current 3-phase (VI 3ph)
• Transformer side
• Auto transformer autoside (Auto trf. autoside)

The Voltage-comparison supervision function supports only 1 stage. The stage is preconfigured at the
factory.
[dw_structure_VBP, 1, en_US]
8.3.7.3 Description
Function Application
The following figure shows an application example.
[dw_VBP application, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Connecting Measuring Points to a Function Group

The following figure shows the connection of the function group Generator stator with several measuring
points in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the brackets after the name.
[sc_VBStoFG, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-20 Connecting the Measuring Points to the Generator Stator Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• 2 voltage measuring points must be connected to one voltage interface.
• Either the Voltage-comparison supervision function or the Voltage measuring-point selection func-
tion must be instantiated. They must not be instantiated at the same time.
Voltage Selection
2 voltage measuring points are connected to a voltage interface of a function group. In the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function, you can set one of the voltages as the reference voltage via the parameter Refer-
ence voltage, and the other voltage becomes the main voltage.
• The reference voltage is used for voltage comparison.
• The main voltage is used for all voltage-related functions in the FGs that contain the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function.
If the main voltage transformer is disconnected, the Voltage-comparison supervision function issues
the blocking signal Meas.-volt failure. The signal is transmitted to all voltage-related protection
functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison supervision.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage VBP, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-21 Logic Diagram of the Supervision Stage
The voltage inputs in the preceding figure are calculated with the following equations:
ΔV1 = |v(n)ref.| - |v(n)main|
ΔV2 = |v(n)main| - |v(n)ref.|
ΔV3 = |Vref. - Vmain|
ΔV4 = Max. (V1ref., V1main)
The following table shows the description of the voltages.
Table 8-1 Voltage Description
Voltages Description
v(n)ref. Sampled value of the reference voltage
v(n)main Sampled value of the main voltage
Vref. Fundamental value of the reference voltage
Vmain Fundamental value of the main voltage
V1ref. Positive-sequence value of the reference voltage

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Voltages Description
V1main Positive-sequence value of the main voltage
Pickup
If the voltage difference between each 2 of 3 continuous sampling points is over 8 % Vrated of the plant, the
supervision stage picks up.
Voltage Supervision
For the Voltage-comparison supervision function, the following 2 connection types are allowed:
• Phase-to-ground
The phase-to-ground voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
• Phase-to-phase
The phase-to-phase voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
NOTE
i The 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN and 2 ph-to-ph voltages connection types are not allowed.
Voltage-Failure Indication
For different connection types, the indications are different.
• Phase-to-ground
You can get the voltage-failure information from the output signals Main-voltage failure and
Ref.-voltage failure.
• Phase-to-phase
– If one phase is influenced, the phase information is indicated.
– If more than one phase is influenced, the phase-to-phase information is indicated.
Take the main voltage transformer for example. You can determine the faulty phase with the
following table.
Determination Criteria Calculated Result

(|vAB(n)ref.| - |vAB(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated >0 >0 <0
(|vBC(n)ref.| - |vBC(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated <0 >0 >0
(|vAC(n)ref.| - |vAC(n)main|) - 8 % Vrated >0 <0 >0
Failure Information Phase A is failed. Phase B is failed. Phase C is failed.
Release Voltage
If the main positive-sequence voltage or the reference positive-sequence voltage is between 50 % Vrated and
130 % Vrated, the function is released.
Selection Invalid
An invalid measuring-point selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as Failure.
• The validity of the voltage measured values is set to Invalid.
• The indication Health is set to Alarm.
• The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

In the event of blocking, the picked up function is reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
Parameter: Reference voltage
• Default setting Reference voltage = None

With the parameter Reference voltage, you can set a measured voltage as the reference voltage.
NOTE
i You must assign a voltage measuring point to the parameter Reference voltage. The assignment influ-
ences the voltage-related protection functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison
supervision function. These voltage-related protection functions use the unassigned voltage measuring
point, which is defined as the main voltage in the Voltage-comparison supervision function. You can find
more information in section Voltage Selection, Page 933.
EXAMPLE
Meas.point V-3ph 1 and Meas.point V-3ph 2 are connected to the Voltage-comparison supervision func-
tion. Then you have 2 more setting options, as shown in the following figure. You must select one of these
setting options for the parameter Reference voltage.
[sc_VBS_ref.voltage, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Mode
• Default setting (_:2311:1) Mode = off

With the parameter Mode, you can activate and deactivate the Voltage-comparison supervision function. If
you switch to test mode, the Voltage-comparison supervision function is marked as invalid.
8.3.7.5 Settings

VolCmpSup 1
_:2311:1 General:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:2311:101 General:Reference Setting options depend on None
voltage configuration

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
VolCmpSup 1
_:2311:81 General:>Block stage SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:307 General:Main-voltage failure ACD O
_:2311:308 General:Ref.-voltage failure ACD O
_:2311:309 General:Selection invalid SPS O
8.3.8 Broken-Wire Detection

The purpose of the Broken-wire detection is to detect interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current
transformers during steady-state operation. In addition jeopardizing the secondary circuit due to high
voltages, such interruptions can mimic the presence of differential currents for the differential protection, as
caused by short circuits in the protected object. To prevent overfunctions due to faulty current values, the
affected protection functions are blocked.
The Broken-wire detection is unavailable for the connection type 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep and the
connection type 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep.

The Broken-wire detection function is located in the power-system data of each 3-phase measuring point.
[dwbwsjsk-301112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
The tasks of Broken-wire detection are:
• The instantaneous values of all current measuring points are checked on a phase-selective basis for
implausible values.
• The affected phases are marked with wire-break suspected.
• Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
• After 10 ms of broken-wire check, a detected wire break is signaled.
Broken Wire Suspected

The Broken-wire detection function monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all
measuring points. For this purpose, the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility.
Each expected violation must be confirmed by additional criteria before a wire break can be detected and
signaled with assurance.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The detection of the local broken wire suspected is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of the
device selectively for each phase.
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.06 I/I rated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken wire suspected.
Resetting:
The broken wire suspected is reset by phase current flowing again or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting
can be useful during laboratory tests among other applications.
Indication
If the broken-wire detection has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated. The indication is held stable
for the duration of at least 3 periods.
When using the fast measuring transducer inputs as 4 mA to 20 mA inputs, broken-wire detection is active.
With a < 2 mA current, wire breaks are detected and the wire break indication is set. The measured values
display remains unaffected.
Parameter: Mode
• Recommended setting value (_:1) Mode = off

The Mode parameter is used to switch the broken-wire detection to on, off and test.
8.3.8.5 Settings

Brk.wire det.
_:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode • off off
• on
• test

(Type)
Brk.wire det.
_:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3.9 Current-Balance Supervision

In healthy network operation, a certain balance between currents can be assumed.
The Current-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
• Unbalance of phase currents in the secondary circuit
• Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current
measuring point.
[dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 3, en_US]

The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase
current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if
|Imin| / |Imax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Imax > Release threshold.
[losymmke-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-24 Characteristic of the Current-Balance Supervision

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-25 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.

If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the operate delay of the failure indication (parameter Delay failure
indication) begins. If both conditions persist during this time, the indication Failure is generated.

The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.5

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum
(Imax) phase current.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Release threshold
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5 A for Irated
=5A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).

switching operations) are avoided.
8.3.9.5 Settings

Supv. balan. I
_:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
8.3.10 Current-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Current-sum supervision function monitors the sum of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary
circuit. It detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary
circuit.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
For summation of the currents, the device requires the phase currents and the ground current of the current
transformer neutral point or of a separate ground-current transformer at this measuring point. Select the
following connection variant:
• Current-transformer connections connected to 3 current transformers and the neutral point (see
Figure A-6 in the Attachment)
NOTE
i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).

The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas-
urement point.
[dwstrcss-300913, 3, en_US]

The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors. Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN| > Threshold + Slope factor •Σ | I |.
[lokensum-300311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-27 Characteristic of the Current-Sum Supervision

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[locssumm-140611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-28 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision
Slope of the Characteristic Curve

The Slope factor • Σ | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of
the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.
The Slope factor and Threshold parameters are used to set the fault-current limit (IFmax) for the current-
sum supervision. The device calculates this fault current limit with the formula:
IFmax = Threshold + Slope factor • Σ| I |
The device uses the current inputs (IA, IB, IC and IN) to calculate:
• The fault current IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl• IN|
• The maximum current Σ| I | = | IA| + |IB| +| IC| + |kl• IN|

with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground-current
transformer (IN), for example, cable type current transformer.
• Transformation ratio of residual-current converter: RatioN
• Transformation ratio of phase-current converter: Ratioph

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision func-
tion.

When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the delay of the failure
indication (parameter: Delay failure indication) starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for
that time, the Failure indication is generated.

The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure.
Parameter: Slope factor
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Slope factor = 0.1

The Slope factor parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax)
phase current. This function calculates the RMS values.
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).

switching operations) are avoided.
8.3.10.5 Settings

Supv. sum I
_:1 Supv. sum I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:6 Supv. sum I:Delay failure 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
indication

(Type)
Supv. sum I
_:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
8.3.11 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Current phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
currents by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the currents. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase
current measurement point.
[dwstrcrs-040211-01.tif, 4, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 4, en_US]
Figure 8-30 Logic Diagram of the Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. You can set the phase sequence with the Phase sequence parameter in the function block General of
the power-system data (see chapter 6.1 Power-System Data).
To supervise the phase rotation, the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase
sequence. For abnormal phase sequences, the indication Failure is generated.
The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence. The connec-
tion diagrams are shown in the chapter A Appendix.
Release Condition
The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than
0.5 Irated.
Blocking of the Function

The following blockings reset the function completely:
• Via the binary input signal >Block function from an external or internal source
• Via a protection pickup

The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure.

When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Delay failure indication,
the indication Failure is generated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

8.3.11.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.I
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
failure indication

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision

The Trip-circuit supervision function recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit. When 2 binary inputs are used,
the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit. If only 1 binary input is available, it will not recognize
disruptions at the circuit breaker.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the
binary inputs VCtrl > 2 VBImin. At least 19 V are required for each binary input. This makes the supervision usable
only with a system-side control voltage of > 38 V.

The trip-circuit supervision is integrated into the Circuit-breaker function group. Depending on the number of
available binary inputs, it works with 1 or 2 binary inputs.
[dwtcsueb-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3.12.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs

In order to recognize disruptions in the trip circuit for each switch position, you need 2 binary inputs. One
input is connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection, the other parallel to the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[dwtcs2be-110611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-32 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (open)
CB coil Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (make contact)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (break contact)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1
V-BI2 Input voltage for binary input 2
Supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage.
It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either acti-
vated (H) or not (L). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault can be a disruption or a
short circuit in the trip circuit, an outage of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
Relay
(CR)
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State

Relay
(CR)
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay or >CB auxiliary contact are not routed on the binary inputs
of the device, then the Input sig. not routed indication is generated and the Trip-circuit supervision
function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[lotcs2be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-33 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
8.3.12.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

When using 1 binary input, you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker. The binary input is
connected in parallel with the respective command relay of the protection device. The circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact is bridged with a high-resistance equivalent resistance R.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwtcs1be-110611-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-34 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
CR Command relay
CB Circuit breaker (open)
CB coil Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (make contact)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (break contact)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance
Supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed with the equivalent resistance R or with the auxiliary contact AuxCon1 of the
closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed (L). If the binary
input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control voltage has
failed.
No. Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
Use the parameter Blk.by trip/open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip-circuit super-
vision is blocked. The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip-circuit supervision function:
• The Trip/open cmd. of the circuit breaker is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker failure protection is activated.

As long as the trip-circuit supervision function is blocked, the closed contact of the command relay does not
cause a failure indication.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip
circuit, the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signal >Trip relay is not routed to a binary input of the device (information routing in
DIGSI 5), then the Input sig. not routed indication is generated and Trip-circuit supervision is no
longer in effect.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
[lotcs1be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-35 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated when
the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is
open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:
[fofr1b02-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain activated, Rmin results in:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[fofr1b03-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:
[fofr1b01-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fofr1b04-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Alarm delay
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)
• Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit failure.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-
term transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration
of a trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is
actually interrupted.
Parameter: Blk.by trip/open cmd from
• Possible settings, application-dependent

The parameter works only with the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
Use the parameter Blk.by trip/open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip-circuit super-
vision is blocked. The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip-circuit supervision function:
• The Trip/open cmd. of the circuit breaker is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker failure protection is activated.
• One of the trip commands of the circuit-breaker reignition protection is activated.

The circuit-breaker failure protection is set to protect a different trip circuit than the local circuit breaker. Using
the configuration options of the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, multiple trip-circuit supervision
functions can be operated in parallel. For instance, a trip-circuit supervision function dedicated to a local
circuit breaker can also be operated parallel to a higher-level circuit breaker upon which the circuit-breaker
failure protection acts.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.3.12.6 Settings

74TC sup.1BI #
_:1 74TC sup.1BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.1BI #:Alarm delay 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
_:102 74TC sup.1BI #:Blk.by trip/ Setting options depend on
open cmd from configuration
74TC sup.2BI #
_:1 74TC sup.2BI #:Mode • off on
• on
• test
_:100 74TC sup.2BI #:Alarm delay 1.00 s to 30.00 s 2.00 s

(Type)
74TC sup.1BI #
_:82 74TC sup.1BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.1BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.1BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.1BI #:Health ENS O
_:71 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit failure SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.1BI #:Input sig. not routed SPS O
74TC sup.2BI #
_:82 74TC sup.2BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay SPS I
_:503 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB auxiliary contact SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.2BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.2BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.2BI #:Health ENS O
_:71 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit failure SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.2BI #:Input sig. not routed SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
8.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
• Base module
• Expansion modules
• Plug-in modules on the interface locations

The error responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can switch into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
• Communication-module failure (module x)
• Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)
• USB interface
• Integrated Ethernet interface
• Real-time clock device
• A/D converter (fast current sum)
• Battery voltage
• Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)

Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of opera-
tion.
Such errors are, for example:
• Memory error (RAM) in the base module
• Defective module
• Module-connection error (PCB Link)
• Control circuit error binary output
• Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation
into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Memory error (flash) in the base module
• CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Device Operating Hours

The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters it performs the following tasks:
• Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
• Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits (for example, analog-digital converter)
• Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measurement input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instanta-
neous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-36 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Path)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device → Measuring-point
routing, set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point.

The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the Power-system
data function group of each 3-phase current measuring point.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 •Σ| i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 • (Σ| i | - Base point 2)
With the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN), the device calculates:
• Fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
• Maximum current Σ| i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|
[lokenisu-240413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-38 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Logic
[losumsch-240413-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-39 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.46 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
i The parameters are fixed in the device and cannot be changed.

It is not necessary to change the parameters depending on the application.
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal
analog-digital converters function.
The threshold value is permanently set to 10 % of the device rated current.
Slope of the Characteristic 1

The component Slope of the characteristic 1 • Σ | i | takes into account permissible errors of the current input
that can occur in the case of small overcurrents.
The Slope of the characteristic 1 is permanently set to 0.1.
Slope of the Characteristic 2

The component Slope of the characteristic 2 takes into account permissible errors of the current input that
can occur in the case of high overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
The Slope of the characteristic 2 is permanently set to 0.95. The base point of the Slope of the character-
istic 2 is permanently set to 10.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
• Supervisions of the data and version consistency
• Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware
• Supervision of the available processor performance

When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be in
effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:
Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.

The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of
operation.
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
• Overloading of the processor
• Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
• Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
• Device startup with version error
• CFC-runtime error
• 3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 8.8 Error
Responses and Corrective Measures. You will find corresponding corrective measures there.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:
Configuration errors for which the device remains in operation.

The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in the IE converter config-
uration (normal/sensitive).
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
• Missing hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware module (module x)
• Incorrect hardware combination
• Incorrect plug-in module (module x)

You can find the detailed description of the error responses in table form at the end of this chapter. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another synchro-
nization with DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

SIPROTEC 5 devices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond the
hardware supervision of the communication plug-in modules the transferred data must be monitored with
respect to their consistency, failure, or outage.
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
• Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
• Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
Marking Fault Signals/Data

The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
• GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication.
• Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values, both analog measured values and binary information
to invalid (for example, for differential protection). Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in
cases of failures.
• Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3 you will find
the detailed description, in tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also
be found there.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
8.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the device
and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals are marked
and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the supervision func-
tions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable

In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to the
type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and indica-
tions.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures
Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures

To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
• Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device remains in operation.
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects cannot be implemented by a restart. In fallback mode, the
protection and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but remains in operation. Normally, the user can
correct the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes
for defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
All Protection and Automation Functions

Group-Warning Indication
Device-Diagnosis Log
Indication of the
Operational Log
Group Warning
Fallback Mode
Device restart
Indication in
Indication in
Life Contact
are inactive
(Reset)
Defect Severity 1 x x x – – – –
Defect Severity 2 – – x x During the x –
starting time of
the device
Defect Severity 3 – – x x x – x
Defect Severity 4 – x – x x – –
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Live status contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The device-
diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corresponding
corrective measures for each detected device error.
There is further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.1 Indications.
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning

In delivery condition, all supervision indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal (_:301) Group
warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority of supervision
indications are permanently connected to the Group warning (Group warning column = fixed). However,
some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a CFC chart (Group warning
column = CFC). If necessary, you can remove again the routings via a CFC chart from the group indication.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is prerouted to an LED.
The following logic diagram shows the context.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[lo_warning_indication, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-40 Forming the Group-Warning Indication Group Warning
Overview of Errors
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
General:
(_:53) Health ENS CFC If the Health of an individual function block, for example
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS a protection stage or an individual function, goes to the
Warning or Alarm state, this state is processed via the
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS
associated function group up to the general group indica-
tion Health (_:53).
Check from the operational log from which function or
function block the error originates. In the associated func-
tion description, there is additional information as to why
the Health of the function or a function block can change.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Warning
Device:
_:320 Auxiliary Power Fail SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
Check the external power supply.
If the device has a redundant PS204 power-supply module,
this indication is not provided and is replaced by the indica-
tions for a device with PS204 that are described in the
following.
(_:305) Battery failure SPS Battery fault:
Replace the device battery.
To avoid data losses, Siemens recommends replacing the
device battery with the device supply voltage switched on.
You can find more detailed information about the disposal
of the battery in the Hardware Manual, version V07.80 and
higher (Order number: C53000-G5040-C002-D).
_:312 Compensation error x ENS Calibration error on module x:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute questionable (measured-value display with ≈).
_:314 Offset error x ENS Offset error on module x:
If this indication persists after the device start, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the quality
attribute questionable (measured-value display with ≈).
_:306 Clock fail SPS Internal time failure
• Check the time settings first.

• Then replace the device battery.
• If the fault is not remedied, contact the Customer
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute Clock Failure.
(_:319) Error memory SPS Checksum (CRC) error in monitored memory areas of the
device
Measuring-transducer error ENS Hardware error on the measuring-transducer module on
(x) plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Warning
Device with redundant PS204 power-supply module:
_:330 Power sup. Module INS CFC Device-internal error on the power-supply module at posi-
fail. x tion x33:
• As the deice has a redundant PS204 power-supply

module, the device remains in operation as long as
this module is OK.
• Exchange the defective power-supply module so that
redundancy is re-established!
_:331 Power sup. Module OK x INS No device-internal error on the power-supply module at
position x33.
_:332 Pow. sup. aux. pow. INS Error on the external auxiliary power supply of the power-
fail. x supply module at position x33:
• As the deice has a redundant PS204 power-supply

module, the device remains in operation as long as
this module is OK.
• Check the auxiliary power supply of the device-
internal power-supply module.
_:333 Power sup.aux.pow.OK x INS The external auxiliary power supply of the power-supply
module at position x33 is OK.
Handling an alarm:
(_:504) >Group Warning SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation of group warning
Time sync.:
(_:305) Time sync. error SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing master is faulty:
• Check the external time source first.

• Check the external connections.
Support Center.
Quality: The internal time is marked with the quality
attribute Clock not synchronized.
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the current balance (see chapter 8.3.9.1 Over-
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. bal. I: view of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of current phase-rotation supervision (see chapter
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Phsseq.I: 8.3.11.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the current sum (see chapter 8.3.10.1 Overview
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv. Sum I of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
33 x means the mounting position of the module (x = 1,2,3,...)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point Failure of the quick current sum (see chapter 8.4.2.1 Over-
SPS CFC
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: view of Functions)
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in the analog-digital
converter at the power input.
• Check the exterior wiring.

Support Center.
Quality: The internally managed current measured values
are marked with the quality attribute invalid.
Blocking: The protection functions based on current meas-
urement are blocked.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is open.
SPS CFC
Volt.Trans.Cir.B: Blocking: Appropriate functions are either blocked defi-
(_:500) >Open nitely or the blocking can be set individually.
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage balance (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Over-
SPS CFC
Superv. of Bal. V: view of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of voltage phase-rotation supervision (see chapter
SPS CFC
Superv. Phsseq.V: 8.3.6.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point V-3ph: Failure of the voltage sum (see chapter 8.3.5.1 Overview
SPS CFC
Superv. of Sum V: of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
2 devices prot. comm.: Protection inter- Protection interface connection defective:
face #:
• Check the connections and the external communica-
(_:303) Connection broken SPS CFC 34 tion infrastructure.
SPS
(_:316) Error rate / min
exc.
Support Center.
(_:317) Error rate / hour SPS
Transferred signals: Faulty or not received telegrams are
exc.
detected at the receive end and discarded. They do not
(_:318) Time delay exceeded SPS result in failure of the applications. Configured binary
(_:320) Time delay jump SPS signals are reset after a time that can be set.
VI-3ph: Mess.Volt.Fail detected: Measuring-voltage failure detected:
SPS CFC
(_:300) Failure Check the exterior wiring.
Blocking: Appropriate functions are either blocked defi-
nitely or the blocking can be set individually.
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
34 The indications are not prerouted in the CFC. The indications must be added to by the user in the CFC!

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational log.
The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detec-
tion and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available for
later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recom-
mendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
826 CPU overload:
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus
available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you are
offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

2822 Memory error (continuous)
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:
4729 Device bus error (repeated):
• Check the module configuration and the module connections.

• Contact the Customer Support Center.
4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
956 Firmware-version error:
2013, 2025 Signature error:
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the device
hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of the
defect severity 4 – the group alarm – is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
• The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
• The life contact is terminated.
• The red Error LED is activated.
• All protection and automation functions are blocked.
• The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
• The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 8.9 Group Indications).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
8.9 Group Indications

The following group indications are available:
• (_:300) Group alarm

• (_:301) Group warning
• (_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Information routing. In the
operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
[scgrwarn-010313-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-41 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
Group Indication Group Alarm

The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect severity 4 monitoring. This moni-
toring has a special purpose, as it is set user-specifically by a binary input signal and not by internal device
supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, such as blocking all protection and automatic
functions (see chapter 8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm
becomes active. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group
alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the >Group
Alarm. This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
Group Indication Group Warning

The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly linked to the signal (_:301) Group warning, others are
connected flexibly in the device delivery condition via a CFC chart. This assignment is described in chapter
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning, that initiates the Group warning.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of
the device → Charts.
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
The Group indication is exclusively for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group indication is set, the
indication (_:302) Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log. This
warning indication does not result in blocking a protection function. If the binary input signal is reset, the
signal (_:302) Group indication drops out. Using a CFC chart, you can define when the binary input
signal (_:505) >Group indication is to be set.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision
of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions 974

9.2 Structure of the Function 975
9.3 Operational Measured Values 977
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 979
9.5 Energy Values 980
9.6 Measuring Transducers 983
9.7 Statistical Values of the Primary System 990
9.8 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 991

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions
9.1 Overview of Functions

The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group. This is how, for example, the electric power is calculated
from the voltage and current measurands.
Measuring transducers are an exception as they already form various calculation parameters from the analog
current and voltage inputs themselves.
Basic instructions for recording and editing process data can be found in the chapter 2.1 Function Embedding
in the Device.
[dwomverf-010212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
• Operational measured values
• Fundamental and symmetrical components
• Function-specific measured values
• Energy metered values
• User-defined measured and metered values
• Statistical values

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.2 Structure of the Function

Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
2 typical function groups are displayed below.

In the simplest version, the Voltage/current 3-phase function group obtains the measured values of the 3-
phase voltage and current system and contains the following measured-value groups:
[dw_FGVI3ph 7SJ81, 1, en_US]
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The Circuit-breaker function group may contain the following measured values:
[dwomvls1-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values

The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and
minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of
the protected object. This requires that the connection polarity for the used measuring points be correctly set
(see also parameter (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj of the measuring point current,
3-phase). It is, however, possible, to set the "forward" direction for the protection functions and the positive
direction for the powers, etc., differently, for example, such that the active power consumption (from the line
to the busbar) is displayed positively. Then set the option reversed in the affected function groups at the
parameter P, Q sign. With the setting not reversed (default setting), the positive direction for the
powers etc. corresponds to the "forward" direction for the protection functions.
The affected values are given in detail in the chapters 9.3 Operational Measured Values - 9.7 Statistical
Values of the Primary System.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.3 Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values
Active power
Apparent power
Reactive power
n Harmonic order
φn The angle difference between the voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Power factor
Active factor

The following table describes the operational measured values of the Voltage/current 3-Phase function group.
All protection functions have access to the values.
Table 9-1 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage/Current 3-Phase Function Group

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence A A Rated operating current of the primary values
current
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
√3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Calculated zero-sequence kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
voltage √3
VN Measured neutral-point kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values/
displacement voltage √3
P Active power MW – Active power of the primary values
Q Reactive power Mvar – Reactive power of the primary values
S Apparent power MVA – Apparent power of the primary values

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

dary
Cos φ Active factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to cos φ = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW – Active power of the phase
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar – Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA – Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx · Irated phsx
NOTE
i With the parameter P, Q sign in the function block General of the respective function group, the sign of
the following measured values can be inverted:
• Active power (total): P total
• Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
• Reactive power (total): Q total
• Reactive power (phase-related): QA, QB and QC

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

The fundamental components are calculated from the frequency-tracked instantaneous values through a
Fourier filter (integration interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the
amount and phase angle.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.
Fundamental Components
Table 9-2 Fundamental Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V A, V B, V C Phase-to-ground voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
values/√3
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
ment voltage values/√3
V 12, V 23, Phase-to-phase voltage kV V ° Rated operating voltage of the
V 31 primary values
I A, I B, I C Phase currents A A ° Rated operating current of the

primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A ° Rated operating current of the
primary values
Symmetrical Components
Table 9-3 Symmetrical Components
Values Primary Secon- Phase % Referenced to

dary Angle
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
voltage values/√3
V1 Positive-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
V2 Negative-sequence component of kV V ° Rated operating voltage of primary
the voltage values/√3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A ° Rated operating current of the
current primary values
I1 Positive-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values
I2 Negative-sequence component of A A ° Rated operating current of the
the current primary values

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.5 Energy Values
9.5 Energy Values
9.5.1 Function Description of Energy Values
The device continually determines the values for the active and reactive energy from the power-measured
values. It calculates the exported and imported electrical energy. The calculation (summation over time)
begins immediately after the device startup. You can read the present energy values on the device display or
through DIGSI, delete the energy value (set to 0), or set it to any initial value. After input, the energy-value
calculation will continue with the new setting values.
Energy values can be transferred to a control center through an interface. The energy values are converted
into energy metered values. Here the following applies:
[foomverg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the settings, you set how the metered values are processed. The setting parameters apply for all
energy metered values of the device, and do not have a function-group specific effect. You determine the
following points:
• Parameter Energy restore time

Hour-related point in time; at this point in time, the device will provide a metered value at the communi-
cation interface for transmission. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval
will be deactivated automatically.
• Parameter Energy restore interval

Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu-
nication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: The transfer interval is used alternatively to the transfer time, and deactivates the set transfer time.
The display of the device is always up to date.
You will find these parameters in the device settings under measured values.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input (>Restoring). The rising edge of the binary
input leads to restoring, that is, provision of the energy-metered value at the communication interface.
The metered-value memory and the energy values can be set to 0 via a binary input (>Resetting) if there is
a rising edge.
Note: The binary inputs affect all energy/energy metered values simultaneously.
The following energy values are available:
Energy Values Primary
Wp+ Active energy, output kWh, MWh, GWh
Wp- Active energy, input kWh, MWh, GWh
Wq+ Reactive energy, output kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
Wq- Reactive energy, input kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
In compliance with IEC 61850, when individually measured values are missing, the quality of the energy-
metered values changes to the state Questionable.
This quality state is retained until a new meter content is specified for the energy value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Set
- Setting a new counter status
- Resetting the counter status to 0

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.5 Energy Values
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function, section on the
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
• Active energy, output: Wp+
• Active energy, input: Wp-
• Reactive energy, output: Wq+
• Reactive energy, input: Wq-
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values
The set parameters apply for all electricity meters of the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the
project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Energy restore interval
• Default setting: (_:111) Energy restore interval = 10 min

0 min Restoring deactivated
60 min Cyclical restoring after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore time is not in
effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Energy restore time
• Default setting: (_:112) Energy restore time = none

none Deactivated
hh:00 Restoring on the full hour
hh:15 Restoring 15 minutes after the full hour
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval is
not in effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Energy restore
• Default setting: (_:120) Energy restore = latest value

latest value Restoring of the current energy value
delta value Restoring the difference value between the current energy value and the
energy value of the last restoring operation
Parameter: Energy restore by A.time
• Default setting: (_:121) Energy restore by A.time = false

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.5 Energy Values

False Restoring deactivated
True The cyclic restoring after the set time of the parameter (_:111) Energy
restore intervalwill also be synchronized with the system time.
Example: Energy restore interval = 30 min; current system time:
12:10 o'clock First restore: 12:30 o'clock; next restore: 13:00 o'clock etc.
Note: When the parameter is activated, the following setting values are possible for the parameter (_:111)
Energy restore interval: 1 min; 2 min; 3 min; 4 min; 5 min; 6 min; 10 min; 12 min; 15 min; 20 min;
30 min; 60 min.
Input Signals: >Restoring and >Resetting
Binary Inputs Description

>Restoring The restoring of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The metered value memory is set to 0 through the binary input.
You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix. Open the function group, for example, Line, where
you created the energy value. There, under the tab Measured values you will find the tab Energy, 3-phase.
In this tab, you will find the logical signals in addition to the measured values.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.6 Measuring Transducers
Measuring transducers with an input rated at 20 mA can be used in the devices. 4 such inputs are available as
module ANAI-CA-4EL, which can be plugged into a communication module slot (for instance, port E or F). Up
to 4 such modules can be plugged in. Typically, slowly changing process variable such as temperature or gas
pressure are recorded with such 20-mA measured values and reported to the substation automation tech-
nology.
The measuring-transducer blocks are embedded in the Analog units function group and contain input and
output channels that are configurable independently of each other.
[dwstrumu-050313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 20-mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If the parameter Range active is not activated (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range
of -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The following figure shows an example.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwklbsp1-120124-01.tif, 3, en_US]
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius and the measured value
20 mA means a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius. Thus, Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100 are
entered. The resolution (decimal place) of the temperature value can be selected; for one decimal place, select
Resolution = 0.1.
[sctransd-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-4 Parameter Settings for Example 1
If a value smaller than -25.6 mA or larger than +25.6 mA is applied to the measuring-transducer input, the
measured value is marked as outside the range of values. If the parameter Range active is activated, the 2
additional parameters Upper limit and Lower limit appear. Both limiting values indicate the input
currents in mA, for which the value set by the Conversion factor (Upper limit) and the value 0
(Lower limit) of the calculated measurand are valid (see following figure).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[dwklbsp2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, Range active is selected. The Upper limit is at 15 mA, the Lower limit is at 5 mA
and the Conversion factor remains at 100. Overall, this results in a characteristic curve as shown in the
following figure, taking into account all possible valid measured values from -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The
parameter Upper limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Upper limit setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured
value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
[dwklges2-120124-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-6 Total Characteristic Curve in Example 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[sctrans2-210415, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-7 Parameter Setting for Example 2
Each measuring-transducer input provides the scaled measured value (these are the temperature values in the
examples) and the original current measured value in mA in the information routing for further processing.
Table 9-4 Measuring-Transducer Measured Values
Measured Value Display

TD scale MV (_:301)
Primary Measured value converted to the sensor
Secondary –
Percent 100 % ≙ parameter (_:104) Conversion factor
(for (_:107) Range active = false)
100 % ≙ max. absolute value of the parameter (_:109) Upper limit - Sensor
or of the parameter (_:110) Lower limit - Sensor
(for (_:107) Range active = true)
TD direct MV (_:302)
Primary –
Secondary -20.000 mA to +20.000 mA or -10 V to +10 V
Percent 100 % ≙ 20 mA or 10 V
The measuring-transducer values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.
Parameter: Unit
• Recommended setting value (_:103) Unit = °C


With the (_:104) Conversion factor parameter, you set the conversion factor for the measuring trans-
ducer.
• Default setting (_:108) Resolution = 0.1


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the parameter Range active (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of
-25.6 mA to +25.6 mA.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit -
• Default setting (_:105) Upper limit = 20000 mA
• Default setting (_:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
• Default setting (_:106) Lower limit = 4000 mA
• Default setting (_:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
9.6.5 Settings

MT in #
_:101 MT in #:Meas. transduc. • Voltage input Current input
I/O type
• Current input
• Voltage output
• Current output
• Temperature input

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:103 MT in #:Unit • % m
• °
• °C
• °F
• Ω
• Ω/km
• Ω/mi
• 1/s
• A
• As
• cos φ
• cycles
• dB
• F/km
• F/mi
• h
• Hz
• Hz/s
• in
• J
• J/Wh
• K
• l/s
• m
• mi
• min
• p.u.
• Pa
• periods
• rad
• rad/s
• s
• V
• V/Hz
• VA
• VAh
• var
• varh
• Vs
• W
• W/s
• Wh

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

_:108 MT in #:Resolution • 1 0.1
• 0.1
• 0.01
• 0.001
_:107 MT in #:Range active • 0 false
• 1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:301 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:302 MT in #:TD direct MV MV O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.7 Statistical Values of the Primary System
9.7 Statistical Values of the Primary System

The device has statistical values for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
The following values are available for each circuit breaker:
• Total number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device.
• Number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device, separately for each circuit breaker pole
(if 1-pole tripping is possible)
• Total sum of primary breaking currents
• Sum of the primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole
• Hours with open circuit breaker
• Hours under load

The following values are available for each disconnector switch:
• Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device
• Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device, separately for each
switch pole (if 1-pole switching is possible)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.8 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function:
• Records the wear of circuit breakers
• Allows maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when their actual degree of wear makes it
necessary
• Sends a warning signal when the wear of a circuit breaker reaches a specified degree
• Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time

Savings on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main benefits this functionality offers.
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
The function offers 4 independent operating stages with different measuring methods:
• ΣIx-method stage
Sum of tripping current powers
• 2P-method stage
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
• I2t-method stage
Sum of all squared fault-current integrals
• Supv.CB make time stage

Supervision of the circuit-breaker make time
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 ΣIx-method stage. A maximum of 1 ΣIx-method
stage, 1 2P-method stage, 1 I2t-method stage, and 1 Supv.CB make time stage can be operated simultane-
ously within this function.
The general functionality is available across stages and provides a uniform start criterion for the stages.
[DwCBWear, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.8.3.1 Description
Logic
As the wear on the circuit breaker depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching
action, including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is important. The following general
functionality provides starting and further timing information to the different stages (methods).
The general functionality operates phase-selectively. The following figure shows the logic of the functionality
across stages.
[LoCBWear, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-9 Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Func-
tion
Start Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function

The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function starts when any of the following criteria is fulfilled:
• Internal protection-function tripping signal from the function block Trip logic is received
• Open command signal from the internal Control function is received.
• Binary input signal >Start calculation is initiated, for example, from external.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Closed position signal of circuit breaker is going

This signal is derived form the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. In this way, opening the circuit-breaker
manually is detected.
Logic Input Signals for Stages

As soon as the start criterion has been fulfilled, the timers of the parameterized opening time and break time
are started. With the parameter CB opening time, the time when the circuit-breaker pole begins to open is
defined. With the parameter CB break time, the time of the pole being open including the arc extinction is
defined. The following figure shows the relationship between these circuit-breaker times.
[DwCBTime, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-10 Circuit-Breaker Times
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation in case of a circuit-breaker failure, the parameter Current
thresh. CB open is used to verify whether the current actually returns to 0 after 2 additional cycles. Funda-
mental components are used for comparing the threshold values. When the current criterion fulfills the
requirement of the phase-selective logic release, the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are
initiated.
End Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function

After calculation and evaluation have been completed, the end criterion of the circuit-breaker maintenance is
fulfilled. The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function is ready for a new initiation.
Parameter: CB opening time
• Default setting value (_:2311:101) CB opening time = 0.065 s

You use the CB opening time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker until the start of opening of switching poles.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 9-10.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: CB break time
• Default setting (_:2311:102) CB break time = 0.080 s

You use the CB break time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker to the instant of arc extinction (and switching pole open).
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 9-10.
Parameter: CB make time
• Default setting (_:2311:103) CB make time = 0.080 s

With the parameter CB make time, you define the typical time interval between the activation of the closing
procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows.
You can find more information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
9.8.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:CB opening time 0.001 s to 0.500 s 0.065 s
_:2311:102 General:CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s
_:2311:103 General:CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calculation SPS I

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.8.4 ΣI*-Method Stage
9.8.4.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[LoCBWIxS, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-11 Logic of the ΣIx-Method Stage
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

RMS values of the fundamental components are stored for each phase in a buffer during the time between the
start criterion and the pole-opening-starts criterion. With the coming pole-opening-starts criterion, the latest
value in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh. CB
open. The 20 ms prior value is used as tripping/opening current for further calculation.
If no value within the buffer is above the setting value, this circuit-breaker opening affects only the mechan-
ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
[LoCBWIxF, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-12 Logic of the Determination of the Tripping Current Value
(1) Current-flow criterion fulfilled

(2) 20 ms prior value
Calculation of the Wear

If the ΣIx-method stage receives the logic release signal, the determined tripping current is used in the calcula-
tion of wear. The calculation results are then added to the existing statistic values of the ΣIx method as
follows, with phase A as example.
[FoCBWIxA-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-
breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the ∑Ix method
m Total number of switching cycles
The phase-selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according to
the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the summated ΣIx value of any phase is greater than the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Exponent
• Default setting (_:11371:101) Exponent = 2.0
You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the ΣIx method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
• Default setting (_:11371:102) Threshold = 10 000.00

You use the parameter Threshold to define the threshold of the statistic value.
The relation of the tripping current powers to the exponentiated rated normal current Irated allows the limiting
value of the ΣIx method to correspond to the maximum number of make-break operations. For a circuit
breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the maximum number of make-break operations can be
entered directly as limiting value.
9.8.4.3 Settings

ΣIx-method
_:11371:1 ΣIx-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:11371:101 ΣIx-method:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:11371:102 ΣIx-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000

(Type)
ΣIx-method
_:11371:54 ΣIx-method:Inactive SPS O
_:11371:52 ΣIx-method:Behavior ENS O
_:11371:53 ΣIx-method:Health ENS O
_:11371:301 ΣIx-method:ΣIx A BCR O
_:11371:302 ΣIx-method:ΣIx B BCR O
_:11371:303 ΣIx-method:ΣIx C BCR O
_:11371:304 ΣIx-method:Warning ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.8.5 2P-Method Stage
9.8.5.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[LoCBW2PS, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-13 Logic of the 2P-Method Stage
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

For the description to determine the tripping/opening current value, refer to chapter 9.8.4.1 Description.
Calculation of Remaining Switching Cycles

A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the circuit-breaker manufacturer illustrates the relationship of
permitted switching cycles and the tripping/opening current, see the following figure. According to the
example, this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA.
2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current. Point P1
is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated. Point P2 is deter-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associated
values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at Ir,
Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[DwCBWOpC, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-14 Diagram of Switching Cycles for the 2P Method
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[FoCBW2P1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
NOTE
i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.
[DwCBWSlo, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-15 Value Limitation of Slope Coefficient
(1) Applied function from m < -4

(2) Parameterized function with m = -4.48
(3) Parameterized function with m = -1.77
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation changes
the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:
[FoCBW2P2-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
Endur.i Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith
switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
[FoCBW2P3-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.

If the residual switching cycles of any phase lie below the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is gener-
ated.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Ir
• Default setting (_:101) Switching cycles at Ir = 10 000

You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated normal current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
Parameter: Rated short-circ.cur. Isc
• Default setting (_:102) Rated short-circ.cur. Isc = 25 000 A

You use the Rated short-circ.cur. Isc parameter to define the rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Isc
• Default setting (_:103) Switching cycles at Isc = 50

You use the Switching cycles at Isc parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated short-circuit breaking current.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
• Default setting (_:104) Threshold = 1000

You use the Threshold parameter to define the threshold of residual switching cycles with rated normal
current. A warning signal is generated when the statistic is less than the Threshold.
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the Threshold parameter. Assuming a circuit breaker with the
same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the Threshold value based on the following calcu-
lation:
[FoCBW2P4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
9.8.5.3 Settings

2P-method
_:1 2P-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 2P-method:Switching 100 to 1000000 10000
cycles at Ir
_:102 2P-method:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:103 2P-method:Switching 1 to 1000 50
cycles at Isc
_:104 2P-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 100

(Type)
2P-method
_:54 2P-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2P-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 2P-method:Health ENS O
_:301 2P-method:Endur.A INS O
_:302 2P-method:Endur.B INS O
_:303 2P-method:Endur.C INS O
_:304 2P-method:Warning ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.8.6 I2t-Method Stage
9.8.6.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[LoCBWI2t, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-16 Logic of the I2t-Method Stage
Calculation of the Wear

The I2t method evaluates the wear of a circuit breaker based the sampled measuring values of the phase
currents during the arc time. The duration of the arc time is defined by the difference between the 2 settings
of parameters CB break time and CB opening time (see also Figure 9-10). The stage determines the
ending point of the arc time by searching backward the zero-crossing point of the phase currents after it
receives the logic release signal. Then, the squared fault currents during the arc time are integrated phase-

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in
the following formula, with phase A as example.
[FoCBWI2T-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.

If the statistic value of any phase lies above the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is generated.
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 10 000.00 I/Ir*s

You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured
values of the phase currents.
9.8.6.3 Settings

I2t-method
_:1 I2t-method:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 I2t-method:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/Ir*s 10000.00 I/Ir*s

(Type)
I2t-method
_:54 I2t-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I2t-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I2t-method:Health ENS O
_:301 I2t-method:ΣI²t A BCR O
_:302 I2t-method:ΣI²t B BCR O
_:303 I2t-method:ΣI²t C BCR O
_:304 I2t-method:Warning ACT O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
9.8.7 Supervision CB Make Time Stage
9.8.7.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[Lo_sup-cb-make-time, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-17 Logic of the Supv.CB Make Time Stage
Operating Mode
The stage for the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time calculates the time between the circuit-breaker
closing command and the point in time when the current from at least one phase exceeds the
Oper.current threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the param-
eter CB make time, the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked
with the quality invalid.
If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the param-
eter Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded, the corresponding outputs Warning 1 and Warning 2 are activated for 100 ms. These
can be routed in the log.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Parameter: Level of warning 1
• Default setting (_:101) Level of warning 1 = 5 %

With the parameter Level of warning 1, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 1 is set. The
output Warning 1 then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Level of warning 2
• Default setting (_:102) Level of warning 2 = 10 %

With the parameter Level of warning 2, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 2 is set. The
output Warning 2 then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Oper.current threshold
• Default setting (_:103) Oper.current threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define the current threshold. If the measured value
exceeds this threshold, the measured value is detected as flowing operating current. As soon as an operating
current flows, the end of the time interval Make time is detected.
Parameter: Delay correction time
• Default setting (_:104) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted from
the Make time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for example,
relay residual times, if necessary.
9.8.7.3 Settings

Supv.CB mak.t.
_:1 Supv.CB mak.t.:Mode • off off
• on
• test
_:101 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 5%
warning 1
_:102 Supv.CB mak.t.:Level of 1 % to 100 % 10 %
warning 2
_:103 Supv.CB 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
mak.t.:Oper.current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
threshold
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:104 Supv.CB mak.t.:Delay -0.050 s to 0.050 s 0.000 s
correction time

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

(Type)
Supv.CB mak.t.
_:54 Supv.CB mak.t.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv.CB mak.t.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv.CB mak.t.:Health ENS O
_:301 Supv.CB mak.t.:Make time MV O
_:302 Supv.CB mak.t.:Warning 1 SPS O
_:303 Supv.CB mak.t.:Warning 2 SPS O

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
10 Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes 1010

10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) 1011
10.3 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground-Fault Functions 1012
10.4 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection 1016
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1018
10.6 Circuit-Breaker Test 1021
10.7 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection 1024
10.8 Functional Test of Transient Ground-Fault Protection 1025
10.9 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision 1026
10.10 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal 1027
10.11 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual 1028
Voltage
10.12 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function 1030
10.13 Testing the Negative-Sequence Current 1034
10.14 Functional Test Protection Communication 1035

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes
10.1 General Notes

Various tests have to be performed for commissioning to warrant the correct function of the device.
For tests using secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are locked in and trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise indicated.
Secondary tests can never replace primary tests because they cannot include connection faults. They provide a
theoretical check of the setting values only.
Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection
systems, with the operation of the system, and with safety regulations and provisions (switching, grounding,
etc.).
Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning. The described tests require that these
be capable of being performed safely. They were not conceived for operational checks.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection)
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage

Connection)
The proper connection of the current and voltage transformer is checked with load current over the line to be
protected. For this, the line must be switched on. A load current of at least 0.1 Irated has to flow over the line; it
should be ohmic to ohmic inductive. The direction of the load current has to be known. In case of doubt,
meshed and ring systems should be unraveled. The line remains switched on the for the duration of the meas-
urements.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured value. First make sure that the power
measured values correspond to the power direction. Normally, it can be assumed that the forward direction
(measuring direction) goes from the busbar toward the line.
Using the power measured values at the device or DIGSI 5, make sure that it corresponds to the power direc-
tion:
• P is positive if the active power flows in the line or protected object.
• P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
• Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object.
• Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line . The current-
transformer neutral point then points in the direction of the protected object (for example line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.3 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground-Fault Functions
10.3 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground-Fault

Functions
10.3.1 Overview
If the CT and VT connections are in the way that the ground quantities (3I0 and V0) are calculated by the
device from the phase quantities, then, no additional directional test is required. Testing according to
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) is sufficient.
If the ground current IN or the ground voltage VN is directly measured via a device input (usually I4 or V4), the
correct polarity of the ground current and the ground voltage path must be checked.
! DANGER
Live system parts! Capacitive coupled voltages on dead parts!
Noncompliance with the following measures can lead to death, serious physical injury, or consider-
able material damage.
² Primary measures may be performed only on dead and grounded system parts.
10.3.2 Directional Testing for Solid or Resistive-Grounded Systems
Primary Test
The primary test is used for the evaluation of the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the deter-
mination of the ground-fault direction.
To generate a zero-sequence voltage V0, the e-n winding of one phase in the voltage-transformer set (for
example, phase A) is bypassed, see Figure 10-1. If no connection on the e–n windings of the voltage trans-
former is provided, the corresponding phase is disconnected on the secondary side, see Figure 10-2. Only the
current of the transformer in the phase of which the voltage is missing is transferred via the current circuit. If
the line carries resistive-inductive load, the protection is subject to the same conditions as existing during a
ground fault in line direction.
For directional testing, the Directional ground-fault protection function (67N) is configured and at least one
stage is switched on. The pickup threshold of the stage must be below the load current of the line. If not, the
binary input signal (_:2311:501) >Test of direction can be activated to lower the threshold tempo-
rarily for testing means without changing the respective parameter.
After switching the line on and off again, you can check the pickup signal of the directional protection stage in
the fault log. A forward information must be logged. If no pickup information is logged at all, the 3I0 or U0
threshold is not exceeded.
If a wrong direction is logged, one of the following conditions may have occurred:
• The direction of the load flow is from the line towards the busbar.
• The ground-current connection is incorrect.
• The voltage connection is incorrect.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends not to change parameter settings for the test. However, if parameters were changed
for this test, they must be returned to their original state after completing the test!

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
[ConnPolarit1_diagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-1 Polarity Testing, Example with Current Transformers Configured in a Holmgreen-Connection
and VTs with Broken-Delta Connection
[ConnPolarit2_201507, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-2 Polarity Testing, Example with Current Transformers Configured in a Holmgreen-Connection
and VTs with Star Connection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.3.3 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Secondary Test with Core Balance Current Transformer

The secondary test is used for the evaluation of the correct ground-fault direction of the directional ground-
fault protection functions. With this test, a core balance current transformer that is incorrectly connected can
also be found.
[dw_secondary_test_SGFP, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-3 Connection with Primary Current Injection
In the preceding figure, the red pilot wire must be wired only for the testing purpose through the core balance
current transformer.
² Make the connections of the test equipment according to Figure 10-3.
² Route the pilot wire through the core balance current transformer in the direction towards the protection
object (towards the feeder).
² To achieve a higher measured ground current, route the pilot wire multiple times through the core
balance current transformer.
² The equivalent primary test current is the test current of the test device multiplied by the number of pilot-
wire windings.
² Inject the test quantities according to the following table. Select the quantities according to the
networking grounding and direction to be tested.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
Neutral Point Isolated Resonant-Grounded

Direction Forward Reverse Forward Non-faulty
VA (V1) 0V 0° 0V 0° 0V 0° 0V 0°
VB (V2) 100 V ‑150° 100 V ‑150° 100 V ‑150° 100 V ‑150°
VC (V3) 100 V +150° 100 V +150° 100 V +150° 100 V +150°
Vda/dn (V4) 100 V +180° 100 V +180° 100 V +180° 100 V +180°
IA = 3I0 (I135) 2A +90° 2A ‑90° 1A 0° 2A ‑90°
² You can check the test result by the direction information from the log.
Primary Test
The primary test is used for the evaluation of the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the deter-
mination of the ground-fault direction.
For directional testing, the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function (67Ns) is configured and a
directional stage is switched on. For example, the directional 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement.
The most reliable test is the one with a primary ground fault. Proceed as follows:
² Isolate the line and ground it on both sides; on the farthest line end it must remain open during the
entire test.
² Place a 1-phase ground fault bridge on the line. For overhead lines, this can be done at an arbitrary loca-
tion, in any case behind the current transformer (as seen from the busbar of the feeder to be tested). For
cables, the grounding is done on the farthest end (sealing end).
² Remove the protective grounding from the line.
² Switch on the circuit breaker on the line to be tested.
² Check direction indicator (LED if routed).
² Check the indication (_:302) Ground fault in the ground-fault log or fault log with regard to its
direction. The indication (_:302) Ground fault forward must be logged as direction information.
If backward is determined as the direction, either with the current connections or the voltage connec-
tions, there is an inversion in the neutral path. For the display unknown, the ground current is probably
too low.
² Switch the line off and ground it.
This completes the test.
35 Refers to I1 of the test equipment in Figure 10-3.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection

Secondary Test
For the secondary test for the overload protection, note that all setting parameters refer to primary variables
of the protected object. The protection device extracts the current transformer ratio from the power-system
data and internally performs the adjustments to device nominal variables. Take these characteristics into
account for the test.
² Reset the thermal memory before you repeat the test. This is possible, for instance, via the binary input
indication >Reset thermal replica. If the function is reparameterized or is switched off, the
thermal replica will also be reset.
Test without Previous Load

² Test the operate time at 1.5 I/Irated, obj.
In the example, the following power-system data are assumed:
Irated, obj = 483 A
Irated, transf.prim = 750 A
Irated, transf.sec = 1 A
The primary test current is 1.5 * 483 A = 724.5 A. This results in a secondary current of 724.5 A *1A/750A =
0.966 A. A secondary current of 0.966 A must therefore be supplied.
² Calculate the operate time with the following formula. Enter only primary variables here.
² Set Iprevious load = 0. The setting parameters reveal the K-factor (for example, 1.1) and the Thermal
time constant (for example, 600 s or 10 min).
² Test from the cold state.
[foauslpr-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
² At a current of 0.966 A supplied on the secondary side, the protection function must trip after 463 s.
Test with Previous Load

² The object rated current (Iprevious load= Irated, obj) flows at a previous load of 1 (100 %).
² Supply 483 A *1 A/750 A = 0.644 A in this case.

After a finite time (greater than 5 τth), the stationary previous load sets in.
K-factor
² If you abruptly increase the supplied secondary current from 0.644 A to 0.966 A (1.5 I/Irated, obj), the over-
load protection will trip in the following time.
[foauslpr-190309-02.tif, 2, en_US]

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
NOTE
i Owing to the relatively large time constants in practice, the tests are carried out with significantly reduced
time constants. Reset the original setting value after completing the tests.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
10.5 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure

Protection
Integration of the Protection Function into the Station
The integration of the protection function into the station must be tested in the real-life application. Because
of the multitude of possible applications and possible system configurations, the required tests cannot be
described here in detail.
NOTE
i Always keep the local conditions, the station plans, and protection plans in mind.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends isolating the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both ends before starting the
tests. Line disconnector switches and busbar disconnector switches must be open so that the circuit
breaker can be operated without risk.
General Precautions
! CAUTION
Tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder cause a trip command to the output to the adjacent (busbar)
circuit breakers.
Noncompliance with the following measure can result in minor personal injury or physical damage.
² In a first step, interrupt the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) circuit breakers, for example, by
disconnection of the corresponding control voltages.
For testing the circuit-breaker failure protection, it must be ensured that the protection (external protection
device or device-internal protection functions) cannot operate the circuit breaker. The corresponding trip
command must be interrupted.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it can also contain points, which have to be ignored
in the current application.
Test Modes
The device and the function can be switched to test mode. These test modes support the test of the function
in different ways:
Test Modes Explanation
Device in test mode This operating mode is relevant for the following tests:
1. Approach of current thresholds in the case of an external start: Supervi-
sion of the binary input signals in the case of an external start is disabled.
This setting allows a static activation of the starting signals in order to
approach the current threshold.
2. Check whether the issued trip commands actuate the corresponding
circuit breakers, because the device contacts are also actuated in the device
test mode.
CBFP function in test mode This operating mode is important for function tests in which the generated
(device is NOT in test mode) operate indications are NOT supposed to actuate the binary outputs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
NOTE
i When the function or device is in test mode, all indications are given a test bit.
NOTE
i In the mode Device in test mode, the operate indications generated by the function operate the binary
outputs.
The function must also be tested in its normal, switched-on condition.

Consider the following in this case:
² The device contacts are actuated.
² Binary input signal supervision (in the case of an external start) is enabled and blocks the function.
² All indications generated are generated without test bit.
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

When circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, they make an essential contribution to the
reliability of the circuit-breaker failure protection, provided that their settings are set accordingly.
² Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked.
Internal Starting Conditions (Trip Command from Internal Protection Function)

The internal start can be tested by means of tripping a protection function, for example, the main protection
function of the device.
² Check the settings for circuit-breaker failure protection. See also chapter 6.30.4 Application and Setting
Notes.
² For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
² Generate the trip for the protection function. This can be generated within the device by a test sequence
(see description in the Operating manual) or by creating corresponding secondary test values.
² The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.
External Starting Conditions (Trip Command from External Protection Function)

If external protection devices are also able to start the circuit-breaker failure protection, the external starting
conditions require checking.
² Check the settings for circuit-breaker failure protection.
See also chapter 6.30.4 Application and Setting Notes.
² For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
² Activate the binary input or inputs to which the start signal and possibly also the release signal for the
CBFP function are routed. This can be done in 2 ways:
– Via internal test sequences
– By controlling the binary input or inputs via an auxiliary voltage
² Check the start input signal, and if available, check the enable input signal in the spontaneous or fault
messages.
² Check the pickup indication in spontaneous or fault indications.
² The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
Start by Trip Command from the External Protection

² Check the static and - in case of 2-channel operation - also the dynamic supervision of the binary input
signals. For this purpose, induce pickup of the supervision and check the supervision indications and the
ready signal in the event log buffer.
Start by Trip Command from the External Protection without Current Flow
² If start is possible without current flow: (see Start by trip command from the external protection).
Repetition of the Local Tripping (T1)

² Make sure that the trip repeat signal controls a 2nd circuit (2nd coil) for switching off the circuit breaker.
Backup Tripping in the Case of a Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2)

For tests in the station, it is important to check that the distribution of trip commands to the adjacent circuit
breakers in the case of a circuit-breaker failure is correct. The adjacent circuit breakers are all circuit breakers,
which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the short-circuit current if the feeder circuit-breaker
fails. They are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which
the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers depends
largely on the system topology.
² With multiple busbars, the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked.
The test has to check for every busbar section that, in case of a failure of the feeder circuit-breaker under
observation, only those circuit breakers which are connected to the same busbar section are tripped.
Backup Tripping on Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2), Tripping of the Opposite End

If the trip command of the circuit-breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit breaker at the opposite
end of the tested feeder, the communication channel for this remote trip has to be tested as well.
² It is practical to test the communication channel for the remote trip while transmitting other signals in
accordance with 10.14.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication.
Termination
² All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, such as special switch positions, interrupted
trip commands, changes to setting values, or individually switched off protection functions.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.6 Circuit-Breaker Test

The Circuit-breaker test function enables you to easily perform a complete test of the trip circuit, the closing
circuit, and the circuit breaker. For this, the circuit-breaker test carries out an automatic opening and closing
cycle or an only-open cycle of the circuit breaker during operation. You can also include a current-flow crite-
rion in the test. The effect of the current-flow criterion is to ensure the circuit-breaker test is only carried out if
the current flow across the circuit breaker is below the parametrizable threshold.
NOTE
i If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected, a circuit breaker that has been opened can be
permanently closed.
The following test program is available for you to carry out the circuit-breaker test.
No. Test Program
1 3-phase open/closed cycle
Structure of the Function

The Circuit-breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers.
[dwcbch01-240217, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-4 Embedding of the Function
[dwzecbc3p2-030217, 2, en_US]
Figure 10-5 Structure of the Function
Test Procedure
The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit-breaker test can start:
² If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals the position of the breaker pole to the device via the binary
inputs of the signal Position, the test cycle is not initiated unless the circuit breaker is closed.
² If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact has not been routed, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is
closed.
² The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-closed-open or only-open cycle (indication >Ready).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
² A protection function must not have been picked up in the circuit-breaker protection function group
responsible for the circuit breaker.
[scCBTest3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-6 Settings for the Circuit-Breaker Test
Figure 10-7 shows the progression over time of an open-close cycle. If you activated the (_:6151:102)
Trip only option, the close command will not be executed and the dead time will not be taken into
account.
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is connected, the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi-
tion = open after the trip command is generated. When the indication Position = open is received, the
close command is transmitted after a dead time (parameter (_:6151:101) Dead time) for an open-close
cycle. If the feedback from the circuit-breaker positions is not received within the maximum transmission time
(Dead time + 2 · Output time + 5 s), the circuit-breaker test is aborted and considered to be failed. The
proper functioning of the circuit breaker is monitored via the feedback on the circuit-breaker positions.
[dwcbch03-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-7 Progress over Time of a Circuit-Breaker Test Cycle
Use the (_:6151:103) Consider current criterion parameter to ensure the circuit-breaker test is
only carried out when the current flowing through the circuit breaker does not exceed a specific current
threshold (parameter (_:6151:104) Current threshold). Otherwise, the circuit-breaker test is not
started.
² If the current-flowcriterion is deactivated, the current threshold is not evaluated. The circuit-breaker test
is performed irrespective of the current-flow level through the circuit breaker.
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker test does not perform a synchrocheck even if the synchrocheck has been configured in
the protection-function groups for circuit breakers. This can cause stability problems in the system during a
3-pole interruption. Therefore, a 3-pole circuit-breaker test should be very short, or not performed at all
under load.
You can start the test program as follows:
• Via the device-control panel
• Via DIGSI
• Via communication protocols
• Via control commands, which you can also connect in the CFC

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
The following figure illustrates operation of the circuit-breaker test in DIGSI.
[sccb_3pol, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-8 Circuit-Breaker Test in the Test Suite in DIGSI
² Select the function in the project tree on the left in the online access.
² Start the desired test program in the upper portion of the working area.
² The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the working area. Additional informa-
tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit-breaker test is being performed can be read in
the operational log.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.7 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection
10.7 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection

General
² For the test, make sure that the test current reflects the typical inrush current.
² Perform the test with transient signals. These can be recorded inrush currents or simulated currents from
a transient system model.
² When using synthetic signals, observe the notes on the individual measuring principles.
Harmonic Analysis
² Superimpose on the fundamental-component current a test current of double frequency (2nd harmonic)
and test the pickup behavior with this.
² Cause a threshold value excess (internal pickup) for one of the protection functions that you want to
block.
- or -
² Apply a test current with a load current as lead (current step).
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
CWA Process
² Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in all 3 phase
currents.
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.8 Functional Test of Transient Ground-Fault Protection
10.8 Functional Test of Transient Ground-Fault Protection

General
This function requires the correct polarity of the ground current IN and the neutral-point displacement voltage
VN respectively the zero-sequence voltage V0. For the direction test of these quantities, refer to chapter
10.3 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground-Fault Functions.
The function is based on the evaluation of the transient in the zero-sequence system after the ground-fault
ignition.
For issuing the signal (_:13021:302) Ground fault, the following 2 conditions must be met:
• There is a transient in the ground quantities.
• The fundamental compoment of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold (_:13021:103)
V0> threshold value.
The following 2 methods are available for testing of the signal (_:13021:302) Ground fault:
• Replaying real transient ground-fault recordings to the device
• Using secondary test equipment which allows to simulate transients ground faults
However, the setting of parameter (_:13021:103) V0> threshold value cannot be tested precisely
with the mentioned 2 methods, since this test requires a static V0. An easy way to test the setting is described
in the following.
Secondary Test
This test must be carried out by injecting static secondary quantities. The test equipment needs to be config-
ured in a way that it generates zero-sequence current 3I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0, which are injected to
the SIPROTEC 5 device. By carrying out a shot, for example, a status change from zero-sequence values of 0 A
and 0 V to the values not equal to zero, a transient is generated. The signal (_:13021:302) Ground
fault is issued as long as the static zero-sequence voltage of the 2nd state is greater than the set threshold.
As amplitude for the secondary 3I0, 100 mA is a suitable value. In this test, the directional result contained in
the signal (_:13021:302) Ground fault is not defined and relevant, since the task is to test the setting
of parameter (_:13021:103) V0> threshold value only.
For testing the threshold, shots must be carried out with a static V0 slightly below the threshold and slightly
above the threshold, for example, to 98 % and 102 % of the threshold value or to a threshold value of -0.2 V
and +0.2 V (the greater absolute deviation of the threshold value must be selected) .
Consider that the V0 threshold is defined according to the definition of the symmetrical components. A full
neutral-point displacement voltage VN of 100 V causes V0 = 57.7 V.
Example
• (_:13021:103) V0> threshold value = 15 V
• 3 shots from 0 to V0 = 14.7 V and 3I0 = 100 mA

No signal (_:13021:302) Ground fault is issued.
• 3 shots from 0 to V0 = 15.3 V and 3I0 = 100 mA

Signal (_:13021:302) Ground fault is issued
If the test result is not as expected, check the injected static V0 voltage via the operational measurement of
the device which contains the zero-sequence components.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.9 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision
10.9 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision

General
² For the test, make sure that the switching threshold of the binary inputs is clearly below half the rated
value of the control voltage.
2 Binary Inputs
² Make sure that the binary inputs used are isolated.
1 Binary Input
² Make sure that, in the circuit of the 2nd circuit-breaker auxiliary contact, an equivalent resistance R is
connected.
² Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.10 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal
10.10 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal

² Check the phase sequence (direction of rotating field) at the device terminals. It must correspond to the
² The output indication Phase sequence ABC or Phase sequence ACB displays the determined
phase sequence. This must correspond to the phase sequence that was set.
² You can also determine the phase sequence via the Symmetrical components measured values. If you
obtain negative-sequence system variables (V2, I2) and no positive-sequence system variables (V1, I1) with
symmetrical 3-phase infeed, the setting parameter Phase sequence does not correspond to the
connection.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.11 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
10.11 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence

Voltage/Residual Voltage
Checking the Stator Ground-Fault Protection with the Machine
You have to check whether the protection function and the protection ranges are functioning correctly. The
following tests are intended for the unit connection.
You can check the protection range by performing a test with a ground fault at the generator terminals. The
ground fault test in the power system enables you to verify the noise suppression of the load resistor.
Checking the Protection Range with a Machine Ground Fault
! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.
² Insert a 1-phase-to-ground jumper into the terminal circuit of the machine.

² Set the Mode parameter in the protection stage to test. This prevents the trip command from being
generated for the stage.
² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to approx. 20 % of the rated machine voltage.
² From the operational measured values, check the plausibility of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and the
input voltage at the connected input.
² Determine the protection range from the pickup voltage.
The following applies for the protection range S:
[foschzbe-130309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Example: Measurement with secondary voltages

VNG: Generator voltage transformed to the transformer secondary side = 100 V
V0, pickup value: Measured zero-sequence voltage at pickup = 5.68 V
S: Resulting protection range = 90 %
² Check the messages in the message buffer. If the Detection of faulty phase parameter is set to
yes, check the display of the phase affected by the fault.
² Shut the machine down and remove the ground fault bridge.
² Set the Mode protection stage parameter to on.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.11 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Checking Disturbance-Voltage Suppression in the Load Resistor with a System Ground Fault
! DANGER
Do not touch live parts or reach into rotating machines.
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
² Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.
² With the primary system de-energized and grounded, insert a 1-pole ground fault bridge on the high-
voltage side of the unit transformer.
! CAUTION
If there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and simultaneously a grounding on the high-
voltage side, do not perform the test.
Material can be damaged during the test if there is a neutral-point grounding at the transformer and
simultaneously a grounding on the high-voltage side.
² Neutral grounding at the transformer must be interrupted during the test.
² Start the machine and excite it slowly up to 30 % of the rated machine voltage.
² Read the zero-sequence voltage V0, measured value from the operational measured values.
² Extrapolate the zero-sequence voltage to 100 % of the machine voltage (V0, fault).
² Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value.
If the result is less than 0.5, the safety margin is sufficient. If the fault voltage is lower, you can increase the
sensitivity of the protection function.
EXAMPLE:
V0, meas. = 0.75 V
Vthreshold value = 5.68 V
V0, fault = 0.75 V * 100 % / 30 % = 2.5 V
Safety margin = 2.5 V / 5.68 V = 0.44
The calculated safety margin of 0.44 is sufficient because it is below 0.5.
² Shut the machine down and de-excite it. Remove the ground-fault bridge.
² Restore neutral-point grounding if you require grounded operation of the neutral on the high-voltage
side of the unit transformer.
When using the function for startup ground-fault protection on a busbar connection, carry out the same check
as for the unit connection, but only the part Test during machine ground fault.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.12 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function

Measuring the Circuit-Breaker Make Time
Under asynchronous system conditions, the circuit-breaker make time must be measured and set correctly.
This achieves an exact parallel switching with a phase angle 0o. If switching occurs only in synchronous system
conditions, this section can be skipped.
The make time can be determined via the following 2 methods:
• By reading from a fault record (recommended method)
• With external timer

1. A simple option for determining the make time involves reading the time between the close command and
closure of the switch pole via the fault record. The time determined here is the real make time and not the
operating time of the circuit breaker. You do not have to add any further time.
Siemens recommends the following procedure:
² Establish a condition in which the circuit breaker can be closed without hazard.
² If V2 is switched through, activate the operating mode Close cmd. at V1< & V2> for the synchroni-
zation stage by setting to yes.
If V1 is switched through, activate the operating mode Close cmd. at V1> & V2<.
² Make sure that the fault recorder is turned on. Via a temporary CFC chart, link the signal Release
close cmd. of the active synchronization stage to the binary input signal >Manual start (of the
fault recorder). With the release of closure, a fault record of the parameterized duration is set up (the
default setting of 500 ms is more than adequate for this).
² Starting the synchronization stage. The device activates immediately.
² Read the fault record and determine the make time via SIGRA (see Figure 10-9).
Use the 2 cursors and the time-measuring function for this. Position the first cursor on the raising close
command. The occurrence of the 2nd voltage signals the closed power-switching poles. Place the 2nd
cursor on the raising 2nd voltage.
² Set the determined time with the CB make time parameter. Round off to the next lower adjustable
value. Proceed in the same way for all other sync stages.
² Set the parameter Close cmd. at V1< & V2> or parameter Close cmd. at V1< & V2< back to
its source value.
² Delete the CFC chart.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
[scsyn001-170510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-9 Measurement of the Circuit-Breaker Make Time
2. The configuration in Figure 10-10 is suitable for measuring the circuit-breaker operating time with an
external timer. Set the timer to the range 1 s or a tripping of 1 ms.
Connect the circuit breaker manually. The timer is started simultaneously by this. After the poles of the circuit
breaker close, the voltage VLine appears. The timer is then stopped.
If the timer is not stopped owing to an unfavorable closing moment, repeat the attempt.
Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts.
NOTE
i Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time. This exclusively depends in good
approximation on the binary output used for the close command. You can find the switching times for the
different binary outputs in the Technical data. Set the total time with the parameter CB make time.
Round off to the next lower adjustable value. Proceed in the same way for all other synchronization stages
used.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
[dwsynae6-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-10 Measurement of the Circuit-Breaker Make Time
Checking the Measurement Chain

The measurement chain for the voltage measurement must be checked. As soon as one of the synchronization
stages to be used is closed, all the necessary functional measured values are calculated. The synchronization
stage, thus, does not have to be started for this check.
Proceed as follows when checking the measurement chain as a primary or secondary test:
a) As primary test
² Establish a synchronous state by closing the circuit breaker, if possible.
² Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
– The delta values must be 0.
– Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values
for the voltage.
– Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.
b) As secondary test
² Establish a synchronous state by applying synchronous voltage values at both measuring points.
² Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
– The delta values must be 0.
– Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values
for the voltage.
– Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.
Blind Switching Attempts when Used in Machines

Perform blind switching attempts when using the function in machines.
Requirement:
² You have checked the setting values again.
² The circuit breaker is switched off. The close command for the circuit breaker is interrupted (discon-
necting the close command). The system voltage is switched through for the measurement.
a) Attempt with asynchronous systems:

² Via manual control, set the generator to a speed slightly below the permitted frequency difference
according to the setting values Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 and Max. frequency diff.
f2<f1. The generator is excited to line voltage. You can read out the values in the operational measured
values.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
² Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller. You can use a synchronoscope to trigger the start at synchronism, that is, at 12 o'clock. The
duration until the close command then corresponds to a cycle with the duration 1/Δf. At a frequency
difference of 0.1 Hz, the duration is thus 10 s.
² Insofar as permissible, perform this attempt several time for oversynchronous switching and subsynchro-
nous switching.
² The switching performance can be checked with an external recorder or the integrated fault recording
function. You have to start the fault recording explicitly.
² You can repeat the blind switching attempts at the limits of the permissible voltage difference.
b) Attempt with synchronous systems:

² Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller.
² Check the proper release for activation with the message log or via a fault record. You have to start the
fault recording explicitly. All activation conditions have to be fulfilled within the time Delay close
command.
If you observe the change between synchronous and asynchronous operation, raise the changeover
threshold f-threshold ASYN<->SYN slightly.
c) Attempt with synchrocheck:

² If you use this function in conjunction with the manual synchronization, check the proper release for
closure.
² Synchronize the generator manually. Start the synchronization stage externally via a binary input. Check
the proper release for closure with the indication log or via the fault record. You have to start the fault
recording explicitly.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.13 Testing the Negative-Sequence Current
10.13 Testing the Negative-Sequence Current

When testing, keep in mind that the measured values are standardized. In the setting I2/Irated, obj., they are
standardized to the rated current of the protected object. The conversion to secondary transformer values is
accomplished in the device.
EXAMPLE:
The threshold value is set to 10 % of the protected object.
Transformer: 100 A/1 A
Rated current of the protected object: 80 A
Action Steps
² At a setting of 10 %, the primary negative-sequence current is 80 A • 10 %/100 % = 8 A.
For a current transformer ratio of 100, test with a secondary current of 0.08 A.
² With a transformer of 100 A/5 A, the test current is higher by the factor 5. Test with 0.4 A. The pickup
value is at 1.1 • 0.4 A = 0.44 A.
² If deviations occur during the testing, you must check whether the power-system data were entered
correctly.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the function works starting from the set minimum current.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
10.14 Functional Test Protection Communication
10.14.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication
Checking the Protection-Data Communication

If the devices are connected to one another via the protection interface and switched on, they contact each
other automatically. If, for example, device 1 recognizes device 2, the successful connection is indicated (see
next figure). Accordingly, each device signals to all devices that aProtection-data communication is available.
[scprotec, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-11 Connection Establishment in DIGSI 5
Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
² Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication valid in DIGSI
5 (see Figure 10-11).
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the Status of topo recog. field shows the indication invalid (see
Figure 10-11).
In Figure 10-12 there is no protection-data communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protec-
tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. The transmission of protection data is interrupted and
differential protection is ineffective. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protection
interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Functional Tests
[scprotco-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-12 Protection-Data CommunicationDeactivated
10.14.2 Directional Test
In the case of protection interfaces of type 1 and type 2, the complex phasors of the voltage and current meas-
uring point are exchanged between devices of one communication topology in order to be able to carry out a
directional test during commissioning, for example. DIGSI 5 depicts this in the form of a phasor diagram. You
can only route the measuring point to the protection interface. For 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts, a measuring
point can therefore be transferred and checked optionally. You can also check and test the 2nd measuring
point by rerouting. Furthermore, communication with DIGSI 5 can take place via the protection interface to
other devices of the constellation. For this purpose, the protection-interface connection is interrupted and
DIGSI 5 uses this connection for communication with the remote device.
² After completing the remote connection by DIGSI 5, the system switches back over to protection commu-
nication.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
11 Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data 1039

11.2 Date and Time Synchronization 1046
11.3 Analog-Units Function Group 1047
11.4 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 1048
11.5 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 1060
11.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 1070
11.7 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Ground 1076
11.8 Inrush-Current Detection 1086
11.9 Arc Protection 1087
11.10 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 1088
11.11 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 1089
11.12 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase 1090
11.13 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Fast Stage) 1097
11.14 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 1098
11.15 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 1100
11.16 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection 1102
11.17 Undercurrent Protection 1110
11.18 Negative-Sequence Protection 1112
11.19 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase – Advanced 1116
11.20 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 1120
11.21 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage 1122
11.22 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1124
11.23 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage 1125
11.24 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 1126
11.25 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1129
11.26 Overfrequency Protection 1131
11.27 Underfrequency Protection 1132
11.28 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1133
11.29 Vector-Jump Protection 1135
11.30 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase 1136
11.31 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 1137
11.32 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1139
11.33 External Trip Initiation 1141
11.34 Automatic Reclosing 1142

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.35 Fault Locator 1143

11.36 Temperature Supervision 1144
11.37 Synchronization Function 1145
11.38 Current-Balance Supervision 1148
11.39 Voltage-Balance Supervision 1149
11.40 Current-Sum Supervision 1150
11.41 Voltage-Sum Supervision 1151
11.42 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision 1152
11.43 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision 1153
11.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision 1154
11.45 Trip-Circuit Supervision 1155
11.46 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum 1156
11.47 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection 1157
11.48 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker 1159
11.49 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 1160
11.50 Energy Values 1164
11.51 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 1165
11.52 CFC 1166

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
11.1.1 Analog Inputs
Current Inputs
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Protection-class current trans- Rated current Irated Measuring range of the non-modular
formers devices
5A 0 A to 250 A
1A 0 A to 50 A
Instrument transformers 5A 0 A to 8 A
1A 0 A to 1.6 A
Burden for rated current Approx. 0.1 VA
Thermal rating 20 A continuously
(protection and instrument trans- 25 A for 3 min
formers) 30 A for 2 min
150 A for 10 s
500 A for 1 s
Dynamic load-carrying capacity 1250 A one half wave
Voltage Input
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Input and output modules IO102, IO202, IO208, IO211, IO215
IO214
Measuring range 0 V to 200 V 0 V to 7.07 V
Burden < 0.1 VA < 0.01 VA
Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ANAI-CA-4EL)
Insulation class SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) (according to IEC 60255-27)
Connector type 8-pin terminal spring
Differential current input channels 4
Measuring range DC -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA
Fault < 0.5 % of the measuring range
Input impedance 140 Ω
Conversion principle Delta-sigma (16 bit)
Permissible potential difference DC 20 V
between channels
Galvanic separation from ground/ DC 700 V
housing
Permissible overload DC 100 mA continuously
Measured-value repetition 200 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Inputs for Optical Sensors for Arc Protection (via Module ARC-CD-3FO)
Connector type AVAGO AFBR-4526Z

Number of transceivers 3
Fiber type Polymer Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm
Receiver
Maximum -10 dBm ± 2 dBm
Minimum -40 dBm ± 2 dBm
Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm
Attenuation In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can expect a path attenuation of
0.2 dB/m. Additional attenuation comes from the plug and sensor head.
Optical budget36 Minimal 25 dB
Analog sampling rate 16 kHz
ADC type 10-bit successive approximation
Transmitter
Type LED
Wavelength λ = 650 nm
Transmitter power Minimum 0 dBm
Maximum 2 dBm
Numerical aperture 0.5 37
Signal rate connection test 1 pulse per second
Pulse duration connection test 11 μs
Temperature Inputs
Settings Value Note

Insulation class PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) –
(acc. to IEC 60255-27)
Measurement mode • Pt 100 Ω –
• Ni 100 Ω
• Ni 120 Ω
3-wire connection, shielded cables
Connector type 16-pin, 17-pin terminal spring –
Temperature measuring range -65 °C to +710 °C For PT100
-50 °C to +250 °C For NI100
-50 °C to +250 °C For NI120
36 All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.

37 Numerical aperture (NA = sin θ (launch angle))

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.1.2 Supply Voltage
Integrated Power Supply

Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to 150 V DC 88 V to DC 300 V
ranges (PS101) AC 80 V to AC 265 V,
50 Hz/60 Hz
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/ DC 110 V/ DC 125 V/
(PS101) DC 125 V DC 220 V/DC 250 V
or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Superimposed alter- ≤ 15 % of the DC auxiliary rated voltage (applies only to direct voltage)
nating, peak-to-peak,
IEC 60255-11,
IEC 61000-4-17
Inrush current ≤ 18 A
Recommended external Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C according to IEC 60898
protection
Internal fuse
– DC 24 V to DC 48 V DC 60 V to DC 125 V DC 24 V to DC 48 V
AC 100 V to AC 230 V
PS101 4 A inert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
Schurter type SPT 5x20
Power Consumption (Life Relay Active)
– DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 module 7W 16 VA 12.5 VA
Without plug-in modules
Plug-in module for base <5W < 6 VA < 6 VA
module or plug-in module
assembly (for example,
communication module)
Stored-energy time on outage or short circuit of the For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 20 ms
auxiliary voltage For V ≥ DC 60 V ≥ 50 ms
IEC 61000-4-11 For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 200 ms
IEC 61000-4-29
11.1.3 Binary Inputs
Standard Binary Input
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V

The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar, with the exception of the
binary inputs on the modules IO230, IO231, and IO233.
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 2.5 mA (independent of the control voltage)
Power consumption, max. 0.6 W
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Dropout time38 Capacitive load (supply-line capaci- Dropout time

tance)
< 5 nF < 4 ms
< 10 nF < 6 ms
< 50 nF < 10 ms
< 220 nF < 35 ms
Control voltage for all modules Adapt the binary-input threshold to be set in the device to the control
with binary inputs, except voltage.
module IO233 Range 1 for 24 V, 48 V, and 60 V Vlow ≤ DC 10 V
Control voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 19 V
Range 2 for 110 V and 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 44 V
Range 3 for 220 V and 250 V Vlow ≤ DC 88 V
Control voltage for binary inputs of Range for 125 V Vlow ≤ DC 85 V
the IO233 module Control voltage Vhigh ≥ DC 105 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
Special Binary Input with Maximized Robustness against Electrical Disturbances and Failures (IO216)
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V

The special binary inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 with maximized robustness
against electrical disturbances and failures are bipolar and available only
on the module IO216.
Rejection pulse charge > 200 µC
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 2.5 mA (independent of the control voltage)
Power consumption, max. 1.5 W at DC 242 V
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time39 Capacitive load (supply-line capaci- Dropout time
tance)
< 5 nF < 4 ms
< 10 nF < 6 ms
< 50 nF < 10 ms
< 220 nF < 35 ms
Control voltage for the module Range for 220 V and 250 V control voltage
IO216 Threshold pickup 158 V to 170 V
Threshold dropout 132 V to 154 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
38 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge
of the binary input (for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).
39 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge
of the binary input (for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.1.4 Relay Outputs
Standard Relay (Type S)
Making capacity Max. 1000 W (L/R = 40 ms)

Max. 3600 VA (power factor ≤ 0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Breaking capacity Max. 30 W (L/R = 40 ms)
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact (continuous) 5A
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact)
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms
Total permissible current for contacts connected to 5A
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 8 ms; maximum: 10 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Break time: typical: 2 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 5 A, General Purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, General Purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, General Purpose
AC 120 V, 1/6 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
contacts
Fast Relay (Type F)
Making capacity Max. 1000 W (L/R = 40 ms)

Breaking capacity Max. 30 W (L/R = 40 ms)
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact (continuous) 5A
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact)
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms
Total permissible current for contacts connected to 5A
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Make time: typical: 4 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Break time: typical: 2 ms; maximum: 5 ms
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with DC 24 V, 5 A, General Purpose
UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, General Purpose
AC 250 V, 0.5 hp
B300
R300

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V

contacts
Supervision 2-channel activation with cyclic testing (only for make
contact)
11.1.5 Design Data
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx81, 7xx82
Type of construction 1/3
Flush-mounting device 3.6 kg
Bracket for non-modular surface- 1.9 kg
mounted variant
Dimensions of the Base and 1/3 Modules
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width over all x Height over all x Depth (incl.
Current Terminal), Width and Depth Each Rounded
up to the Next Full mm (in Inches)
Flush-mounting device 150 mm x 266 mm x 229 mm
(5.91 x 10.47 x 9.02)
Plug-In Module Dimensions
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)

USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm
(2.4 x 1.77 x 4.74)
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO (without protection 61 mm x 45 mm x 132.5 mm
cover) (2.4 x 1.77 x 5.22)
ANAI-CA-4EL 61 mm x 45 mm x 119.5 mm
(2.4 x 1.77 x 4.7)
ARC-CD-3FO 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm
(2.4 x 1.77 x 4.74)
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
Pay attention to the length of the cable protection
sleeve, which you must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending radius)
Degree of Protection According to IEC 60529
For equipment in the surface-mounted housing IP5440 for front

For equipment in the flush-mounting housing IP5440 for front
For operator protection (back side) IP2x for current terminal (installed)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
Maximum operating altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
40 The provided plug-in label must be used for expansion modules with LEDs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
UL Note
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.

When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must be mounted completely inside an
enclosure.
Tightening Torques for Terminal Screws
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Terminals Screw Connection
Stranded wires with ring- 2.7 Nm No ring-type lug No ring-type lug
type lug
Stranded wires with boot- 2.7 Nm 1.0 Nm 0.6 Nm
lace ferrules or pin-type
lugs
Solid conductor, bare 2.0 Nm 1.0 Nm –
(2 mm2)
Bare stranded wire Not permitted 1 Nm 0.6 Nm
NOTE
i For current and voltage terminals, the maximum speed of the tool must not exceed 640 rpm.
NOTE
i Use copper cables only.
Torques for Other Screw Types
Screw Type Torque

M4 x 20 1.2 Nm
M4 x 8 1.2 Nm
M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 8 0.39 Nm
Collar screw, M4 x 20 0.7 Nm

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Date format DD.MM.YYYY (Europe)
MM/DD/YYYY (USA)
YYYY-MM-DD (China)
Time source 1, time source 2 None
IRIG-B 002(003)
IRIG-B 006(007)
IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to
IEEE C37.118-2005
DCF77
PI (protection interface) 41
SNTP
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
IEEE 1588
T104
Time zone 1, time zone 2 Local
UTC
Failure indication after 0 s to 3600 s
Time zone and daylight saving time Manually setting the time zones
Time zone offset with respect to GMT -720 min to 840 min
Switching over to daylight saving time Active
Inactive
Beginning of daylight saving time Input: day and time
End of daylight saving time Input: day and time
Offset daylight saving time 0 min to 120 min [steps of 15]
41 If provided

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.3 Analog-Units Function Group
11.3 Analog-Units Function Group

20-mA Unit Ether. 7XV5674-0KK00-1AA1
Max. number of connected 20-mA units 4

Max. number of channels per 20-mA unit 12
20-mA Unit Serial 7XV5674-0KK30-1AA1 (RS485) and 7XV5674-0KK40-1AA1 (Fiberglass)
Max. number of connected 20-mA units 4

Max. number of channels per 20-mA unit 12
RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200) 7XV5662-6AD10
Max. number of connected RTD units 4

Max. number of sensors per RTD unit 12
Sensor type Pt 100 to EN 60751; connection of Ni 100 and Ni 120
sensors possible. The measured values must be
converted in the evaluation unit.
RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200 IP) 7XV5662-8AD10
Max. number of connected RTD units 4

Max. number of sensors per RTD unit 12
Sensor type Pt 100 to EN 60751; connection of Ni 100 and Ni 120
sensors possible. The measured values must be
converted in the evaluation unit.
Temperature Measured Values
Unit of measurement for temperature °C or °F, adjustable

Pt 100 -199 °C to 800 °C (-326 °F to 1472 °F)
Ni 100 -54 °C to 278 °C (-65 °F to 532 °F)
Ni 120 -52 °C to 263 °C (-62 °F to 505 °F)
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Tolerance ±0.5 % of the measured value ±1 K

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Value for the Function Block Filter
h(0) -100.000 to 100.000 Increments of 0.001

Setting Values for Protection Stage
Method of measurement Fundamental component –

RMS value
Threshold value42 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Operate delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
The greater dropout differential (= | pickup value – dropout value |) of the following 2 criteria
applies:
Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overcurrent and of 105 % for undercur-
rent functionality.
Minimum absolute dropout differential
Protection-class current transformer 15 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
75 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Instrument current transformer 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
2.5 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 25 ms + OOT 43 at 50 Hz

Approx. 22 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
Extension of the operate time during operation with Approx. 10 ms
transformer inrush-current detection
Dropout time Approx. 20 ms + OOT
42 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
43 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Frequency Operating Range
0.9 ≤ f/frated ≤ 1.1 According to specified tolerances

10 Hz ≤ f < 0.9 frated Slightly expanded tolerances
1.1 frated < f ≤ 90 Hz
f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Currents, method of measurement = fundamental 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated ± 10 %)
Currents, method of measurement = RMS value, no filter applied
(33 % harmonics, in relation to fundamental component)
Up to 30th harmonic 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated ± 10 %)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3 % of the setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Currents, method of measurement = RMS value
with filter for the compensation of the amplitude attenuation due to the anti-aliasing filter
(33 % harmonics, in relation to the fundamental component)
Up to 30 harmonic 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
with filter for the gain of harmonics (including compensation of the amplitude attenuation44
Up to 30 harmonic 1.5 % of the setting value or 10 mA (Irated = 1 A)
or 50 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated ± 10 %) 45
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3% of the setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Time delays 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
44 In case that the filter response exactly matches the user-defined gain factors
45 In case that the user-defined gain factor is set below 3. The tolerance increases, if the gain factor is larger.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Influencing Variables for Thresholds
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement = < 5 %

fundamental component, for τ > 100 ms (with
complete unbalance)


RMS value
Threshold value 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout Disk emulation –
Instantaneous
Time multiplier 0.00 to 15.00 Increments of 0.01
Minimum time of the curve 0.00 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Additional time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
Dropout 95 % of 1.1 ⋅ threshold value
Reset of the Integration Timer
Instantaneous With dropout

Disk emulation Approx. < 0.90 ⋅ threshold value
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to IEC


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
[dwocpki1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-1 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Figure 11-2 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
[dwocpka1-080213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 11-3 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Figure 11-5 Tripping Characteristic Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Operate time for 2 ≤ I/I threshold value ≤ 20 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
+2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)


RMS value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Absolute pickup value 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Instantaneous
Number of value pairs for the operate curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1
X values of the operate curve 1.00 p.u. to 20.00 p.u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Y values of the operate curve 0.00 s to 999.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Number of value pairs for the dropout characteristic 2 to 30 Increments of 1
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 p.u. to 0.95 p.u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Y values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.00 s to 999.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
Dropout 95 % of 1.1 ⋅ threshold value or 95 % of the absolute
pickup value


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data


complete unbalance)
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values

RMS value
Time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 25 ms + OOT57 at 50 Hz


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
57 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
3I0 measured via I458, method of measurement = 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
fundamental component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated ± 10 %)
3I0 measured via I459, method of measurement = RMS value

complete unbalance)
Setting Values

RMS value
Instantaneous
Dropout
applies:
58 Slightly expanded tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
59 Slightly expanded tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
60 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 l
rated,sec.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC

Figure 11-7 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Figure 11-8 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
Figure 11-9 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
3I0 measured via I462, method of measurement = RMS value
61 Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Dropout time for 2 ≤ I/threshold value I ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)
Setting Values

RMS value
Absolute pickup value 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.000 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Instantaneous
X values of the operate curve 1.00 p.u. to 20.00 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 p.u. to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Dropout
applies:
Dropout 95 % of 1.1 ⋅ threshold value or 95 % of the absolute
pickup value


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
3I0 measured via I464,
method of measurement = RMS value

complete unbalance)


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to +180° Increments of 1°

Directional mode Forward –
Reverse
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Type With healthy voltages

With voltage memory 2 s
Forward range Vref,rot ±88°
Dropout differential forward/reverse range 1°
Directional sensitivity Unlimited for 1 and 2-phase short circuits
Dynamically unlimited, stationary for 3-phase short
circuits
Approx. 13 V phase-to-phase

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Times

Dropout time, typical Approx. 25 ms + OOT
Dropout time, maximum Approx. 30 ms + OOT

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Direction-determination angle error 1°

complete unbalance)
Setting Values

Backward
RMS value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Instantaneous
Dropout
applies:

Normal inverse: type A See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Very inverse: type B teristic Curve, Figure 11-1
Extremely inverse: type C See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Long-time inverse: type B teristic Curve, Figure 11-2
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI/IEEE
Inverse: type C See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-

Short inverse teristic Curve, Figure 11-3
Long inverse See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Moderately inverse teristic Curve, Figure 11-4
Very inverse See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Extremely inverse teristic Curve, Figure 11-5
Definite inverse See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
teristic Curve, Figure 11-6


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Directional sensitivity Unlimited for 1 and 2-phase short circuits

circuits
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Operate time for 2 ≤ I/threshold value I ≤ 20 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
Dropout time for I/threshold value I ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values

Reverse
RMS value
Dropout Disk emulation -
Instantaneous
Number of value pairs for the operate characteristic 2 to 30 Increments of 1
curve
X values of the operate curve 1.00 p.u. to 66.67 p.u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 p.u. to 0.95 p.u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Dropout
applies:



C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Directional sensitivity Unlimited for 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits

circuits
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Operate time for 2 ≤ I/threshold value I≤ 20 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
Dropout time for I/threshold value I ≤ 0.90 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values for the Function Direction Determination
Method for direction determination Zero sequence –

Negative sequence
Minimum V0 or V2 threshold 0.150 V to 20.000 V 0.001 V
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to 180° 1°
Forward range 0° to 180° 1°
Setting Values
Direction mode Forward –

Reverse
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
The maximum pickup time with operate delay = 0 ms Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

inrush-current detection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active with reduced sensitivity
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
(33 % part of harmonic, referring to fundamental component)
Direction-determination angle error 1º

complete unbalance)

Negative sequence
Setting Values

Reverse
RMS value
Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Instantaneous
Dropout
applies:

Normal inverse: type A Refer to the respective figure of the technical data for
Very inverse: type B the non-dir-OC-ground function 11.5.2 Stage with
Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Extremely inverse: type C
Long-time inverse: type B
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI/IEEE
Inverse: type C Refer to the respective figure of the technical data for
Short inverse the non-dir-OC-ground function 11.5.2 Stage with
Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Long inverse
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
Definite inverse
Times



C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

+ 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms

complete unbalance)


Negative sequence
Setting Values

Reverse
RMS value
Characteristic curve: see Figure 11-13
Threshold value multiplier 1.00 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Time multiplier 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s

Minimum time of the characteristic curve 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Maximum time of the characteristic curve 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
[dwloginv-300913, 3, en_US]
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Inverse-time operate time to logarithmic inverse-time 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
characteristic + 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Inverse-time dropout time to logarithmic inverse-time 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)
11.7.4 Stage with Knee-Point Characteristic Curve

Negative sequence
Setting Values

Reverse
RMS value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Knee-point time of the curve 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Knee-point value 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Current at minimum time of the curve 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
[dwdrloinkn-171013, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-14 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee-Point Characteristic (In the Example
of Threshold = 0.004 A)
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Times


f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Inverse-time operate time to logarithmic inverse time 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
with knee-point characteristic + 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Inverse-time dropout time to logarithmic inverse time 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
with knee-point characteristic + 2 % current tolerance or 30 ms

complete unbalance)

Negative sequence

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values

Reverse
RMS value
Instantaneous
X values of the operate curve 1.00 p. u. to 66.67 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p. u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 p. u. to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p. u.
Dropout
applies:

Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

f > 90 Hz
Tolerances


complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Operat.-range limit Imax 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Content 2nd harmonic 10 % to 45 % Increments of 1 %
Duration of the crossblock function 0.03 s to 200.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Pre-arcing times Approx. 29 ms
Dropout Ratios
Harmonic: I2nd harm/I1st harm 0.95
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Current measurement Imax 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA

Harmonic: I2nd harm/I1st harm 1 % of the setting value with setting values
of I2nd harm/I1st harm

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.9 Arc Protection
11.9 Arc Protection

Setting Values
Threshold I> 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Threshold 3I0>> 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
External trip initiation no
current
light
Operating mode light only
current and light
Sensor point sensor
line sensor
custom
Threshold light -28.00 dB to 0.00 dB Increments of 0.01
Channel Possible settings, application-dependent
Dropout
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup threshold – dropout threshold |) of the following
2 criteria is used:
Dropout differential derived from the Dropout ratio parameter
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies to the overcurrent protection and a dropout
ratio of 105 % applies to the undercurrent protection.
Protection-class current transformers 15 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
Instrument transformers 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
Times
Shortest operate time Approx. 2.6 ms + OOT 71

Operating mode = light only
Shortest operate time
Approx. 4.0 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Operating mode = Current and light
71 OOT (Output Operating Time): Additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relay, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time for current > 2 · √2 · threshold value Approx. 8 ms + OOT72

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Response tolerance, current 5 % of setting value or 10 mA

at Irated = 1 A
5 % of setting value or 50 mA
at Irated = 5 A
72 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of

0.01 s
Tolerances
Times < 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values

RMS value
Dropout ratio (fixed) 0.95 –
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times

Dropout time Approx. 20 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
74 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances


complete unbalance)
Setting Values

RMS value
Instantaneous
Dropout
applies:


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC

The operate curves and dropout characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the Technical Data
chapter under Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection.
Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE

The operate curves and dropout characteristic curves according to ANSI/IEEE can be found in the Technical
Data chapter under Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection.

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances


complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value multiplier 1.00 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
[dw_ocp 1phase logarithmic, 1, en_US]
Dropout
applies:

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

rent functionality.
Times


f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Inverse-time operate time to logarithmic inverse-time 5 % of the reference (calculated) value
Inverse-time dropout time to logarithmic inverse-time 5 % of the reference (calculated) value

complete unbalance)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values

RMS value
Instantaneous
X values of the operate curve 1.00 p.u. to 66.67 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 p.u. to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Dropout
applies:


f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances


complete unbalance)


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.13 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Fast Stage)
11.13 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Fast Stage)

Setting Values

Dropout ratio (fixed) 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 8 ms + OOT76


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Pickup tolerance, current 5 % of the setting value or 10 mA (Irated = 1 A)

or 50 mA (Irated = 5 A)
76 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional time delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold For current transformer type protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
value 3I0> and Irated = 1 A
interm.
For current transformer type protection 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
and Irated = 5 A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive and For I
ph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
IN-rated = 1 A
IN-rated = 5 A
Number of pickups until intermittent ground fault 2 to 10 Increments of 1
Pickup extension time 0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Sum of extended pickup times 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times


f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents -3I0 via protection-class current transformers:

1 % of setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
-3I0 via sensitive current transformer:
1 % of setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A)
or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A)
Times 1 % of the setting value or ± 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold For current transformer type 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

value 3I0> protection and Irated = 1 A
For current transformer type 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
protection and Irated = 5 A
IN-rated = 1 A
IN-rated = 5 A
Number of pulses until intermit- 2 to 10 Increments of 1
tent ground fault
Pickup extension time 0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Sum of extended pickup times 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Number of pulses for operate 2 to 100 Increments of 1
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Pickup time Approx. 30 ms + OOT78 at 50 Hz


f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents 3I0 via protection-class current transformers:

1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
3I0 via sensitive current transformer:
1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A)
or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A)
Times 1 % of the setting value or ± 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.16.1 General
Setting Values
Decay time V0 0.03 s to 0.20 s Increments of 0.01 s

Core balance Protection-class For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to Increments of 0.001 A
current transformer current trans- 35.000 A
current 1 formers For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Core balance
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to Increments of 0.001 A
current transformer
type sensitive 35.000 A
current 2
and IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to Increments of 0.001 A
175.000 A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive 35.000 A
and IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to Increments of 0.001 A
175.000 A
Core balance current transformer angle correction F1 0.0° to 5.0° Increments of 0.1°
Core balance current transformer angle correction F2
Times
Pickup times Approx. 25 ms + OOT79 at 50 Hz

Dropout times Approx. 25 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

10 Hz ≤ f < 0.9 frated Slightly expanded tolerances 80
f < 10 Hz Active with less sensitivity 81
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Currents -3I0 via sensitive current transformer:

1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A)
or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A, frated ± 10 %)
-3I0 via protection-class current transformers:
1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A, frated ± 10 %)
Voltages 1 % of the setting value or 0.05 V
Times 1 % of the setting value or ±10 ms
80 Transient ground-fault stage is inactive
81 Transient ground-fault stage is inactive

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Direction-calculation angle error82 ≤ 1° at 3I0 > 5 mA, V0 = 0.6 V

≤ 2° at 3I0 ≤ 5 mA, V0 = 0.6 V
11.16.2 Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
Setting Values
Direction method of measurement cos φ –

sin φ
Threshold value Protection-class For Iph-rated = 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
3I0> current trans- 1A
Minimum direc- formers
For Iph-rated = 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
tional 3I0> for
5A
direction determi-
nation For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 0.001 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive 1A
and IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 0.005 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive 1A
and IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 0.005 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5A
Threshold value V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Time delay of the direction determination 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
α1 constraint of the direction range 1° to 15° Increments of 1°
α2 constraint of the direction range
Angle correction φ -45° to 45° Increments of 1°
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overcurrent/overvoltage and of 105 % for
undercurrent/undervoltage functionality.
Voltage transformer 150 mV sec.
82 Not applicable to 11.16.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Times

11.16.3 Directional Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Setting Values
3I0> threshold Protection-class For Iph-rated = 0.000 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

value current transformers 1 A
3I0> threshold For Iph-rated = 0.00 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
for operate
5A
Sensitive current IN-rated = 1 A 0.000 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
transformer for IN
IN-rated = 5 A 0.000 A to 8.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Maximum operational V0 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Dropout
applies:
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.16.4 Directional 3I0 Stage with φ(V0,3I0) Measurement
Setting Values
Threshold value Protection-class For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

3I0> current transformers
For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
For IN transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
sensitive For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and IN-rated = 1 A
For IN transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
sensitive For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and IN-rated = 5 A
Min. V0> for direction determination 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Time delay of the direction determination 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180° to 180° Increments of 1°
Forward range +/- 0° to 180° Increments of 1°
Dropout
applies:
Times

Extension of operate time during operation with Approx. 10 ms
Tolerances
Direction-calculation angle error ≤ 1° at 3I0 ≥ 10 mA, V0 = 0.6 V

≤ 2° at 2 mA < 3I0 < 10 mA, V0 = 0.6 V
≤ 3° at 3I0 ≤ 2 mA, V0 = 0.6 V

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.16.5 Directional Y0 Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement (Admittance)
Setting Values
Direction method of measurement B0 –

G0
Release Protection-class For Iph-rated = 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Threshold current transformers 1 A
value 3I0> For Iph-rated = 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
5A
type sensitive and 1A
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5A
type sensitive and 1A
5A
Threshold value Y0> 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS Increments of 0.01 mS
Time delay of direction determination 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
α1 constraint of direction range 1° to 15° Increments of 1°
α2 constraint of direction range
Angle correction φ -45° to 45° Increments of 1°
Dropout
applies:
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
Admittance 1 % of the setting value or 0.05 mS (Irated = 1.6 A) or

0.25 mS (Irated = 8 A), (frated ± 10 %)
11.16.6 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Setting Values
Threshold value87 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

V< faulty ph-gnd vltg. 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V> healthy ph-gnd. vltg. 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Dropout
applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for the overvoltage and of 105 % for the
undervoltage functionality.
Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec.
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms

Standard filter, true RMS Approx. 25 ms + OOT88 at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters Approx. 45 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Dropout time
Standard filter, true RMS Approx. 20 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters Approx. 31.06 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Tolerances
Voltages 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V

87 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.16.7 Non-Directional 3I0 Stage
Setting Values
Method of Measurement Fundamental component

RMS value
Threshold Protection-class For Iph-rated = 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
value 3I0> current transformers 1 A
For Iph-rated = 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
5A
For transformer type For Iph-rated = 0.001 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
I-sensitive and 1A
5A
For transformer type For Iph-rated = 0.005 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
I-sensitive and 1A
5A
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times

11.16.8 Non-Directional Y0 Stage
Setting Values
V0> threshold value 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold Y0> 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS Increments of 0.01 mS

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Dropout
applies:
Times

Current Operating Range
Minimum 3I0 threshold Protection-class current 30 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A)

for Y0 calculation transformers
Sensitive current trans- 1 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A)
former
Tolerances
Admittance 1 % of the setting value or 0.05 mS (Irated = 1.6 A) or

0.25 mS (Irated = 8 A), (frated ± 10 %)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value I< 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time Approx. 25 ms + OOT91 at 50 Hz


f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
91 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter Relay
Outputs

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents, method of measurement = fundamental 1 % of setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

(33 % portion harmonic, referring to fundamental component)
Up to 30th harmonic 1 % of setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3 % of setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 60 Hz 4 % of setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Setting Values
Reference value for I2 (Iref) Rated object current Irated, obj.

Positive-sequence current I1
Pickup value 5.0 % to 999.9 % l2/lref Increments of 0.1
Release current (minimum 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
current release) 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Maximum phase current 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
(maximum current 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
limiting)
Dropout
applies:
• Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio
• Dropout differential of 3 % of the object rated current
Times

Current range At least one phase current ≥ setting value Irelease

All phase currents ≤ setting value Iph, max

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
Pickup value
I2/Irated, obj Approx. 2 % of the setting value
or 0.8 % of the absolute value
I2/I1 Approx. 2 % of the setting value
or 4 % of the absolute value (I1 > 50 mA
(Irated = 1 A) or 250 mA (Irated = 5 A))
Setting Values
Reference value for I2 (Iref) Rated object current Irated,obj.

Positive-sequence current I1
Pickup value 5.0 % to 999.9 % l2/lref Increments of 0.1
Dropout Disk emulation
Instantaneous
Release current (minimum 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
current release) 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Maximum phase current 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
(maximum current 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
limiting)
Dropout
applies:
• Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio
• Dropout differential of 3 % of the object rated current
Times

Dropout Ratio
Disk emulation Approx. 0.90 ⋅ threshold value

Instantaneous Approx. 1.05 ⋅ threshold value
Approx. 0.95 ⋅ pickup value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Operate and Dropout Characteristic Curves

You can select from the following operate and dropout characteristic curves:
Table 11-1 Standard Characteristic Curves to IEC
Normal inverse: type A See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Very inverse: type B teristic Curve, Figure 11-1
Extremely inverse: type C See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Long-time inverse: type B teristic Curve, Figure 11-2
Table 11-2 Standard Characteristic Curves to ANSI
Inverse: type C See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-

Short inverse teristic Curve, Figure 11-3
Long inverse See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Moderately inverse teristic Curve, Figure 11-4
Very inverse See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
Extremely inverse teristic Curve, Figure 11-5
Definite inverse See chapter 11.4.2 Stage with Inverse-Time Charac-
teristic Curve, Figure 11-6
Extension of the Operating Time

Current range At least one phase current ≥ setting value Irelease

All phase currents ≤ setting value Iph, max

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Reference value = rated current

Pickup value Approx. 2 % of the setting value or
0.8 % of the absolute value
Operate time for 2 ≤ I/I threshold value ≤ 20 5 % of the setting value or
+ 2 % of the current tolerance or 30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value ≤ 0.90 5 % of the setting value or
+ 2 % of the current tolerance or 30 ms
Reference value = pos. seq. current
Pickup value Approx. 2 % of the setting value
or 4 % of the absolute value
(I1 > 50 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 250 mA (Irated = 5 A))

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.19 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase – Advanced


Setting Values/Increments for the Protection Stage
Threshold current 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

warning 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Threshold thermal warn. 50 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Dropout threshold operate 50 % to 99 % Increments of 1 %
Emerg. start T overtravel 0 s to 15 000 s Increments of 10 s
K-factor acc. to IEC 60225-149 0.10 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
Thermal time constant 10 s to 60 000 s Increments of 1 s
Cooling time constant 10 s to 60 000 s Increments of 1 s
Imax thermal 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Imin cooling 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Temperature rise at Irated 40 K to 200 K Increments of 1 K
Default temperature -55°C to 55°C Increments of 1°C
Minimal temperature -55°C to 40°C Increments of 1°C
Dropout Ratios
Tripping threshold (fixed at 100 %) Dropout if value drops below operate indication
dropout threshold
Thermal warning threshold About 0.99 of the setting value
Current warning threshold About 0.95 of the setting value
Frequency Range of the Input Signals

The function captures input signals up to the 50th harmonic.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances
No filter applied
With reference to k ⋅ Irated Up to 30th harmonic 2 % or 10 mA ( Irated = 1 A)
or 50 mA ( Irated = 5 A),
2 % class acc. to IEC 60255-149
Up to 50th harmonic, 4 % or 20 mA ( Irated = 1 A)
frated = 50 Hz or 100 mA ( Irated = 5 A),
With the filter for compensation of the amplitude attenuation due to the anti-aliasing filter
With the filter for gain of harmonics including compensation of the amplitude attenuation94
2 % class acc. to IEC 60255-14995
4 % class acc. to IEC 60255-14996
5 % class acc. to IEC 60255-14996
With reference to the Up to 30th harmonic 3 % or 1 s for I/(k ⋅ Irated) > 1.25,
operate time 3 % class acc. to IEC 60255-149
94 In case that the filter response exactly matches the user-defined gain factor.
95 In case that the user-defined gain factor is set below 3. The tolerance is increased if the gain factor is larger.
96 In case that the user-defined gain factor is set below 7. The tolerance is increased if the gain factor is larger.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Operate Curve
Operate curve
Where t Operate time

τth Time constant
I Current load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or
IEC 60255-149 (K factor)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
[dwauslke-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-16 Operate Curve of Overload Protection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values for the Function
Stabilization counter 0 to 10 Increments of 1
Setting Values for Stage Type Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection
Measured value Phase-to-phase

Phase-to-ground
Method of measurement Fundamental component
RMS value
Pickup mode 1 out of 3
3 out of 3
Pickup value97 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Setting Values for Stage Type Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Pickup mode 1 out of 3
3 out of 3
Pickup value 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Pickup factor 1.00 to 1.20 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant k 0.00 to 300.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant α 0.010 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Characteristic constant c 0.000 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Operate Curve for Stage Type Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection
Where
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
Dropout
applies:
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms, typical Approx. 25 ms + OOT98 at 50 Hz

Operate time with time delay = 0 ms, maximum Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances for Stage Type Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection

Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection

Operate time for 5 % of the setting value or 30 ms
1.2 ≤ V/V threshold value ≤ 20
Reset time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.21 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual

Voltage
Setting Values
Method of measurement RMS value

Fundamental component
Fundamental component
over 2 cycle filters
Block. on measuring-voltage outage Yes
No
Determ. ph. aff. by grd. flt. Yes
No
V< faulty ph-gnd vltg. 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V> healthy ph-gnd. vltg. 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Dropout
applies:
Times

Standard filter, true RMS, typical Approx. 25 ms + OOT100 at 50 Hz
Standard filter, true RMS, maximum Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters, typical Approx. 40 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters, maximum Approx. 45 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Dropout time
Standard filter, true RMS, typical Approx. 20 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Standard filter, true RMS, maximum Approx. 25 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters, typical Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
2 cycle filters, maximum Approx. 35 ms + OOT at 50 Hz


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup value 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Measuring window 1 cycle to 10 cycles Increments of 1 cycle
Setting Values
Pickup value of V2 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout
applies:
Times
Pickup times 55 ms to 210 ms + OOT 102

(depends on the measuring-window length) at 50 Hz
48 ms to 185 ms + OOT
(depends on the measuring-window length) at 60 Hz
Dropout time 20 ms to 70 ms + OOT
(depends on the measuring-window length)

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances

Time delays 1.00 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Stabilization counter 0 to 10 Increments of 1
Setting Values for Stage Type Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Current-flow criterion On
Off
Threshold value I> 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Setting Values for Stage Type Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Off
Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Pickup factor 0.80 to 1.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant k 0.00 to 300.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant α 0.010 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Characteristic constant c 0.000 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Operate Curve
Top=TInv+Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
103 If you have selected the Method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)
[fo_UVP3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Inactive, maintained;
f > 90 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by
increasing the measurand beyond the dropout
threshold

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances for Stage Type Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection

Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 25 mA
(Irated = 5 A, frated ± 10 %), valid for protection-class
current transformers
1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A) or
0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A, frated ± 10 %), valid for instrument
transformers
Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection

Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 25 mA
(Irated = 5 A, frated ± 10 %), valid for protection-class
current transformers
0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A, frated ± 10 %), valid for instrument
transformers
Operate time for 0 < V/VThresh < 0.9 5 % of the setting value or 30 ms
Reset time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Off
Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Inactive, maintained;
f > 90 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by
increasing the measurand beyond the dropout
threshold

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Tolerances

Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or
25 mA (Irated = 5 A, frated ± 10 %),
valid for protection-class current transformers
0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A, frated ± 10 %),
valid for instrument transformers

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup values f> 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz

Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2 000 mHz Increments of 10 mHz
Time delay T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Times
Pickup times f> Angle difference method

50 Hz Approx. 70 ms + OOT106
60 Hz Approx. 60 ms + OOT
Filtering method
Dropout times f> 60 ms to 80 ms
Dropout
Frequency Parameterizable dropout differential

Minimum voltage
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup value – dropout threshold |) of the following
2 criteria is used:
Dropout differential derived from Dropout ratio 105 % for the Minimum voltage parameter
Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV secondary
Operating Ranges
Voltage range 5 V to 230 V (phase-phase)

Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 90 Hz
Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz
Tolerances
Frequency f>
frated - 0.20 Hz < f < frated + 0.20 Hz ± 5 mHz at V = Vrated
Time delay T(f>) 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Minimum voltage 1 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
106 OOT (Output Operating Time): Additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup values f< 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz

Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2 000 mHz Increments of 10 mHz
Time delay T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Pickup times f< Angle difference method

50 Hz Approx. 70 ms + OOT107
Filtering method
Dropout times f< 60 ms to 80 ms
Dropout

Minimum voltage
2 criteria is used:
Operating Ranges
Voltage range 5 V to 230 V (phase-phase)

Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 90 Hz
Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz
Tolerances
Frequency f<
Time delay T(f<) 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data


Measuring window 2 periods to 5 periods Increments of 1 period
Setting Values for Stage Types
Threshold 0.100 Hz/s to 20.000 Hz/s Increments of 0.025 Hz/s

Dropout differential 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s Increments of 0.01 Hz/s
Dropout

Minimum voltage
2 criteria is used:
Times
Pickup time Approx. 160 ms + OOT108 to 220 ms + OOT (depends on measuring

window length)
at 50 Hz
Approx. 140 ms + OOT to 200 ms + OOT (depends on measuring
window length)
at 60 Hz
Dropout time Approx. 160 ms + OOT to 220 ms + OOT (depends on measuring
window length)
at 50 Hz
Approx. 140 ms + OOT to 200 ms + OOT (depends on measuring
window length)
at 60 Hz

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold, Approx. 3 % or 0.060 Hz/s

measuring window > 3 periods
Threshold, Approx. 5 % or 0.060 Hz/s
measuring window ≤ 3 periods

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold V1 min 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold V1 max 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Threshold Δφ 2.0° to 30.0° Increments of 0.1°
T Reset 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
T Block 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
I< Threshold 0.030 A to 35.000 A at 1 A Increments of 0.001 A
0.150 A to 175.000 A at 5 A
Times
Pickup times Approx. 80 ms + OOT 109at 50 Hz

Dropout times Approx. 80 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
frated - 3 Hz ≤ f or frated ≤ frated + 3 Hz According to specified tolerances

f < frated - 3 Hz or f > frated + 3 Hz Inactive
Tolerances
Angle jump 0.5° at V > 0.5 Vrated

Voltage blocking 1 % of the setting value or 0.500 V
Undercurrent release For Irated = 1 A: 1 % of the setting value or 10 mA
For Irated = 5 A: 1 % of the setting value or 50 mA
Time delay T 1 % or 10 ms
109 OOT (Output Operating Time): additional delay of the output medium used. You can find more information in chapter 11.1.4 Relay
Outputs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Measured value Positive sequence power

Power of phase A
Power of phase B
Power of phase C
Threshold value -200.0 % to +200.0 % Increments of 0.1
Tilt-power characteristic -89.0° to +89.0° Increments of 0.1°
Dropout delay time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout ratio Upper stage: 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Lower stage: 1.01 to 1.10 Increments of 0.01
Times
Pickup times Approx. 55 ms + OOT110 at 50 Hz

Dropout times Approx. 55 ms + OOT at 50-Hz
Tolerances
Power 0.5 % Srated ± 3 % of setting value

(Srated: rated apparent power)
Variables That Influence Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in the range 0.8 ≤ Vaux./ ≤1%

Vaux.,rated ≤ 1.15
Frequency in the range 0.95 ≤ f/frated ≤ 1.05 ≤1%
Harmonics
≤1%
- Up to 10 % of 3rd harmonics
≤1%
- Up to 10 % of 5th harmonics

10 Hz < f < 0.9 frated Slightly expanded tolerances
1.1 frated < f
f ≤ 10 Hz Inactive

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value Power Q 1.00 % to 200.00 % Increments of 0.01 %

Voltage of protection 3.000 to 175.000 Increments of 0.001 V
stage
Voltage of reclosure 3.000 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
stage
Current I1 release threshold 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Release time delay of reclosure stage 0.00 s to 3600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Protection stage
Reactive-power flow Q Approx. 0.95
Voltage Approx. 1.02
Release current Approx. 0.95
Reclosure stage
Voltage Approx. 0.98
Release current Approx. 0.95
Times

Tolerances
Current I1 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

Voltage 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V
Power Q 0.5 % Srated ± 3 % of the setting value
(Srated: rated apparent power)
Reclosure time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Starting Conditions
For circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole tripping internal or external112
Setting Values
Phase-current threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

values 1 A @ 50 Irated
5 A @ 50 Irated
Sensitive threshold value 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
1 A @ 50 Irated
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00A Increments of 0.01 A
5 A @ 50 Irated
Supervision time of release signal 0.00 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Time delays T1 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Time delays T2 0.050 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Supervision times of binary inputs 0.05 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
The greater dropout differential (= | pickup threshold – dropout threshold |) of the following 2
criteria applies:
Dropout differential 95 % of the pickup value
Protection-class current transformer 15 mA sec. (Irated= 1 A) or
Instrument current transformer 0.5 mA sec. (Irated= 1 A) or
Circuit-Breaker Supervision
Position supervision via circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts

For 3-pole CB tripping 1 input each for make contact and break contact
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker failure protection can also work without the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts stated.
Auxiliary contacts are required for circuit-breaker failure protection in cases where the current flow is
absent or too low for tripping (for example with a transformer or a Buchholz protection).
112 Via binary inputs

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Times
Pickup time, in the case of an internal start < 1 ms

Pickup time, in the case of an external start < 5 ms
Typical dropout time < 15 ms
Dropout time, via circuit-breaker auxiliary contact < 5 ms
criterion113

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold values, dropout thresholds 2 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
113 The use of the transformer connection types 2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep result in slightly increased tolerances

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.33 External Trip Initiation
11.33 External Trip Initiation

Setting Values
Times

Approx. 10 ms + OOT 114.
- At initiation via binary input signal
Tolerance
Sequence tolerance for delay times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
114 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.34 Automatic Reclosing
11.34 Automatic Reclosing

Function specifications Cyclic automatic reclosing function
Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function
Number of reclosings Max. 8, per individual settings
Type (depending on the order 1-pole, 3-pole, or 1-/3-pole
variation)
Operating mode of the automatic With trip command, without action time
reclosing function With trip command, with action time
With pickup, without action time
With pickup, with action time
Reclaim time after reclosing 0.50 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Blocking time after dynamic 0.5 s -
blocking
Blocking time after manual closure 0.00 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Start supervision time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Circuit-breaker supervision time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Evolving-fault detection With trip command
With Pickup
Reaction to evolving faults Blocks Automatic reclosing function
Start, evolving fault, dead time
Action times (separated for all 0.00 s to 300.00 s or oo (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
cycles) tive)
Dead times after trip command 0.00 s to 1 800.00 s or oo (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
(separated for all types and all tive)
cycles)
Dead time after evolving-fault 0.00 s to 1 800.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
detection (separated for all cycles)
Synchrocheck after 3-pole dead None
time Internal
External
Transmission delay, inter close 0.00 s to 300.00 s or oo (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
command tive)
Dead-line check/reduced dead time Without
Reduced dead time (VWE)
Dead line checking
Voltage supervision warning time 0.10 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Limiting value for fault-free line 0.3 V to 340.0 V Increments of 0.1 V
Limiting value for zero potential 0.3 V to 340.0 V Increments of 0.1 V

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.35 Fault Locator
11.35 Fault Locator

Setting Values
Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
The residual compensation factors in the setting format Kr and Kx or K0 and angle (K0)
Consideration of the load current for 1-pole ground Correction of the X value, for connection and discon-
faults nection
Fault Distance
Output of the fault distance (line length) In Ω primary and secondary

In km, miles or in percent. 115
Tolerances
Measuring tolerances during sinusoidal measurands 1.5 % from fault location at VK/Vrated ≥ 0.01 and one of
and error duration the following scenarios:
> 25 ms at 60 Hz or
> 30 ms at 50 Hz
• Metal fault
• Non-metallic fault for one-side infeed without
load
115 The output of the fault distance in km, miles and percent presupposes a homogenous line.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup value -50 °C to 250 °C Increments of 1°C

-58 °F to 482 °F Increments of 1°F
Time delay 0 s to 60 s Increments of 1 s
or ∞
Dropout Conditions
Dropout differential 3 °C or 6 °F
Tolerances
Tripping delay ±1 % of the setting value or ±10 ms

Measured temperature value ±0.5 % of the setting value or ±1 °C or ±2 °F

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Operating Modes
Synchrocheck
Switching synchronous systems
Switching asynchronous systems
Switching synchronous/asynchronous systems with balancing commands
De-energized switching
Direct closing command
Balancing Voltage
Balancing Frequency
Setting Values
Supervision/Delay/Pulse times:
Max.durat. sync.process 0.00 s to 3 600.00 s or ∞ (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
tive)
Supervision time de-energized 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
switching
Closure delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
T V pulse min/T f pulse min 0.01 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
T V pulse max/T f pulse max 0.01 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
T pause V/T pause f 0.01 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
T close without balancing 1.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Voltage threshold values:
Upper voltage limit Vmax 0.300 V to 340.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
phase)
Lower voltage limit Vmin 0.300 V to 340.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
phase)
V<, for off-circuit conditions 0.300 V to 170.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
V>, for voltage present phase) Increments of 0.001 V
0.300 V to 340.000 V (phase-to-
phase)
Differential values, changeover thresholds asynchronous/synchronous/balancing/adjusting commands:
Voltage differences 0.000 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V2 > V1; V2 < V1
Frequency difference f2 > f1; 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz (synchro- Increments of 0.001 Hz
f2 < f1 nous)
0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz (asynchro-
nous)
Angle difference α2 > α1; α2 < α1 0o to 90o Increments of 1o
Δf threshold ASYN <-> SYN 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz Increments of 0.001 Hz
Δf set point for balancing -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz
Δf for the kick pulse -1.00 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz
Adjustments of the sides:
Angle adjustment 0.0o to 360.0o Increments of 0.1o
Voltage adjustment 0.500 to 2.000 Increments of 0.001
Circuit breaker
Closing time of the circuit breaker 0.01 s to 0.60 s Increments of 0.01 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Dropout Ratio
Min./max. operating limit 1 % of the setting value

Voltage differential 10 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
De-energized/energized 5 % of the setting value
Frequency difference 3 mHz
Angle difference 0.1o
Measured Values of the Synchronization Function
Reference voltage V1 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vrated

Display always as phase-to-phase voltage
• Range 10 % to 120 % of Vrated
• Tolerance at rated frequency ≤ 1 % of the measured value or 0.5 % Vrated

Voltage to be synchronized V2 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vrated
Display always as phase-to-phase voltage
• Range 10 % to 120 % of Vrated
• Tolerance at rated frequency ≤ 1 % of the measured value or 0.5 % Vrated

Frequency of the voltage V1f1 f1 in Hz
25 Hz ≤ f ≤ 70 Hz
• Range
1 mHz
• Tolerance at rated frequency
Frequency of the voltage V1f2 f2 in Hz
25 Hz ≤ f ≤ 70 Hz
• Range
1 mHz
Voltage difference V2-V1 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vrated
Display always as phase-to-phase voltage in relation
to side 1
10 % to 120 % of Vrated
• Range
≤ 1 % of the measured value or 0.5 % Vrated
Frequency difference f2-f1 In mHz
frated ± 10 %
• Range
1 mHz
Angle difference λ2-λ1 In o
• Range -180o to +180o
0.5o
Times
Measuring time, after switching on the variables Approx. 80 ms
Operating Range
Voltage 20 V to 340 V
Frequency frated - 4 Hz ≤ frated ≤ frated + 4 Hz
Tolerances
Tolerances of the voltage settings 2 % of the pickup value or 1 V

Voltage difference V2>V1; V2<V1 1V

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Frequency difference f2>f1; f2<f1 10 mHz

Angle difference α2>α1; α2<α1 1o
Pulse time 1 % of the calculated impulse or
10 ms
Tolerance of all time settings 10 ms
Max. phase displacement angle 5o for Δf ≤ 1 Hz
10o for Δf > 1 Hz

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.38 Current-Balance Supervision
11.38 Current-Balance Supervision

Setting Values
Release threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

1 A @ 50 Irated
5 A @ 50 Irated
Threshold min/max 0.10 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Delay failure indication 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Overcurrent dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undercurrent dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times
Tripping time Approx. 500 ms

Dropout time Approx. 500 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.39 Voltage-Balance Supervision
11.39 Voltage-Balance Supervision

Setting Values
Release threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold min/max 0.58 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Dropout Ratio
Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.40 Current-Sum Supervision
11.40 Current-Sum Supervision

Setting Values
Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01

Threshold 1 A @ 50 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and100 Irated
5 A @ 50 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments 0.01 A
and100 Irated
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.41 Voltage-Sum Supervision
11.41 Voltage-Sum Supervision

Setting Values
Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.97
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.42 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
11.42 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

Setting Values

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.43 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
11.43 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

Setting Values

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Times


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
11.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision

Times
Alarm times Approx. 3 ms to 12 ms + OOT 116at 50 Hz

Approx. 2.5 ms to 10 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
Dropout time 20 ms
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 90 Hz According to specified tolerances

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Pickup threshold
Voltage 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V
116 OOT (Output Operating Time): extra delay of the output medium used

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.45 Trip-Circuit Supervision
11.45 Trip-Circuit Supervision

Setting Values
Number of monitored circuits per circuit-breaker function group 1 to 3

Operating mode per circuit With 1 binary input
With 2 binary inputs
Pickup and dropout time About 1 s to 2 s
Adjustable indication delay with 1 binary input 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Adjustable indication delay with 2 binary inputs 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.46 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum
11.46 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum

Times
Pickup times Approx. 2 ms (faster than the fastest protection function)

Blockings
Blocked functions All functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection).

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.47 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

Setting Values
3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < 0.300 V to 340 000 V Increments of 0.001 V

3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release 1 A @ 50 and100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5 A @ 50 and100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump 1 A @ 50 and100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5 A @ 50 and100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Asym.fail. - time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
SO 3ph.fail. - time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
The larger dropout differential (= | pickup value – dropout threshold |) of the following 2 criteria
is used:
Dropout differential derived from the Dropout ratio parameter
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies to the overvoltage protection and a dropout
ratio of 105 % applies to the undervoltage protection.
Times

Times
Use in function group Line

Use in other function group types


117 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
118 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
119 OOT (Output Operating Time) Additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
f < 10 Hz Active
f > 90 Hz
Tolerances
Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)


C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.48 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker
11.48 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

Setting Values
Response time 0.000 s to 0.030 s Increments of 0.001 s

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.49 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values

The following applies to the tolerances of currents and voltages:
• The values apply both to the RMS values and the absolute value and phase angle of the fundamental
components.
• The values were determined for pure sinusoidal signals – without harmonics.
• All measured values have an additional tolerance of 1 DIGIT.
Voltages
VA, VB, VC V secondary

Voltage range < 200 V secondary
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range (0.1 to 2) · Vrated
Frequency range 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance 0.2 % of the measured value in the above-mentioned
measuring range
Frequency range (expanded) 45 Hz to 55 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
measuring range
VAB, VBC, VCA V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range (0.1 to 2) · Vrated
measuring range
measuring range
Currents, Instrument Transformers
IA, IB, IC, 3I0 A secondary

Current range < 1.6 Irated
Rated currents 1 A, 5 A
Measuring range (0.1 to 1.6) · Irated
measuring range

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

measuring range
Currents, Protection-Class Current Transformer
IA, IB, IC, 3I0 A secondary

Current range < 50 Irated
Measuring range (0.1 to 5) · Irated
measuring range
measuring range
Currents, Sensitive Ground-Current Transformer
3I0 A secondary
Current range < 1.6 Irated
Measuring range (0.1 to 1.6) · Irated
measuring range
measuring range
Phase Angle
ΦV °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦV 0.2° at rated voltage
ΦI °
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance ΦI 0.2° at rated current

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
Power Values
Active power P W secondary

Voltage range (0.8 to 1.2) · Vrated
Current range (0.1 to 2) · Irated
measuring range
measuring range
Reactive power Q var secondary
measuring range
measuring range
Apparent power S VA secondary
Measuring range (0.01 to 2) · Srated
Frequency range
measuring range
measuring range
Power Factor
Measuring range |cosφ| ≥ 0.01

measuring range

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

measuring range
Frequency
Frequency f Hz
Range frated - 0.20 Hz ≤ f ≤ frated + 0.20 Hz
Tolerance ± 2 mHz at V = Vrated or at I = Irated
Range frated - 3.00 Hz ≤ f < frated + 3.00 Hz
Range 25 Hz to 80 Hz; operational measured values
10 Hz to 90 Hz; functional measured values, system
frequency
Statistical Values of the Device
Device operating hours h

Range 0 to 9999999 h
Tolerance 1h
Statistical Values of the Circuit Breaker
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None
∑I Off (sum of the primary currents switched off) A, kA, MA, GA, TA, PA primary
Range 0 to 9.2e+15
Operating hours h
Tolerance 1h
Circuit breaker open hours h
Tolerance 1h
Statistical Values of the Disconnector
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.50 Energy Values
11.50 Energy Values

Setting Values
Active energy Wp kWh, MWh, GWh

Measuring range |cosφ| ≥ 0.01
Tolerance 0.3 % of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring
range
50 Hz to 70 Hz at frted = 60 Hz
range
Reactive energy Wq kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh

Measuring range |cosφ| ≤ 0,984
range
range

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value ΣIx-method stage 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1

2P-method stage 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1
I2t-method stage 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21 400 000.00 I/Ir*s Increments of 0.01
CB opening time 0.001 s to 0.500 s Increments of 0.001 s
CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s Increments of 0.001 s
CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s Increments of 0.001 s
Exponent for the ΣIx method 1.0 to 3.0 Increments of 0.1
Switching cycles at Irated 100 to 1 000 000 Increments of 1
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc 10 to 100 000 Increments of 1
Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 Increments of 1
Level of warning 1 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Level of warning 2 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Operating 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
current threshold 5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Delay correction time -0.050 s to 0.050 s Increments of 0.001 s
Tolerances
Tolerance of the measured value make time ± 2 ms

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.52 CFC
11.52 CFC
Typical response times and maximum number of ticks of the CFC task levels:
Task Level Time (in ms) Ticks for Non- Ticks for Modular Ticks for Modular
Modular Devices Devices with CP200 Devices with CP300
with CP100
Fast Event- <1 500 500 1000
Triggered
Event-Triggered <10 12 367 12 757 14 702
Interlocking <10 117 564 in total 121 537 in total 141 398 in total
Measurement 250
The times describe the response time of a typical CFC chart at the respective task level. The maximum number
of ticks applies to a typical load for the device based on the application template Directional overcurrent
protection, grounded system. The maximum number can be lower in case of extensive protection applica-
tions.
The task level Measurement runs in cycles every 500 ms. All other task levels are event-triggered.
In order to estimate the tick consumption of a CFC chart, you can use the following formula:
TChart = 5 ∙ nInp + 5 ∙ nOutp + TTLev + ∑i Tint + ∑j TBlock
where:
nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart
nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart
TTLev 101 Ticks in Fast Event-Triggered level
104 Ticks in Event-Triggered level
54 Ticks in Measurement level
74 Ticks in Interlocking level
Tint Number of internal connections between 2 CFC blocks in one chart
TBlock Used ticks per CFC block (see Table 11-3)
Table 11-3 Ticks of the Individual CFC Blocks
Element Ticks
ABS_D 2.3
ABS_R 1.5
ACOS_R 6.9
ADD_D4 3.4
ADD_R4 3.3
ADD_XMV 6.4
ALARM 1.8
AND_SPS 1.1
AND10 2.9
APC_DEF 1.2
APC_EXE 1.0
APC_INFO 3.9
ASIN_R 1.3
ATAN_R 1.2
BLINK 1.3
BOOL_CNT 2.0
BOOL_INT 1.5

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.52 CFC
Element Ticks
BSC_DEF 1.3
BSC_EXE 1.1
BSC_INFO 2.7
BUILD_ACD 2.9
BUILD_ACT 2.2
BUILD_BSC 1.2
BUILD_CMV 2.3
BUILD_DEL 2.1
BUILD_DPS 1.4
BUILD_ENS 1.3
BUILD_INS 0.5
BUILD_Q 0.8
BUILD_SPS 0.6
BUILD_WYE 3.2
BUILD_XMV 2.9
BUILDC_Q 3.0
CHART_STATE 5.9
CMP_DPS 1.5
CON_ACD 0.7
CON_ACT 0.5
CONNECT 0.4
COS_R 2.5
CTD 1.8
CTU 1.6
CTUD 2.3
DINT_REAL 3.0
DINT_UINT 3.0
DIV_D 2.9
DIV_R 1.6
DIV_XMV 2.2
DPC_DEF 0.4
DPC_EXE 0.4
DPC_INFO 1.1
DPC_OUT 1.3
DPS_SPS 1.0
DRAGI_R 1.7
ENC_DEF 3.6
ENC_EXE 3.8
EQ_D 1.0
EQ_R 1.9
EXP_R 1.5
EXPT_R 2.7
F_TRGM 0.3
F_TRIG 0.3
FF_D 0.9
FF_D_MEM 1.4
FF_RS 0.7

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.52 CFC
Element Ticks
FF_RS_MEM 1.2
FF_SR 0.8
FF_SR_MEM 1.1
GE_D 0.9
GE_R 1.1
GT_D 0.9
GT_R 1.2
HOLD_D 1.1
HOLD_R 1.0
INC_INFO 0.9
LE_D 1.1
LE_R 1.1
LIML_R 1.5
LIMU_R 1.5
LN_R 3.3
LOG_R 1.2
LOOP 1.5
LT_D 0.9
LT_R 0.9
MAX_D 0.9
MAX_R 1.4
MEMORY_D 0.9
MEMORY_R 1.1
MIN_D 0.7
MIN_R 1.3
MOD_D 1.5
MUL_D4 2.5
MUL_R4 2.7
MUL_XMV 2.8
MUX_D 1.2
MUX_R 0.9
NAND10 3.5
NE_D 0.9
NE_R 0.9
NEG 1.2
NEG_SPS 0.8
NL_LZ 3.8
NL_MV 5.6
NL_ZP 2.7
NOR10 3.2
OR_DYN 1.1
OR_SPS 1.3
OR10 2.6
R_TRGM 0.4
R_TRIG 0.4
REAL_DINT 3.0
REAL_SXMV 3.0

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Technical Data
11.52 CFC
Element Ticks
SIN_R 0.8
SPC_DEF 0.4
SPC_EXE 0.4
SPC_INFO 0.4
SPC_OUT 0.4
SPLIT_ACD 3.4
SPLIT_ACT 1.0
SPLIT_BSC 1.3
SPLIT_CMV 2.2
SPLIT_DEL 2.0
SPLIT_DPS 1.0
SPLIT_INS 0.5
SPLIT_Q 0.7
SPLIT_SPS 0.8
SPLIT_WYE 2.6
SPLIT_XMV 2.1
SQRT_R 0.6
SUB_D 1.3
SUB_R 1.6
SUB_XMV 2.4
SUBST_B 1.0
SUBST_BQ 1.5
SUBST_D 1.0
SUBST_R 1.0
SUBST_XQ 1.4
SXMV_REAL 3.0
TAN_R 1.1
TLONG 2.2
TOF 1.0
TON 1.1
TP 2.5
TSHORT 1.9
UINT_DINT 3.0
XOR2 2.6

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
A Appendix
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options 1172

A.2 Ordering Accessories 1173
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 1175
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SJ81 1178
A.5 Current Transformer Requirements 1182
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1185
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices 1192
A.8 Prerouting 7SJ81 1196

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options

Order Configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5 products. The order configurator is a Web
application that can be used with any browser. The order configurator can be used to configure complete
devices or individual components, such as communication modules, expansion modules, or other accessories.
At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a detailed presentation of the configuration
result are provided. The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an
order number.
Ordering Options
The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products:
• Device
• Single part
• DIGSI 5
• Functional enhancement
NOTE
i To order single parts in the order configurator, use the Single part link.
Individual parts are:
• Expansion module
• Plug-in module
• Sensors for arc protection
• Operation panel
• Terminal
• Accessories

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.2 Ordering Accessories
NOTE
i To order terminals, terminal accessories, and mechanical accessories in the order configurator, use the
Single part link.
Table A-1 Accessories
Group Accessories
Terminal Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole
Terminal Voltage input (power supply)
Terminal block, 2-pole120
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x protection
(for modular devices)
Terminal Type A current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x measurement
Terminal Type B current terminal, 4 x protection
(for non-modular devices)
Terminal Type B current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
(for non-modular devices)
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for current terminal
Terminal Terminals for IO110, IO112, IO113120
Terminal Terminals and shielding for IO111120,121,122
Terminal Terminal kit only for IO23x120 only
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal
Terminal Cover for current terminal block
Terminal Cover for voltage terminal block
Terminal Transport safety, current terminal
Terminal Transport safety, voltage terminal
Terminal Terminals for low-voltage applications
Terminal 8 x voltage terminal, 14-pole
Terminal 2 x voltage terminal, 2-pole
Accessories USB covers (10 pieces each for CP 100, 200, 300)
Accessories Cable, integrated operation panel, 0.43 m
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 2.50 m
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 5.00 m
Accessories Cable set, COM link cable
Accessories Cover plate for plug-in modules
Accessories Set of angle rails
Accessories 10 x labeling strip, LEDs/function keys
Accessories 5 x labeling strips, push-buttons
Accessories Set of parts, mounting bracket 1/2
120 Recommended tightening torque when screwing down the terminal on the rear plate: 0.3 Nm
121 The set consists of terminals and shielding for the IO111 for the terminal positions M and N.
122 Only for non-modular devices 7xx82

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
Group Accessories
Accessories 4 x screw cover 1/3, type C11
Accessories 2 x bus termination plate
Accessories Assembly frame for panel surface mounting for non-modular
devices 7xx81 and 7xx82 devices
Accessories SDHC memory card for 7KE85
Accessories 10 x battery holder
Accessories Connecting cable for 2nd row
Accessories DIGSI 5 USB cable 2.0
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 3 m
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 3 m
Sensors for arc protection Supply line for line sensors, length 3 m

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following typefaces are used to characterize parameters in the text:
Mode Parameter name
_:661:1 Parameter address
_ stands for the address combination from function
group:function
661, for example, stands for the address of the
setting parameter
from Parameter state
The following symbols are used in drawings:

Icon Description
Parameter
Parameters with setting values

The default setting is in the 1st position and displayed
in italics
Parameters with application-dependent setting values
Dynamic settings:
State logic
Health of a function, stage, or function block
External binary input signal with indication number
External output signal with indication number and

additional information
External output signal without indication number
Measured output value

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
Icon Description
Binary input signal derived from an external output
signal
Internal input signal
Internal output signal
Analog input signal
Reset/Block a logic element
AND gate
OR gate
XOR gate
Negation
Threshold stage exceeded
Threshold stage exceeded with

reset of input
Threshold stage shortfall
Threshold stage shortfall with

reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input

Dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input
Comparators
Pickup delay
Dropout delay
Pickup and dropout delay

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
Icon Description
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a positive signal
edge
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal

edge
SR-Flip-Flop, RS-Flip-Flop, D-Flip-Flop
Characteristic curve
Minimum operate time

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SJ81
[dw_standardvariant_7SJ81_1, 1, en_US]
Figure A-1 Standard Variant Type AI1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.5 Current Transformer Requirements

The requirements for phase current transformers are usually determined by the overcurrent protection, partic-
ularly by the high-current element settings. Besides, there is a minimum requirement based on experience.
The recommendations are given according to the standard IEC 60044-1.
The standards IEC 60044-6, BS 3938 and ANSI/IEEE C 57.13 are referred to for converting the requirement into
the knee-point voltage and other transformer classes.
Accuracy Limiting Factors
Table A-2 Effective and Rated Accuracy Limiting Factor
Required minimum effective accu-

racy limiting factor
but at least 20
with
KALF' Minimum effective accuracy limiting factor
I>>PU Primary pickup value of the high-current
element
Irated,prim Primary rated transformer current
Resulting rated accuracy limiting
factor
with
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
RBC Connected burden (device and cables)
RBN Rated burden
RCt Internal burden
Table A-3 Calculation Example According to IEC 60044–1
Irated,sec = 1 A
KALF' = 20
RBC = 0.6 Ω (device and cables)
KALF set to 10,
RCt = 3 Ω
so that: 5P10, 5 VA
RBN = 5 Ω (5 VA)
with
Irated,sec = Secondary rated transformer current
Class Conversion
Table A-4 Conversion into Other Classes
British Standard BS 3938
ANSI/IEEE C 57.13, class C
Irated,sec = 5 A (typical value)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
IEC 60044-6 (transient response),

class TPS
K≈ 1
KSSC≈ KALF
Classes TPX, TPY, TPZ
You can find a calculation example in the above section Accuracy
Limiting Factors with: KSSC≈ KALF
TP depending on power system and specified closing sequence
with
Vk Knee-point voltage
RCt Internal burden
RBN Rated burden
Irated,sec Secondary rated transformer current
KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
Vs.t.max Secondary terminal voltage at 20 Irated,prim
Val Secondary magnetization limit voltage
K Dimensioning factor
KSSC Factor symmetric rated fault current
TP Primary time constant
Cable Core Balance Current Transformer

The requirements to the cable core balance current transformer are determined by the function Sensitive
ground-fault detection.
The recommendations are given according to the standards IEC 60044-1 and IEC 61869-2.
Table A-5 Requirements to the cable core balance current transformer according to IEC 60044-1 and
IEC 61869-2
Transformation ratio, typical 60 / 1

It may be necessary to select a different transforma-
tion ratio to suit the specific power system and thus
the corresponding amount of the maximum ground
fault current.
Accuracy limiting factor FS = 10
Power 1 to 4 times the connected burden (device input plus
infeeds)
Notes concerning the power:
The burden of the sensitive ground-current input is very low (0.05 VA or 0.1 VA). Thus, an underburden of
more than factor 4 is probable. In this case, clarify the suitability of the class accuracy concerning an impor-
tant underburden with the transformer manufacturer. If necessary, request the accuracy for the range from 0
VA to the rated burden. This specification is then outside the standard, but in practice, it is possible in most
cases.
(Relevant standard: IEC 61869-2, Chapter 5.6.201.4 Extended burden range. There, the range 1 VA to rated
burden is specified for rated burdens smaller than 15 VA.)
Table A-6 Minimum Required Class Accuracy Depending on Neutral Grounding and Function Operating
Principle
Neutral Point Isolated Resonant-Grounded High-Resistance

Grounded
Function directional Class 1 Class 1 Class 1

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
Function non-directional Class 3 Class 1 Class 3
NOTE
i The class accuracy according to IEC 61869-2 below 5% Irated (< 50 mA secondary) is not defined in general.
For very sensitive directional measurements, Siemens recommends the classes 0.5S or 0.1S that define the
class accuracy via an extended current range (up to 1% Irated) (see chapter 5.6.201.5, IEC 61869-2).
Another possibility is to correct the phase-angle error of the transformer on the device, if this error is
known (see function description Sensitive ground-fault detection.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[ti3leit1-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure A-5 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers (Zero-Sequence Current to be Calculated)
Figure A-6 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Conductor)
NOTE
i The switchover of the current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction
of electric current for current input I4 (IN)!

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
Figure A-7 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection
NOTE
of electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
Figure A-8 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Measured Ground Current from a Complete
Holmgreen Connection

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
NOTE
Figure A-9 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and a Measured Ground Current via the Neutral-
Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer
Figure A-10 Connection to a 2 Phase Current Transformers – for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Only

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
tive Ground-Fault Detection – for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems Only
NOTE
Figure A-12 Connection to 3 Phase Current Transformers and an Additional Current Transformer in the
Neutral Point of a Grounded Power Transformer

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
[tileit10-260313-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure A-13 Current Transformer Connection for High-Impedance Differential Protection (for Example, a
Power Transformer, in Preparation)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
[tileit14-260313-10.tif, 4, en_US]
tive Ground-Fault Detection of the Line and Additional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection via
the Neutral-Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer
NOTE

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
[ti_leite_15, 1, en_US]
Figure A-15 Connection to 2 Phase Current Transformers and an Additional Cable Type Current Trans-
former for Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection via a Sensitive Input (I4) and an Input of Normal
Sensitivity (I2; IN2 and IN)
NOTE
of electric current for current inputs I2 and I4 (IN-sep)!

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular

Devices
[tvvolta1-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-16 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers
Figure A-17 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding of a
Separate Voltage Transformer (for Example, Busbar)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
Figure A-18 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a
Busbar Voltage Transformer (for Example, for Synchrocheck Applications)
[tvvol2ll82-260313-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure A-19 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Measurement of 2 Phase-to-Phase Voltages)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
[tvl2lluu82-260313-01.vsd, 1, en_US]

and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
[tvvolta5SJ82-260313-01.vsd, 2, en_US]

and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer (for Example,
for Synchrocheck Applications)
[tvvolta7SJ82-260313-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure A-22 Connection to a 1-Pole Insulated Voltage Transformer (Phase-to-Ground Voltage)

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
A.8 Prerouting 7SJ81

Meaning of the abbreviations in DIGSI, see 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
Binary Inputs
Table A-7 Default Binary Inputs for Overcurrent Protection
Binary Signal Number Signal Type Configura-

Input tion
BI1 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 201.4261.58 DPC OH
BI2 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 201.4261.58 DPC CH
BI3 Disconnector 1:Circuit break.:Position 601.5401.58 DPC OH
BI4 Disconnector 1:Circuit break.:Position 601.5401.58 DPC CH
Binary Outputs
Table A-8 Default Output Relays for Overcurrent Protection
Binary Signal Number Signal Type Configura-

Output tion
BO1 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip/open 201.4261.300 SPS U
cmd.
BO2 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Close 201.4261.301 SPS X
command
BO3 Disconnector 1:Disconnector:Open 601.5401.300 SPS X
command
BO4 Disconnector 1:Disconnector:Close 601.5401.301 SPS X
command
command
command
command
command
Light-Emitting Diodes
Table A-9 Default LED Displays for Overcurrent Protection
LEDs Signal Number Signal Type Configura-

tion
LED1 VI 3ph 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs A SPS NT
LED2 VI 3ph 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs B SPS NT
LED3 VI 3ph 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs C SPS NT
LED4 VI 3ph 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs gnd SPS NT

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Appendix
LEDs Signal Number Signal Type Configura-

tion
LED5 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip/ 201.4261.300 SPS L
open cmd.
LED11 Alarm handling:Group warning 5971.301 SPS U
LED12 Device:Process mode inactive SPS U
General:Functions in Test mode 91.329 SPS U

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
ACD
IEC 61850 data type: Directional protection activation information
ACK
Data transfer acknowledgment
ACT
IEC 61850 data type: Protection activation information
APC
Controllable analog set point information
ASDU
ASDU stands for Application Service Data Unit. An ASDU can consist of one or more identical information
objects. A sequence of the same information elements, for example measured values, is identified by the
address of the information object. The address of the information object defines the associated address of the
first information element of the sequence. A consecutive number identifies the subsequent information
elements. The number builds on this address in integral increments (+1).
BAC
Binary Controlled Analog Process Value
Back-up battery
The back-up battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, times and counters are kept retentive.
Bay controller
Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protection functions.
BCR
IEC 61850 data type: Binary Counter Reading
Best master clock algorithm

A PTP network contains communicating clocks. With the best master clock algorithm (BMC), the device indi-
cating the most precise time is determined. This device is used as a reference clock and is designated as grand-
master. If the network topology is changed, the BMC algorithm is executed again on network segments that
are possibly disconnected from the grandmaster. If a participating device is a master and a slave, it is called a
boundary clock.
Big-endian
Big-endian and little-endian describe the order in which a sequence of bytes is stored. In big-endian systems,
the most significant byte is stored at the lowest storage address. In little-endian systems, the most significant
byte is stored at the highest storage address.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Binary Controlled Analog Process Value

The data type BAC represents a command with or without feedback. The BAC is used for example for the
control of an arc suppression coil. The commands Higher, Lower, and Stop are possible. The feedback from
the process is an analog value.
Binary Controlled Step Position

The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up, down
can be given.
Bit pattern indication

A bit pattern indication is a processing function, with the help of which adjacent numerical process informa-
tion can be logged coherently and processed further in parallel via multiple inputs. The bit pattern indication
can be selected as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BMC
Best Master Clock Algorithm
Boundary clock
The Precision Time Protocol knows different types of clocks: an ordinary clock (abbreviation: OC), a boundary
clock (BC), and a transparent clock (TC). The boundary clock transports time information over a network limit,
for example, in a router connecting different switched networks: As a slave, the clock of the router receives
the time information and transmits this further on as a master.
BRCB
Buffered Report Control Block
BSC
Binary Controlled Step Position
Buffered Report Control Block

Buffered Report Control Block (BRCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports or saving of events for the transfer. Data values cannot therefore be lost on account of
transport flow control conditions or connection interruptions. BRCB provides the functionality SOE (see
Sequence of Events).
CB
Circuit breaker
CDC
Common Data Class
CFC
Continuous Function Chart
Chatter blocking
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, owing to a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a parameteriz-
able monitoring time and therefore cannot generate any more signal changes. The function prevents the
system from overloading in the event of an error.
CID
Configured IED Description

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
CMV
Complex measured value
Combination device
Combination devices are bay units with protection functions and with feeder mimic diagram.
Common Data Class

Generic term for a data class according the IEC 61850 model.
Communication branch
A communication branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n participants communicating via a joint
bus.
Configured IED Description

A Configured IED Description (CID) is a file for data exchange between the IED Configuration Tool and the IED
itself.
Container
If an object contains other objects, this is referred to as a container. The object Folder is an example of such a
container.
Continuous Function Chart

The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) is a programming language. It is used for programmable logic control-
lers. The programming language Continuous Function Chart is not defined in the standard IEC 61131-3, but
represents a current extension of IEC programming environments. CFC is a graphic programming language.
Function blocks are linked to one another. This represents an essential difference from conventional program-
ming languages, where sequences of commands are entered.
Control display
The control display becomes visible for devices with a large display after pressing the Control key. The diagram
contains the switching devices to be controlled in the feeder. The control display serves for implementing
switching operations. Specification of this diagram forms part of configuring.
Controllable Integer Status

The data type INC can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information
routing) that is monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Controller
The controller initiates the IO data communication.
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
Data type
The data type is a value set of a data object, together with the operations allowed on this value set. A data
type contains a classification of a data element, such as the determination whether it consists of integers,
letters, or similar.
Data unit
Information item with a joint transmission source. Abbreviation: DU – Data Unit

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Data window
The right area of the project window visualizes the content of the area selected in the navigation window. The
data window contains for example, indications or measured values of the information lists or the function
selection for parameterization of the device.
DCF
Device Configuration File
DCF77
The precise official time is determined in Germany by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt PTB in Bruns-
wick. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter in Main-
flingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1500 km from
Frankfurt/Main.
DCP
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol
DDD
DIGSI 5 Device Driver – SIPROTEC 5 device driver which must be loaded in DIGSI.
DEL
Phase-to-phase related measurements of a 3-phase system
Device 5 Export Format

DEX5
DEX5
Device 5 Export Format
You can archive the data from an individual SIPROTEC 5 device in DEX5 format.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIGDNP
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for DNP3
File extension for a file generated by DIGSI for exporting the protocol configuration from DIGSI 5.
DIGMOD
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for Modbus TCP
DIGSI
Configuration software for SIPROTEC
DIGSI 5 Display Pages

You can archive individual or all display pages of a SIPROTEC 5 device in DSP5 format. You can also use this
format to exchange display pages between SIPROTEC 5 devices. The DSP5 format is based on XML.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for DNP3

If the DNP3 protocol is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in DIGDNP
format. The DIGDNP format is specially designed to transmit interface data from DIGSI 5 into the SICAM PAS
substation automation system.
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for IEC 60870-5-103

If the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in
DIGT103 format. The DIGT103 format is specially designed to transmit interface data from DIGSI 5 into the
SICAM PAS substation automation system.

If the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in
DIGT104 format. The DIGT104 format is specially designed to transmit interface data from DIGSI 5 into the
DIGSI 5 protocol settings for Modbus TCP

If the Modbus TCP protocol is configured for a system interface, you can export the protocol settings in
DIGMOD format. The DIGMOD format is specially designed to transmit interface data from DIGSI 5 into the
DIGSI 5 Test Sequences

You can archive individual or all test sequences of a SIPROTEC 5 device in SEQ5 format. You can also use this
format to exchange test sequences between SIPROTEC 5 devices. The SEQ5 format is based on XML.
DIGT103
DIGT104
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol

The DCP protocol is used to detect devices without IP addresses and to assign addresses to these devices.
DNP3
DNP3 is a communications standard for telecontrol engineering. DNP3 is used as a general transmission
protocol between control systems and substations and between bay devices and the systems control.
Double command
Double commands (DPC – Double Point Control) are process outputs which visualize 4 process states at 2
outputs: 2 defined states (for example, On/Off) and 2 undefined states (for example, disturbed positions).
Double-point indication
Double commands (DPS – Double Point Status) are process indications which visualize 4 process states at 2
inputs: 3 defined states (for example, On/Off and disturbed position) and 1 undefined state (00).
DPC
IEC 61850 data type: Double Point Control

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
DPS
IEC 61850 data type: Double Point Status
Drag and drop

Copying, moving, and linking function, used in graphic user interfaces. The mouse is used to highlight and
hold objects and then move them from one data area to another.
DSP5
DIGSI 5 Display Pages
DU
Data Unit
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

In order to configure PCs automatically, centralized and uniformly in a TCP/IP network, a dynamic assignment
of IP addresses is used. DHCP is used. The system administrator determines how the IP addresses are to be
assigned and specifies the time lapse over which they are assigned. DHCP is defined in the Internet standards
RFC 2131 (03/97) and RFC 2241 (11/97).
For SIPROTEC 5, a device can also be assigned an IP address via DIGSI via DHCP.
ELCAD
Electrical CAD
Electrical CAD
You can import the topology information contained in an ELCAD file into a project and use it as the basis for a
single-line configuration. The other information contained in the ELCAD file is not included in this process.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means that an item of electrical equipment functions without error in a
specified environment. The environment is not influenced in any impermissible way here.
ENC
Enumerated Status Controllable
ENS
Enumerated Status
ESD protection
The ESD protection is the entirety of all means and measures for the protection of electrostatic-sensitive
devices.
Far End Fault Indication

Far End Fault Indication (FEFI) is a special setting of switches. It is always only possible to log a line interrup-
tion on the receive line. If a line interruption is detected, the link status of the line is changed. The status
change leads to deletion of the MAC address assigned to the port in the switch. However, outage of the
receive line from the aspect of the switch can only be detected in the receiver, that is, by the switch. The
receiver then immediately blocks the transmit line and signals the connection failure to the other device. The
FEFI setting in the switch triggers detection of the error on the receive line of the switch.
FEFI
Far End Fault Indication

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
FG
Function group
Fleeting indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
Floating
Floating means that a free potential not connected to ground is generated. Therefore no current flows
through the body to ground in the event of touching.
Folder
This object type helps when structuring a project hierarchically.
Function group
Functions are brought together into function groups (FG). The assignment of functions to current and/or
voltage transformers (assignment of functions to measuring points), the information exchange between the
function groups via interfaces as well as the generation of group indications are important for this bringing
together.
General interrogation
The state of all process inputs, of the status, and of the error image are scanned on system startup. This infor-
mation is used to update the system-side process image. Likewise, the current process state can be interro-
gated after data loss with a general interrogation (GI).
General Station Description Mark-up Language

GSDML is an XML-based description language for creating a GSD file.
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE. Protocol of IEC 61850 for communication between bay units.
GI
General Interrogation
GIN
Generic Identification Number
GOOSE
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to 0 at every point. In the area of grounding
conductors, the ground can have a potential diverging from 0. The term reference ground is also used for
this situation.
Grounding
The grounding is the entirety of all means and measuring for grounding.
GSDML
General Station Description Mark-up Language

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Hierarchy level
In a structure with superordinate and subordinate objects, a hierarchy level is a level of equal-ranking objects.
High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol

Like PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) is specified in
IEC 62439-3. Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time.
The principal function can be found in the definition of PRP. With PRP, the same indication is sent via 2 sepa-
rated networks. In contrast to this, in the case of HSR the indication is sent twice in the 2 directions of the ring.
The recipient receives it correspondingly via 2 paths in the ring, takes the 1st message and discards the 2nd
(see PRP).
Whereas NO indications are forwarded in the end device in the case of PRP, a switch function is installed in the
HSR node. Thus, the HSR node forwards indication in the ring that are not directed at it.
In order to avoid circular messages in the ring, corresponding mechanisms are defined in the case of HSR.
SAN (Single Attached Node) end devices can only be connected with the aid of a REDBOX in the case of HSR.
PRP systems and HSR systems can be coupled redundantly with 2 REDBOXES.
HMI
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
HSR
High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
HV bay description
The HV project description file contains data concerning which bays are present within a ModPara project. The
actual bay information is saved for each bay in an HV bay description file. Within the HV project description
file, each bay receives an HV bay description file through a reference to the file name.
HV project description
If the configuring and parameterization of PCUs and submodules is completed with ModPara, all the data will
be exported. The data is distributed to several files during this process. A file contains data on the basic project
structure. This typically includes information on which bays are present within this project. This file is desig-
nated as an HV project description file.
ICD
IED Capability Description
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission - International electrotechnical standardization body
IEC 60870-5-103
International standard protocol for communication with IEDs (especially protective equipment). Many protec-
tive relays, bay devices, bay controllers and measurement acquisition devices use the IEC 60870-5-103
protocol to communicate with the SICAM system.
IEC 60870-5-104
Internationally standardized telecontrol protocol. Transmission protocol based on IEC 60870-5-101 for the
connection of the substation control level to the telecontrol center using TCP/IP via a Wide Area Network
(WAN) connection.
IEC 60870-5-104 is also used for the communication with IEDs.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 is an international standard for consistent communication in substations. This standard defines the
communication amongst devices in substations and the related system requirements. All substation automa-
tion functions as well as engineering functions are supported. IEC 61850 can also be transferred to automa-
tion systems in other applications, for example, for the control and monitoring of distributed power genera-
tion.
IEC address
A unique IEC address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within an IEC bus. A total of 254 IEC
addresses per IEC bus are available.
IEC communication branch

Within an IEC communication branch, the participants communicate on the basis of the protocol IEC
60870-5-103 via an IEC bus.
IED Capability Description

Data exchange from the IED configuration software (DIGSI) to the system configurator. This file describes the
performance properties of an IED.
IEEE 1588
Time-synchronization protocol according to IEEE Std 1588-2008: Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for
Networked Measurement and Control Systems (IEEE 1588 v2) and IEEE Std C37.238-2011: IEEE Standard
Profile for Use of IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol in Power System Applications (Power Profile).
IID
Instantiated IED Description
INC
Controllable Integer Status
Input data/input direction

Data is sent from the protocol slave to the protocol master.
INS
Integer Status
Instantiated IED Description

Files in IID format are ICD files adapted for the concrete application in the project. This format is mainly suit-
able for exchanging data between DIGSI 5 and an external system configurator or also a substation automa-
tion system such as SICAM PAS. The ICD format uses SCL as the description language for this purpose.
International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC
Internet Protocol
An Internet protocol (IP) enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks.
IO
Input-Output

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
IO Provider Status
The provider (sender) of an IO data element uses this to signal the status (good/bad with error location).
IOPS
IO Provider Status
IP
Internet Protocol
IPv4
Internet-Protocol Version 4
ISC
Integer Step Controlled Position Information
LAN
Local Area Network
Link address
The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol supplies the basis for topology detection and for determination of the
configuration.
List view
The right area of the project window displays the names and symbols of the objects which are within a
container selected in the tree view. As the visualization is in the form of a list, this area is also referred to as list
view.
LLDP
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Local Area Network

A Local Area Network (LAN) is a regional, local PC network. The PCs are all equipped with a network interface
card and work with one another via data exchange. The LAN requires an operating system on each PC and
standardized data transport software. The operating systems can be different, as can the data transport soft-
ware, but both must support a common transmission protocol (= TCP/IP protocols), so that all PCs can
exchange data with one another.
LSB
Least Significant Bit
MAC address
The MAC address (Media Access Control) is the hardware address of each single system adaptor. With the MAC
address, the device can be identified unambiguously in the system.
Management Information Base

A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database which saves information and statistics concerning each
device in a network continuously. The performance of each device can be monitored with this information and

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
statistics. In this way, it can also be ensured that all devices in the network function properly. MIBs are used
with SNMP.
Manufacturing Message Specification

The standard Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) serves for data exchange. The standard is used for
the transmission protocols IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-6 TASE.2.
Measured Value
This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function, used to determine the total number of discrete similar events
(counting pulses), for example, as integral over a time span. In the power supply utility field, electrical energy
is often recorded as a metered value (energy import/delivery, energy transport).
MIB
Management Information Base
MICS
Model Implementation Conformance Statement
MMS
Manufacturing Message Specification
Modbus
The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol. It is based on a Master/Slave or Client/Server architecture.
Model Implementation Conformance Statement

Model Implementation Conformance Statement (see MICS)
The Model Implementation Conformance Statement describes in detail the standard data object models that
are supported by the system or by the device.
Module
Self-contained unit at the device level. This can be a real module or a functional unit of the device.
MSB
Most Significant Bit
MV
Data type Measured Value
NACK
Negative acknowledgment
Navigation window
Left area of the project window, which visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the
form of a hierarchical tree structure.
Object
Each element of a project structure is designated as an object in DIGSI 5.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Object property
Each object has properties. These can on the one hand be general properties that are common to several
objects. Otherwise, an object can also have object-specific properties.
Offline
If there is no communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is offline. The PC program executes in
Offline mode.
Online
If there is a communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is online. The PC program executes in
Online mode.
Optical Switch Module

An Optical Switch Module (OSM) is a process for switching over switches in Ethernet networks that are ring-
shaped in structure. OSM is a proprietary process from Siemens, which later became standard under the term
MRP. OSM is integrated in the optical Ethernet module EN100-O. OSM is hardly used in IEC 61850 networks.
RSTP is used there, this having become established as an international standard.
OSM
Optical Switch Module
Output data/output direction

Data is sent from the protocol master to the protocol slave.
Parallel Redundancy Protocol

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in IEC
62439-3. Unlike conventional redundancy procedures, such as RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE
802.1D-2004), PRP offers uninterruptible switching, which avoids any down time in the event of a fault, and
thus the highest availability.
PRP is based on the following approach: The redundancy procedure is generated in the end device itself. The
principle is simple: The redundant end device has 2 Ethernet interfaces with the same address (DAN, Double
Attached Node). Now, the same indication is sent twice, in the case of PRP (parallel) to 2 separate networks,
and uniquely marks both with a sequence number. The recipient takes the information that it receives first,
stores its ID based on the source address and the sequence number in a duplicate filter and thus recognizes
the 2nd, redundant information. This redundant information is then discarded. If the 1st indication is missing,
the 2nd indication with the same content comes via the other network. This redundancy avoids a switching
procedure in the network and is thus interruption-free. The end device forwards no messages to the other
network. Since the process is realized in the Ethernet layer (same MAC address), it is transparent and usable
for all Ethernet payload protocols (IEC 61850, DNP, other TCP/IP based protocols). In addition, it is possible to
use one of the 2 networks for the transmission of non-redundant messages.
There are 2 versions of PRP: PRP-0 and its successor PRP-1. Siemens implements PRP-1.
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. You can parameterize the protection functions with
DIGSI 5 or sometimes also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the entirety of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC device.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Participant address
A participant address consists of the name of the participant, the international dialing code, the local dialing
code and the participant-specific telephone number.
PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PLC
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, German Process and Fieldbus standard (EN 50170). The standard specifies the functional,
electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial fieldbus.
PROFIBUS address
A unique PROFIBUS address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within a PROFIBUS network. A total of
254 PROFIBUS addresses per PROFIBUS network are available.
Profile_ID
A Profile_ID in combination with an API uniquely identifies the access and the behavior of an application.
PROFINET IO
PROFINET is an open Industrial Ethernet Standard from PROFIBUS for the automation.
Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers, enabling user-specific func-
tionality in the form of a program. This logic component can be programmed by various methods: CFC (=
Continuous Function Chart) is one of these. SFC (Sequential Function Chart) and ST (Structured Text) are
others.

Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the
control unit. The construction and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control.
The programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer; it consists of CPU with memory, installa-
tion/extension groups (for example, DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply (PS) and racPrk (with bus system). The
peripherals and programming language are oriented towards the circumstances of the control system.
Programmable Logic Module

Modules are parts of the user program delimited by their function, structure and intended use.
Project
In terms of content, a project is the replication of a real energy supply system. In graphic terms, a project is
represented as a number of objects which are incorporated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project
consists of a series of directories and files containing project data.
Project tree
The Project tree is used to display a data structure. This data structure represents the content of the project
and is created by a Generic Browser.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Protection communication
Protection communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection interface.
Protection communication is created automatically during configuration of communication channels.
Protection device
A protection device detects erroneous states in distribution networks, taking into account various criteria, such
as error distance, error direction or fault direction, triggering a disconnection of the defective network section.
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

The performance properties of the system to be tested are summarized in the report on the conformity of
implementation of a protocol (PICS = Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement).
PRP
Parallel Redundancy Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a standardized redundancy process with a short response time. In
the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP protocol), structuring times in the multidigit second range apply in the case of
a reorganization of the network structure. These times are reduced to several 100 milliseconds for RSTP.
Real Time
Real time
RedBox
Reduncancy box
The RedBox is used for the redundant connection of devices with only one interface to both the LAN A and the
LAN B PRP network. The RedBox is a DAN (Double Attached Node) and operates as a proxy for the devices
connected to it (VDANs). The RedBox has its own IP address in order to be able to configure, manage, and
monitor it.
Relay Information by OMICRON

Files in RIO format can be used to exchange data between test systems from the OMICRON company and any
other project-protection planning system. With DIGSI 5, you can export different settings from protection
functions in RIO format, which the OMICRON test equipment 7VP15 can then continue to process. The rele-
vant settings are described in the Test equipment manual.
RIO
Data format Relay Information by OMICRON
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SAN
Single Attached Node
A SAN is a non-redundant node in the PRP network. It is only connected with one port to one network (LAN A
or LAN B). It can only communicate with nodes in the connected network. Via a RedBox, devices with only one
connection can be redundantly connected to the 2 LAN A and LAN B networks. In order to obtain symmetrical
LAN A and LAN B networks, Siemens recommends avoiding SANs and to connect the devices either via a
RedBox or in a separate network without PRP support.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
SBO
Select before operate
SC
Single command
SCD
Ssubstation Configuration Description
SCL
Substation Configuration Description Language
SED
System Exchange Description
SEQ
Data type Sequence
SEQ5
DIGSI 5 Test Sequences
Sequence of Events
Acronym: SOE. An ordered, time-stamped log of status changes at binary inputs (also referred to as state
inputs). SOE is used to restore or analyze the performance, or an electrical power system itself, over a certain
period of time.
Service interface
Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 (for example, through a modem)
SICAM SAS
Substation Automation System – Modularly structured station control system, based on the substation
controller SICAM SC and the SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system.
SICAM WinCC
The operator control and monitoring system SICAM WinCC graphically displays the state of your network.
SICAM WinCC visualizes alarms and messages, archives the network data, provides the option of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employees.
SIM
Simulation data format for single/multiple devices
Simple Network Management Protocol

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet standard protocol and serves for the admin-
istration of nodes in an IP network.
Simple Network Time Protocol

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a protocol for the synchronization of clocks via the Internet. With
SNTP, client computers can synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a time server.

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
Simulation data format for single/multiple devices

You can export the simulation-related files of a SIPROTEC 5 device in the SIM format. This new functionality in
DIGSI 5 provides the ability to export the simulation data and simulate all the devices in the DIGSI 5 project for
test and commissioning needs. The simulation is achieved by importing the simulation file into a signal
processing and automation system which will then simulate the device/devices with the process data as in a
real-time system. This feature also ensures the testing of a device for various real-time system conditions.
Single command
Single commands (SPC – Single Point Control) are process outputs which visualize 2 process states (for
example, On/Off) at an output.
Single-line diagram
A single-line diagram (SLD) is a simplified electric overview of the switchgear. Only 1 phase is shown instead
of all 3 phases of a line. Therefore, the diagram is called single-line.
Single-Line Editor
A Single-Line Editor contains a catalog of topological components to create a single-line diagram. The
customer may use the single-line elements to configure the topological view of his substation.
Single-point indication
Single-point indications (Single Ppoint Status) are process indications which visualize 2 process states (for
example, On/Off) at an
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC designates the product family of protection devices and fault recorders.
SIPROTEC 5 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data.
Slave device
A slave may only exchange data with a master after its has been requested to do so by this master. SIPROTEC
devices work as slaves. A master computer controls a slave computer. A master computer can also control a
peripheral device.
SLD
Single-Line Diagram
SLE
Single-Line Editor
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SOE
Sequence of Events

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
SP
Single-point status
SP
Single-Point Indication
SPC
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Control
SPS
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Status
SSD
System Specification Description
ST
Structured Text file
Station description
A station description is an IEC 61850-compliant file for data exchange between the system configurator and
the IED configurator. The station description contains information on the network structure of a substation.
The station description contains for example, information on the assignment of the devices to the primary
equipment, as well as on the station-internal communication.
Structured Text file

You can import function charts (CFC) from DIGSI 4 in ST format. First, however, export your function charts
from DIGSI 4.83 or higher.
Substation Configuration Description Language

A description language standardized in IEC 61850, SCL is based on XML. This description language allows all
information relevant to an IEC 61850 substation to be documented consistently. This format is therefore suit-
able for exchanging IEC 61850-specific data between different applications, even if these come from different
manufacturers. The described import checks are basically done for all SCL formats, not only for SCD imports.
System Exchange Description

Files in SED format can be used to exchange interface information between DIGSI 5 projects and thus between
substations. To do this, the project extracts the data for the other projects from the file during import and
writes its own data in the same file during export. The contents of an SED file are formulated in SCL.
System Specification Description

Files in SSD format contain the complete specification of a station automation system, including a single-line
configuration of the station. The assignment of logical nodes from IEC 61850 to primary equipment can also
be described in SSD files. This allows device requirements to be defined in the SSD file so that the devices can
be used in the substation. The contents of an SED file are formulated in SCL.
TAI
Temps Atomique International - International Atomic Time
TC
Tap-position command

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TEA-X
You can archive the data from individual SIPROTEC 5 devices or whole projects in TEA-X format. This format is
also suitable for data exchange between different applications, such as DIGSI 5 and Engineering Base (EB). The
TEA-X format is based on XML.
Time stamp
A time stamp is a value in a defined format. The time stamp assigns a time point to an event, for example, in a
log file. Time stamps ensure that events can be found again.
Topological view
The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system (for example, switch gear) and their relation to one
another. The Topological View describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form. The Topolog-
ical View does not assign the objects to the devices.
Transmission Control Protocol

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a transmission protocol for transport services in the Internet. TCP is
based on IP and ensures connection of the participants during the data transmission. TCP ensures the correct-
ness of the data and the correct sequence of the data packages.
Transparent clock
The Precision Time Protocol knows different types of clocks: an ordinary clock (abbreviation: OC), a boundary
clock (BC), and a transparent clock (TC). The transparent clock was added to the specification in 2008 and
improves the time-information transmission within a network by receiving PTP messages and transmitting
them after modification (correction).
Tree view
The left area of the project window visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a hierarchical tree structure. This area is referred to as a tree view.
Tunneling
Technology for connecting two networks via a third network, whereby the through traffic is completely
isolated from the traffic of the third network.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
Unbuffered Report Control Block

Unbuffered Report Control Block (URCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports based on best effort. If no association exists or if the transport data flow is not fast
enough, events can be lost.
URCB
Unbuffered Report Control Block
USART
Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Glossary
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP is a protocol. The protocol is based on IP as TCP. In contrast to this, however, UDP works without a
connection and does not have any safety mechanisms. The advantage of UDP in comparison to IP is the higher
transmission rate.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
Vendor ID
Manufacturer-specific part of the device identification for PROFINET.
Virtual device
A VD (virtual device) comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or
a software module.
WYE
Phase-to-ground related measurements of a 3-phase system

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Index
A C
ACD 118 Circuit breaker
Acknowledgment Circuit-breaker failure protection 233
Spontaneous fault display 79 Circuit-breaker test 233
Acquisition blocking 125 Trip logic 237
ACT 118 Trip-circuit supervision 233
Application templates Trip-command reset 237
7SJ81 149 Circuit-breaker failure protection
Arc protection 445 CBFP 695
Automatic reclosing function Communication log 71
Structure of the function 716 Communication-supervision log 73
Automatic Reclosing Function Control functions
Overview of Functions 716 Command checks 823
Automatic reclosing function, cyclic Command logging 839
Blockings 742 Controllables 792
Circuit-breaker readiness, circuit-breaker posi-
tion 741
Closing indication, close command 737
Cycle control, Operating mode 1 726 D
Cycle control, Operating mode 2 728
Cycle control, Operating mode 3 730 Device-diagnosis log 75
Cycle control, Operating mode 4 731 Dimensions 1044
Dead time, Operating modes with pickup 734 Directional intermittent ground-fault protection 501
Dead time, Operating modes with tripping 733 Directional overcurrent protection, phases 352
Dead-line checking, reduced dead time 745 Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Evolving-fault detection 735 Sensitive ground current with 3I0 559
Input logic, Operating modes with pickup 724 Directional test 1036
Input logic, Operating modes with tripping 723 DPC 118
Operating modes 719 DPS 117
Reclaim time 740
Stage release 732
Start 725
Structure 722
E
External trip initiation 713
B
Battery fault 965
F
Broken-wire detection
Application and setting notes 938 Fault display
Broken wire suspected 937 Configuration 79
Overview of functions 937 Spontaneous 78
Structure of the function 937 Fault locator
Parallel-line compensation 762
Fault log 65
FG Analog Transformers

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Index
Overview 20-mA Unit Serial 180 L

FG Analog units
20-mA Unit. Ether. 174 Lockout 81
Application and setting notes for the RTD unit Log 62
serial 202 Configuring 62
Application and setting notes for the RTD-Unit Deleting 76
Ether. 199 Logs 76
Application and setting notes MT fast input 191 Management 62
Communication with 20-mA Unit. Ether. 173
Communication with an RTD unit 198
Function-group structure 170
Measuring transducer with fast inputs 189 M
Overview 170
Overview 20-mA Unit Ether. 172 Manual updating 125
Overview of RTD Unit Ether. 197
Overview RTD unit serial 202
Technical data 1047
Temperature sensor 200 N
FG Analog Units
Application and Setting Notes 20 mA Unit. Negative-sequence protection 573
Serial 181 Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protec-
Function group VI 3-phase tion 493
Overview 154
Structure of the function group 154
O
G Operational log 63
Operational measured values 977
General Functionalities (Undervoltage Check, df/dt Calcu- Order configurator 1172
lation) 662 Ordering
Ground-fault log 66 Accessories 1173
Group Indications Individual components 1172
Time Overcurrent Protection Functions 282 Other Functions
Acquisition Blocking 121
Chatter Blocking 121
Manual Updating 121
I Persistent Commands 121
Stored Outputs 121
IEC 60529 1044 Overcurrent protection
INC 118 Dynamic settings 316, 347
Indication display Overcurrent Protection
Spontaneous 78 AREC 318, 349
Indications 56 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase 467
Displays 59 stage with definite-time characteristic curve (defi-
Read out 56 nite time-overcurrent protection) 469
Reading 56 Structure of the function 467
Reading with DIGSI 58 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
INS 117, 118 Application Example: High-Impedance Restricted
Instantaneous high-current tripping Ground-Fault Protection 484
Function structure 438 Application Example: Tank Leakage Protection 490
Overview of functions 438 Fast stage 483
Release via protection interface 441 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Standard release 439 (Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection) 472
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault 464 Overcurrent protection, ground 321
IO212 189, 191 Inrush-current detection 345
Structure of the function 321
User-defined characteristic curve 340
Overcurrent protection, phases 283

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
Index
Inrush-current detection 315 Synchronization of synchronous systems 863

Structure of the function 283 Synchronization stage 848
User-defined characteristic curve 309, 480
Overload protection 582
T
P Temperature Monitoring
Application and Setting Notes 776
Protection interface Technical Data 1144
Checking the protection-data communication 1035 Temperature supervision
Function description 776
Function structure 775
Overview of functions 775
Q Thermal overload protection
Functional measured values 585
Quality attributes 60 Thermal replica 585
Quality processing for GOOSE Later Binding 86
U
S
User log 68
Security log 74
Sensitive ground-fault detection
Directional overcurrent protection stage with 3I0-
φ(V,I) measurement 537 V
Directional overcurrent-protection stage with cos φ
or sin φ measurement 519 Voltage protection
Directional overcurrent-protection stage with G0 or Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage 596
B0 measurement 544 Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence
Overvoltage protection stage with zero-sequence voltage 615
voltage/residual voltage 555 Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/
Sensitive ground current with Y0 563 residual voltage 608
Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage 626
Function Structure 511 Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence
Overview of Functions 511 voltage 644
Transient Ground-Fault Stage 528
Setting-history log 70
SIPROTEC 5 device
Application templates/Adaptation of functional
scope 45
Reference number for parameters and indica-
tions 51
SIPROTEC 5 Device
Function Control 47
Function Embedding 38
SPC 117, 118
SPS 116
SPS unsaved 116
Stage Control 393
Stage Description 664
Stage Description of the Reclosure Stage 692
Stage description of the stage 687
Stored indications 80
Synchrocheck 859
Synchronization function
Dynamic measuring-point switching 855
Synchronization of asynchronous systems 865

C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019
C53000-G5040-C079-1, Edition 06.2019

SIP5 7SJ81 V07.90 Manual C079-1 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SJ81 V07.90 Manual C079-1 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SJ81 V07.90 Manual C079-1 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Open Source Software

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 3

• Communication protocol manual

• DIGSI 5 online help

• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

• Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

IND. CONT. EQ.

4 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 5

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

• Proper storage, setup and installation

• Proper operation and maintenance

Used Symbols on Device

No. Symbol Description

1 Direct current, IEC 60417-5031

2 Alternating current, IEC 60417-5032

3 Direct and alternating current, IEC 60417-5033

4 Earth (ground) terminal, IEC 60417-5017

5 Protective conductor terminal, IEC 60417-5019

6 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

No. Symbol Description

6 Caution, risk of electric shock

7 Caution, risk of danger, ISO 7000-0434

8 Protective Insulation, IEC 60417-5172, Safety Class II devices

9 Guideline 2002/96/EC for electrical and electronic devices

10 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 7

• Switch to online mode.

• Select the device.

• Select Online in the menu bar.

• Click Show open source software information.

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 9

Open Source Software..................................................................................................................................9

2 Basic Structure of the Function.................................................................................................................. 37

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 11

3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................. 92

12 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

5 Function-Group Types.............................................................................................................................. 153

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 13

5.4.7 RTD Unit Ethernet...................................................................................................... 197

14 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

5.6 Process Monitor.............................................................................................................. 252

6 Protection and Automation Functions..................................................................................................... 259

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 15

6.3.7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection..........................315

16 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

6.5.6.4 Information List................................................................................................... 378

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 17

6.7.6 Information List......................................................................................................... 437

18 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

6.11.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 472

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 19

6.14.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 527

20 SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual

6.16.5.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 581

SIPROTEC 5, 7SJ81, Manual 21